TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 33/11 KV AIS SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT

7.1.1 Scope

This clause describes the General Technical Requirements for the new 33 KV Circuit
Breaker with PCM and 11KV AIS Switchgear and general switchyard equipment, and shall
be read in conjunction with the Project Requirements, Schedules and Drawings in the
specification.

The Contractor shall demonstrate that the switchgear has been designed, built and
installed in accordance with the relevant and latest international standards and the
specification as specified in the tender documents. It shall also operate and perform on a
site in accordance with the requirements of the specification and in the environment
defined herein.

The design shall be proven by the submission at the time of Tender of test certificates
covering all specified tests deemed to be pertinent to the plant and to the conditions in
which it will operate or, if such test certificates cannot be supplied or are deemed
unacceptable by the Engineer, type tests which will be subject to the conditions of this
Contract shall be carried out at no extra cost to the Employer.

The requirement for switchgear spares, tools and appliances, including test, maintenance
and handling equipment shall be as stated in the tender document.

7.1.2 References
7.1.2.1 British Standards

BS 159 Specifications for HV bus bars and bus bar connections

BS 1977 Specifications for high conductivity copper tubes for electrical
BS 2898 purposes
Specifications for wrought aluminium for electrical purposes. Strip
with
BS 3938 drawn or rolled edges.
BS 5253 Specification for
Specifications forcurrent transformers.
AC disconnectors and earthing switches.
BS 6651 Lightning Protection
BS 7354 Code of practice for design of HV open terminal stations.
7.1.2.2 IEC Standards
1. IEC 62271 HV Switchgear and Controlgear- All parts.
Series
2. IEC 60376 Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride
3. IEC 60480 Guide to checking of sulphur hexafluoride taken from
electrical equipment.
4. IEC 60060 High Voltage test techniques.
5. IEC 60071 Insulation Co-ordination
6. IEC 60099-5 Surge arresters Part 5: Selection and application
reccommandation
7. IEC 61869-1 Instrument transformers - Part 1: General requirements
8. IEC 61869-2 Current transformers.
9. IEC 61869-3 Voltage transformers.
10. IEC 60273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for
systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000V.
11. IEC 61850 Communication network and system in substation
12. IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by Enclosure (IP code)
13. IEC 60255 Electrical relays

293
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 14. IEC 62271-1 High voltage switchgear and control gear: common
specification
15. IEC 62271- High voltage switchgear and control gear: Part 100: Alternating
100 current circuit breakers
16. IEC 62271- High voltage switchgear and control gear: Part 102: Alternating
102 current disconnector and earthing switch

7.1.3 33 kV Vacuum Circuit Breaker

1. Installation : Outdoor Sub-station.
2. Type : Vacuum Circuit Breakers
3. Number of Phase : 3 (Three)
4. Operation : Single Break in Service/ Pole
5. Nominal Voltage : 33 KV
6. Maximum Operating Voltage : 36 KV
7. Frequency : 50 Hz
8. Rated Current for : 1250A
9. Symmetrical Breaking Capacity : 1800 MVA
10. Asymmetry : 50%
11. Short Time Current Duration : 31.5 KA, 3 Sec.
12. Making Current (Peak) KA : 80KA
13. Opening Time (Maximum) : 0.05 Sec.
14. Breaking Time : ≤ 5 Cycle
15. Capacity of Vacuum Interrupter at rated : 50 nos. of operations
short circuit current switching
16. Basic Insulation Level (1.2/50 Micro : 170 KVp
Second Wave)
17. Power Frequency Test Voltage (Dry) 70 KV at 50 Hz, 1 Min.
18. Rated Operating Sequence : 0-0.3 Sec – CO – 3 min – CO
19. Standard : Design, Manufacture, Testing,
Installation and Performance shall
be in accordance with the latest
edition of applicable IEC-62271-
100
20. FEATURES
- Circuit Breaker terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR Merlin, Gross
Beak (636MCM).
- Grading terminal connector.
- Current carrying parts - Terminals are made by Copper/Al-Alloy and all
other Current carrying parts are made by Copper.
- Externally visible circuit breaker position indicator.
- Electrically remote controlled operating mechanism.
- Shall be capable of the interrupting duties produced by the switching of
transformer magnetizing current and the switching of line charging current.
Tests certificate demonstrating this ability of the circuit breakers shall be
submitted with the offer.
- Circuit Breaker closing mechanism shall be 230 volt AC motor wound spring-
operated type such that the closing speed is independent of the operator.
Spring charging motor shall be AC driven Universal motor. Rectifier in motor
circuit is not acceptable.
- Shall be two tripping coils and one closing coil. Trip coil and close coil shall
have freewheeling diode installed.
- Hand closing and tripping shall be done through manual levers.
- Trip free mechanism as specified in IEC 60056-1 i.e. tripping is independent.
294
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - Local “Close” and “Trip” controller.
- VCB should be re-strike free.
- VCB should be trip free.
- Operation Counter.
- Supporting Steel Structure.
- Bushing Insulator as Specified in IEC-60137.
- Weather proof sheet steel control kiosk, with hinged door on three sides and
necessary multi-core cable glands. Controls from this position will normally is
used under maintenance and emergency conditions only. AC 230V lighting
system inside the door of control kiosk shall be provided.
- ARC suppression type contacts.
- Manually operating devices for slow closing for inspection and maintenance. It
shall not be possible to slow close a breaker when in normal services.
- Earthing pad with provision for earth leads.
- Standard sundries like anti-condensation heaters, MCBS wiring board etc.
Facilities to be incorporate for tripping and lockout of the breaker in the event
Vacuum failure falling below stipulated value.
- Rating plate and diagram plate shall be made of stainless steel and have
engraved letters filled with black enamel paint with clear visibility.
- Evidence of prototype tests together with test certificate from an internationally
reputed/accredited institution covering the equipment shall be furnished with
the offer. The test duty shall be as per the requirements of IEC–60056.
- Laminated control & protection drawing set shall be fitted/supplied inside the
control box/kiosk.
- Motor-driven, spring charged
- Automatically charged after each closing operation
- O-C-O operation without recharging
- Mechanical / electrical interlocking, anti-pumping
- Provision for manual charging
- Manual closing and tripping arrangement
- Mechanical ON-OFF, operation counter and spring-charged indication
- All necessary positive interlocks installed, as per IEC guidelines.

7.1.3.1 INFORMATION REQUIRED for Outdoor type VCB

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information/ Documents have to be submitted:-
a) The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall submit with the bid the testing procedure & list of
testing/ measuring equipment, meters etc. along with valid Calibration
Certificate(s) from competent authority used in manufacturer's laboratory for
performing Routine Test as per IEC standard.
b) Construction, Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual.
c) Outline, Dimensional, Cross-sectional & General arrangement drawings of
offered type equipment with mounting structure arrangement.
d) Manufacturer’s printed catalogue describing specification and technical data of
the offered type equipment.

7.1.3.2 TEST REPORTS FOR VCB:

FOR 33KV SWITCHGEAR (OUTDOOR VCB WITH PCM):

Type Test Certificates & Reports for offered type similar or higher Ampere rating Outdoor
Vacuum Circuit Breaker for same voltage class from any short-circuit testing liaison

295
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (STL) Member [http://www.stl-liaison.org/web/03_Members.php] Testing Organization
or Laboratory as per relevant IEC standard. The type test report along with results shall
include at least the following tests:

a) Lightning Impulse Voltage withstand tests

b) Power Frequency withstand tests
c) Temperature Rise tests
d) Measurement of Resistance of the main circuit.
d) Short-time withstand current and peak withstand current tests.
g) Mechanical Endurance tests
e) Short Circuit performance tests
f) Out-of-phase making & breaking tests

7.1.3.3 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS FOR OUTDOOR TYPE VCB

Design, Drawing diagrams, Specification and Technical Particulars & Guarantees etc, along
with Outline, Dimensional, Cross-sectional & General arrangement drawings, Installation
diagram, printed catalogue describing the type/ model of offered circuit breaker and vacuum
interrupter shall be submitted to to the Superintending Engineer, Design & Inspectoin, NESCO
Ltd, Rajshahi by the Bidder. The submitted Design, Drawing diagrams, Specification and
Technical Particulars & Guarantees etc must be approved by Design & Inspectoin, NESCO
Ltd, Rajshahi prior to the manufacturing of the goods.

The Bidder shall have to submit 3 (three) sets of the same for Approval within 15 days from
the date of signing Contract. The bidder shall also submit one set reproducible tracing of the
above drawings in soft format.

No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the
Testing Equipment until the technical data and drawings have been approved.
The cost of supplying drawings and specifications shall be borne by the supplier.

7.1.3.4 TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS FOR OUTDOOR TYPE VCB

General
Functional electrical, material, mechanical and hydraulic tests shall be carried out at
manufacturers’ premises. The extent and method of recording the results shall be agreed
by the Purchaser in ample time to enable the tests to be satisfactorily witnessed or to
make any changes to the proposed program of tests.

MATERIAL TESTS
The supplier shall provide test pieces free of charge as required to enable the quality of
the material to be determined at the supplier’s expense. Purchaser may at its own
discretion and by specific arrangement accept certified particulars of tests carried out in
the absence of his authorized representative.
TYPE TEST
Type tests are required to prove the general design of the offered equipments/ materials.
The Tenderer shall submit the type test reports of the offered equipments/ materials from
as per relevant clause.
ROUTINE TESTS
All equipments/ materials shall be subjected to routine tests as per latest version of
relevant IEC/ BS or equivalent international standards as mentioned in the contract at
the manufacturers works and shall include, but not be limited to, an operational test.

296
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.1.4 33KV PCM Panel

7.1.4.1 General

The panels shall be vermin and dust proof free standing type completely metal enclosed
by sheet steel (minimum 1.62 mm thick) with necessary reinforcement color gray with
appropriate spray painting. The approximate dimension of the PCM panel shall be 2100
mm (Height) x 600 mm (Width) x 700 mm (Depth) for 33 KV line and be 2100 mm
(Height) x 800 mm (Width) x 700 mm (Depth) for power transformer while viewed from
the front side, suitable for opening at the back by hinged door with locking arrangement.
The panels shall be neatly and completely wired before shipment.

The work relating to protection, control and panels for 33/11KV Sub-stations shall
comprise of development of elementary diagram, design, manufacture, test and supply
of pre-wired control panels to be installed in the sub-station control room. The protection,
control and panels are to be pre-wired with relays and meters in position. The
elementary primary diagram shall be produced giving a clear representation of each
protection, control and metering function. The standard design, drawing, manufacturing,
testing & performance shall be in accordance to the IEC 62271-200 standards.

7.1.4.1 A.1 33 kV Protection, Control, Metering and Relay Panel For Power
Transformer, each Panel comprising:
1. Indicating analogue/digital Ampere meter flush mounting with dual scales 3 (three)
options, 0-300/600A for connecting to current transformer ratio 300-600/5-5-5A nos.
for 10/13MVA Power Transformer.
2. Indicating analogue/digital voltmeter with six position selector switch flush 1 (one)
mounting with scales 0-40 KV for connection to potential transformer ratio set
(33/3)/ (0.11/3)/(0.11/3) KV, (50 Hz).
3. a) Numerical Programmable Multifunctional type MFM Meter It shall be capable 1 (one)
of measuring and displaying MW, MVAR, PF, V, I, f, ø etc. distinguishing import no.
and export operation.
b) 3 phase, 4 wire, 3 element solid state, indoor type, multi tariff programmable 1 (one)
KWh meter of class of accuracy 0.2 with the features for measuring the no.
parameters viz. phase voltages, phase currents, system frequency, per phase &
total KW with demand, KVAR, Power factor etc.
4. Numerical programmable type Three Phase combined IDMT Over Current relay 1 (one)
and Earth fault protection relay of 5 Amps, 50 Hz, 110V dc, 3 second operating set
time ratings having 3 (Three) over current units, one earth fault, over
voltage ,frequency protection & Power measuring option with current setting
range of the O/C & E/F relay shall be from 0.1*In to 40*In (where In is relay nominal
current) for both overcurrent and earth fault element. All O/C & E/F relays shall
have both IDMT & DT (51) and Instantaneous (50) function along with IEC NI, VI,
EI, LTI etc. curve setting capability. The relays are housed in a horizontal, flush
mounting draw-out case (tropicalized) with self-reset trip relay (relaying 02 nos.
NO contacts as spares) (Not to be included in Differential Relay). The numerical
programmable relay shall have IEC 61850 communication protocol suitable
for SAS implementation. Necessary Binary I/O module (minimum 8 nos BI &
8 nos. BO) along with the relay (alternately separate BCU will also be
accepted) shall be provided for SAS/SCADA operation.
297
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 5. Numerical programmable type Differential relay with REF inbuilt feature for 1 (one)
33/11KV, 10/13MVA Power Transformer. The relay(s) are housed in a horizontal, set
flush mounting draw-out case (tropicalized) with hand-reset trip relay (having 02
nos. NO contacts as spares). Differential relay shall have user defined 3 nos.
curves for differential and REF protection with second and fifth harmonic
blocking features. The numerical programmable relay shall have IEC 61850
communication protocol suitable for SAS implementation
6. Separate Auxiliary Flag Relays for Device/Self Protection of Power Transformer 1 (one)
to be provided. The following Auxiliary Flag Relays shall be available - OTA, OTT, set
WTA, WTT, BA, BT, OLTC Surge, PRD for main tank, etc.
7. All necessary switches (Local and remote selector switch, TNC switch, etc. ), CT, 1 (one)
PT test terminal blocks, signaling set lamps, master trip relay, trip circuit supervision set
relay for each trip circuit coil, PT supervision relay, auxiliary relay, MCB, fuse and
provision for lighting etc. terminal blocks, mimic diagram with circuit breaker control
indicating switches and isolating position indicating switches, indicating lamps shall
be provided to indicate “Spring Charge”/ readiness for closing and healthy trip circuit
indicating readiness for tripping. The mimic and positions of circuit breaker control
cum position indicating switch and isolator position indicating switch arrangement in
the panel. Mimic diagram shall contain LED based Semaphore Indicator for
Isolator/Breaker/Earth switch position. The annunciator shall have 30 or more
windows for facilitate transformer related all the alarm & trip signals and OLTC related
alarm and indication signals and have built in buzzer and AC/DC fail relay.
8. 70 W, 230 V AC, Single Phase heater with thermostat and a visible light indicator 1 (one)
which indicate the ''ON"- ''OFF" position of the heater set

7.1.4.1 A.2 RTCC PANEL FOR 33/11 KV POWER TRANSFORMER

OLTC Tap position indicator & Lower/Raise push-button switchs with blinking feature
along with AVR relay etc. AVR relay shall have IEC-61850 communication protocol for
SAS. The panel shall be equipped with Oil & winding temperature indication meter,
auto/manual selection switch for tap lower/rise operation and master/follower control
function for facilitate parallel operation of transformers and appropriate data
communication port have to be provided. Also it shall have local/remote selector switch,
fan start & stop controlling push button/electrical switch with manual/auto operation
mode selection. Indication LED for fan running (Red), fan stop (Green), OLTC in
progress (Yellow) etc. shall be provided. Annunciation for OLTC out of step, OLTC
faulty/motor tripped, OLTC max./min. position etc. along with other transformer’s self-
protection alarm & trip signals shall be provided. Annunciator shall have 12 or more
window for facilitate all the alarm & trip signals mentioned with buzzer/hooter and accept,
reset & test push button/electrical switch.

7.1.4.1 B 33 KV PROTECTION, CONTROL, METERING AND RELAY PANEL FOR LINE FEEDER
(INCOMING /OUTGOING), each comprising:
1. Indicating analogue/digital Ampere meter flush mounting with dual scales 3 (three)
option (0-600A/1200A) for connecting to the current transformer ratio 600- nos.
1200/5-5A for Line Fedder.
2. Indicating analogue/digital voltmeter with six position selector switch flush 1 (one) set
mounting with scales 0-40 KV for connection to potential transformer ratio
(33/3)/ (0.11/3)/(0.11/3) KV, (50 Hz).
3. a) Numerical Programmable Multifunctional type MFM Meter It shall be 1 (one) no.
capable of measuring and displaying MW, MVAR, PF, V, I, f, ø etc.
distinguishing import and export operation.

298
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 b) 3 phase, 4 wire, 3 element solid state, indoor type, multi tariff programmable 1 (one) no.
KWh meter of class of accuracy 0.2 with the features for measuring the
parameters viz. phase voltages, phase currents, system frequency, per phase
& total KW with demand, KVAR, Power factor etc.
4. Numerical programmable type Three Phase combined IDMT Over Current relay 1 (one) set
and Earth fault protection relay with directional ,over/under voltage, frequency
protection, feature of 5 Amps, 50 Hz, 110V dc, 3 second operating time ratings
having 03 (Three) over current units and 01(one) earth fault with current setting of
50 to 200% and one earth fault unit with current setting range of the O/C & E/F
relay shall be from 0.1*In to 40*In (where In is relay nominal current) for both
overcurrent and earth fault element. All O/C & E/F relays shall have both IDMT
& DT (51) and Instantaneous (50) function along with IEC NI, VI, EI, LTI etc.
curve setting capability. The relays are housed in a horizontal, flush mounting
draw-out case (tropicalized) with self-reset trip relay (relaying 02 nos. NO contacts
as spares). The numerical programmable relay shall have IEC 61850
communication protocol suitable for SAS implementation. Necessary Binary
I/O module (minimum 8 nos BI & 8 nos. BO) along with the relay (alternately
separate BCU will also be accepted) shall be provided for SAS/SCADA
operation.
5. All necessary switches (Local and remote selector switch, TNC switch, etc. ), 1 (one) set
CT, PT test terminal blocks, signaling set lamps, master trip relay, trip circuit
supervision relay for each trip coil, PT supervision relay, auxiliary relay, MCB,
fuse and provision for lighting etc. terminal blocks, mimic diagram with circuit
breaker control indicating switches and isolating position indicating switches,
indicating lamps shall be provided to indicate “Spring Charge”/ readiness for
closing and healthy trip circuit indicating readiness for tripping. The mimic and
positions of circuit breaker control cum position indicating switch and isolator
position indicating switch arrangement in the panel. Mimic diagram shall
contain LED based Semaphore Indicator for Isolator/Breaker/Earth switch
position. The Annunciator shall have 12 windows and have built in buzzer and
AC/DC fail relay.
6. 70 W, 230 V AC, Single Phase heater with thermostat and a visible light 1 (one) set
indicator which indicate the "ON"- "OFF" position of the heater

7.1.4.1 C FOR 33 KV PANEL FEATURES:

Each PCM panel shall be equipped with the following:
a.) Instruments and Relays described elsewhere. All the relays shall be IEC 61850
protocol type for automation network of the 33/11kV Sub-station. In addition,
numerical relay shall have sufficient contacts and shall be configured for Sub-
station automation system operation. Intermediate auxiliary relay with sufficient
spare contacts shall be used for controlling CB or any other switching devices
through numerical relay in case of SAS operation.
b.) Status indicating discrepancy, Control switches for 33 kV Circuit Breaker with
safety arrangements.
c.) Illuminated Circuit Breaker and Isolator position indicators.
d.) Signaling relays (annunciator, compact type) to yield audiovisual signals on faults
and have reset feature.
e.) The inside of the panel will have all auxiliary relays to sense the operation of gas
relays, over temperature, over current, differential relay operation failure of
auxiliary voltage (DC & AC) etc. and to transmit for tripping and fault signaling.
f.) All inside equipment described and required shall be neatly arranged inside the
panel.
g.) Thermostat control heater with status indicating illumination lamp (LED) shall be
provided.

299
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 h.) The terminal blocks for connecting the incoming multi-core cables shall be placed
at the bottom part and necessary glands/ opening shall be provided for the entry
of the outside cables.
i.) Sufficient-working spaces shall be provided inside the panel between instruments
and wiring for easy approach.
j.) All AC, DC auxiliary power circuits and PT secondary circuits entering the control
panel shall be provided with MCCB. Separate MCBs shall be provided for DC
supply to Power, Control and Alarm & Indication circuits.
k.) Provision to hang danger/ caution board.
l.) The PCM panel shall be SCADA/SAS compatible and hence all intelligent
devices, digital energy meters etc. shall comply IEC 61850. All physical
connections for control, measurement and status indication shall be made
SAS ready.
m.) Sufficient spare terminals (at least 10%) in each terminal block.
n.) Stabilizing resistance and Metrocil of appropriate value by calculation for the high
impedence REF scheme in PCM panel.
o.) There must be two trip coils, both trip coils shall be energized by separate contacts
of trip relay for protection tripping. However, for manual tripping, only one trip coil
can be engaged only.
p.) All CT Terminal blocks shall have shorting, isolating and jacking (test barrel) facility
while PT terminal blocks shall have isolating and jacking (test barrel) facility.
q.) Circuit Breaker control indicating switches and isolating position indicating
lamps to indicate spring Charge/ Readiness for closing and healthy trip
circuit indicating readiness for tripping.
r.) Signaling /indicating lamps shall be LED type only.
s.) Auxiliary relays, trip relays with spare contacts, fuses.
t.) All necessary switches etc.
u.) Provision for lighting etc.
v.) 70W, 230V AC, 1-phase heater with thermostat and control switch and a visible
light indicator which indicate the "ON"- "OFF" position of the heater.
w.) Mimic diagram along with semaphore for CB, DS and ES. Mimic diagram shall
contain LED based Semaphore Indicator instead of moving Semaphore indicator.
The color and size of the mimic shall be as described below:
33 KV GREEN ½'' X 1/8''
11 KV BLACK ½" X 1/8"
x.) Ferrule marking and color coding for all type of wiring shall be as follows:
1. Ferrule marking:
i. “A”- for differential protection circuit
ii. “C”- for O/C & E/F protection circuit
iii. “D”- for metering circuit
iv. “E”- for PT circuit
v. “L”- for Alarm & Indication circuit
vi. “S”- for fault recorder
2. Color coding:
i. “Black”- for phases of AC supply
ii. “White”- for neutral of AC supply
iii. “Grey”- for control circuit
iv. “Brown & Grey”- for (+) and (-) DC supply respectively
v. “Red, Yellow, Blue, Black”- for CT and PT circuit
vi. “Yellow with green strip”- for earthing
y.) Detailed schematic diagram of control circuit of PCM inside panel.
z.) Separate relay shall be used for over current, Earth fault protection and differential
protection.

300
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 aa.) Annunciator shall have 12 nos. window for incoming and outgoing panel and 24
nos. windows for transformer panel with builtin buzzer.
bb.) Necessary communication cable and software shall be supplied.
cc) Inter tripping arrangement for 11 kV incomer (from 33 kV transformer feeder
tripping) and for 33 kV transformer feeder (from directional tripping of 11 kV incomer
or Stand by E/F tripping) shall be provided. All type of tripping shall be done through
Master Trip relay.

dd) Transformer incomer PCM panel shall be equipped with AVR relay and tap
changing control switch along with necessary indication system (Tap position,
temperature etc.).

ee) Following LED Indicators including Lamp test facility shall be provided in the panel:

DC DS close DS open AC CB ES close ES open

CB Spring
Availabl indicatio indication Availabl Ope indicatio indicatio
Close Charged
e n e n n n

ff) Relay test plug facility shall be provided in 33 kV PCM panel along with licensed
software (CD), communication cable and catalogues etc.

Besides the provisions of control, signal, protection and metering described, any other
provisions to suit with the requirement of associated equipment of the concern feeder
shall be provided. All meters and relays shall be flush mounting. There shall be panel-
grounding terminal.
The bidder shall quote the particulars of various protective relays, meters, Auxiliary
relays signaling relays, discrepancy control and position indicating switches etc. of the
control panel, mentioning the names of the manufacturers.

7.1.4.1 D Alarms
The following alarm provision shall be made:
1. 33 KV TRANSFORMER FEEDER (30 window Annunciator)
Main DC Main Relay-1 Main Relay-2 TCS-1 TCS-2
AC Fail
Fail Faulty Faulty Unhealthy Unhealthy
OTI High WTI High WTI High
PT Failure OTI High Trip PRD Trip
Alarm Alarm Trip
MT MT
OLTC Surge
Buchholtz Buchholtz O/C Trip E/F Trip 87T Trip
Trip
Alarm Trip
Main tank oil Lockout Spare Trip OLTC out
11 kV Inter
87N/64 Trip level operated relay-2 of
trip
high/low pare operated step
OLTC OLTC in
OLTC in min.
faulty/motor max. Spare Spare Spare
position
tripped position

2. 33 kV Incoming/Outgoing Feeder (12 window Annunciator)

Main DC Fail AC Fail Main Relay Faulty PT Failure
TCS-1 Unhealthy TCS-2 Unhealthy O/C Trip E/F Trip

301
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 67 Trip 67N Trip Spare Spare

7.1.10 E TESTS
Complete tests shall be made at the manufacturer’s factory in accordance with the
latest & relevant IEC 62271-200 standards. Among others, at least the following test
shall be included:
a) Wiring Check
b) Functional check
c) Di-electric Test
d) Verification of protection
Test plugs shall be supplied. Test results of instruments and relays are to be
provided along with the bid.
7.1.4.1 F Construction Details
Each panel shall be fabricated from steel sheet (minimum 1.62 mm thick) with
necessary steel member reinforcement to make the structure self supporting. All joints
are to be welded and ground to be made smooth.
Mounting brackets required shall be arranged inside the panel for mounting and fixing
auxiliary devices and terminal blocks.
Instruments meters control switches and protective relays shall be mounted on the
front panel only. Panel output mounting studs and support brackets shall be accurately
located.
Finished panel surface shall be free of waves and other imperfections exterior panel
surfaces shall be send blasted, ground smooth, filled, panel and finished with gray
enamel. Interior surface shall be sand blasted, primed and finished with glass white
enamel.
The panel shall be designed to have bottom closed and with an adequate number of
50 mm knock outs provided to facilitate entry of control wires and cables. The back
end closure of the panel shall be equipped with hinged formed door. The door shall be
rigid and shall be equipped with three point latches.
The supplier shall furnish internal panel wiring and circuit protection. The supplier shall
provide one 70W, 240, AC strip heater in the panel. The heater shall have a separate
switch. Engraved name plate shall be provided at the top of the front enclosure.

7.1.4.1 G PANEL WIRING

The supplier shall provide internal wiring and connections, in accordance with the
requirements of the following paragraph.
All wiring used within the panel shall conform to the requirements of these
specifications and shall be installed and tested at the factory. All wiring shall be neatly
and carefully installed in wring gutters of raceway wiring raceway shall be plastic wiring
duct with covers. Instrument wiring on the panel shall be numbered sequentially from
the sources to the panel instrument and the number of the source equipment shall be
used as a prefix for the individual wire numbers, wiring shall be terminated at terminal
blocks plainly lettered or marked in accordance with the manufacturer’s connection
diagrams.
Sufficient clearance shall be provided for all the leads. All the leads for external circuit
wiring shall be connected to grounded terminal blocks located for convenient
connection of external circuits.
Splices will not be permitted in panel wiring.
All the terminal block connections shall be made with ring type lugs. Pre-insulated ring
type terminals with crimp guide or per-insulated slotted spring spade terminals shall
be provided on devices equipped with individual fitted covers.

302
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Arrangement of circuits on terminal block shall be such that all the connections for one
circuit, plus any spare conductors, shall have terminal blocks adjacent to the split and
shall be provided with wiring required to interconnect the split unit.
The size of the wiring used in the panel shall be conform to the following requirements:
a.) Ampere meter and current transformer circuit: 6 Sq.mm (RYB color code shall be
used)
b.) All other wiring: 2.5 Sq.mm.

Closing circuit of the PCM panel shall have Interlocking mechanism with DS/ES switch.
DC/AC supply of the 33 kV breaker panel shall be supervised through corresponding
PCM panel. Single point grounding of the neutral of CT/PT circuits shall be ensured. It
is always recommended that the neutral of CT/PT is grounded at the CT/PT junction
box end. Ferrule marking and color coding shall be as per clause “7.1.4.1 C 33 kV
PCM Panel Features”

7.1.4.1 H POWER SUPPLY DISCONNECT

Each panel mounted devices requiring AC or DC supply, shall have disconnecting
devices from the power supply in the tripped or open condition.
The MCCB's used in DC control circuit shall have a rating of 6 A and 250 V. The
tumbler switch in the heater shall have the same rating.
Each S/S will be equipped generally with the following:
3 (Three) phase MCCB for incoming from Auxiliary transformers - 1 (one) no.
MCCB for incoming DC for battery - 1 (one) no.
MCCB for AC outgoing - 10 (ten)
nos.
MCCB for DC outgoing - 10 (ten) nos.

The fuses shall be modular type with Bakelite frame and reinforced retaining clips.

7.1.4.1 I INDICATING LIGHTS

Indicating lights of LED type shall be have transparent glass lenses and appropriately
sized
resister. CB spring charged indication- Blue , Panel DC available indication- White, CB close
indication- Red, CB open indication- Green, DS close indication- Red, DS open indication
Green, ES close indication- Red”ES open indication- Green. It is recommended to install the
CB, DS & ES Open/close indicating LED lamps/semaphore in the mimic bus.

7.1.4.1 J TERMINAL BLOCKS

Terminal blocks shall provided with white marking strips, circuit designation by the
supplier shall be inscribed on the marking strip with black print, terminals in a quantity
of not less than 25 percent of the interconnected terminals in excess shall be provided
on each terminal block for circuit modifications and for termination of all conductors in
multi-conductor cable.
All CT Terminal blocks shall have shorting, isolating and jacking (test barrel) facility
while PT terminal blocks shall have isolating and jacking (test barrel) facility.
CT, PT, Control, Alarm etc. wiring shall be separately grouped or segregated.
All physical connections for control, measurement and status indication shall be made
SAS ready hence Terminal Blocks shall be kept reserved if necessary.
Terminal block shall be grouped in each panel for easy accessibility unrestricted by
interference from structural members and instruments. Sufficient spaces shall be
provided on each side of each terminal block to allow an orderly arrangement of all the
lead to be terminated on the block.
7.1.4.1 K INSTRUMENTS AND DEVICES
303
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Indicating instruments shall be semi flush panel type with 1% percent accuracy class
except for energy meters which shall be of 0.2. They shall be approximately 100 mm
square with black 240 degree scales on a white back ground.
All AC instruments shall be designed for operation on 5A current transformers
secondary and 110V (50 Hz) potential transformer secondary.

7.1.4.1 L TRIP RELAYS

Following shall be the main features of a high speed tripping relays:
All tripping relays shall be of the heavy duty type suitable for panel mounting and shall have
operating coils which are rated sufficiently to operate in conjunction with series flag relays. If
necessary, normally closed contacts in series with the relay operating coil, shall be delayed
for a period which will allow series flag relays to operate satisfactorily. All other tripping
contacts should be instantaneous i.e. no intentional time delay. The operating time shall not
exceed 10 milliseconds at rated voltage. The operating range of the relay shall be from 70%
to 120% of rated voltage. Electrical reset facilities shall be available for operation, from remote
and supervisory controls. High speed tripping relays shall prevent closing of the associated
circuit breakers until reset. Wherever the tripping relay contacts need to break the d.c. current,
sufficiently rated magnetic blow out contacts or such approved means shall be used.
Trip Relay shall be of following types:
a. Self-reset type for O/C, E/F protection
b. Hand & Electrical reset type for Differential, REF and Transformer Self-
protection
c. Operating Coil Voltage: 110 V DC (No series resistor allowed)
d. Shall have in built freewheeling diode.

7.1.4.1 M SUPERVISION RELAYS

7.1.4.1 M.1 Trip Circuit and Protection Supply Supervision

The trip circuit supervision function shall be a seperate relay and independent of control and
protection unit provided in the switchgear. Trip circuit supervision relays shall be provided to
monitor each of the trip circuits of all 33kV circuit breakers and each relay shall have sufficient
contacts for visual/audible alarm and indication purposes. The trip circuit supervision scheme
shall provide continuous supervision of the trip circuits of the circuit breaker in either the open
or closed position and independent of local or remote selection at the local operating position.
Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms during faults on dc wiring
on adjacent circuits, or due to operation of a trip relay contact. Series resistances shall be
provided in trip supervision circuits to prevent mal tripping a circuit breaker if a relay element
is short circuited. Relay alarm elements shall be equipped with hand resetting flag indicators.

Trip circuit supervision relay (TCSR) shall supervise not only the trip coil but also the whole
trip circuit during both breaker open and close position (pre-close & post-close). Both trip
circuits shall be supervised by separate TCS relay. TCS function of main relay shall be avoided
for supervision.

7.1.4.1 M.2 D.C. Supply Supervision

Supervision relays are required for each protection supply, Main protection, Back-up and Trip
Relay Reset. Similarly for each trip circuit supply and for each alarm/ indications supply. These
supervision relays are to be independent of alarms from the trip circuit supervision scheme so
that the operator can clearly differentiate via the available alarms between loss of supply due
to a blown fuse / tripped MCB and failure of a trip circuits supervision /faulty supervision wiring.
304
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
DC supply supervision shall be performed by the built in AC/DC fail relay of the Annunciator.
Hence, the Annunciator shall be powered by dual source (with internal/external AC/DC
changeover switch).

7.1.4.1 N SPECIFICATION OF 110V, 3 x 5(6) A, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE, 3-ELEMENT, INDOOR

TYPE MULTI-TARIFF PROGRAMMABLE METER WITH ASSOCIATED INSTRUMENT
TRANSFORMERS ENCLOSED IN METERING PANEL.

7.1.4.1.N. A GENERAL

The meters are required for the purpose of energy metering of medium/high/extra-high
voltage consumer metering at 132 kV or 33 kV or 11kV level. KWh is the unit for the
purpose.
System voltage Nominal
: service voltage 110V (PT Secondary), 3
phase 4wire, solidly grounded neutral at source,
maximum system voltage 120V line to line.
System frequency : 50 Hz

7.1.4.1.N. B SPECIFICATION OF 110V 3 x 5(6)A, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE 3-ELEMENT,

INDOOR TYPE MULTI TARIFF PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL ENERGY METER
The consumer meters are required for the purpose of energy metering of low
voltage consumer who purchases power at 11 kV/33 kV line through PT & CT. kWh
is the unit for revenue purpose.

System voltage : Nominal service voltage 110V, 3 phase 4 wire, solidly

grounded neutral at source, maximum system voltage 120V
line to line.
System frequency : 50 Hz
Standard : The Energy Meter should be designed, manufactured and
tested in accordance with IEC 62052-11, 62053-22 and 62053-
23 or ANSI C 12.16, 12.10 (latest publication) or specified in
this specification
Installation : Indoor Type
Type : Solid state.
Application : Registration of KWh (Peak & off-peak), Total KVarh(Q1+Q4),
KW on 3- phase, 4-wire supply for balanced & unbalanced load
(unidirectional). Peak 17.00-23.00. hrs and off peak 23.00-17.00
hrs (programmable) Bangladesh standard time. The software
for Time of Use (TOU) shall be so developed to accommodate
future tariff and can be customized, if the purchaser changes
the tariff. The software shall be compatible with Windows
operating system.
Connection : 3-phase 4-wire, solidly grounded neutral.
Nos. of element : 3 (Three)
Rated current : Basic current 5 amps and maximum current 6 amps.
Multiplication factor : The following shall be inscribe on the mater. Dial reading X CT
ratio X PT ratio = Actual reading in KWh.
Register : Solid state LCD display type register. The display shall be
programmable, automatic and include:
• Meter ID
• Time & date
• Cumulative KWh (Peak & off-peak)
• Cumulative Total KVarh (Q1+Q4)
305
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 • Maximum demand (KW) with time & date
• Cumulative Maximum demand (kW) for billing month.
Maximum demand (MD) in kW shall be registered using the
technique of cumulating on integration period controlled by built-
in process and the MD shall be continuously recorded and the
highest shall be indicated. The highest MD shall be added to the
cumulative store, which shall be automatically initiated after an
interval of one month / one billing period by means of built-in
timing device.
• Integration period: 30 (thirty) minutes.
• Number of MD reset (Automatic& manually).
• Average PF for billing period.
Instantaneous:
• Phase voltage with indication
• Phase amps with direction.
• Power factor (average).
• Demand (KW)
• Voltage phase angel (each phase) or P.F. Angle(each phase)
• Current phase angle(each phase)
• Tampering indication in the register.
Memory storage : The meter shall have sufficient capacity (minimum 400 KB) to
store the following readings and data in non-volatile memory
even in case of power failure.
• Equipment identification codes, security codes and access
codes.
• Number of power interruption with date & time (minimum
100 events).
• Latest power failure time & date
• Date & time of meter tempering. (Voltage & Current
missing, demand reset , time change).
• Event logs
• Current & Previous registered in month KWh (Peak & off-
peak), Total KVarh (Q1+Q4)
• Current & Previous month registered with maximum KW
demand since last MD reset with time and date of its
occurrence.
The meter must have sufficient capacity to store data at 30
(thirty) minutes interval for at least 90 (ninety) days.
• Load Profile data [kWh, KVarh (Q1+Q4)
• Phase voltage or Vh
• Phase amps or Ah
Accuracy class : Accuracy class is 0.2 (point two)
Number of digit Minimum 5 (Five) integer with 1 (One) decimal (Total 6 digit).
Type of Display Solid-state LCD display.
Time switch : The time switch shall be built-in type and shall be designed to
perform a present cycle of operation. Time switch shall reset
MDI at the end of every month (billing period) automatically. In
the event of failure of power supply and battery, at the same
time set memory shall not be lost i.e. the set program shall be
recorded in non-volatile memory. The maximum error shall be
kept within  1 (one) second per day. Time error adjustment
facility shall be provided.

306
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Battery reserve : Each time switch must be provided with lithium battery which
allow the switch to function for a period of not less than 10 (ten)
years. The guaranteed life of the battery should not be less than
10 (ten) years and shall have provision for easy replacement.
The shelf life of the battery should be minimum 15(fifteen) years
or more.
Construction : The meter shall be completely self-contain round socket or
enclosure type. The meter cover shall be made of
polycarbonate/acrylic /phenolic /resin and socket cover shall be
made of metal polycarbonate/ acrylic /phenolic /resin. The meter
cover and socket /enclosure shall be provided with security
sealing provisions to prevent unauthorized access to the
internal meter works and socket /enclosure sealing shall be
designed to accommodate both padlock and wire type seal.

IEC meters shall be minimum IP51. The ANSI Standard meter

shall be effectively sealed to prevent entrance of rain and dust
into its internal parts. The meter shall pass Rain test described
in underwriter’s laboratory standard UL-50 (USA) for type 3
enclosures. A general purpose finish of class 1 as specified in
section 7 of ANSI C12.10 shall be provided for the meter and it
shall meet the requirement of weather simulation test (Sec.
7.2.1 of ANSI C12.10) and salt spray test (ASTM B117). It shall
be designed to operate continuously for the normal life of the
meter in unsheltered outdoor tropical location exposed to the
elements without corrosion or other damage to parts to
adversely affect meter accuracy or reliability.
Enclosure for IEC The meter shall be surface mounted in PCM panel with
Standard Meter necessary wiring. The enclosure box should be made either of
high quality flame retardant ABS Resin of minimum 3 mm
thickness or of galvanized sheet steel of minimum 1.22 mm (18
SWG) thickness or of auto extinguishable, shockproof and UV
resistant, hot molded glass reinforced polyester of minimum 3
mm thickness. The box shall have hinged front door with one
toughened glass window or transparent UV resistant Polly
carbonate to enable easy reading of meter. The metering box
shall be weather proof, dust proof, rodent and inspect proof in
accordance with enclosure classification IP54. Service cable
entry and exit will be sides of the box and 40 (forty) mm diameter
hole with black PVC conic cable gland shall be provided for side
entry & exit for this purpose. All material parts shall have anti-
corrosive protection.
All materials shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per
IEC or equivalent International standards except as mentioned.
The front door shall be removable and provision must be made
for sealing in the closed position.
Socket : Meter sockets shall be suitable for installation of offered type
meter.
Meter sockets shall be 3-phase, 4-wire wye, 600 volt class,
made from 16 gauge sheet metal. Meter sockets shall be similar
except as described below. Meter sockets shall approximately 14
(35.6 cm) H9(22.9cm) W4 (10.2 cm) D and rectangular in
shape. Sockets shall be the same size as 1-phase sockets and
terminal blocks shall be interchangeable. Sockets shall be ring less
type, sealing latch to be stainless steel and have adequate means
307
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 for socket grounding. Meter socket shall have a 2(5 cm) Diameter
top opening complete with a 1- ¼ (3.2 cm) hub. Meter socket
shall have 4 knockouts with a range up to 2(5 cm) Diameter, one
on the back, one in the bottom and one in each side. Meter socket
shall comply with ANSI C 12.6, 12.10
The Socket shall have written permanently (not in paper printed)
“connection diagram” distinctly marked in addition to all standard
data.
Terminal : Socket connected type/ Non-symmetrical, bottom entry, front
connection, and connection type with extended terminal cover:
Minimum 10 Terminals to accommodate up to 06 sq. mm size
of cable. The terminal cover for the offered energy meter shall
be extended type, and which can be sealed independently.
There shall be free space between bottom of the terminal and
the bottom of the terminal cover.
Connection : 3-phase, 4-wire solidly grounded neutral.
Service life of meter : Shall be minimum 15 (fifteen) years.
Visual indication of : Pulse indicator on the front of meter as per meter constant.
operation
Special condition : a) The factory calibration conforms to relevant IEC or equivalent
international standard. LCD display shall be shown
consecutively and continuously one after another. The display
shall be automated i.e. no external means shall be required to
see the display. Each display shall last for at least 5 (five) sec.
b) Meter Electronic Circuit biasing voltage shall have to be
ensured from each phase to phase and each phase to neutral
and minimum basing voltage 40V.
Meter Sealing : The Energy meter body will be hermetically sealed or ultrasonically
welded to avoid unauthorized opening of meter cover.
Communication port : The meter must be provided with a suitable communication port to
allow down loading of desired information stored in the meter to a
PC via hand held data logger as per IEC 1107 or equivalent
standard.
Remote : The meter shall be equipped with external GSM-GPRS Modem,
Communication which will be able to interface with RS232/RS485 for data
communication with the central server from meters, having all
accessories like power supply adapter, necessary connecting
cables, antenna with minimum 2.5 meter extension cable,
connectors, enclosure box with fixing materials etc. The modem
shall be compatible with existing AMR system of NESCO.

7.1.4.1.N.C TAMPER AND FRAUD PROTECTION FEATURE:

The meter shall have the following features to prevent/detect tamper and fraud:
• Phase Sequence Reversal: The meter should work accurately irrespective of
phase sequence of supply.
• Missing Potentials: The meter shall be capable of detection occurrence of
missing potential of one phase or two phase(s), which can happen due to
intentional/accidental disconnection of potential link(s).
• Terminal cover must have micro-switch provision to monitor unauthorized
opening. Opening of terminal cover shall trigger an event to be recorded in the
event log memory.
• Software Access: Software access for configuration and setting of the meters.

7.1.4.1.N.D TECHNICAL FEATURE

308
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 • The body cover and socket / enclosure shall be provided security sealing
provisions to prevent unauthorized access to the internal meter works.
• The meter shall be provided with connection diagram.
• The data access should be protected by minimum 3(three) steps software
password in meter.
• The meter shall have provision of phase to phase and each phase to neutral
biasing.
• The meter shall have minimum biasing voltage of 40V.
• The meter and socket/enclosure shall have provision of earthing.
• Meter must operate and accurately register demand and energy when
service voltage is applied across any two of the three input terminals or
when service voltage is applied from any input terminal to neutral. Meter
will continue to operate even the neutral is missing.
• The meter and socket/ enclosure must be the same country of origin other
wise the bid will be rejected.
• The registration of KWh (Peak & off-peak) on 3-phase, 4-wire supply for
balanced & unbalanced load will be unidirectional. i.e. if one, two or three
phase supply is/are reversed, it will take the absolute (kWh-del) + absolute
(kWh-rev) and will add them together as total 3-phase KWh.
• The meter shall be equipped with remote GSM & PSTN communication
option.
• It has to be ensured that the meter complies IEC61850 for SAS operation.
If required, internal/external module as protocol converter can be used for
the compatibility with IEC61850
• The meter shall have permanently print nameplate distinctly marked with
the following in addition to all standard data:
1. The word “NESCO” and insignia of NESCO.
2. Voltage and current rating.
3. Frequency.
4. Number of element, number of wire and multiplication factor.
5. Accuracy class.
6. Year of manufacture.
7. Serial number.
8. Name of manufacturer.
9. Meter constant.

7.1.4.1. N. E Display of measured values/ Meter Display

• The Sequence of LCD display should be user programmable.
• The contrast setting of LCD display should be visible in different lighting
environment and distinctly visible in broad daylight.
• The meter should be of displaying time and date, the direction of energy
i.e. as import/export or +/-, active tariff and internal fault indicators.
• There should be up to three groups of display to priorities the display.
Each showing a programmable function group.

7.1.4.1.N. F Meter Parameterisation Software

• The parameterisation software must run on Windows operating
environment.
• The software must be protected by software keys to control duplication and
installation.
• The software should have a customizable printing feature by task list.

309
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 • The meter must be able to display or record meter ID, Program,
Programmer ID, C. T. ratio, V. T. ratio, Total (KWh, KVarh, KVAh, KW,
KVar, KVA, P.F); per phase (voltage, current, KW, KVar, KVA, P.F, phase
voltage angle, phase current angel); Load profile having minimum 8(eight)
Channels data stored in different interval for 90 days.
• Tamper feature: The meter must have Errors & Warnings codes, History
log and Event log(minimum 400events) to record date & time of all power
outages, demand resets, time change.
• In addition, each software key must bear a unique user ID and that is not
transferable to another PC that has different user ID.
• The Meter should be able to display the phasor diagram.
• The software for Time of Use (TOU) shall be compatible to accommodate
future tariff and can be customized, if the purchaser changes the tariff .The
software shall be compatible with Windows operating system.
• The Meter must be provided with meter passwords to secure
communication between meter software and meter having minimum
3(three) access levels.
• The AMR Software have to be compatible with NESCO’s existing AMR
System. The Tenderer have to develop the total AMR System with existing
and supplied AMR Solution. In this case the tenderer have to provide their
meter protocols so that all exiting meters and supplied meters data will be
downloaded and managed in a single AMR System.

7.1.4.1.N. G EXTERNAL MODEM WITH ACCESSORIES

GSM/GPRS modem with RS-232/RS-485 ports, meter interfaced power supply,
connection cables, antenna with minimum 2.5 meters cable, mounting facilities,
enclosure (if necessary). The modems will be capable of GSM and GPRS connectivity
simultaneously. For GSm configuration the AT command will be available and for GPRS
communication the APN, reset time, username, password, port number, etc. are
configurable. The modem will have the following specification.
Interruption (< 1 ms), RS-232 (at least 1), GPRS class 10, operating band 900/1800,
auto reset capability (with phone call, SMS). The modem will be robust, durable and
compatible with the employers existing service condition.

7.1.4.1.N. H Manufacturer
All the energy meter shall be supplied from any of the following manufacturers:
a) Siemens, Germany/Switzerland.
b) AEG, Germany.
c) ABB, Switzerland/Finland
d) Toshiba , Japan
e) Elster, USA/Romania
f) Landis Gear, Switzerland.
g) Honeywell , USA

Note: Related software & accessories if required for Energymeters is within

the scope of supply.

7.1.4.1.O PROTECTIVE RELAYS

All Protective relays shall be numerical programmable type and shall comply relevant
IEC or equivalent international standard. Contract arrangement of the relays should
conform to the requirements of the diagram. All the relays shall be IEC 61850 protocol
type for automation network of the 33/11kV Sub-station.

310
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 All the protective relays shall be supplied from any of following manufacturers: ABB
(Switzerland/Finland/Sweden)/Siemens (Germany/ Switzerland)/Alstom (France/UK)/
Schneider (france/UK) /SEL, USA.
Note: Related software & accessories if required for Relays is within the scope
of supply.

7.1.4.1.P. AUXILIARY RELAY

Auxiliary relays with sufficient contact shall be used for transformer self-protection
(OTA, OTT, WTA, WTT, BA, BT, OLTC Surge, PRD for main tank. etc.). Apart from these
relays, each 33 kV PCM Cubicle shall be provided with 1 (one) set separate Auxiliary
and signaling relay and wiring with fuses. This relay shall be used for control &
monitoring of CB, DS and ES through numerical relay/BCU in case of SAS operation.
7.1.4.1.Q. Annunciator
Each PCM panel shall be equipped with 1 (one) set Annunciator with sufficient
windows (LED type with blinking facility) to display the alarms as per requirement.
Annunciator shall have built in buzzer and AC/DC fail relay and shall be powered by
dual source (with internal/external AC/DC changeover switch). Buttons for Accept,
Mute, Test, Reset etc. shall be provided in the Annunciator.

7.1.4.1.R. INDICATING AMMETERS

Each 33 KV PCM Cubicle will be provided with 3 Ammeters (1 for each phase),
analogue/digital type.
7.1.4.1.S. INDICATING VOLTMETERS
1 (one) voltmeter with a multi-selector switch (phase to phase, phase to neutral, off)
shall be installed on 33 KV transformer panel.
7.1.4.1.T. MIMIC BUS
LED based Semaphore Indicator showing the position (open/close) of Circuit Breaker,
Isolator and Earth Switch shall be inserted within the mimic bus.
Mimic bus material shall be brass, bronze or copper with enamel finished or anodized
aluminum or plastic. The mimic bus and included symbols shall be shaped,
colored and located as international standard. Light indicator showing position
(opening/closing) of circuit breaker, DS, ES shall be installed.
The mimic bus shall be attached to the panel by mechanical devices, not with
adhesive.
Attachment shall be closely spaced to hold all parts of the mimic bus firmly to the panel
face.
Mimic bus shall be provided with the following dimensions and color code:
Voltage Bus Color Thick Dimension (mm)
33 KV Green 3 12
Note : One set of relay testing plug shall be supplied with protection, metering and
control panel which will be included in the quoted price. Each cubicle shall be complete
according to the specification, features and bill of materials but not limited to these
items; the cubicles should be complete in all respects, to make it fully operational.

7.1.4.1.V INFORMATION REQUIRED

The Tenderer/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information/Documents has to be submitted along with the
tender:-

311
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (a) Manufacturer’s drawing showing Outline dimension & General arrangement drawings
of offered type equipment.
(b) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data of the
offered type equipment.
(c) The Tenderer/Manufacturer shall submit with the bid the testing procedure & list of
testing/measuring equipment, meters etc. used for Factory test witness.
(d) Construction, Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual.
(e) Manufacturer's valid ISO Certificate.

(f) IEC 61850 Test Certificate for all Protective Relays.

7.1.4.2 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIOS:
Design, Drawing diagrams, Specification and Technical Particulars & Guarantees etc,
along with Outline, Dimensional, Cross-sectional & General arrangement drawings,
Installation diagram, printed catalogue describing the type/ model of offered PCM
cubicle, Protective relays, Energy meters shall be submitted to the Superintending
Engineer, Design & Inspectoin, NESCO Ltd, Rajshahi by the Bidder. The submitted
Design, Drawing diagrams, Specification and Technical Particulars & Guarantees etc
must be approved by Design & Inspectoin, NESCO Ltd, Rajshahi prior to the
manufacturing of the goods.

The Bidder shall have to submit 3 (three) sets of the same for Approval within 15 days
from the date of signing Contract. The bidder shall also submit one set reproducible
tracing of the above drawings in soft format.

No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the Testing
Equipment until the technical data and drawings have been approved.
The cost of supplying drawings and specifications shall be borne by the supplier.

7.1.4.3. W TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS FOR PCM PANEL

General
Functional electrical, material, mechanical and hydraulic tests shall be carried out at
manufacturers’ premises. The extent and method of recording the results shall be agreed by
the Purchaser in ample time to enable the tests to be satisfactorily witnessed or to make any
changes to the proposed program of tests.

MATERIAL TESTS
The supplier shall provide test pieces free of charge as required to enable the quality of the
material to be determined at the supplier’s expense. Purchaser may at its own discretion and
by specific arrangement accept certified particulars of tests carried out in the absence of his
authorized representative.

TYPE TEST
Type tests are required to prove the general design of the offered equipments/ materials.
The Tenderer shall submit the type test reports of the offered equipments/ materials from as
per relevant clause.
ROUTINE TESTS
All equipments/ materials shall be subjected to routine tests as per latest version of relevant
IEC/ BS or equivalent international standards as mentioned in the contract at the
manufacturers works and shall include, but not be limited to, an operational test.

7.1.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS & REQUIREMENTS OF 11KV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS

WITH PROTECTION, CONTROL & METERING CUBICLES

312
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.1.5.1 GENERAL
One panel structure and enclosure assembly with supports, Busbar compartments, Circuit
breaker compartment, LV compartment, V.T Compartment, Cable termination compartment,
earthing, Mechanical operating/ Indicating devices, Interlocks, LV compartments with all wiring
MCBs, Fuses,Links, Auxilary relays, Supervision relays, Heater, Humidistat, Indications lamp,
control and selector switches, Local and remote switches, TNC swithes, Interlocking facilities,
Voltmeter with selector switches, Terminal blocks, CTs/ VTs etc. as required for the complete
unit for control and protection HV side requirement etc. The panel shall be suitable for
connecting to 10/13.33 MVA or 20/26MVA power Transformer in accordance with the drawing.
1. Installation Indoor
2. Type Vacuum, Draw-out Pattern Cubicle
3. Bus-bar Scheme Single bus bar
4. Construction The structure of the cell is made of
special sheet clad with convenient
treatment which in all respect resists the
effect of indoor humid tropicalized
climate.
5. Mounting Trolley Type/ Floor Mounting
6. System 3-Phase, 3-Wire with earthed Neutral
7. Nominal System Voltage 11 kV Phase to Phase
8. System Highest Voltage 12 kV Phase to Phase
9. Rated short duration power frequency 28 kV (rms)
withstand voltage
10. Rated Lightning Impulse withstand voltage 75 kV (peak)
11. Frequency 50 Hz
12. Rated normal current:
a) 10/13.33 MVA power transformer 11kV 1600 A
Incoming & Bus Coupler
b) for 11KV outgoing feeder with 1600A bus bars 630A
13. Temperature rise of any part of the switchgear & Shall be as per the latest revision of relevant
control gear IEC standards.
14. Rated Short-time withstand Current (Rated short 31.5 KA for 3 Sec.
circuit breaking current)
15. Rated Peak withstand Current (Rated short circuit 80 KA
making current)
17. Opening Time ≤ 0.05 Sec.
18. Breaking Time ≤ 5 Cycle
19. Rated supply voltage of closing & opening devices 110 Vdc & 240/415 Vac
and auxiliary circuits.
20. Rated supply frequency of closing & opening 50Hz.
devices and auxiliary circuits.
21. Rated Operating Sequence 0-0.3sec-CO-3Min-CO
22. Degrees of Protection by enclosures (IP) IP4X as defined in IEC 60529
23. All Current Carrying Parts of VCB Shall be made of copper
24. Dimensions of all 11kV Cubicles (including bus bar Shall be matched in all respect.
height and size)
25. Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing and
Performance shall be in accordance to the
IEC-62271-200 and other related IEC
standards.

7.1.5.2 11KV TRANSFORMER INCOMING CUBICLES , EACH PANEL COMPRISING:

10/13.33 MVA Power Transformer

313
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 1. Type of Bus Bar HDHC copper 1600A.
2. Bus Bar Scheme Single Bus Bar
3. Type of Circuit Breaker Vacuum
4. Number of Phases 3 (Three)
5. Operating Mechanism For Circuit Breaker operation, both
spring-operated and stored-energy
mechanisms shall be available. With
manual Power/Manual, Trip Free,
Electrically Spring wound operated by
240 Vac and shunt trip by 110 Vdc from
storage battery, vertically disconnected
horizontal draw-out type with 2 Nos.
Trip coils. The operating sequence
OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN is stored in the
springs.
6. Rupturing Capacity. 600 MVA, Symmetrical.
7. Breaking Time. 5 Cycle Maximum
8. Continuous Current Rating. 1600 A
9. All Current Carrying Parts of VCB. Shall be made of Copper
10. AC Control Voltage. 240  10% Volts
11. DC Control Voltage. 110  10% Volts
12. Cable and Boxes for Incoming. Suitable for size 2x1Cx300 mm2
XLPE 11kV cables per phase with
copper conductors.
10/13.33 MVA Power Transformer: Single
Phase Bushing/Ring type Current Transformer with
Ratio 600-1200/5-5-5A power transformer of
13. burden & accuracy class-20 VA & 0.2 (for 3 Nos.
measurement) and 30VA & 5P20 (for protection). (A Phase, B Phase & C Phase Shall
(Characteristics: Epoxy resins insulated and double have
windings, butyl rubber type. The epoxy resin should Individual CT)
be ultraviolet stabilized, fungus resistant & high
tracking resistance, short time current ratings
31.5KA for 3 second & extended current ratings
120% of the rated value, secondary double winding,
installation shall be in the panel).
Numerical, programmable IDMT & Instantaneous
14. type Over Current and Earth fault protection relay 1 set
and separate Standby Earth fault and all other
necessary features for transformer incoming feeder
protection. The current setting range of the O/C &
E/F relay shall be from 0.1*In to 40*In for both
overcurrent and earth fault element. All O/C & E/F
relays shall have both IDMT, DT (51) and
Instantaneous (50) function along with IEC NI, VI,
EI, LTI etc. curve setting capability. O/C & E/F
relays for 11 kV Transformer Incoming Cubicles
shall have directional, over voltage, under voltage,
frequency protection, power measuring features as
well.
15. Master Trip & Trip Circuit Supervision (for each 1 Set
trip coil) relays.
16. All necessary Auxiliary & Signaling relays. As required.

314
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Numerical Programmable 3 phase, 4 wire, 3
17. element solid state, indoor type, multi tariff
6
programmable KWH Meter of accuracy class 0.2 1 No.
.
with the features for measuring the parameters
viz. phase voltages, phase currents, per phase &
total KW with maximum demand, KVar, Power
factor etc.
18. Indicating analogue/digital ampere meter flush 3 Nos.
mounting type with dual scales option (0-
600A/1200A) for connecting to the current
transformer ratio 600-1200/5-5-5A.
70W, 240V AC, Single Phase space heater with
19. thermostat and a visible light indicator which 1 set
indicate the "ON"- "OFF" position of the heater
All necessary AC DC MCB, TNC Switch, Selector
20. Switch, Limit Switch, Control Switch, Toggle As required.
Switch, Link/ Base, Push Button, Indicating/
Illumination Lamp, AC Plug Socket, Wiring,
Fuses, Hooter etc. i.e. complete in all respect.
Mimic diagram with LED based Semaphore
Indicator for Isolator/Breaker/Earth switch
position.
21. 11 kV bus incomer Switchgear panel (12 window
Annunciator)
Main Relay
Main DC Fail AC Fail PT Failure
Faulty
TCS-1 TCS-2
O/C Trip E/F Trip
Unhealthy Unhealthy
67 Trip 67N Trip Standby E/F 33 kV Inter trip
22. 11kV PT As described in GTP may also be
proposed.
23. Indicating analogue/digital voltmeter with six 1 set
position selector switch flush mounting with
scales 0-15 kV for connection to potential
transformer ratio (11/√3)/(0.11/√3)/(0.11/√3) kV,
(50 Hz).
24. Multifunctional meter (MFM) capable of 1 set
measuring and displaying MW, MVAR, PF, V, I,
f, ø etc. distinguishing import and export
operation.
25. Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) based Live 1 set
Line Indicator (LLI) system.

7.1.5.3 BUS COUPLER WITH BUS RISER CUBICLES EACH COMPRISING: (NOT APPLICABLE FOR
THIS TENDER)

1. Type of Bus Bar HDHC copper 1600A.

2. Bus Bar Scheme Single Bus Bar
3. Type of Circuit Breaker Vacuum
4. Number of Phases 3 (Three)

315
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 5. Operating Mechanism For Circuit Breaker operation, both
spring-operated and stored-energy
mechanisms shall be available. With
manual Power/Manual, Trip Free,
Electrically Spring wound operated by
240 Vac and shunt trip by 110 Vdc from
storage battery, vertically
disconnected horizontal draw-out type
with 2 Nos. Trip coils. The operating
sequence
OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN is stored in the
springs.
6. Rupturing Capacity 600 MVA, Symmetrical
7. Breaking Time 5 Cycle Maximum
8. Continuous Current Rating 1600 A
9. All Current Carrying Parts of VCB Shall be made of Copper
10. AC Control Voltage 240  10% Volts
11. DC Control Voltage 110  10% Volts
12. Voltage Selection Relay 1 No.
13. 10/13.33 MVA Power Transformer: Single
Phase Bushing/Ring type Current Transformer
with Ratio 600-1200/5-5-5A power transformer of
burden & accuracy class-20 VA & 0.2 (for
measurement) and 30VA & 5P20 (for protection). 3 Nos.
(Characteristics: Epoxy resins insulated and (A Phase, B Phase & C Phase Shall
double windings, butyl rubber type. The epoxy have
resin should be ultraviolet stabilized, fungus Individual CT)
resistant & high tracking resistance, short time
current ratings 31.5 KA for 3 second & extended
current ratings 120% of the rated value, secondary
double winding, installation shall be in the panel).
14. Numerical programmable IDMT & Instantaneous
type Over Current and Earth fault protection relay 1 set
with all necessary features for Bus Coupler
protection. The current setting range of the O/C &
E/F relay shall be from 0.1*In to 40*In (where In is
relay nominal current) for both overcurrent and
earth fault element. All O/C & E/F relays shall have
both IDMT, DT (51) and Instantaneous (50)
function along with IEC NI, VI, EI, LTI etc. curve
setting capability.
15 Indicating analogue/digital ampere meter flush 3 nos.
mounting type with dual scales option (0-
600A/1200A) for connecting to the current
transformer ratio 600-1200/5-5-5A.
16. Master Trip & Trip Circuit Supervision (for each 1 Set
trip coil) relays.
17. All necessary Auxiliary & Signaling relays. As required.
18. 70W, 230V AC, Single Phase heater with 1 set
thermostat and a visible light indicator which
indicate the "ON"- "OFF" position of the heater

316
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 19. All necessary AC DC MCB, TNC Switch,
Selector Switch, Limit Switch, Control Switch, As required.
Toggle Switch, Link/ Base, Push Button,
Indicating/ Illumination Lamp, AC Plug Socket,
Wiring, Fuses, Hooter etc. i.e. complete in all
respect. Mimic diagram with LED based
Semaphore Indicator for Isolator/Breaker/Earth
switch position.
20. 11 kV bus coupler Switchgear panel (8 window
Annunciator)
Main Relay
Main DC Fail AC Fail Spare
Faulty
TCS-1 TCS-2
O/C Trip E/F Trip
Unhealthy Unhealthy
21. Indicating analogue/digital voltmeter with six 1 set
position selector switch flush mounting with
scales 0-15 kV for connection to potential
transformer ratio (11/√3)/(0.11/√3)/(0.11/√3) kV,
(50 Hz). There shall be two voltmeters, one for
Bus-1 and the other for Bus-2 respectively.
22. Multifunctional meter (MFM) capable of 1 set
measuring and displaying MW, MVAR, PF, V, I,
f, ø etc. distinguishing import and export
operation.
23. Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) based Live 1 set
Line Indicator (LLI) system.
24. Bus coupler panel will feed incoming 1 or 2 PT 1 set
secondary output voltage to 11 kV outgoing
control Panel for measuring and protection
purpose automatically with combination of
magnetic contact and MCB .

7.1.5.4 11 KV OUT-GOING CIRCUIT BREAKER CUBICLES, EACH COMPRISING:

1. Type of Bus Bar HDHC Copper 1600A
2. Bus Bar Scheme Single Bus Bar
3. Type of Circuit Breaker Vacuum
4. Number of Phases 3 (Three)
5. Operating Mechanism For Circuit Breaker operation, both
spring-operated and stored-energy
mechanisms shall be available.
With manual Power/ Manual, Trip Free,
Electrically Spring wound operated by
240 Vac and shunt trip by 110 Vdc from
storage battery, vertically disconnected
horizontal draw-out type with 2 Nos. Trip
coils. The operating sequence OPEN-
CLOSE-OPEN is stored in the springs.
6. Rupturing Capacity 600 MVA, Symmetrical.
7. Breaking Time 5 Cycle Maximum
8. Continuous Current Rating 630 Amps
317
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 9. Cable and Boxes for Incoming Cable Suitable for size 1x3Cx185 mm2
10. AC Control Voltage 240  10% Volts
11. DC Control Voltage 110  10% Volts
12. All Current Carrying Parts of VCB Shall be made of Copper
13. Single Phase Bushing/Ring type Current Transformer
of Ratio 200-400/5-5A of burden & accuracy class-
20VA & 0.2 (for measurement) and 30VA & 5P20 (for
protection).
(Characteristics: Epoxy resins insulated and double 3 Nos.
windings, butyl rubber type. The epoxy resin should (A Phase, B Phase & C Phase
be ultraviolet stabilized, fungus resistant & high Shall have Individual CT)
tracking resistance, short time current ratings 31.5 KA
for 3 sec. & extended current ratings 120% of the
rated value, secondary double winding, installation
shall be in the panel)
14. Numerical programmable IDMT & Instantaneous type
Over Current and Earth fault protection relay with all 1 set
necessary features for 11KV Outgoing feeder
protection. The current setting range of the O/C & E/F
relay shall be from 0.1*In to 40*In (where In is relay
nominal current) for both overcurrent and earth fault
element. All O/C & E/F relays shall have both IDMT,
DT (51) and Instantaneous (50) function along with
IEC NI, VI, EI, LTI etc. curve setting capability.
15. Master Trip & Trip Circuit Supervision (for each trip coil) 1 Set
relays.
16. All necessary Auxiliary & Signaling relays. As required.
17. Numerical Programmable 3 phase, 4 wire, 3 element solid
state, indoor type, multi tariff programmable KWH Meter of
6 1 No.
accuracy
. class 0.2 with the features for measuring the
parameters viz. phase voltages, phase currents, per phase
& total KW with maximum demand, KVar, Power factor etc.
19. Indicating analogue/digital ampere meter flush mounting 3 Nos.
type with dual scales option (0-200A/400A) for connecting
to the current transformer ratio 200-400/5-5A.
20. 70W, 230V AC, Single Phase heater with thermostat
and a visible light indicator which indicate the "ON"- 1 set
"OFF" position of the heater
21. All necessary AC DC MCB, TNC Switch, Selector Switch,
Limit Switch, Control Switch, Toggle Switch, Link/ Base, As required.
Push Button, Indicating/ Illumination Lamp, AC Plug
Socket, Wiring, Fuses, Hooter etc. i.e. complete in all
respect. Mimic diagram with LED based Semaphore
Indicator for Isolator/Breaker/Earth switch position.
22. 11 kV outgoing feeder panel (8 window Annunciator)
Main Relay
Main DC Fail AC Fail Spare
Faulty
TCS-1 TCS-2
O/C Trip E/F Trip
Unhealthy Unhealthy
23. Indicating analogue/digital voltmeter with six position 1 set
selector switch flush mounting with scales 0-15 kV for
connection to potential transformer ratio
(11/√3)/(0.11/√3)/(0.11/√3) kV, (50 Hz).

318
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 24. Multifunctional meter (MFM) capable of measuring 1 set
and displaying MW, MVAR, PF, V, I, f, ø etc.
distinguishing import and export operation.
25. Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) based Live Line 1 set
Indicator (LLI) system.

7.1.5.5 MEASURING CUBICLES, EACH COMPRISING:

a) 3 nos. epoxy resin-insulated single phase potential transformer having a ratio of
(11/3)/0.11/3)/0.11/3) kV (50 Hz), accuracy class 0.2 for measurement and 3P for
protection, rated burden of 30VA connected to the bus through fuses. The epoxy resin
should be ultraviolet stabilized, fungus resistant and should have high tracking resistance.
b) 1 no. Indicating voltmeter, flush mounted with scale 0 to 15 KV for connection to the
potential transformer.
c) 1 no. voltmeters selector switch with 6 (Six) positions flush mounted, rated voltage 500
Volts (50 Hz) rated current 15 Amps, front plate with inscription AB-BC-AC-AN-BN-CN.
d) 1 set, necessary supporting insulators and other accessories, wiring, fuses, heater etc.
e) The PT will be mounted on the top of the transformer 11 KV incoming Circuit breaker
panel.
7.1. 5.6 FEATURES & ACCESSORIES
a) VCB should be restrike free.
b) VCB should be trip free.
c) Vacuum Interrupter shall be capable of short circuit current switching ≥ 100.
d) Breaker trucks of different current ratings shall not be interchangeable. The breaker truck
may be wheel mounted and rail supported.if the breaker is not wheel mounted and rail
supported then separate trolly must be provided that will be interchangeable for different
current rating,
e) All current carrying parts shall be made of copper.
f) Hand closing and tripping shall be done through manual levers.
g) Manually operating devices for slow closing for inspection and maintenance. It shall not
be possible to slow close a breaker when in normal services.
h) Each cubicle shall have ON-OFF indicator and provision for manual operation and
necessary mechanical & electrical interlocking.
i) Protective relay shall be sufficient for over current and earth fault protection and shall be
of numerical programmable type. Accessories/Software required if any, Control &
Protection Scheme drawings and Operation & Maintenance manual is within the scope
of supply for each panel. All the relays shall be IEC 61850 protocol type for automation
network of the 33/11kV Sub-station. In addition, numerical relay shall have sufficient
contacts and shall be configured for SAS operation. Intermediate auxiliary relay with
sufficient spare contacts shall be used for controlling CB or any other switching devices
through numerical relay in case of SAS operation.
j) All indicating meters will be semi flush type with full view 240" scale range with intimate
dial, black marketing and pointer with moving element with zero adjuster.
k) The painting shall be gray (RAL 7032) outside and glazed white inside.
l) All equipment and accessories shall be fully tropicalized.
m) Necessary foundation bolts, spare heaters (installed and wire), manual handle for the
breakers, test jumpers, portable lamp, set of test plug for test terminals and draw-out
type relay shall be supplied.
n) The complete panel and its accessories shall be made to the latest relevant IEC
standards.
o) VCB shall be removable, draw-out type floor mounted/ trolley type and all the protective
relays shall be mounted on the upper part of the panel.
p) Rating plate and diagram plate having all information as per relevant IEC standard shall
be made of stainless steel and have engraved letters filled with black enamel paint.
319
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
q) At least three sets relay & meter testing plug shall be supplied.
r) Each VCB cubicles shall be complete according to the specification, features and bill of
materials but not limited to these items; the VCB cubicles should be complete in all
respects, to make it fully operational.
s) Tripping from protection to circuit breakers shall be through fast acting (<10 msec) Trip
relays.
t) CT terminal block shall have isolation, shorting & jacking facility while PT terminal block
shall have isolation & jacking facility.
u) Sufficient spare terminals (at least 10%) in each terminal block.
v) Provision to hang danger/ caution board.
w) The Switchgear panel shall be SCADA/SAS compatible and hence all intelligent
devices, digital energy meters etc. shall comply IEC61850. All physical connections for
control, measurement and status indication shall be made SAS ready.
x) 70W, 230V AC, 1-phase heater with thermostat and control switch and a visible light
indicator which indicate the “ON” & “OFF” position of the heater.
y) Circuit Breaker control indicating switches and indicating lamps to indicate spring Charge/
Readiness for closing and healthy trip circuit indicating readiness for tripping.
z) Circuit Breaker shall have 2 trip coils, Both trip coils shall be energized by separate
contacts of master trip relay for protection tripping. However, for manual tripping, only one
trip coil can be engaged only.
aa) Indicating/Signaling Lamps shall be of LED type. Following LED Indicators including Lamp
test facility shall be provided in the panel:

CB in Test CB in
DC AC CB CB Spring CB
Position Service
Available Available Open Close Charged Tripped Position

ab) Mimic diagram shall contain LED based Semaphore Indicator instead of moving
Semaphore indicator.
ac) Ferrule marking and color coding for all type of wiring shall be as follows:
1. Ferrule marking:
i. “A”- for differential protection circuit
ii. “C”- for O/C & E/F protection circuit
iii. “D”- for metering circuit
iv. “E”- for PT circuit
v. “L”- for Alarm & Indication circuit
vi. “S”- for fault recorder
2. Color coding:
i. “Black”- for phases of AC supply
ii. “White”- for neutral of AC supply
iii. “Grey”- for control circuit
iv. “Brown & Grey”- for (+) and (-) DC supply respectively
v. “Red, Yellow, Blue, Black”- for CT and PT circuit
vi. “Yellow with green strip”- for earthing
ad) A copy of Control circuit scheme shall be laminated and fixed to the inner side of the door
of the cubicle
ae) Operation Counter for the circuit breaker.
af) Anti pumping feature shall be provided/ included.
ag) Bidder shall supply related software (1copy) and manuals describing trouble shooting
procedure(3copies).
ah) Bidder shall supply the operation manuals of relay and meters describing the trouble
shooting and configuration procedure (3copies).

320
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
ai) Inter tripping arrangement for 11 kV incomer Cubicle (from 33 kV transformer feeder
tripping) and for 33 kV transformer feeder (from directional tripping of 11 kV incomer or Stand
by E/F tripping) shall be provided. All type of tripping shall be done through Master Trip relay.

aj) Separate MCBs shall be provided for DC supply to Power, Control and Alarm & Indication
circuits.
ak) Relay test plug facility shall be provided in all 11 kV Switchgear panel along with licensed
software (CD), communication cable and catalogues etc.
7.1.5.7 INFORMATION REQUIRED
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
crucial components (i.e. breakers, vacuum interrupter, relays, energy meters,
annunciator, etc.) of offered type equipment.
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.
c) The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall submit the list of available testing/ measuring
equipment, meters, etc., along with valid Calibration Certificate(s) from competent
authority used in manufacturer's laboratory for performing Routine Test as per
IEC standard.

7.1.5. PROTECTIVE RELAYS

All Protective relays shall be numerical programmable type and shall comply relevant IEC or
equivalent international standard. All the relays shall be IEC 61850 protocol type for
automation network of the 33/11kV Sub-station.
All the protective relays shall be supplied from any of following manufacturers:-
a) ABB (Switzerland/Sweden/Finland).
b) Siemens (Germany).
c) ALSTOM (UK/France)
d) Schneider Electric (UK/France)
e) SEL, USA

Note: Supply of Related software & accessories is within the scope of supply.

7.1.5.9 ENERGY METERS

KWH meter shall 3-phase 4-wire, Numerical Programmable Multifunction KWH Meter of
accuracy class 0.2s with the features for measuring the parameters viz. phase voltages, phase
currents, system frequency, per phase & total KW with maximum demand, KVAR, Power
factor etc.
It has to be ensured that the meter complies IEC61850 for SAS operation. If required,
internal/external module as protocol converter can be used for the compatibility with
IEC61850. However, the detail specification of the meter shall be same as that for 33 kV PCM
panel meter described in clause 7.1.4.1.N.
All the energy meter shall be supplied from any of the following manufacturers:-
a) Siemens, Germany/Switzerland.
b) AEG, Germany.
c) ABB, Switzerland/Finland
d) Itron, USA
e) Elster, USA./Romania
f) Landis+ Gyr, Switzerland
g) Toshiba (Japan)
h) Honeywell (USA)
i) CEWE, UK

321
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Note: Manufacturer’s authorization for Protective Relays & Energy Meters (KWh) shall furnish
with the offer. Necessary software & accessories is within the scope of supply.
7.1.5.10 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
Each panel shall be fabricated from steel sheet (minimum 1.62 mm thick) with necessary steel
member reinforcement to make the structure self supporting. All joints are to be welded and
ground to be made smooth.
Mounting brackets required shall be arranged inside the panel for mounting and fixing auxiliary
devices and terminal blocks.
Instruments meters control switches and protective relays shall be mounted on the front panel
only. Panel output mounting studs and support brackets shall be accurately located.
Finished panel surface shall be free of waves and other imperfections exterior panel surfaces
shall be send blasted, ground smooth, filled, panel and finished with gray enamel. Interior
surface shall be sand blasted, primed and finished with glass white enamel.
The LV panel shall be designed to facilitate entry of inter-panels control wires and cables. The
LV & Breaker compartment doors shall be equipped with hinged formed door. The door shall
be rigid and shall be equipped with three point latches. The breaker & busbar compartments
shall be capable of withstanding internal faults.

The supplier shall furnish internal panel wiring and circuit protection. The supplier shall provide
one 70W, 240, AC strip heater in the panel. The heater shall have a separate switch. Engraved
name plate shall be provided at the top of the front enclosure.

7.1.5.11 PANEL WIRING

The supplier shall provide internal wiring and connections, in accordance with the
requirements of the following paragraph.
All wiring used within the panel shall conform to the requirements of these specifications and
shall be installed and tested at the factory. All wiring shall be neatly and carefully installed in
wring gutters of raceway wiring raceway shall be plastic wiring duct with covers. Instrument
wiring on the panel shall be numbered sequentially from the sources to the panel instrument
and the number of the source equipment shall be used as a prefix for the individual wire
numbers, wiring shall be terminated at terminal blocks plainly lettered or marked in accordance
with the manufacturer’s connection diagrams.

Sufficient clearance shall be provided for all the leads. All the leads for external circuit wiring
shall be connected to grounded terminal blocks located for convenient connection of external
circuits.

Splices will not be permitted in panel wiring. All the terminal block connections shall be made
with ring type lugs. Pre-insulated ring type terminals with crimp guide or per-insulated slotted
spring spade terminals shall be provided on devices equipped with individual fitted covers.
Arrangement of circuits on terminal block shall be such that all the connections for one circuit,
plus any spare conductors, shall have terminal blocks adjacent to the split and shall be
provided with wiring required to interconnect the split unit.

Closing circuit of the Switchgear panel shall have interlocking mechanism with breaker
position (Test position/Service position). Earth switch of the Switchgear panel shall have
mechanical interlocking alongside electrical interlocking. Single point grounding of the neutral
of CT/PT circuits shall be ensured. Ferrule marking and color coding shall be as per clause
“7.1.5.6 Features & Accessories”.

The size of the wiring used in the panel shall be conform to the following requirements:-

322
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - Ampere meter and current transformer circuit: minimum 4 Sq.mm.
- All other wiring: minimum 2.5 Sq.mm.
7.1.5.12 INDICATING LIGHTS
LED type indicating lights shall be of transparent glass lenses and appropriately sized
resister.

7.1.5.13 POWER SUPPLY DISCONNECT

Each panel mounted devices requiring AC or DC supply, shall have disconnecting devices
(MCB). The MCBs used in DC control circuit shall have a rating of 10 A and 250 V. The fuses
shall be modular type with Bakelite frame and reinforced retaining clips.
7.1.5.14 TERMINAL BLOCKS
Terminal blocks shall provided with white marking strips, circuit designation by the supplier
shall be inscribed on the marking strip with black print, terminals in a quantity of not less than
25 percent of the interconnected terminals in excess shall be provided on each terminal block
for circuit modifications and for termination of all conductors in multi-conductor cable.
CT terminal blocks shall have isolation, shorting & jacking facility while PT terminal blocks
shall have isolation & jacking facility. CT, PT, Control, Alarm, etc. wirings shall be separately
grouped or segregated.

All physical connections for control, measurement and status indication shall be made SAS
ready hence Terminal Blocks shall be kept reserved if necessary.
Terminal block shall be grouped in each panel for easy accessibility unrestricted by
interference from structural members and instruments. Sufficient spaces shall be provided on
each side of each terminal block to allow an orderly arrangement of all the lead to be
terminated on the block.
7.1.5.15 INSTRUMENTS AND DEVICES
Indicating, analogue/digital instruments shall be semi flush panel type with 1% percent
accuracy class except for energy meters which shall be of 0.2. They shall be approximately
100 mm square with black 240 degree scales on a white back ground.
All AC instruments shall be designed for operation on 5A current transformers secondary and
110V (50 Hz) potential transformer secondary.

7.1.5.16 CONTROL AND DEVICES

All switches shall be located at a convenient operating height and so constructed, mounted
and wired to facilitate the maintenance of contacts without the need to disconnect wiring.
Switches shall have locks incorporated in the design. Control switches must be lockable in the
inactive or neutral position and selector switches in all positions. Labels shall clearly indicate
all positions and function of each switch.
7.1.5.17 Control Switches
Control switches shall be of either the handle type and shall be arranged to operate clockwise
when closing the circuit devices and anticlockwise when opening. Handle type switches shall
be so designed that when released by the operator the handle and mechanism shall return
automatically to the centered neutral position and interrupt the supply of current to the
operating mechanism of the circuit device. All control switches shall have additional labeling
giving the reference identification of the primary device.
7.1.5.18 SELECTOR SWITCHES
Selector switches shall have spade type handles. Where key operated switches are specified
these shall be operated by inserting and turning the key to the required position. The key shall
be removable in the 'off' position only.
7.1.5.19 ANNUNCIATOR RELAY
Each 11 kV Switchgear Cubicle shall be equipped with 1 (one) set Annunciator with sufficient
windows (LED type with blinking facility) to display the alarms as per requirement. Annunciator
323
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
shall have built in buzzer and AC/DC fail relay and shall be powered by dual source (with
internal/external AC/DC changeover switch). Buttons for Accept, Mute, Test, Reset etc. shall
be provided in the Annunciator.

7.1.5.20 INDICATING AMMETERS

Each 11kV PCM Cubicle will be provided with 3 Ammeters, analogue/digital type (1 for each
phase).
7.1.5.21 INDICATING VOLTMETERS
1 (one) voltmeter with selector switch, analogue/digital type with a multi-selector switch (phase
to phase, phase to neutral, off) shall be installed on 11kV transformer panel.
7.1.5.22 ISOLATING FEATURES
The circuit breaker shall be connected to the busbars and feeder circuit through plug
and socket type isolating devices. The devices shall be off load type but shall be
suitable for operation whilst the busbars or feeder circuits are live. The isolators shall
comply with IEC 62271-102 standards. The following circuit breaker locations shall be
provided and the description of each position shall be as per relevant IEC standards.
The following positions shall be provided as a minimum:
ISOLATED (OR MAINTENANCE)
TEST SERVICE: Mechanical and lamp indications shall be provided to show the
location of the circuit breaker (ie. CB in test position, service position etc). Such
indications shall be visible from the front of the equipment at all times.
7.1.5.23 EARTH SWITCH & EARTHING SYSTEM
Earthing switches shall be arranged to permit safe maintanance of any section of the
equipment when the remainder is live. Mechanical Interlock shall be provided such
that when the cable is live the line earth switch shall not close. Local Electrical/
Mechanical position indicators shall be provided on all switches and shall be visible
from the front side of the panel. The field contacts used for electrical indicators shall
be contacts of limit switch which shall be actuated at the instant of earthing blades set
at final position of operation.
7.1.5.24 EARTHING SYSTEM
All metal parts other than those forming part of any electrical circuit shall be earthed to the
earthing system. Any necessary terminals on any part of the equipment required for this
purpose shall be provided by the Manufacturer. Earthing conductor cross section shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer standards which shall be proved with necessary type test
reports. However, for 11kV switchgear minimum 300 mm2 cross section copper bar shall be
employed for earthing. The copper earth bar shall run along the full length of the switchboard
and earthing studs shall be provided at not less than two points. The frame of the draw-out
circuit breaker earthing truck shall be automatically connected to the switchgears bar through
substantial plug type contact when the circuit breaker is in disconnection, service and test
position.
7.1.5.25 TRIP RELAYS
Following shall be the main features of a high speed tripping relays:
All tripping relays shall be of the heavy duty and self-reset type suitable for panel mounting
and shall have operating coils which are rated sufficiently to operate in conjunction with series
flag relays. If necessary, normally closed contacts in series with the relay operating coil, shall
be delayed for a period which will allow series flag relays to operate satisfactorily. All other
tripping contacts should be instantaneous i.e. no intentional time delay. The operating time
shall not exceed 10 milliseconds at rated voltage. The operating range of the relay shall be
from 70% to 120% of rated voltage.
Trip Relay shall be of following types:
a. Self-reset type
324
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 b. Operating Coil Voltage: 110 V DC (No series resistor allowed.
c. Shall have in built freewheeling diode.

Wherever the tripping relay contacts need to break the d.c. current, sufficiently rated magnetic
blow out contacts or such approved means shall be used.

7.1.5.26 SUPERVISION RELAYS

7.1.5.26.1 Trip Circuit and Protection Supply Supervision

The trip circuit supervision function shall be a separate relay and independent of control and
protection unit provided in the switchgear. Trip circuit supervision relays shall be provided to
monitor each of the trip circuits of all 11kV circuit breakers and each relay shall have sufficient
contacts for visual/audible alarm and indication purposes. The trip circuit supervision scheme
shall provide continuous supervision of the trip circuits of the circuit breaker in either the open
or closed position and independent of local or remote selection at the local operating position.
Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms during faults on dc wiring
on adjacent circuits, or due to operation of a trip relay contact. Series resistances shall be
provided in trip supervision circuits to prevent mal tripping a circuit breaker if a relay element
is short circuited. Relay alarm elements shall be equipped with hand resetting flag indicators.

Trip circuit supervision relay (TCSR) shall supervise not only the trip coil but also the whole
trip circuit during both breaker open and close position (pre-close & post-close). Both trip
circuits shall be supervised by separate TCS relay. TCS function of main relay shall be avoided
for supervision.

7.1.5.26.2 D.C. Supply Supervision

Supervision relays are required for each protection supply, Main protection, Back-up and Trip
Relay Reset. Similarly for each trip circuit supply and for each alarm/ indications supply. These
supervision relays are to be independent of alarms from the trip circuit supervision scheme so
that the operator can clearly differentiate via the available alarms between loss of supply due
to a blown fuse / tripped MCB and failure of a trip circuits supervision /faulty supervision wiring.

7.1.5.27 MIMIC BUS

Mimic bus material shall be brass, bronze or copper with enamel finished or anodized
aluminum or plastic. The mimic bus and included symbols shall be shaped, colored and
located as international standard. Light indicator showing position (opening/closing) of circuit
breaker, DS, ES shall be installed.
The mimic bus shall be attached to the panel by mechanical devices, not with adhesive.
Attachment shall be closely spaced to hold all parts of the mimic bus firmly to the panel face.
Mimic bus shall be provided with the following dimensions and color code:-

Voltage Bus Color Thick Dimension (mm)

11 KV Black 3 12
LED based Semaphore Indicator showing the position (open/close) of Circuit Breaker and
Earth Switch shall be inserted within the mimic bus.
7.1.5.28 Auxiliary Relays
Each 11 kV Switchgear Cubicle shall be provided with 1 (one) set separate Auxiliary and
signaling relay and wiring with fuses. This relay shall be used for control & monitoring of CB
and ES through numerical relay/BCU in case of SAS operation.

7.1.5.29 Live Line Indicator

325
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Each 11 kV Switchgear Cubicle shall be equipped with CVD based Live Line Indicator (LLI)
system.

7.1.5.30 TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS FOR 11KV SWITCHGEAR:

7.1.5.30.1 GENERAL

Functional electrical, material and mechanical tests shall be carried out at manufacturers’
premises. The extent and method of recording the results shall be agreed by the Purchaser in
ample time to enable the tests to be satisfactorily witnessed or to make any changes to the
proposed program of tests.

7.1.5.30.2 MATERIAL TESTS:

The supplier shall provide test pieces free of charge as required to enable the quality of the
material to be determined at the supplier’s expense. Purchaser may at its own discretion and
by specific arrangement accept certified particulars of tests carried out in the absence of his
authorized representative.

7.1.5.30.3. TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES & REPORTS:

For 11KV Switchgear (VCB with PCM Panel):

Type Test Certificates & Reports must be provided for offered type similar or higher
Ampere rating Switchgear for same voltage class from any short-circuit testing liaison
(STL) Member [http://www.stl-liaison.org/web/03_Members.php] Testing
Organization or Laboratory as per relevant IEC standard. The type test report along with
results shall include at least the following tests:

a) Lightning Impulse Voltage Withstand tests.

b) Power frequency withstands tests.
c) Temperature Rise Tests.
d) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit.
e) Short-circuit performance tests (including short-time and peak withstand current
tests, verification of making & breaking capacities tests).
f) Mechanical operation tests.
g) Internal Arc Classification IAC A FLR

IEC 61850 Test Certificate for all Protective Relays.

7.1.5.30.4. ROUTINE TESTS:

All items shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with the relevant latest version of
IEC 62271-1, IEC-62271-200, IEC-60298 IEC-60255 standards at the manufacturers works
and shall include, but not be limited to, an operational test.

TECHNICAL ORIENTATION AND QUALITY TEST WITNESS:

The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/ Test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the Technical specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time

326
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/ materials at the manufacturers’
premises, workmanship and performance.
100% of the goods must be ready completely before pre-delivery inspection.

The following test of (not limited to) shall be carried out for 33KV VCB, PCM panel &
11KV Switchgear as per latest version of IEC-62271-200, IEC-60298 IEC-60255 and other
relevant IEC standard. Among others, the following test shall be included but not
limited to:-
33KV VCB
a) Dielectric test on the main circuit
b) Tests on auxiliary and control circuits
c) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
d) Tightness test
f) Design and visual (physical) checks
g) Electrical and mechanical operation test.
h) Breaker contact resistance test
i) Breaker timing test

33KV PCM
a) Wiring Check
b) Functional check
c) Di-electric Test
d) Verification of protection

11KV Switchgear
a) Di-electric test on the main circuit.
b) Test on Auxilary and control circuits.
c) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
d) Tightness test.
e) Design and visual (Physical) checks
f) Electrical and Mechinical operation test.
g) Relay, control and protection scheme functional check.
Test shall be performed in accordance with the relevant IEC Standards and shall be
complied with offered Guaranteed Technical Particulars. All expenses for such tests
shall be borne by the supplier, which shall deemed to be included in the offered price.
The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in
writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for testing
as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at the place so named on
date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests, which
shall be deemed to have been made in the purchaser’s presence, and shall forth with forward
to the purchaser duly certified copies of test readings.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier accordingly
in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely notice in
writing of his intention to attend the test.
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer
of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance,
labor, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and
as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These test shall be
performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent and only routine tests as agreed
upon, will be performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes the
tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect.
327
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall
have the right to reject any of the item or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier
have to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any financial involvement
to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming with the specification at
the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relieved from the
responsibility of replacing them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment
were found good at the time of Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any
way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.
No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved
and written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.

7.1.6 Technical Specification of 33KV Isolator with Earth blade

7.1.6.1 General Specification:
1. Installation Outdoor
2. Type Air
3. Construction Open
4. Operation Gang
5. Operating Mechanism Manual
6. Mounting Position Vertical on supporting structure.
7. Number of Pole 3 (Three)
8. Frequency 50 Hz
9. System Nominal Voltage 33 KV
10. System Maximum Voltage 36 KV
11. Basic Insulation Level 170 KV
12. Rated continuous Current 1250A
13. Rated Short Time Withstand Current 31.5 KA (3 Sec.)
14. Rated 1 minute power frequency 70KV
withstand voltage, kV (rms)
Controling handle length of Isolator
15 ≥400mm
operating Pipe
16 Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation and
Performance shall be in accordance to the latest
editions of IEC 62271-102 standard and other
relevant IEC standards.
A. FEATURES
- Single-Break Pattern [Vertical break or Horizontal break (centre break)], OFF load type.
- Channel type mounting base insulator, blast.
- Coupling tubes for gang operation and adjustable operating rod with insulating link and
intermediate guide for operating rod.
- Auxiliary switch, operated by the phase coupling tube, to control circuits for operating
indicators, alarms, electrical inter-locking with the respective breaker to ensure that the
isolator can only be operated when the breaker is in “OFF’ position etc. with at least 10%
spare contacts.
- Terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR Merlin/ Grosbeak conductor as required.
- Earthing steel pads with provision for earth lead.
- Glands for multi-core control cables.
- Provision for pad locking in “ON” & “OFF” position.
- Provision of key interlocking.
- Galvanized Nuts, bolts & all accessories for mounting on structures.
- Interlocking magnet for electrical interlocking.
- All ferrous parts shall be hot dipped galvanized after completion of machining. Galvanizing
shall be in accordance with BS-729 and ASTM A90.
- All control devices shall be suitable for operation on 110 V DC supplies from Sub-station.
- Operating mechanism shall be fully tropicalized and housed in waterproof housing.
328
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - Complete supporting steel structure.
- Isolating devices shall be accordance with IEC 62271-102. They shall be complete with
supporting steel work and installed to maintenance of any section of the sub-station plant
when the remainder is alive and shall be so located that the minimum safety clearances
are always maintained.
- The air gap between terminals of the same pole with the isolator open shall be of a length
to withstand a minimum impulse voltage wave of 115. Percent of the specified impulse
insulation rating to earth
- Isolating switches shall be designed for life operation and isolators shall be hands
operated. Where used for feeders they shall be capable of switching transformer-
magnetizing currents. Main contacts shall be of the high-pressure line type and acing
contacts.
- All feeder isolators shall be fitted with approved three phase link earthing devices,
mechanically, coupled or interlocked with the main isolator so that the earthing device and
main isolator con not be closed at the same time.
- Isolator operating mechanism shall be of robust construction, carefully fitted to ensure free
action and shall be un-effected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechanism shall be as
simple as possible and comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing parts. Approved
grease lubricating devices shall be fitted to all principal bearings. The mechanism shall be
housed in weatherproof enclosure complete with auxiliary switches, terminal blocks and
cable gland plates. All steel and malleable iron parts including the support steelwork shall
be galvanized as per BS-729 and ASTM A90.

B. Blades:
All metal parts shall be of non rusting and non corroding material. All current carrying parts
shall be made from high conductivity electrolytic copper. Bolts, screws and pins shall be
provided with lock washers. Keys or equivalent locking facilities if provided on current
carrying parts, shall be made of copper alloy. The bolts or pins used in current carrying
parts shall be made of non corroding material. All ferrous castings except current carrying
parts shall be made of malleable cast iron or cast steel. No grey iron shall be used in the
manufacture of any part of the isolator. The live parts shall be designed to eliminate sharp
joints, edges and other corona producing surfaces, where this is impracticable adequate
corona shield shall be provided. Isolators and earthing switches including their operating
parts shall be such that they cannot be dislodged from their open or closed positions by
short circuit forces, gravity, wind pressure, vibrations, shocks, or accidental touching of the
connecting rods of the operating mechanism. The switch shall be designed such that no
lubrication of any part is required except at very infrequent intervals i.e. after every 1000
operations or after 5 years whichever is earlier.
C. Base :
Each isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanised steel base provided with
holes and designed for mounting on a supporting structure.
D. Supporting Structure
All isolators and earthing switches shall be rigidly mounted in an upright position on
their own supporting structures. Details of the supporting structures shall be furnished
by the successful tenderer. The isolators should have requisite fixing details ready for
mounting them on switch structures.
7.1.7 Technical Specification of 33KV Isolator without Earth blade
7.1.7.1 General Specification:
1. Installation Outdoor
2. Type Air
3. Construction Open
4. Operation Gang
5. Operating Mechanism Manual
6. Mounting Position Vertical on supporting structure.
7. Number of Pole 3 (Three)

329
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8. Frequency 50 Hz
9. System Nominal Voltage 33 KV
10. System Maximum Voltage 36 KV
11. Basic Insulation Level 170 KV
12. Rated continuous Current 1250A
13. Rated Short Time Withstand Current 31.5 KA (3 Sec.)
14. Controling handle length of Isolator
≥400mm
operating Pipe
15. Rated 1 minute power frequency 70KV
withstand voltage, kV (rms)
16 Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation and
Performance shall be in accordance to the latest
editions of the relevant IEC standards.
A. FEATURES
- Single-Break Pattern [Vertical break or Horizontal break (centre break)], OFF load type.
- Channel type mounting base insulator, blast.
- Coupling tubes for gang operation and adjustable operating rod with insulating link and
intermediate guide for operating rod.
- Auxiliary switch, operated by the phase coupling tube, to control circuits for operating
indicators, alarms, electrical inter-locking with the respective breaker to ensure that the isolator
can only be operated when the breaker is in “OFF’ position etc. with at least 10% spare
contacts.
- Terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR Martin/ Grosbeak/ HAWK conductor as
required.
- Earthing steel pads with provision for earth lead.
- Glands for multi-core control cables.
- Provision for pad locking in “ON” & “OFF” position.
- Provision of key interlocking.
- Galvanized Nuts, bolts & all accessories for mounting on structures.
- Interlocking magnet for electrical interlocking.
- All ferrous parts shall be hot dipped galvanized after completion of machining. Galvanizing
shall be in accordance with BS-729 and ASTM A90.
- All control devices shall be suitable for operation on 110 V DC supplies from Sub-station.
- Operating mechanism shall be fully tropicalized and housed in waterproof housing.
- Complete supporting steel structure.
- Isolating devices shall be accordance with IEC 62271-102. They shall be complete with
supporting steel work and installed to maintenance of any section of the sub-station plant
when the remainder is alive and shall be so located that the minimum safety clearances
are always maintained.
- The air gap between terminals of the same pole with the isolator open shall be of a length
to withstand a minimum impulse voltage wave of 115. Percent of the specified impulse
insulation rating to earth.
- Isolating switches shall be designed for life operation and isolators shall be hands
operated. Where used for feeders they shall be capable of switching transformer-
magnetizing currents. Main contacts shall be of the high-pressure line type and acing
contacts.
- All feeder isolators shall be fitted with approved three phase link earthing devices,
mechanically, coupled or interlocked with the main isolator so that the earthing device and
main isolator con not be closed at the same time.
- Isolator operating mechanism shall be of robust construction, carefully fitted to ensure free
action and shall be un-effected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechanism shall be as
simple as possible and comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing parts. Approved
grease lubricating devices shall be fitted to all principal bearings. The mechanism shall be
housed in weatherproof enclosure complete with auxiliary switches, terminal blocks and

330
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 cable gland plates. All steel and malleable iron parts including the support steelwork shall
be galvanized as per BS-729 and ASTM A90.
B. Base :
Each isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanised steel base provided with
holes and designed for mounting on a supporting structure.

C. Supporting Structure
All isolators and earthing switches shall be rigidly mounted in an upright position on
their own supporting structures. Details of the supporting structures shall be furnished
by the successful tenderer. The isolators should have requisite fixing details ready for
mounting them on switch structures.

7.1.8 Technical Specification of 33 kV Off-Load Fused Isolator for Auxiliary

Transformer and Bus PT.

A. General :
Installation Outdoor
Type Air
Construction Open
Operation Gang
Purpose For auxiliary Transformer / Bus PT
Operating Mechanism Manual
Base Mounting Position Vertical
Number of Pole 3 (Three)
Frequency 50Hz
System Nominal Voltage 33KV
System Maximum Voltage 36KV
Continuous Current 400 A
Fuse Rating 5A
Fuse Type HRC Cartridge
Rated Short Time Withstand Current 31.5KA 3 Sec.
Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation and
Performance shall be in accordance to the latest
Standard editions of the relevant IEC standards.
Features
- Single Break Pattern [Vertical break).
- Channel type mounting base, insulator & phase coupling tube for gang operation
and adjustable operating rod with insulating link and intermediate guide for operating
rod.
- Terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR Merlin/ Grosbeak/ HAWK conductor
as required.
- Glands for multi-core control cables.
- Provision for pad locking in “ON” & “OFF” position.
- Galvanized Nuts, bolts & all accessories shall be required for mounting the isolator
on structure.
- All ferrous parts shall be hot dipped galvanized after completion of machining.
Galvanizing shall be in accordance with BS-729 and ASTM A90.
- 2 sets of spare fuse links (6 Nos.) shall be supplied with each set of isolator.
- All steel supporting structures for mounting on the structures.
- For enclosed fuses a positive mechanical indication shall be provided to indicate a
blown fuse.
- The design shall provide reasonable protection against accidental earthing by
animals or birds.
331
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - All the movable current carrying contacts shall be silver plated.
- Arcing horn if the unit is combined.
- Disconnecting blade has continuous current rating as specified.
- Isolating devices shall be accordance with IEC 62271-102. They shall be complete with
supporting steel work and installed to maintenance of any section of the sub-station plant
when the remainder is alive and shall be so located that the minimum safety clearances
are always maintained.
- The air gap between terminals of the same pole with the isolator open shall be of a
length to withstand a minimum impulse voltage wave of 115 percent of the specified
impulse insulation rating to earth.
- Isolating switches shall be designed for live operation and isolators shall be hands
operated. Where used for feeders they shall be capable of switching transformer-
magnetizing currents. Main contacts shall be of the high-pressure line type and arcing
contacts, if provided, shall be to the Engineer’s approval.
- Service conditions require that isolating switches shall remain alive and in continuous
service for periods of up to 2 years in the climatic conditions specified without
operation or maintenance. These contacts shall carry their rated load and short circuit
currents without over heating or welding and at the end of the two years period the
maximum torque required at the operating handle to open 3-phase isolator shall not
exceed 350 Nm.
- All feeder isolators shall be fitted with approved three phase link earthing devices,
mechanically, coupled or interlocked with the main isolator so that the earthing device
and main isolator con not be closed at the same time.
- Isolator operating mechanism shall be of robust construction, carefully fitted to
ensure free action and shall be un-effected by the climatic conditions at site.
Mechanism shall be as simple as possible and comprise a minimum of bearing and
wearing parts. Approved grease lubricating
- devices shall be fitted to all principal bearings. The mechanism shall be housed in
weatherproof enclosure complete with auxiliary switches, terminal blocks and cable
gland plates. All steel and malleable iron parts including the support steelwork shall
be galvanized as per BS-729 and ASTM A90.
- At least two pairs of auxiliary contacts for each isolator shall be provided.

7.1.9 Technical Specification Of 33 kV Off-Load Isolator Without Earth Blade for Bus
Section.
7.1.9.1 General

1. Installation Outdoor
2. Type Air
3. Construction Open
4. Operation Gang
5. Operating Mechanism Manual
6. Mounting Position Vertical for Bus Isolator & Horizontal for Bus Coupler
on supporting structure
7. Number of Pole 3 (Three)
8. Frequency 50 Hz
9. System Nominal Voltage 33 KV
10. System Maximum Voltage 36 KV
11. Basic Insulation Level 170 KV
12. Rated continuous Current 1250 A
13. Rated Short Time Withstand Current 31.5 KA (3 Sec.)

332
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 14 Controling handle length of Isolator ≥400mm
operating Pipe
15. Rated 1 minute power frequency 70KV
withstand voltage, kV (rms)
16 Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation and
Performance shall be in accordance to the latest
editions of the relevant IEC standards.

FEATURES
i) Single-Break Pattern [Vertical break or Horizontal break (Centre break)], OFF load type.
ii) Channel type mounting base insulator, blast.
iii) Coupling tubes for gang operation and adjustable operating rod with insulating link and
intermediate guide for operating rod.
iv) Auxiliary switch, operated by the phase coupling tube, to control circuits for operating
indicators, alarms, electrical inter-locking with the respective breaker to ensure that the isolator
can only be operated when the breaker is in “OFF’ position etc. with at least 10% spare contacts.
v) Terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR Martin/ Grosbeak conductor as required.
vi) Earthing steel pads with provision for earth lead.
vii) Glands for multi-core control cables.
viii) Provision for pad locking in “ON” & “OFF” position.
ix) Provision of key interlocking.
x) Galvanized Nuts, bolts & all accessories for mounting on structures.
xi) Interlocking magnet for electrical interlocking.
xii) All ferrous parts shall be hot dipped galvanized after completion of machining.
xiii) Galvanizing shall be in accordance with BS-729 and ASTM A90.
xiv) All control devices shall be suitable for operation on 110 V DC supplies from Sub-station.
xv) Operating mechanism shall be fully tropicalized and housed in waterproof housing.
xvi) Complete supporting steel structure.
xvii) Isolating devices shall be accordance with IEC 62271-102. They shall be complete with
supporting steel work and installed to maintenance of any section of the sub-station plant when
the remainder is alive and shall be so located that the minimum safety clearances are always
maintained.
xviii) The air gap between terminals of the same pole with the isolator open shall be of a length to
withstand a minimum impulse voltage wave of 115. Percent of the specified impulse insulation
rating to earth.
xix) Isolating switches shall be designed for life operation and isolators shall be hands operated.
Where used for feeders they shall be capable of switching transformer-magnetizing currents. Main
contacts shall be of the high-pressure line type and acing contacts. xx) Isolator operating
mechanism shall be of robust construction, carefully fitted to ensure free action and shall be un-
effected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechanism shall be as simple as possible and comprise
a minimum of bearing and wearing parts. Approved grease lubricating devices shall be fitted to all
principal bearings. The mechanism shall be housed in weatherproof enclosure complete with
auxiliary switches, terminal blocks and cable gland plates. All steel and malleable iron parts
including the support steelwork shall be galvanized as per BS-729 and ASTM A90.

INFORMATION REQUIRED
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
crucial components of all type of 33KV Isolators.
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.
c) The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall submit the list of available testing/ measuring
equipment, meters, etc., along with valid Calibration Certificate(s) from competent
authority used in manufacturer's laboratory for performing Routine Test as per
IEC standard.

333
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.1.10 11KV Off -load Isolator with Earth -blade (Not Applicable for this
tnder):

11KV Off-load Isolator with Earth-blade as specified shall be conforming to the latest
edition of the following standards for operation under local ambient conditions. Design,
Manufacture, Testing and Performance of the cable shall be in accordance with the
IEC 62271-102 or equivalent International standards.

7.1.10.1 Technical Specification of 11 kV Off-Load Isolator With Earth Blade: (Not

Applicable for this tender)
A General
1. Installation Outdoor Sub-station
2. Type Air
3. Construction Open
4. Operation Gang
5. Operating Mechanism Manual
6. Mounting Position Vertical/Horizontal
7. Number of Pole 3 (Three)
8. Frequency 50 Hz
9. System Nominal Voltage 11 KV
10. System Maximum Voltage 12 KV
11. Basic Insulation Level 75 KV
12. a) Rated Normal Current 800 A
13. Rated Short Time Withstand 31.5 KA (3 Sec.)
Current
14 Controling handle length of ≥400mm
Isolator operating Pipe
15. Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation and
Performance shall be in accordance to the latest
editions of the relevant IEC 62271-102 standards.

B FEATURES & ACCESSORIES:

(a)The line isolators shall be single break Pattern [Vertical break or Horizontal break
(centre break)] pattern off-load type with manual operating mechanism for the earth blade.
There shall be interlocking arrangement with the breaker to ensure that the Isolator can
only be operated with breaker in “OFF” position. Necessary controls, accessories and
auxiliary operating mechanism for manual operation shall be provided in water proof
outdoor boxes.

(b)The earthing device shall be gang operated & integral with the switch. The unit shall be
complete with channel type mounting base, insulators, and phases coupling tube for gang
operation and adjustable operating rod with insulating link and intermediate guide for
operating rod.

334
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (c) Auxiliary switch operated by the phase coupling tube shall be provided to control
circuits for operating devices like indicators/alarms & interlocking with 100% spare
contacts.
(d)Terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR Merlin/ Dog/ Rabit conductor as required.

(e)Earthing steel pads shall be provided with provision of earth leads.

(f) Cable glands for multi-core control/ power cables as required.

(g)There shall be provisions for pad locking in “ON” & “OFF” position.

(h) Operating Mechanism Shall be fully Tropicallized and housed in waterproof housing with
Provision of key interlocking.

(i) Mechanical interlocking between earthing device & the Isolator (With Earth switch) shall
be provided.

(j) All accessories, nuts, bolts etc. required for mounting the isolator on structure as
required shall be provided.
(k) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized after completion of machining. Galvanizing
shall be in accordance with BS-729.

(l) All control devices shall be suitable for operation from 110 Volts DC available in the control
room.

(m) Isolator and earthing devices shall be accordance with IEC 62271-102. They shall be
complete with supporting steelwork and installed to permit maintenance of any section of the
sub-station plat when the remainder is alive and shall be so located that the minimum safety
clearances are always maintained.

(n) The air gap between terminals of the same pole with the isolator open shall be of a
length to withstand a minimum impulse voltage wave of 115 percent of the specified impulse
insulation rating to earth.

o) Isolator shall be designed for live operation and isolators shall be hands operated. Where
used for feeders they shall be capable of switching transformer magnetizing currents main
contacts shall be of the high-pressure line type and acing contacts.
(o) Isolator shall be designed for live operation and isolators shall be hands operated. Where
used for feeders they shall be capable of switching transformer magnetizing currents main
contacts shall be of the high-pressure line type and acing contacts.

(m) Isolator Operating Mechanism shall be Robust Construction, Carefully Fitted to ensure
free action and shall be un-effected by the climatic condition at site Mechanism Shall be
as simple as possible and comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing Parts. Approved
grease lubricating device shall be fitted to all principal bearings. The Mechanism shall be
housed in weather proof enclosure with Auxiliary Switches, Terminal blocks and cable

335
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 gland plates. All steel and malleable iron parts including the supports steel work shall be
Galvanized as per BS-729.

(n) Diagram Plate and rating nameplate shall provide. Rating Plate and diagram plate shall
be made of Stainless Steel and have engraved letters filled with blank enamel paint
mentioning Manufacturers name, Client Name with bold, Years of Manufacturing, and
Contract No. Model No & Rating etc.

7.1.11 33KV Current Transformer

A. GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

1. Application Metering and Protection

2. Installation Outdoor.
3. Construction Sealed Tank
4. Insulation Oil
5. Number of Phase Single
6. Rated Frequency 50 Hz
7. Mounting On Supporting Structure
8. System Primary Rated Voltage 33 kV Phase to Phase
9. Maximum System Voltage 36kV Phase to Phase
10. System Earthing Effectively earthed
11. Basic Insulation Level (1.2/50  sec.) 170 kV
12. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 min. 70 kV
50 Hz).
13. A. 33 kV Line Feeder Ratio: 600-1200/5-5A
B. 10/13.33 MVA Transformer Feeder 300-600/5-5-5A
Ratio:
14. Primary Single Winding
15. Secondary Double (for line) & Triple (for power
transformer) Winding
16. Accuracy Class 0.2 for Measurement, 5P20 for
Protection.
17. Burden 30VA
18. Short Time Current Rating 31.5 kA for 3 Sec.
19. Extended Current Rating 120% of Rated Current
20. Over Current Rating < 10 A
21. Creepage Distance 25 mm/ KV (minimum)
Design, Manufacture, Testing,
Installation and Performance shall be in
22. Standard accordance to the latest editions of the
relevant IEC 61869-1, 61869-2
standards.

B. FEATURES & ACCESSORIES:

a) Current transformer shall have porcelain outdoor type bushing.
336
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 b) Terminal connectors provided, shall be suitable for ACSR Merlin/ Grosbeak
conductor as required.
c) The equipment must be tropicalized and suitable for the outdoor location.
d) Galvanized nuts, bolts and all accessories required for mounting on structure.
e) All ferrous parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after completion of machining.
Galvanizing shall be in accordance with BS-729.
f) Each terminal shall have cadmium-plated nuts and bolts.
g) Sealing/locking arrangement for the secondary terminal box shall be provided.
h) Diagram plate and rating nameplate shall be provided. Rating plate and diagram
plate shall be made of stainless steel and have engraved letters filled with blank
enamel paint mentioning manufacturer’s name, client name, year of manufacturing,
contract no & model no, rating, etc.
i) Supporting clamps, all accessories shall be provided with the CT's for installation
on supporting gantry structure for line feeders CT's.

C. INFORMATION REQUIRED
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
crucial components of 33KV Current Transformer.
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.
c) The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall submit the list of available testing/ measuring
equipment, meters, etc., along with valid Calibration Certificate(s) from competent
authority used in manufacturer's laboratory for performing Routine Test as per
IEC standard.

337
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.1. 12 Technical Specification of single phase 33KV Potential Transformer
A GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

1. Application Metering and Protection

2. Installation Outdoor
3. Insulation Oil
4. Type Voltage Induction
5. Construction Oil Tank
6. Number of Phase Singe Phase (1Set=3Nos)
7. Frequency 50 Hz
8. Mounting Mounted Supporting on Gantry Structure Mounted
9. System Primary Rated Voltage 33 kV (Phase to Phase)
10. System Primary Maximum Voltage 36 kV (Phase to Phase)
11. System Earthlings Effectively earthed
12. Basic Insulation (Impulse withstand 170 kV
Voltage)
13. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage 70 kV
14. The neutral end of primary winding, Insulated to withstand the 10 kV low
for direct connection to ground frequency test.
15. Type of Secondary Winding Double Winding
16. Transformation Ratio (33/√3)/ (0.11/√3)/ (0.11/√3) kV
17. Creepage Distance 25 mm/ kV (minimum)
18. Short Time Current Rating 31.5 kA for 3 Sec.
19. Rated Secondary Burden 50 VA
20 Voltage limit factor 1.2 continuous
21 Class of Accuracy 0.2 for metering and 3P for protection.

22 Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation

and Performance shall be in accordance
to the latest editions of the relevant IEC
61869-1, 61869-3 standards.

B FEATURES & ACCESSORIES:

a) Potential transformer shall have porcelain outdoor type bushing.

b) Terminal connectors provided, shall be suitable for ACSR Merlin/ Grosbeak/ Hawk
conductor as required.
c) The equipment must be tropicalized and suitable for the outdoor location.
d) Galvanized nuts, bolts and all accessories required for mounting on structure shall be
provided.
e) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized after completion of machining, galvanizing
shall be in accordance whether BS-729.
f) Each terminal shall have cadmium-plated nuts and bolts.
g) Each Voltage transformer is to be protected by high voltage fuse of the high rupturing
capacity cartridge type. All fuses are to be clearly identified and easily accessible.
h) Diagram plate and rating nameplate shall be provided. Rating plate and diagram plate
shall be made of stainless steel and have engraved letters filled with blank enamel
paint mentioning manufacturer’s name, client name, year of manufacturing, contract
no & model no, rating, etc.
i) Sealing/locking arrangement for the secondary terminal box shall be provided.

338
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
C INFORMATION REQUIRED
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
crucial components of 33KV Potential Transformer.
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.
c) The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall submit the list of available testing/ measuring
equipment, meters, etc., along with valid Calibration Certificate(s) from competent
authority used in manufacturer’s laboratory for performing Routine Test as per
IEC standard.
7.1.13 33 KV SINGLE PHASE LIGHTNING ARRESTER

A GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

1 Application Distribution Transformer/ Overhead Line/
Power Cable Line/ Power Transformer of
heavy duty class.
2 Type of Arrester Station Class, Metal Oxide (ZnO), Gapless
3 Construction Single Unit, gapless hermetically sealed in
with non-linear characteristics with high
energy capacity, all enclosed in housing.
4 Installation Outdoor
5 Mounting Pole Mounted steel bracket/Gantry
mounted
6 Rated Arrester Voltage (rms, Ur) 36kV
7 Continuous Operating Voltage (COV, 22- 27.5 kV
Uc)
8 System frequency 50 Hz
9 Number of Phase 1
Nominal Discharge Current (kAp) of 10 kA
10.1
8/20 micro second wave
10.2 Type of Lightning Arrester housing Polymer (Hydrophobic silicon)
10.3 Power Frequency withstands voltage ≥ 70 kV (Dry & wet)
of Lightning Arrester Housing, Dry &
Wet.
11 Impulse Withstand Voltage of ≥170 kV (peak)
Lightning Arrester Housing.
12 Lightning Impulse Residual Voltage
100 or better
(8/20 micro-second wave)
13 Steep Current Impulse Residual
Voltage at 10kA for 1 micro-second 110 or better
front time.
14 High Current Impulse Withstand Value
100 or better
(4/10 micro-second)
15 Minimum Energy Discharge capability 5
(kJ/kVr) at rated voltage.
16 Line Discharge Class 3
17 Creepage distance (minimum) 31 mm/ kV
18 Leakage current at rated voltage ≤1 mA
19 Partial Discharge (pico-coulomb) Not exceeding 10 pC
when energized at 1.05 times its
continuous operating voltage.

339
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
CONSTRUCTION:
Lightning arresters shall be gapless type described briefly as follows:
Gap less Arresters shall have elements of zinc oxide to perform both the surge discharge and
power frequency reseal functions. ZnO arrester shall have excellent thermal stability for high
energy surges, external pollution & temporary over voltage. Zinc oxide elements block RMS
value should be minimum 3kV.

INSULATORS

The housing insulator of Lightning Arrester shall be Polymer (Hydrophobic silicon). The
insulator sheds shall be designed to minimize the trapping of contamination and shall have a
high Creepage distance (minimum 31mm/kV) and a high dielectric strength, as specified in
article above. Also, the minimum aerial distance between contact terminals to ground shall
be 25 inch (635mm) for 33kV.
CONNECTORS
The Line lead and earthing terminal with clamps shall be provided, suitable to accommodate
AAC/ ACSR/ Copper Conductor of diameter from 10.0mm to 15 mm. The necessary
connecting wire (5meter for each LA) for the connection of each Lightening arrester to surge
counter shall also be included in the scope of supply.

NAMEPLATE

Information required for identification must be embossed on a stainless steel nameplate firmly
fixed to the arrester and shall include:
a. Designation of arrester (Arrester classification)
b. Continuous operating voltage
c. Rated voltage
d. Nominal discharge current
e. Rated short-circuit current in kiloamperes (ka).
f. The manufacturer's name or trade mark, type, model and identification number of
the complete arrester
g. Identification of the assembling position of the unit (for multi-unit arresters only)
h. The year of manufacture
i. Contract Number.

SURGE COUNTER
Tenderer shall supply surge counter/Monitor for each phase of the surge arrester. It
shall be integrated into the arrester ground connection and counts the surge arrester
responses that have occurred. Surge counter with leakage current meter shall also
offer monitoring of arrester leakage current. The surge counter shall be analog or
digital type. Surge arrester shall have suitable earth terminal to connect surge counter
with insulated cable.
B. FEATURES :
- The Arrester shall be Zno type, basically consisting of gapless hermetically sealed in
with non-liner volt-ampere characteristics with high-energy capacity. The Earthing
terminal with clamp shall be suitable to accommodate Copper conductor of diameter
from 5mm to 10mm.
- Terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR Merlin/ Grosbeak conductor as
required.
- Zno Arrester with Pressure Relief Device (PRD) shall be of excellent thermal stability
for high-energy surges, external pollution & temporary over voltage.
340
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - Leakage Current Detector with Operation counter on each unit shall be provided to
indicate number of operation on account of lightning of switching surges at man eye
height.
- Identification marks on each separately housed unit shall be provided to enable it to
be replaced in current position after a multi-unit Arrester has been dismantled.
- All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be cadmium plated.
- Each Arrester shall have lattice type steel, structures & shall be of sufficient high to co-
ordinate with the sub-station equipment/material supplied. Each support shall be
complete in all respect.
- Arresters with PDR features shall be housed in porcelain containers sealed against
the entry of moisture and oxygen and free of influence of moisture and weather
condition.
- Each single pole Arrester shall be furnished with a rating plate; the elements shall also
have an individual rating plate. The rating plate shall indicate the main characteristics
of the Arrester. The rating plate making shall be in English..
- The height of the lightning Arresters and supports shall be coordinated with associated
sub-station equipment.
- The connecting cable (connecting lead) from LA to surge monitor of sufficient
length shall be provided and the connecting lead shall be insulated copper cable
of minimum 95mm2 size.
- The station class surge arresters shall be complete with fittings suitable for mounting
in a vertical position on mild steel channels
C INFORMATION REQUIRED
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
crucial components of 33KV Lightening Arrester.
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.
c) The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall submit the list of available testing/ measuring
equipment, meters, etc., along with valid Calibration Certificate(s) from competent
authority used in manufacturer's laboratory for performing Routine Test as per
IEC standard.

TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES & REPORTS:

FOR 33KV SURGE ARRESTER (LA):

Type Test Certificates & Reports for offered type similar or higher Ampere rating Surge
Arrester (LA) for same voltage class from any short-circuit testing liaison (STL) Member
[http://www.stl-liaison.org/web /03_Members.php] Testing Organization or Laboratory
as per relevant IEC standard. The type test report along with results shall include at least the
following tests :
a) Insulation Withstand tests on the Arrester housing;
b) Step Current Impulse Residual Voltage test;
c) Lightning Impulse Residual Voltage test;
d) Long Duration Current Impulse withstand test;
e) High Current Impulse operating duty test;
f) Power Frequency voltage versus time curve;
g) Partial Discharge test.

341
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.1. 14 11KV SINGLE PHASE LIGHTNING ARRESTER
A GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

1 Application Distribution Transformer/ Overhead Line/

Power Cable Line/ Power Transformer of
heavy duty class.
2 Type of Arrester Station Class,Metal Oxide (ZnO), Gapless
3 Construction Single Unit, gapless hermetically sealed in
with non-linear characteristics with high
energy capacity, all enclosed in housing.
4 Installation Outdoor
5 Mounting Pole Mounted steel bracket
6 Rated Arrester Voltage (rms, Ur) 9kV
7 Continuous Operating Voltage (COV, 8- 10 kV
Uc)
8 Number of Phase 1
9 System frequency 50 Hz
Nominal Discharge Current (kAp) of 10 kA
10.1
8/20 micro second wave
10.2 Type of Lightning Arrester housing Polymer(Hydrophobic silicon)
10.3 Core Technology Open Cage Polymeric
10.4 Power Frequency withstands voltage of ≥ 35 kV (Dry & Wet)
Lightning Arrester Housing, Dry & Wet.
11 Impulse Withstand Voltage of Lightning ≥75 kV (peak)
Arrester Housing.
12 Lightning Impulse Residual Voltage
35 kV (peak)
(8/20 micro-second wave)
13 High Current Impulse Withstand Value
65 kV (peak)
(4/10 micro-second)
14 Creepage distance (minimum) 25 mm/ kV
15 Partial Discharge (pico-coulomb) when Not exceeding 10 pC
energized at 1.05 times its continuous
operating voltage.

NAMEPLATE

Information required for identification must be embossed on a stainless steel nameplate firmly
fixed to the arrester and shall include:
a. Designation of arrester (Arrester classification)
b. Continuous operating voltage
c. Rated voltage
d. Nominal discharge current
e. Rated short-circuit current in kiloamperes (ka).
f. The manufacturer's name or trade mark, type, model and identification number of
the complete arrester
342
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 g. Identification of the assembling position of the unit (for multi-unit arresters only)
h. The year of manufacture
i. Contract Number.

A. FEATURES :
- The Arrester shall be Zno type, basically consisting of gapless hermetically
sealed in with non-liner volt-ampere characteristics with high-energy capacity.
The Earthing terminal with clamp shall be suitable to accommodate
AAC/ACSR/Copper conductor of diameter from 5.0mm to 10.0mm.
- Terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR Merlin/ Grosbeak conductor as
required.
- Zno Arrester shall be excellent thermal stability for high-energy surges, external
pollution & temporary over voltage.
- Identification marks on each separately housed unit shall be provided to enable
it to be replaced in current position after a multi-unit Arrester has been
dismantled.
- All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be cadmium plated.
- Arresters shall be housed in Polymer(Hydrophobic silicon) containers sealed
against the entry of moisture and oxygen and free of influence of moisture and
weather condition.
- Each single pole Arrester shall be furnished with a rating plate; the elements
shall also have an individual rating plate. The rating plate shall indicate the main
characteristics of the Arrester.The rating plate making shall be in English.
- The height of the lightning Arresters and supports shall be coordinated with
associated sub-station equipment.
- The connecting cable (connecting lead) from LA to surge monitor shall be
provided and the connecting lead shall be insulated copper cable of minimum
16mm2 size.
- The station class surge arresters shall be complete with fittings suitable
for mounting in a vertical position on mild steel channels

C INFORMATION REQUIRED
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
crucial components of 11KV Lightening Arrester.
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.

TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES & REPORTS:

FOR 11KV SURGE ARRESTER (LA):

Type Test Certificates & Reports for offered type similar or higher Ampere rating Surge
Arrester (LA) for same voltage class from any short-circuit testing liaison (STL) Member
[http://www.stl-liaison.org/web /03_Members.php] Testing Organization or Laboratory
as per relevant IEC standard. The type test report along with results shall include at least the
following tests :
a) Insulation Withstand tests on the Arrester housing;
b) Step Current Impulse Residual Voltage test;
c) Lightning Impulse Residual Voltage test;
343
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 d) Long Duration Current Impulse withstand test;
e) High Current Impulse operating duty test;
f) Power Frequency voltage versus time curve;
g) Partial Discharge test.

7.1. 15 Substation Battery

7.1. 15.1 Battery

7.1.15.1.1 General

Batteries shall be located in separate mechanically ventilated rooms, which will be provided
with sinks and water supplies. Storage facilities will be provided for electrolyte, distilled water
and maintenance equipment.

The voltage measured at the main distribution switchgear shall not vary by more than plus 10
percent or minus 20 percent of the nominal voltage under all charging conditions when
operating in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

The complete equipment shall preferably be a manufacturer’s standard but any departure from
this Specification shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

7.1. 15.1.2 Type of Battery

The battery shall be of the high performance Nickel Cadmium pocket plate type complying
with IEC 60623 and shall be designed for a life expectancy of 25 years.

Battery cases shall be of high impact translucent plastic or annealed glass and shall be
indelibly marked with maximum and minimum electrolyte levels. The design of the battery
shall permit the free discharge of the gases produced during the normal operating cycle, whilst
excluding dust. Spray arresters shall be included.
The electrolyte shall be free from impurities and the Potassium Hydroxide used shall comply
with BS 5634. Dilution of the alkaline electrolyte and topping up of cells shall be carried out
using distilled water only.

A complete set of test and maintenance accessories, suitably boxed, shall be provided for
each battery. A syringe hydrometer and a durable instruction card shall be included in each
set.

Cells shall be numbered consecutively and terminal cells marked to indicate polarity.

Cells shall be permanently marked with the following information:

- Manufacturer's reference number and code

- Year and month of manufacture
- Voltage and nominal capacity at the 5 hour discharge rate

The electrolyte capacity and general design of the cells shall be such that inspection and
maintenance, including topping up of the electrolyte, shall be at intervals of not less than
twelve months.

344
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.1. 15.1.3 Initial Charge and Test Discharge

The initial charge, test discharge and subsequent re-charge of the battery must be carried out
under continuous supervision. Resistors, instruments, leads, and the other apparatus will be
necessary for the initial charge, test discharge and subsequent recharge of the battery.

7.1. 15.1.4 Battery Duty

The battery shall have sufficient capacity to supply the following continuous and intermittent
loads for the periods specified, with the chargers out of service.
Standing DC loading for protection, control, indications and alarms for 10 hours. This loading
shall be determined from all equipment to be supplied on this Contract. In addition the future
circuit requirements estimated on the same basis as the present requirements.

At the end of 10 hours the battery shall have sufficient capacity to complete the operations
listed below, at the end of which duty the system voltage shall not have dropped below 90
percent of the nominal voltage with the standing loads, specified above, connected.

1. Two closing operations on all circuit breakers (including future) supplied by the battery.

2. Two tripping operations on all circuit breakers (including future) supplied by the battery.
Where busbar protection is provided, it shall be assumed that all circuit breakers in any
one busbar protection zone trip simultaneously.

3. Charging of DC motor wound circuit breaker closing springs (where applicable) to enable
the closing operations to be carried out.
4. At the end of these duties, the battery voltage shall not have dropped such that the voltage
at the battery terminals falls below 90% of the nominal system voltage when supplying the
standing load.
5. In addition, the voltages at the terminals of all components in the system (eg. relays, trip
and closing coils) shall not be outside of the individual voltage limits applying to them.
6. A margin of 10 % shall be allowed for derating of this battery over its life time.

All quantities derived in this manner shall be quoted in the Bid, but shall not be used for
ordering materials until specifically approved by the Engineer. Detailed calculations, and
loading characteristics on which these are based, shall be submitted to the Engineer at an
early stage.

7.1. 15.1.5 Location of Batteries

The batteries shall be housed in a ventilated battery room. The charging equipment and
distribution switchboards shall be housed in a separate room.

The floor of the battery room shall be coated with a suitable electrolyte resistant
protective coating. The floor shall be fitted with a drain and shall have sufficient slope
to prevent any major electrolyte spillages from entering into other areas.

No ducts or any other items shall penetrate the floor or create a means whereby spillage can
drain away apart from the drain provided for this purpose.

The ventilation fans and lamps in battery room shall be an explosion proof type.

345
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.1. 15.1.6 Battery mounting connections and accessories

Batteries shall be placed on timber boards mounted in double tiers on steel stands of robust
construction and treated with acid resisting enamel or gloss paint to BS 381C No.361. The
cells shall be arranged so that each cell is readily accessible for inspection and maintenance
and it shall be possible to remove any one cell without disturbing the remaining cells. The
stands shall be mounted on insulators and be so dimensioned that the bottom of the lower tier
is not less than 300mm above the floor.

Alternatively, batteries may be mounted in a similar manner on treated hardwood stands.

Batteries shall be supplied and erected complete with all necessary connections and cabling.
Connections between tiers, between end cells and between porcelain wall bushings shall be
by PVC cables arranged on suitable racking or supports. Before jointing, joint faces shall be
bright metal, free from dirt, and shall be protected by a coating of petroleum jelly. Terminal
and intercell connections shall be of high conductivity corrosion free material.
Cartridge fuses shall be provided in both positive and negative leads, positioned as close to
the battery as possible and shall be rated for at least three times the maximum battery
discharge current at the highest operating voltage. The two fuses shall be mounted on
opposite ends of the battery stand or rack in an approved manner. These fuse links shall
comply with BS 88 Clause DC. 40 and shall be bolted in position without carriers.

Warning labels shall be fitted to warn personnel of the danger of removing or replacing a fuse
whilst the load is connected and that fuses should not be removed immediately following boost
charge due to the possible ignition of hydrogen gas.

Fuses between the battery and charger shall be located adjacent to the battery in a similar
manner to that described above. A warning label shall be placed on the charging equipment
indicating the location of these fuses and the fact that they should be removed to isolate the
charger from the battery.

It shall not be possible to leave the battery disconnected (by means of switches or removal or
operation of fuses) without some local and remote indication that such a state exists.
One set of miscellaneous equipment, including two syringe hydrometers, one cell-testing
voltmeter, two cell-bridging connectors, two electrolyte-pouring funnels, two electrolyte
thermometers, battery instruction card for wall mounting, electrolyte airtight containers, labels,
tools and other items necessary for the erection and correct functioning and maintenance of
the equipment, shall be provided for each station.

7.1. 16 Battery Charger

7.1.16.1 General:

Each battery charging equipment shall comply with the requirements of BS 4417 (IEC 146),
shall be of the thyristor controlled automatic constant voltage type with current limit facilities
and shall be suitable for supplying the normal constant load, at the same time maintaining the
battery to which it is connected in a fully charged condition. All equipment shall be naturally
ventilated.

346
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
All the equipment for each charger shall be contained in a separate ventilated steel cubicle.
The charger cubicles shall normally be mounted immediately adjacent to the DC distribution
panel to form a board and shall be of matching design colour and appearance.

Where their ratings permit, chargers shall preferably be designed for operation from a
single-phase AC auxiliary supply with a nominal voltage of 230 V. Otherwise a three phase
400V supply may be utilised. Chargers shall maintain the float charge automatically for all DC
loads between 0 and 100%, irrespective of variations in the voltage of the ac supply within the
following limits :

- Frequency variation : 47 to 51 Hz.

- Voltage variation : ± 15%

The mains transformer shall be of a suitable rating and design. Clearly marked off-circuit
tappings shall be provided on the primary windings and change of tapping shall be by means
of easily accessible links. The transformer shall be of the natural air-cooled type capable of
operating continuously at full load on any tapping with the maximum specified ambient
temperature.

All rectifiers and semi-conducting devices employed in the charger shall be of the silicon type.
They shall be adequately rated, with due regard to air temperature within the charger
enclosure, for the maximum ambient temperature.

The rating of the charger on float charge shall be equal to the normal battery standing load
plus the recommended finishing charge rate for the battery.

Each charger shall also incorporate a boost charge feature which shall, after having been
started, provide an automatically controlled high charge rate sufficient to restore a fully
discharged battery to the fully charged state within the shortest possible time without
excessive gassing or any form of damage to the battery. The boost charge shall be initiated
manually or automatically upon detection of a significant battery discharge. An adjustable
timer shall be provided to automatically switch the charger to the float condition after the
correct recharge period.

Should the AC supply fail while a battery is on boost charge, the switching arrangements shall
automatically revert the charger to float charge status and then reconnect the battery to the
distribution board.
The output voltage regulator shall be adjustable for both float and boost charge modes, within
limits approved by the Engineer, by means of clearly marked controls located inside the
cubicle.
Although it is not intended that the charger be operated with the battery disconnected, the
design of the charger shall be such that with the battery disconnected the charger will maintain
the system voltage without any damage to itself and with a ripple voltage no greater than 2.0%
rms of the nominal output voltage.

The charger shall automatically adjust the charging current from a value not less than the
battery capacity divided by 10 hours to a minimum value of not more than the battery capacity
divided by 200 hours. The charging circuitry shall be so designed that the failure of any
component will not give a situation which will cause permanent damage to the battery by over
charging.

Each charger shall have a float charge maximum current rating sufficient to meet the total
standing load current on the dc distribution board plus a battery charging current equal
numerically to 7% of the battery capacity at the 10 hour rate.

347
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Each charger shall be designed with a performance on float charge such that with the output
voltage set at approximately 1.45 V per cell at 50% load and rated input voltage and frequency,
the output voltage shall not vary by more than plus 3% to minus 2% with any combination of
input supply voltage and frequency variation as stipulated in this Specification and output
current variation from 0-100% of rating.

Each charger shall be suitable for operating alone or in parallel with the other charger. When
operating with both chargers, one charger shall be arranged to supply the standing load with
the second charger in the quiescent standby mode.

Each charger shall also have a taper characteristic boost charging facility which shall be
selectable by a float/boost charge selection switch and which will give boost charging of 1.60
volts per cell.

Each charger shall be designed with a performance on boost charge such that with rated input
voltage and frequency the charger output shall not be less than its rating in Watts at 1.3 V and
1.6 V per cell, and also the output voltage shall be 1.60 per cell over an output range of
0 - 100% of rating.

The boost charging equipment shall be capable of recharging the battery within six hours
following a one hour discharge period.

In the event of the battery becoming discharged during an AC supply failure, the rate at which
recharging commences shall be as high as possible consistent with maintaining the automatic
charging constant voltage feature and with the connections remaining undisturbed as for
normal service.

The charger shall have an automatic boost/quick charge feature, which shall operate upon
detection of a significant battery discharge. When, after a mains failure, the AC supply voltage
returns and the battery have been significantly discharged, the charger will operate in current
limit. If the current limit lasts for more than a specified time and the charging current does not
fall back to float level, the automatic high rate charge shall be activated.

An override selector switch shall be provided inside the charger unit to enable a first
conditioning charge to be made, in line with the battery manufacturer’s recommendations, for
batteries which are shipped dry and require forming at site.

A blocking diode unit shall be incorporated in the output circuit of each charger to limit the load
voltage during boost charging of the battery. The diode unit shall not be in service in the
normal float charging mode. Should the stabiliser fail in the boost charging mode, the charger
shall automatically revert to the float mode.

An anti-parallelling diode shall be provided in each positive feed to the DC distribution board
to prevent faults on one supply affecting the other. These diodes shall be continuously rated
to carry the maximum possible discharge current likely to occur in service and a safety factor
of 4 shall be used to determine the repetitive peak reverse voltage rating. The I2t rating of the
diodes shall be such that in the event of a DC short circuit, no damage to the diodes shall
result.

Each charger shall be capable of sustaining, without damage to itself, a continuous permanent
short circuit across its output terminals. The use of fuses, MCBs or other similar devices will
not be acceptable in meeting this requirement.

348
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Suitable relays shall be provided for each charger to detect failure of the incoming supply and
failure of the DC output when in float charge mode. These relays shall operate appropriate
indicating lamps on the respective charger front panel and shall have additional voltage free
contacts for operating remote and supervisory alarms. These alarms shall be immune from
normal supply fluctuations and shall not be initiated when any one charger is taken out of
service.

The charger shall also be fitted with a device to de-energise the charger in the event of a DC
output float over voltage.

Each charger shall be provided, as a minimum, with the following instrumentation, indication
and alarm facilities:-

-Indicating lamps for the AC supply to the rectifier and DC supply from the rectifier.
- Indicating lamps for float and boost charging operations.
- Voltmeter - Input voltage.
- Voltmeter - Output voltage.
- Ammeter - Output current.
- Alarm - Charger failure.
- Alarm - Mains failure.

The following battery alarms shall also be provided:

- Battery fuse failure
- Diode assembly failure
- Battery circuit faulty
- Low DC volts
- High AC volts
- Earth fault +ve
- Earth fault -ve

Lamp test facilities shall be included.

A “charger faulty” alarm for each charger and a “battery faulty” alarm shall be provided in the
substation control room and to the SCADA system where applicable.

Each battery charger shall be equipped with charge fail detection equipment to give local
indication and remote alarm if the voltage from the charger falls below a preset level which will
be lower than the nominal float charge voltage. Suitable blocking diodes shall be provided to
prevent the battery voltage being supplied to the equipment and so prevent charge fail
detection.
The device shall not operate on switching surges or transient loss of voltage due to faults on
the AC system. The voltage at which the alarm operates shall be adjustable for operation over
a range to be approved by the Engineer.
Each charger shall be equipped with a switch-fuse for the incoming AC supply and an off load
isolator for the DC output. An additional Ammeter for input current measurement shall be
provided with the charger.

Bidders shall include particulars with their Bid on the method of adjustment included to
compensate for ageing rectifier elements. The construction of the charger shall be such that
access to all components is readily available for maintenance removal or replacement. Internal
panels used for mounting equipment shall be on swing frames to allow for access to the
charger interior.

7.1. 16.2 Earthing Screen

349
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Earthed screens shall be provided to protect the equipment from direct lightning strikes. The
screens shall be of aluminium clad steel wires of not less than 50 sq.mm. total section, and
connected to provide low impedance paths to earth.
The layout of the earth wires shall be such that equipment to be protected generally lies within
areas bounded by two or more conductors, in which case the protected angle shall not exceed
45 degree centigrade. Where equipment is protected by a single earth wire, the protective
angle shall not exceed 35 degree centigrade to the vertical.

The earth screens shall be suitable for extension to protect the substation equipment to be
installed in future stages of development.

Connections shall be made of copper strip of 30mm x 5mm cross section between the
overhead earthed screen wire and the main substation earthing system at each support unless
the galvanized steel support structure has sufficient area and current carrying capacity.

Earth wires shall be held in clamps with free pin type joints between clamps and supports.

Connections shall be provided for the terminations of the earth wires of the overhead lines,
including bimetal connectors where necessary.

The design of all structures shall generally comply with the specification and in addition is to
ensure that in the event of breakage of one earth wire, the Factor of Safety is not less than
1.5.

7.1. 16.3 INFORMATION REQUIRED

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
crucial components of Battery and Battrey charger.
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.

7.1.17 GROUNDING MATERIAL

The grounding wire shall be 125mm2 stranded copper conductor. All nuts & bolts shall be
cadmium plated. The washers shall be sine plated.
All clamps contort shall be of 25mmx 4mm copper.
All clamps connectors shall be of quality manufacturer such as Burnaby or equal.
Connector to equipment shall be by bare copper cable/flexible copper braid as required.
The grounding copper electrode shall be 16 mm Dia. And each 4 meter length.

7.1. 18 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 33kV DISC INSULATOR WITH FITTINGS

7.1. 18 .1 STANDARDS:
These 33 kV Disc Insulator with Fitt ings specified in this Sect ion shallconf orm
to the latest edit ion of the following standards for operation in overhead lines in air
under local ambient conditions. Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance shall be in
accordance with latest revisions of BS, IEC standards as listed below or other equivalent
internationally acceptable Standards:
IEC-120 : Ball & Socket Coupling.
IEC-305 : Characteristics of String Insulator Unit.
IEC-383 : Insulator Tests.
IEC-437 : Radio Interference Tests.
IEC-506 : Switching Impulse Tests.
IEC-575 : Thermal Mechanical Performance Tests.
350
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 BS-137 : Method of test & requirements.
BS-916 : Bolts, Screws & Nuts.
7.1. 18 .2 SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Specification of Disc Insulator:

These 33 kV Disc Insulators shall be designed as per above standards for operation
in overhead lines in air under local ambient conditions.
1. Installation Overhead line for suspension or
termination.
2. Nominal System Voltage, kV 33 (line to line).
3. Type of System Three phase, 50 Hz, Three Wire,
Effectively earthed.
4. Highest System Voltage, kV 36 (three phase).
5. Atmospheric Condition Moderately polluted.
6. Altitude, meter 0-300 above sea level.
7. Maximum Ambient Temperature, ºC 45.

8. Insulator Material The Insulator shall be made of good

commercial grade wet process
porcelain. The porcelain shall be
sound, thoroughly vitrified and free
from defects and blemishes that
might adversely affect the life of the
Insulator. The exposed parts of the
porcelain shall be smoothly glazed
and shall be brown in color unless
otherwise specified.
9. Type of Insulator Ball & Socket type Disc, security clip
made of Stainless Steel or Phosphor
Bronze.
10. Markings Each Insulator shall be marked with
the name of Trade Mark of the
manufacturer, the type of Insulator
and the year of manufacture. These
markings shall be legible and
indelible.
11. Maximum Nominal Diameter 255
of Insulator, mm
12. Nominal Spacing, mm 146

13. Minimum Nominal Creepage 292

Distance, mm
14. Coupling Size, mm 16
15. WITHSTAND VOLTAGE, MINIMUM
15.1 Power Frequency, dry 70
(one minute), kV
15.2 Power Frequency, wet 40
(one minute), kV
15.3 Impulse 1.2x50 micro-sec wave, 170
kVp

16. FLASHOVER VOLTAGE,

MINIMUM
16.1 78
351
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 16.2 Power Frequency, dry, kV 45
16.3 Power Frequency, wet, kV 180
50% Impulse 1.2x50 micro-sec
16.4 wave, positive, kVp 185
50% Impulse 1.2x50 micro-sec
wave, negative, kVp

17. POWER FREQUENCY PUNCTURE 110

VOLTAGE MINIMUM, kV

18. RADIO-INFLUENCE VOLTAGE

DATA MINIMUM:
18.1 Power Frequency Test Voltage, 10
RMS to Ground, kV
18.2 Maximum RIV at 1000 KC Micro-volt 50

19. MECHANICAL FAILING LOAD 70

MINIMUM, kN

B. Specification of 33 kV Strain Insulator String Set:

33 KV Strain Insulator String Set consisting of the following component parts for each set.
Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance shall be in accordance with latest revisions
of BS-3288 or other equivalent internationally acceptable Standards.

1. Anchor Shackle Made of forged steel galvanized complete with cotter bolt
and Pin, UTS-6800 Kg, Galvanization as per BS-729 OR
ASTM A-153 part 1 or ASTM A-153.
2. Ball Eye Oval eye type, made of forged steel galvanized, UTS-
6800 Kg, Galvanization as per BS- 729 part 1 or ASTM
A-153.
3. Socket Eye Made of malleable iron galvanized complete with cotter
bolt and Pin, UTS-6800 Kg, Galvanization as per BS- 729
part 1 or ASTM A-153.

4. Strain Clamp Bolted type, Made of malleable iron galvanized or

Alluminium Alloy, suitable for accommodating ACSR
GROSBEAK of overall diameter 25.15 mm, complete
with bolts, nuts, washers, Alluminium Alloy liner etc.,
UTS-6800 Kg, Galvanization as per BS- 729 part 1 or
ASTM A-153 in case of malleable iron or other ferrous
metal.
5. Disc Insulator 3 (Three) Nos. are required for each set.

7.1. 18 .3 INFORMATION REQUIRED:

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
offered Disc insulator.
b) Detail dimensional drawings of offered Disc insulators and Disc Fittings.
c) Detail description of testing facilities (Routine & Type Test) at manufacturer's
plant.

352
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.1.19 H-Type Connectors

7.1.19.1 STANDARDS:
The H-Type Connect ors as specif ied in t his Section shallconf orm to the latest
edit ion of the following standards for operation in overhead lines in air under local ambient
conditions. Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance of the H-Type Connector shall
be in accordance with the BS-3288 Part-1 &BS-4579 Part 3 or equivalent International
standards.

7.1.19 .2 SPECIFICATIONS:
The H-Type Connect ors will be used for connecting the ACSR Conductors to ACSR
Conductors, AAC Conductors to AAC Conductors and Copper Conductors to AAC conductors.
These should be Uni-metal or Bi-metal type according to the contractions and applications of
such connectors.

These should be made from high conductivity Aluminium and pre-filled with oxide inhabiting
compound. The design of the compression type connectors should be such that galvanic
corrosion is minimised. Conductor rough & tooling shall be clearly joined on the connectors.

The connector must have at least the same conductance as the conductor for which it is
intended to be used and shall carry the full continuous current rating of the conductor size they
are designed for.

The original quality of contacts shall be maintained through out the service life of the
connectors. Glow discharge and radio interference must be reduced to a minimum level.All
compression type connectors shall be suitable for installation, using either manual or hydraulic
compression tools.

The size of the connectors for different Conductors is as follows:

Grove A Grove B
Max Min Max Min Length in
(mm2) (mm2) (mm2) (mm2) mm
ACSR 400 350 400 350 150.00
GROSBEAK/ACSR
GROSBEAK
ACSR MERLIN/ACSR 185 150 185 150 112.00
MERLIN
ACSR DOG/ ACSR 120 95 120 95 63.00
DOG
AAC WASP/ AAC 120 95 120 95 63.00
WASP
AAC ANT/ AAC ANT 70 50 70 50 47.00
AAC WASP / Service 120 95 35 16 63.00
Bail
AAC ANT /Service Bail 70 50 35 16 47.00

INFORMATION REQUIRED:

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information. Besides
these, the following information has to be submitted:
353
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
offered Accessories.
b) Dimensional drawing of offered Accessories.
c) Detail description of testing facilities at manufacturer's plant.

7.1. 20 SHIELD WIRES:

1. Installation Sub-station
2. Type Stranded
3. Material High Strength Steel
4. Nominal Size 9.525 mm
5. Number of Strand 7 (Seven)
6. Diameter of Each Strand 3.05 mm
7. Overall Diameter 9.525 mm
8. Weight per KM Length 407 Kg
9. Rated Ultimate Tensile Strength 4,900 Kg/mm2
10. Class of Zinc Coating Class-A
11. Galvanization As per BS-729 OR ASTM A-153
12. Grade of Steel 60,000 Kg
14. Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation and
Performance shall be in accordance to the latest
editions of the relevant IEC standards.

A. FEATURES
- Wires shall be shipped on standard non-returnable wooden reels Gross weight shall
not exceed 800 Kg per reel. The minimum length of wire per reel shall be 1500 M.
- Each reel shall have the following information stenciled on side size and kind of
conductor, length of conductor, gross and net weight. No joints of any kind shall be
made in the finished wire entering into the construction of strand.
- The diameter of each zinc coated wire forming the strand shall not differ from the
diameter specified by more than plus or minus 0.01 mm.
- The strand shall have a left hand lay with a uniform pitch of not more than 16 times the
normal dia. of the strand.
B. PACKING AND SHIPPING
Grounding wire reels shall be constructed sufficiently strong to withstand usual
requirement shipping, transporting and field erection.

C. HARDWARE FOR SHIELD WIRE

i) Angular 900 bolted type T-connector of malleable iron galvanized steel or aluminum
alloy suitable for 9.525 mm dia, 7/3.05 mm stranded high strength galvanized steel
wire run to 9.525 diameter, 7/3.05 mm stranded high strength galvanized steel wire
tap.

ii) Angular 450 bolted type clamp made of aluminum alloy suitable for 9.525 mm diameter,
7/3.05 mm stranded high strength galvanized steel wire run to 9.525 mm diameter
7/3.05 mm stranded galvanized steel wire tap.

iii) Shield wire clamp set suitable for 9.525 mm diameter 7/3.05mm stranded high strength
galvanized steel wire, comprising of the followings :

a) Bolted wire strain clamp made of malleable iron galvanized steel or aluminum alloy
complete with nuts bolts washers etc. anchor shackle made of forged steel
galvanized complete with cotter bolt and pins.
354
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 b) Double eye rectangular made of forget galvanized.
c) Wire clip made of malleable iron galvanized or aluminum alloy.

7.1. 21 PG Clamp:
7.1. 21 .1 STANDARDS:

The PG Clamps as specified in this Sect ion shallconform to t he latest edition

of the following standards for operation in overhead lines in air under local ambient
conditions. Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance of the PG Clamp shall be in
accordance with the BS-3288 Part-1 &BS-4579 Part 3 or equivalent International standards.

7.1. 21 .2 SPECIFICATIONS:

The PG Clamps will be used for connecting the ACSR Conductors to ACSR Conductors
and AAC Conductors to AAC Conductors. Parallel Groove Clamp, a non tension bolted type
connector, shall be made of Aluminium Alloy, massively designed body. The bolts are made
of Galvanised Steel. For the insulated conductors, 0.80 mm thick PVC insulation cover is to
be provided with full length clamp.

The clamps must have at least the same conductance as the conductor for which it is intended
to be used and shall carry the full continuous current rating of the conductor size they are
designed for.

The original quality of contacts shall be maintained through out the service life of the clamps.
Glow discharge and radio interference must be reduced to a minimum level.

The size of the connectors for different Clamps is as follows:

Conductor Conductor Dimension No. of

Size Diameter L W Bolt
(sq. mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

ACSR 370 25.15 125 50 3

GROSBEAK,
either side
ACSR MERLIN, 170 17.35 110 45 3
either side
ACSR DOG, either 100 14.15 95 30 2
side
ACSR RABBIT, 50 10.05 80 22 2
either side
AAC WASP, either 100 13.17 95 30 2
side

Information Required

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
offered Accessories.
b) Dimensional drawing of offered Accessories.

355
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 c) Detail description of testing facilities at manufacturer's plant.

7.1. 22 LV AC Distribution Panel

Vermin and dust proof, completely metal enclosed by sheet steel (11 SWG) with necessary
reinforcement, colour, Grey with appropriate spray painting, free standing type, compact in
size, suitable for opening at the back by hinged door with locking device.

There shall be a 3 phase 400 A, 1 KV bus (Cu) arrangement with neutral. Bus being connected
with the following MCCB's and instrument. :

Voltmeter with 6-position selector switch connected to the bus.

2  400A, 4 pole MCCB being interlocked with each other, operative one at a time to bring the
input Power to the Bus. Both these incoming feeders shall have 3 x ammeter (each).

2  100A, 3 pole MCCB as outgoing.

10  60A, 3 pole MCCB as outgoing.
10  30A, 3 pole MCCB as outgoing.

The Short Circuit Current rating of each 3 phase MCB and MCCB shall be of at least 36 kA
and that for 1 phase shall be at least 10 kA.
All MCCB's are provided with over load setting and short circuit tripping device.

There shall be a 3-φ 4-wire class 0.5 energy meter for recording the station use.

Necessary terminal blocks and glands/openings shall be provided for the entry of suitable
cables.

All equipment/instruments inside the panel shall be arranged neatly and sufficient space shall
be provided for easy approach to each equipment/instrument.

Thermostat controled panel heater, bulb for inside illumination of panel shall be provided.

All other features as stated in the table of guaranteed data schedule shall applicable also.

AC panel dimensions are subject to approval from NESCO.

7.1.23 DC Distribution Panel

The switchboard shall comply with the requirements of BS 5468 (IEC 60947:2021 SER)
The distribution switchboard shall be of the cubicle type or otherwise incorporated in the
cubicles for battery chargers. Double pole switches and fuses or switch fuses (miniature circuit
breakers to BS 4752 or IEC 60127 may only be used if it can be shown that there will be no
discrimination problems with sub-circuits) shall be fitted to the DC switchboard as required by
substation services but, as a minimum requirement, that set out in the Schedule A of
Requirements.

Distribution panels shall be mounted adjacent to the charger control panel and shall be of the
cubicle type complying with the general requirements of cubicle type control panels. No
equipment associated with the chargers shall be installed in the distribution board.

Distribution panels shall incorporate double-pole switches for each of the outgoing DC circuits
and double-pole isolators for the incoming DC supplies. The panel shall be provided with a
voltmeter and centre zero ammeter on each incoming circuit.
356
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
A double pole switch or contactor shall be provided for the purpose of sectionalising the
busbar.

A battery earth fault detecting relay, which will centre tap the system via a high resistance,
shall be incorporated in the distribution panel.

A low voltage detecting device for the system shall be incorporated in the distribution panel.
No-volt relays will not be accepted for these devices. The voltage setting shall be adjustable
over an approved range.

In addition to any other requirements specified elsewhere, the battery earth fault detecting
relays and low voltage devices shall each have three alarm contacts, one for local visual
annunciation, one for the station control panel alarm indication and one for potential free
contact for external supervisory alarms. A lamp test facility shall be provided.

Connections between the battery and the distribution cubicle shall be made in PVC insulated
cable as required. Cable laid in runs where it may be subject to damage shall be protected by
wire armouring, be sheathed overall and be cleated to walls as required.

Cable boxes or glands shall be provided as appropriate for all incoming and outgoing circuits
of the distribution switchboard and associated battery chargers. Each circuit shall be suitably
labelled at the front of the panel and at the cable termination where the terminals shall be
additionally identified.

Charging and distribution switchboards shall be provided with an earthing bar of hard drawn
high conductivity copper which shall be sized to carry the prospective earth fault current
without damage or danger.

The cubicles for the chargers and distribution boards shall be of rigid, formed sheet metal
construction, insect and vermin proof, having front facing doors allowing maximum access to
the working parts, when open. The design of the cubicles for the chargers shall be such as to
prevent the ingress of dust and minimise the spread of flames or ionised zones, shall be to
IEC 60529 IP52, but at the same time shall provide all necessary ventilation and cooling. The
design of the frames shall allow the clamping and holding of all chokes, transformers and
similar sources of vibration, so that vibration will be minimised, satisfy relevant standards, and
not limit the life of the equipment. The frame shall allow the fixing of lifting and so that the
equipment remains properly mechanically supported whilst being transported, lifted and
installed.
DC panel dimensions are subject to approval from NESCO.

7.1.24 Sub-Station Steel Structure

GENERAL

The structural steel shall conform to the latest provision of ASTM A36/BS-4360 and all the
parts shall be hot dip galvanized as per BS-729 after fabrication.

SCOPE

The work covered by these specifications shall include design, fabrication, marking,
painting, galvanizing, supply of all materials, suitable for the location, sea worthy packing,
transportation to S/S site, storage on the site, site visit needed to complete the sub-station

357
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 structures, miscellaneous steel members, nuts, bolts, plates etc. according to
specifications and drawings prepared by the bidder and approved by the Purchaser.

DESIGN DATA

Structure shall be designed on the basis of the following:

i) Buses, structures, conductors and shield wires shall be designed to withstand the force
of a true wind velocity of 160 KM per hour (120 kg/m2 on round surface, 200 KG/m2 on
flat surface). The over load capacity factor shall be 2.

ii) All connections between steel members shall be bolted, minor welds will be allowed
for fabrication purposes before galvanization, but no welding will be permitted in the
main legs of members of terminal structure. The diagonals and struts shall be bolted
directly to the structure legs and to each other. Gasket plats shall not be used unless
absolutely necessary.

Members shall be design to avoid depressions that can trap water, such depressions if
unavoidable, shall have drain holes, and connections shall be designed so that all bolts
can be tightened in the field using a flat erection wrench. The ends of connected members,
shall, where necessary, be clipped or cut to allow free movement of the wrench.

The quantity of bolts, nuts and locking devices furnished shall include the number of each
size required for erection plus an additional 5% of that number to cover loss and damages.

The bus supports shall be designed to withstand a momentary short circuit current equal
to the momentary short circuit rating of the associated breakers.

All shield wires for the sub-station shall be 9.525 mm dia 7 strands with high strength steel
galvanized wire.

The contractor must supply complete detailed drawings, bill of materials, composition of
materials etc. all connectors, clamps, fittings, hardware, etc. with their range of adjustment.
Detailed catalogues, printed literatures etc. showing all significant characteristics for all
those things for which the contractor intends to offer must be supplied with the offer.
Particular items proposed to be supplied, must be arrow marked in the catalogue.

Material

All materials used for the sub-station structures and buses shall be new and undamaged
and shall conform to the requirements given below certified test reports for all steel
materials shall be submitted to the Engineer before such materials shall be fabricated. The
latest revisions to the specified American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) and
General Specifications ruling.

i) STEEL STRUCTURE MEMBER

The main steel structure shall be designed for the loading specified and separate
additional structures as necessary shall be provided for overhead line terminations,
disconnect switches, bus supports, potential devices lightning Arresters and other
equipment.

The structures steel shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM for “Steel Bridge and
Buildings” or equivalent and all parts shall be hot dip galvanized after packing for

358
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 fabrication.

All structures shall be shipped completely unassembled unless other-wise specified. All
S/S parts shall be plainly marked as aid in assembly and the marking shall agree with the
identification on the erection drawings.

The structures shall be completed with all bolts, nuts and locking devices which are
required for erection of the structures and for installation of equipment.

ii) CONNECTION FASTENERS

All connections shall be made with hot dip galvanized, sodium carbon, heat treated,
regular square head, bolts to meet Feb Spec FF-B-575. Type-1, Grade-5 or of equivalent
standard with hot dip galvanized, heavy semi finished hexagonal nuts. Each fastener shall
gave a locking devices by screw and bolt, length of which shall provide 3mm (minimum)
to 12.5 mm (maximum) projection beyond nut when connection is tightened. Standard
ASTM-A 394 or equivalent.

iii) WELDING ELECTRODE

Where welding is permitted in Fabrication it shall be done in accordance with ASTM

specification A233 using F-70 series low hydrogen electrode as recommended by
American Welding Society (AWS) or equivalent for various grades of steel.

iv) GALVANIZED COATING

All angles, channels, plates and other shaped or members required for these structures
shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM specification A123 or equivalent.
Galvanizing is to be applied on after fabrication is competed as per BS-729 (1971)
Galvanization shall be done when fabrication is complete.

iv) GROUND CONNECTION

Grounding will be done by placing a copper wire/bar Grid having cross section not less
then 150 mm2. Earthing rods/electrodes of copper having minimum diameter of 150 mm
shall be inserted deep into soil and jointing/welding the rod with the grid as well as
earthing electrodes shall be designed in such a way that Grounding resistance
requirement is achieved as per IEEE 80 considering 31.5 kA fault current. All the joints
within the grounding grid will be cad welding type. Existing grounding is to be upgraded
in accordance with the new higher size power transformer.

The size/type of earthing leads for different equipment shall be as follows:

1 Neutral of the power transformer, 33/11 KV, -not less than 240mm2 copper conductor/bar
10/13.33 MVA and 20/26 MVA with adequate insulation
2 Body of the power transformer, 33/11 KV, - bare copper bar of not less than 2x120mm2
10/13.33 MVA and 20/26 MVA
3 Neutral of the station transformer, 33/0.4 - not less than 120 mm2 PVC LT cable
KV
4 Body of the station transformer, 33/0.4 KV - not less than 120 mm2 Cu wire
5 33 KV PT LV Neutral - 16 mm2 Cu. Wire.
6 11 KV PT LV Neutral - 16 mm2 Cu wire
7 Steel mounting structure at the switchyard - not less than 120 mm2 Cu wire
359
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8 Body of the indoor 33 KV switchgear Panel - not less than 3x120 mm2 Cu wire
9 Body of the indoor 11 KV switchyard Panel - not less than 4x120 mm2 Cu wire
10 Body of the Indoor control relay panel - - 120 mm2 Cu wire
33/11 KV A.C. distribution panel. DC
distribution panel, battery charger and
other miscellaneous indoor equipment.
11 33 KV Lightning Arrestor Outdoor - not less than 120 mm2 Cu wire

The earthing leads with appropriate thimble shall be connected to the welded flat bar
earth electrode, by bolts & nuts.

The other ends of the earthing leads shall be connected to the equipment/chassis at
appropriate terminals by using thimbles/connectors etc and nuts & bolts.

(b) Earthing Device

Appropriate earthing devices and arrangement shall be provided for all 33KV and 11KV
switching panels having provision for operation from the front.

FABRICATION

The Purchaser/ Engineer shall be notified when fabrication of the materials is to begging
so that Owner/ Engineer may, if desires, provide shop inspection.

Each steel component shall be completely fabricated and then galvanized in the shop. All
workmanship and finishing shall be first class and equal to the best practices in modern
steel fabricating shops. All angles and members shall be fabricated in accordance with the
standard, specifications and details given in the edition of the “Steel Construction Hand-
Book” issued by the American Institute of Steel Construction or its equivalent. Structural
item as delivered to the job site shall have all members straight, free from warp, bends or
local deformations, accurate, sot that when the structure is assembled, proper fit will be
provided. All reaming of holes shall be done at the factory before galvanizing. Punching,
drilling or reaming of holes after galvanizing will not be permitted. Holes, 18mm in diameter
shall be provided in the steel for ground connection on each leg of each structure. Legs or
members shall be drilled with 18 holes at 1.5m intervals, in all of members where ground
conductors are to be installed for grounding of shield wires or equipment. These holes
shall be made before galvanizing. Holes shall be drilled and attachment devices shall be
furnished on the terminal structures for all overhead circuit conductors and shield wires.

The bolt holes shall not exceed the diameter of the bolt by more than 1.5mm. Leg angles
and other members shall be lap spliced and the back of the inside angle shall be round to
clear the fillet of the outside angles.
i) WELDING

All welding done in the shop on steel members shall be by the shield metal are processes
using joints details performed in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS)
code or equivalent. All welding procedures and operators shall be qualified by an
independent testing laboratory in accordance with AWS standard qualification procedures.
Accurate records of operator and procedure qualifications shall be maintained by the
contractor and shall be available to the owner or Engineer. All welds shall be continues
and shall develop full strength of the least strength component unless otherwise shown on
the drawings.

360
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Components shall be thoroughly cleaned before welding and shall be accurately fitted and
rightly secured in position during welding and weld surface shall be smooth and uniform
and shall be thoroughly cleaned of all slag flux before galvanizing.

ii) MAKING

Each separate structure member shall be plainly stamped with a number. All like parts
shall have the same number. The marking shall be stamped into the metal with figures at
least 15mm high. Impression shall be made before galvanizing and have sufficient depth
so that hey are plainly visible after galvanizing. The mark shall be placed as nearly as
possible in the same relative position on each pieces so as to be seen plainly after
assembly of the structure.

The mark numbers shall be composed of letters and numbers that will designate the S/S
and type of structure. These markings shall the same as shown on the fabrication and
erection drawings.

iii) GALVANZING
All steel components of the structures shall be galvanized using the hot dip process.
Fabrications shall be completed before galvanizing. All pieces to be galvanized shall be
thoroughly cleaned to remove paint, grease, rust, scales or other materials that could
interfere with the bonding of zinc with the steel. Galvanization shall be as per BS-729.

The contractor shall perform all works in accordance with the rules and requirements as
specified under ASTM specifications A123, A153 and BS-729.

After galvanizing, steel members may be straightened, if necessary by being re-rolled or

pressed only. No punching welding or any other work which may damage the protective
cover shall be allowed after galvanizing, except the lapping of nuts. All holes shall be free
from pelter after galvanizing.

iv) DRAWINGS
The contractor shall furnish to the employer/ engineer complete fabrication and erection
drawings along with the strength calculations on buses and loading on each structure
foundation of each type of S/S structure for approval before fabrication. Drawings shall
show outline, dimensions, drilling and details of fabrications.

STRUCTURE

All structures shall be designed, fabricated, galvanized etc. as specified and as described
below :
i) TERMINAL STRUCTURES

The “Terminal Structure” is identified as the structure on which the 11 KV services

cable/overhead conductor are terminated. When designed to accept the cable termination,
this shall be complete with all plates, bases and other fittings required for mounting the
cable and box for 11 KV XLPE single core cable of appropriate size 2x1Cx300 Sq.mm
cable per phase) with mounting switches etc.

For overload conductors and shield wires, the maximum tension per conductor shall be
450 Kg.

ii) BUS SUPPORT STRUCTURES

361
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The bus support structures shall be pedestal type, steel columns used to support the strain
ACSR S/S buses. These structures shall be designed to withstand the forces outlined
herein without damage off deformation. All plates and bus support insulators shall be
furnished.

STRUCTURE FOUNDATION
The contractors shall furnish the detail design for foundations of all steel structures
considering soil pressure of <4880 Kg/m2. A copy of calculations and design criteria for
foundation along with complete bill of materials of sand, cement, reinforcing bar and
concrete aggregate etc. shall be furnished after singing of the contract and at the time of
drawing approval.

PACKING

i) Steel members shall be shipped unassembled only members with the same mark shall
be bundled together.

ii) All packages shall be securely tied with heavy gauge annealed galvanized steel bands
to withstand transportation handling.

iii) Parts shall be handled and loaded, without damaging the materials or galvanized
coatings.

iv) The contractor shall replace, free charge all materials which has been damaged due
to inadequate of faulty packing.

H. TAGGING
i) For erection purpose, each package or bundle shall be tagged to identify the number
of pieces.

ii) For shipping purpose separate tagging shall be used for each package and bundle
showing the name and number of the contract, gross weight, port of dispatch and the
destination in Bangladesh.

7.1.25 BUS-BAR CONDUCTOR AND JUMPERS

1. Installation Sub-station, Outdoor.

2. Type Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR)
3. Code Name MARTIN ACSR for Bus-Bar
Gross Beak ACSR for Jumpers
4. Conductor Size 1351.5 MCM for MARTIN ACSR
636 MCM for Gross Beak (ACSR)
5. Standard Performance, design & testing shall be in accordance to the latest
editions of ASTM B-232.
6. Shipment On standard non-returnable wooden reels Gross weight shall not
exceed 2000 Kg per reel.
7. Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation and Performance shall be in
accordance to the latest editions of the relevant IEC standards.
A. FEATURES

- Shall be of continuous length between supports.

362
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - Conductors to be used for bus bars shall be stressed not more than 33% of their
breaking strength.

- Overhead conductors carried by the S/S structures shall be erected with such a
tension that when the conductors are subject to a transverse wind pressure of 640
Pascal's on the whole projected area, the factor of safety is not less than 2 (Two).

- When dissimilar metals are in contact, approved means shall be provided to prevent
elector-chemical action and corrosion.

7.1.26 ELECTRICAL HARDWARE FOR 33KV SWITCHYARD

- All connectors shall be compression type and made of Aluminum alloy suitable for the
conductor.
- Load support clamps shall be complete with bolts, nuts, lock washers etc. complete
and of the appropriate size.
- Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanized as per BS-729.
- Joints and connections shall be such as to permit easy dismantling. All necessary
terminals and connections (bi-metallic) shall be provided for connection to the
equipment. Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be as light as possible
and shall be of approved type.
- Tension conductor clamps shall be not permit slipping of or damage to or failure of
the complete conductor or any part, thereof at a load less than 70% of the breaking
load of the conductor.
- Catalogue with making on the catalogues of the hardware proposed shall be
submitted with the offer.

7.1.27 SUB-STATION EARTHING

A. SCOPE

These Clauses describe the General Requirements for the Earthing and
Lightning Protection and shall be read in conjunction with the Project
Requirements and Schedules.

B. REFERENCES

American Standards

ANSI/IEEE std 80 : IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding

ANSI/IEEE std : IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground

81 Impedance,
and Earth Surface Potential of a Grounding System.
German
Standards
DIN VDE 0141 : Earthing Systems for Power Installations with Rated Voltages
above 1 KV.
British Standards
BS 1432 : Specification for copper for electrical purposes; high conductivity
363
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 copper rectangular conductors withdrawn or rolled edges.
BS 1433 : Specification for copper for electrical purposes; Rod and bars.
BS 2871 : Specification for copper and copper alloys. Tubes.
: Specification for copper and copper alloy rods and sections (other
BS 2874 than forging stock).
BS 4360 : Specification for weldable structural steel.
BS 6360 : Specification for conductors in insulated cables and cords.
BS 6651 : Protection of Structures against Lightning.
BS 6746 : Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
BS 7430 : Code of Practice for Earthing.

International Standards
Wrought copper-tin alloys - chemical composition and forms of
ISO 427 :
wrought productions.
Wrought copper-aluminum alloys - chemical composition and
ISO 428 :
forms of wrought productions.
Special wrought copper alloys - chemical composition and forms
ISO 11 87 :
of wrought products.
Wrought coppers having minimum copper contents of 99.85% -
ISO 1137 :
chemical composition and forms of wrought products.

C. GENERAL

An earthing System generally in accordance with the requirements of IEEE 80 and BS

7430 shall be designed under this contract. Installation and supply of all materials and
equipment also included. The earthing system shall also be including earth electrodes and
connections to all electrical equipment and metallic structures on the site. The earth
electrodes shall limit the potential rise under fault conditions and buried conductors shall
be provided to limit potential differences on the site and adjacent to the site to ensure
safety to people and animals. Protection of all electrical equipment against lightning shall
also be provided.

a. EXTENT OF WORK

The work under the clause "SUB-STATION EARTHING" comprises the site testing,
design, supply and installation including excavation, back filling and temporary
reinforcement of earthing system and connections to electrical apparatus at the substation.
Also included the lightning protection scheme and the provision of portable earthing
devices.

The contractor shall be required to undertake all necessary earth resistively tests at the
sub-station sites and from the tests result to undertake the design of the earthing system.
The design as well as providing safe passage to earth for the stated earth fault currents,
shall also include calculation of step, touch and mesh potentials, which shall be within the
allowable limits of the standards quoted in the specification.

The design calculations of step, touch and mesh potentials accompanied by full installation
drawings and material requirement schedules, shall be submitted to and receive the
approval of the Engineer before materials procurement or installation commences.

b. SOIL SURVEY

364
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The preliminary tender design shall be based on a value of 100 ohm-m soil resistivity.

Not later than one month after the site has been handed over for access, the Contractor
shall carry out an earth resistivity survey of the sites and report in writing to the Engineer
in accordance with the approved program. The report shall detail the methods and
instruments used and the results of the surveys. Based on the results the Contractor shall
include in the report his proposal for the resistiveties to be used in the design of the
earthing system.

The surveys shall show the variation of resistivity across the site and with the depth below
the site. The Contractor shall consider if there is a need to model the resistivity in two
layers and if there is any advantage in the use of deep rod electrodes.

The surveys shall also determine the depth and nature of any underlying rock, which may
limit the depth for driving earth rods or if boring will be necessary for installing earth rods.

The weather conditions prior to and at the time of the surveys shall be recorded in the
report and an assessment made of the seasonal variations in resistivity based on
meteorological data for the area. The program for the project should, as far as possible,
time the resistivity surveys to take place during a dry season.

The report should also state if there are any indications that the ground is corrosive to bare
copper.
The report shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding with the design of the
earthing.
c. FAULT CURRENT AND DURATION
Each site shall be provided with an earth grid of buried conductors designed for an earth
fault current of 31.5 KA for three second. The preliminary earthing, design shall be such
that the ground potential rise shall not exceed 2 kV.

d. EARTH ELECTRODE SYSTEM DESIGN

i) Design Calculations

The design of the earth electrode systems shall be based on the approved earth resistivity
data and the system fault currents and their duration.

The design calculations in detail shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer and shall
be based on the methods given in the standards listed. The calculations shall include the
following parameters:-

(a) earth resistance of the whole system and of its components.

(b) earth potential rise
(c) step, touch and mesh potentials inside and outside the perimeter fence
(d) requirements for a high resistance surface layer
(e) conductor ratings

Earthing points shall be provided such that the combined resistance of the earth grid and
all other earthing points does not exceed 0.5 ohm during the dry season.

The earth potential rises shall not exceed the CHIT limits appropriate to the classification
of the system unless special precautions are taken to cater for transferred potentials.

365
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Step, touch and mesh potentials shall be within the permitted limits calculated in
accordance with the standards given in IEEE 80 for the proposed surface layer.

ii) Earth Electrode

The earth electrode shall comprise a system of bare copper conductors forming a mesh
buried near the surface of the ground and supplemented, if required, by one or more of
the following electrodes:-

(a) a system of interconnected rods driven into the ground.

(b) a mesh system of bare conductors buried in the ground.
(c) structural metal work in direct contact with the ground.

(d) reinforcing steel in buried concrete.

(e) a system of bare conductors buried near the surface of the ground outside
the perimeter fence.

iii) Mesh System

The mesh system shall be designed with above to limit touch, step and mesh potentials
taking into account the combined length of the mesh conductors, other buried conductors
and rods but excluding any buried conductors outside the perimeter fence. Due regard
shall be given to non-linear distribution of the fault current giving rise to the highest
potentials at mesh corners.

The rating of the mesh conductors shall be compatible with the fault currents after allowing
for parallel paths of hard drawn high conductivity copper strip with a minimum conductor
size of 200 mm2.

The conductor shall be installed in trenches excavated by the contractor at a minimum

depth of 800 mm. The system will be installed after all foundations have been laid and the
site filled to 100 mm below finished level. When the earthing grid has been laid and back
filled, bricks will be laid up to finished site level. Where the excavated material is rocky or
may be difficult to consolidate, the back filling shall be carried out using other material to
the approval of the Engineer. The cost of such material shall be deemed to be included in
the Contract.

iv) Interconnected Rods

If the design calculations show that a mesh alone is unable to limit the required values,
then the mesh shall be supplemented by the use of interconnected copper earthing rods
driven into the ground or installed in bored holes.

Rods shall be installed inside the perimeter fence to enclose the maximum possible area
compatible with the earthing of any metallic fence. (The spacing between rods shall not
be less than their length, unless rating considerations determine otherwise). The copper
rod electrodes of 15mm diameter shall be interconnected in groups of four to eight rods
by insulated copper conductors and non-ferrous clamps to form a ring. Each group shall
be connected to the mesh by duplicate insulated copper conductor via disconnecting test
links.

Individual rods may be connected directly to the mesh, provided the rod can be
disconnected for testing.

366
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Rods installed in bored holes may be used to reach lower resistivity ground strata at depths
beyond the reach of driven rods or where rock is encountered and it is not possible to drive
rods. After installing the rod the bored hole shall be back-filled with a low resistivity liquid
mixture, which shall not shrink after pouring, to ensure good contact between the rod and
the ground for the life of the installation.

The resistance and rating of individual rods and the combined resistance of the groups of
rods in the proposed design shall be calculated and the rating of the interconnecting
conductors shall not be less than that of the group of rods with a minimum conductor size
of 70 mm2.

The calculation of potentials in the design of the complete installation shall be made
without the group of rods with the lowest estimated resistance to simulate the condition
with the group disconnected for testing.

v) Other Conductors

As an alternative to rods to supplement a mesh, additional bare copper conductors with a

cross-section area of not less than 150mm2 may be used. They shall be buried in the
ground within the perimeter fence to enclose the maximum possible area compatible with
the earthing of any metallic fence. Such conductors may be laid below the mesh, below
foundations or in areas where there is no plant. It shall be shown by calculation that the
step potentials are low in such areas.

The conductor shall be in a ring, or a part of a ring, with at least two widely separated
connections to the mesh or other parts of the earthing system.

vi) Reinforcing Steel

The reinforcing steel in the foundations of buildings containing the primary electrical
equipment may be used as auxiliary electrodes, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The contractor shall show in the design calculations that the fault currents and d/c stray
currents will not damage the structure.

Steel reinforcing mesh in the floors of the building may also be used for the control of step
and touch potentials within the building subject to approval of the Engineer.

vii) Conductors Outside Perimeter Fence

If the design calculations show that the step and touch potentials outside the perimeter
fence or wall exceed the limits, than additional bare conductors shall be buried in the
ground outside the fence in the form of rings encircling the whole site.

The distance of the conductors from the fence and the depth shall be determined in the
design to ensure that step and touch potentials are within the limits.

The minimum conductor size shall be 75mm2 copper and shall be connected to the fence
or the mesh with 75mm2 conductors at each corner of the site and at intervals of not more
than 100m. These conductors shall not be included in the calculations called for above.

POWER TRANSFORMER NEUTRAL ROUNDING

Neutral of POWER TRANSFORMER seperately Grounded by 03(Three) Nos. of
Electrode

367
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (round Bar) of 16 mm Dia with 04(Four) Meter Length Each and Length of the electrode
will
be decided as per Design calculation. From Transformer Neutral to Electrode
Connection
300 sq-mm Copper Conductor will be used.

MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION

Description Size
Mesh Conductor Cross Section Area 200 sq-mm(Min)
Dia & Length of Each electrode/Rod 16 mm & 04(Four) Meter
Total Length of the electrode & Mesh as per Design calculation
Conductor
Conductor for Neutral of Power 2x150 sq-mm(Min)
Transformer

The size/type of earthing Riser/Connectors for different equipment shall be as follows

1 Neutral of the power transformer, 33/11 --not less than 2x150 mm2
KV, copper conductor with adequate
insulation
2 Body of the power transformer, 33/11 - bare copper bar of not less than
KV, 120mm2
for each power transformer 2 nos.
3 Neutral of the station transformer, - not less than 150 mm2
33/0.4 KV copper conductor with
adequate insulation
4 Body of the station transformer, 33/0.4 - not less than 120 mm2 Cu wire
KV
5 33 KV PT LV Neutral - 16 mm2 Cu. Wire.
6 11 KV PT LV Neutral - 16 mm2 Cu wire
7 Steel mounting structure at the - 120 mm2Cu wire for each steel
switchyard mounting structure 2 nos
8 Body of the indoor 33 KV switchgear - not less than 3x120 mm2 Cu wire
Panel
9 Body of the indoor 11 KV switchyard - not less than 120 mm2
Panel Cu wire at minimum 2 points
10 Body of the Indoor control relay panel - - 120 mm2 Cu wire
33/11 KV A.C. distribution panel. DC
distribution panel, battery charger and
other miscellaneous indoor equipment.
11 33 KV Lightning Arrestor Outdoor - not less than 120 mm2
Cu wire at minimum 2 points

The earthing leads with appropriate thimble shall be connected to the welded flat bar earth
electrode, by bolts & nuts.
The other ends of the earthing leads shall be connected to the equipment/chassis
at
appropriate terminals by using thimbles/connectors etc and nuts & bolts.
Appropriate earthing devices and arrangement shall be provided for all 33KV and
11KV
switching panels having provision for operation from the front.

H. DESIGN OF EARTH SYSTEM

I. i) Earth System
368
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 An earth system shall comprise the following components:-

(a) the conductors between the earth electrode system and the main earth bar
(b) the main earth bar

(c) the conductors between the main earth bar and the metallic frames,
enclosures or supports of electrical equipment

(d) the conductors between structural metalwork and non-electrical equipment

and the main earth bar

The rating of earth system conductors connected between an item of electrical plant and
the earth electrode system shall be sufficient to withstand the fault currents and duration,
after allowing for the parallel paths through the earth system conductors, with any one
conductor disconnected.
The design comprising all the above mentioned items shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval within four months of the award of contract.

ii) Connection of the System Neutrals and Earth

The system neutral points within a substation shall be arranged in two groups with a
conductor from earthing point.

The copper earth electrodes of a neutral earthing point shall be arranged in two groups
with a conductor from each group to a test link and there shall be duplicate bare copper
conductors of cross sectional area not less than 150 mm2 from each test link to the earth
grid. The duplicate connection may be in the form of a ring.

Neutral earthing connections between the substation system (transformer) neutral and the
test links shall be of bare copper tape, secured and supported on stand-off insulators so
that there is no contact between copper tape and transformer tank.

Neutral earthing conductors shall normally be buried directly in the ground but where
necessary, they may be cleared to walls, fixed to cable racks or laid in the cable trenches.

iii) Main Earth Bar

The main coppper earth bar shall be in the form of a ring or rings of bare conductors
surrounding, or within an area in which items to be earthed are located. Where two or more
rings are installed, they shall be interconnected by at least two conductors which shall be
widely separated.

The main earth bar, or parts thereof, may also form part of the earth electrode system,
providing this is bare conductor.

Each main earth bar shall be connected by at least two widely separated conductors to
the earth electrode system.

The minimum conductor size for the main earth and interconnections between earth bars
and the earth electrode system shall not be less than 200 mm2.

iv) Electrical Equipment Tank and Structure Connections to Earth

369
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Connections between: (a) all HV electrical equipment and (b) LV electrical equipment
comprising substantial multi-cubicle switchboards and the main earth bar shall be
duplicated. The bare copper conductor size shall have a minimum cross section area of
150 mm2.

All substation equipment, including disconnectors, earth switched, main transformer tanks,
current and voltage transformer tanks, switchboards, electrical supporting steelwork and
gantries etc. shall all be connected with the earth grid.

Surge Arresters installed for the protection of transformers and reactors shall be connected
by low reactance paths both to the transformer tanks and to the earth grid.

Capacitor voltage transformers used in connection with line traps shall be connected by
direct low reactance paths to a single earth rod for each Arrester, in addition to the earth
grid.

An earth mat shall be installed at all operating positions for outdoor HV equipment manual
operating mechanism boxes and local electrical control cubicles to ensure the safety of
the operator. The mat shall be directly bonded to the cubicle and the conductors forming
the mat and the bonding connection shall have a minimum copper cross-section area of
75 mm2.

Galvanized structures comprising bolted lattice components shall not be used as the sole
earth connection path to post and strain insulators or to overhead line earth conductors.

Buildings containing electrical equipment shall be provided, at each level, with a ring of
earthing conductors which shall have duplicate connections to the earth grid outside the
building. The frames of all switchgear, control and relay panels and other electrical
equipment and exposed structural metal work shall be connected by branches to a ring.
The ring and branch conductors shall be of the same material as the earth grid. Strip run
within buildings, inside cable trenches or above ground level on apparatus shall be neatly
supported on non-ferrous clamps.

Fixed earthing connectors for use with portable earthing devices below shall be provided
on each bus bar and on both sides of high voltage equipment is by tubular bus bars.

Rigid loops in the copper earthing strip branch bond between the equipment and the
earthing grid shall be provided adjacent to each item of high voltage equipment for use
with the portable earthing devices. The rigid loops shall be marked green.

Connections between other LV electrical equipment and the earth bar need not be
duplicated. The single conductor shall be rated to withstand the fault rating of the
equipment.

v) Connections to Non-Electrical Structural Metalwork and Equipment

All metal work within the project area which does not form part of the electrical equipment
shall be bonded to the main earth bar except where otherwise specified. The bonding
conductor size shall be not less than 150 mm2.

Individual components of metallic structures of plant shall be bonded to adjacent

components to form an electrically continuous metallic path to the bonding conductor.

Small electrically isolated metallic components mounted on non-conducting building fabric

370
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 need not be bonded to the main earth bar.
I) MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION
J) i) Conductors

Conductors shall be of high conductivity copper in the form of circular conductors stranded
to IEC 228(BS 6360) or solid rods or bars to BS 1433.

Conductor sheaths shall be of PVC to meet the requirements of BS 6746 Grade TM1 or
IEC 502 Grade ST1 with a minimum thickness of 1.5mm.

Buried conductors which are not part of the earth electrode system shall be PVC sheathed
circular stranded cable.

Bare strip conductors only shall be used for earth electrodes or voltage control meshes.

Conductors buried in the ground shall normally be laid at a depth of 800 mm in an

excavated trench. The back fill in the vicinity of the conductor shall be free of stones and
the whole back fill shall be well consolidated. Conductors not forming part of a voltage
control mesh shall be laid at the depth required by the approved design and in the case of
a PVC sheathed conductor, at the same depth as any auxiliary power or control cables
following the same route.

All conductors not buried in the ground shall be straightened immediately prior to
installation and supported clear of the adjacent surface.

ii) Earth Rods

Earth rods shall be driven to a depth below the ground water table level, to be determined
by the Contractor during soil investigation and survey of site.

The earth rods shall be of hard-drawn high conductivity copper with a diameter of not less
than 15mm with hardened steel driving caps and tips. The rods should be as long as
possible but couplings may be used to obtain the overall depth of driving required by the
design.

The rods shall be installed by driving into the ground with a power hammer of suitable
design to ensure the minimum of distortion to the rod. Where it is not possible to drive rods
to the full depth required due to the presence of a strata of rock, then holes shall be drilled
or blasted in the rock. The holes shall be filled with betonies or other approved material
prior to inserting the rod.

If difficult driving conditions arising from hard or rocky ground are encountered or are
anticipated or there is a need for deep rods, then high tensile steel rods shall be used.
High tensile steel rods shall have a molecularly bounded high conductivity copper coating
with a minimum radial thickness of not less than 0.25 mm. The overall diameter shall be
not less than 12 mm. Rolled external screw threads shall be used on the rod for coupling
and after rolling the thickness of the copper coating on the threaded portion shall be not
less than 0.05 mm.

Rods, driving caps and tips shall about at couplings to ensure that the couplings and screw
threads are not subject to driving forces. All screw threads shall be fully shrouded at the
couplings. Alternatively, conical couplings may be used to the approval of the Engineer.

High conductivity copper for earth rods shall have a minimum copper content (including
371
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 silver) of 99.90% to ISO 1337, Cu-ETP or Cu-FRHS (BS 2894 Grade C 101 or C102) for
copper earth rods and to ISO 1337 Grade Cu-ETP (BS 28734 Grade C 101) for the
molecular bonded copper coating of steel rods.

The steel for copper-clad steel rods shall be low carbon steel with a tensile strength of not
less than 570 N/mm2 to ISO 630, Grade Fe 430A (BS 4360 Grade 43A) or better.

Couplings for copper rods shall be of 5% phosphor bronze (copper-tin-phosphorous) to

ISO 427, CU Sn4 (BS 2874, Grade PB 102M) and for copper bonded steel rods of 3%
silicon or 7% aluminum bronze to BS 2874, Grade CS 101 and BS 2871, Grade CA 102.
iii) Fittings

Clips supporting strip conductors not buried in the ground shall be of the direct contact
type and clips for circular conductors shall be of the cable saddle type. The clips shall
support the conductors clear of the structure.

Conductors shall be connected to earth rods by a bolted clamp to facilitate removal of the
conductor for testing rod.

Disconnecting links shall comprise a high conductivity copper link supported on two
insulators mounted on a galvanized steel base for bolting to the supporting structure. The
two conductors shall be in direct contact with the link and shall not be disturbed by the
removal of the link. Links for mounting at ground level shall be mounted on bolts embedded
in a concrete base.

Disconnecting links mounted at ground level and the connections at the earth rods shall
be enclosed in concrete inspection pits, with concrete lids, installed flush with the ground
level.

All conductor fittings shall be manufactured from high strength copper alloys with phosphor
bronze nuts, bolts, washers and screws. Binary brass copper alloys will not be acceptable.
All fittings shall be designed for the specific application and shall not be permanently
deformed when correctly installed.

Sheathed conductor support fittings may be of silicon aluminum, glass-filed nylon or other
tough non-hygroscopic material for indoor installations.

Fittings not in direct contact with bare or sheathed conductors may be of hot-dip galvanized
steel.
Bi-metallic connectors shall be sued between conductors of dissimilar materials and
insulating material shall be interposed between metallic fittings and structures of dissimilar
materials to prevent corrosion.

iv) Joints

Permanent joints shall be made by exothermic welding (Cad Welding) below ground, or
crimping for above ground connections.

Detachable joints shall be bolted and stranded conductors at bolted joints shall be
terminated in exothermic welded lugs or a crimped cable socket. The diameter of any holes
drilled in strip conductors shall not greater than half the width of the strip.

Connections to electrical equipment shall be detachable and made at the earthing studs
or bolts provided on the equipment by the manufacturer. When an earthing point is not

372
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 provided, the point and method of connection shall be agreed with the Engineer.

Connections to metallic structures for earthing conductors and bonding conductors

between electrically separate parts of a structure shall be either by direct exothermic
welding or by bolting using a stud welded to the structure. Drilling of a structural member
for a directly bolted connection shall only be carried out to the approval of the Engineer.

Bolted joints in metallic structures, including pipe work and which do not provide direct
metallic contact, shall either be bridged by a bonding conductor or both sides of the joint
shall be separately bonded to earth, unless the joint is intended to be and insulated joint
for cathodic protection or other purposes.

When the reinforcing in concrete is used as a part of the earthing system, the fittings used
to provide a connection point at the surface of the concrete shall be exothermically welded
to a reinforcing bar. This fitting shall be provided with a bolted connection for an earthing
conductor. The main bars in the reinforcing shall be welded together at intervals to ensure
electrical continuity throughout the reinforcing.

No connections shall be made to reinforcing bars and other steelwork which do not form
part of the earthing system and are completely encased in concrete.

J. EARTHING OF FENCES

i) Method

Metallic fences shall be separately earthed unless they come within 1.8m of any equipment
of structure above the surface of the ground and which is connected to the main earthing
system. If the separation of 1.8m cannot be obtained, the fence shall be bonded to the
main earthing system.

ii) Separately Earthed Fences

The earthing of a fence shall be provided by connecting certain metallic fence posts to an
earth rod by a copper conductor. The earth rod shall be driven adjacent to the posts inside
the fence line to a depth of not less than 3.0m. where no metallic posts are provided, the
earth rods shall be connected directly to the metal wires, mesh or other components of the
fence.

If, owing to the nature of the ground, it is not possible to drive earth rods, then fence posts
shall be connected to the center point of a 20m length of bare copper conductor buried in
the ground at a depth of 500mm, running closely parallel to the inside of the fence.

The earth rods or bare conductor electrodes shall be installed at each corner post, below
the outer phase conductors of overhead line connections passing over the fence, at each
gate and at intervals of not more than 100m.

iii) Bonded Fences

Fences which need to be bonded to the main earthing system of the installation shall be
connected by copper conductors to the nearest accessible point on the main earthing
system at each point where the fence comes within 1.8 m of any electrical equipment.
Bonds shall also be made to each corner post, below the outer phase conductors of
overhead line connections passing over the fence at each gate and at intervals of not more

373
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 than 100m.

iv) Bonding of Fence components

Fences made up bolted steel or other metallic component do not require bonding between
components. Where such fences have non-metallic component, bonds shall be installed
to maintain continuity between metallic components. Reinforced concrete components
shall be treated as being non-metallic.

Longitudinal wires for supporting other fence component or for anti-climbing guards and
the wires of chain link, shall be directly bonded to each electrode or to each bond to the
main earthing system.

Metallic component on masonry, brick, concrete or similar boundary wall shall be treated
in the same manner as metallic fences.

Wire fence component coated for anticorrosion protection shall be earthed inn accordance
with this clause.

v) Gates

The fixed metallic components on both sides of the gate shall be directly bonded together
by a copper conductor installed under the surface of the access way. Flexible conductors
shall be installed to bond the moving parts of the gates to the metallic fixed parts. An earth
rod or a bond to the main earthing system shall be installed at each gate.

vi) Potential Control Outside Fences

Where the approved design calculations show that the touch or step potentials outside the
fence or boundary wall would otherwise be excessive, bare copper conductors shall be
buried in the ground outside the fence or boundary wall at such depths and spacing as are
shown in the approved design calculations to give acceptable touch and step potentials.
The conductors shall form complete rings surrounding the installation and each ring shall
be bonded to the adjacent ring and to the fence at each corner, below the outer phase
conductors of overhead line connections passing over the fence at each gate and at
intervals of not more than 100 m. In this case separate earth electrodes are not required
for the fences.

If the boundary fence or wall is substantially non-metallic, the rings of conductors shall be
bonded to the main earth system at each corner of the site and at intervals of not more
than 100m. Any metallic components on such boundary fences or walls shall be bonded
to the earthing system in accordance with this Specification.

If the boundary fence is metallic and is not within 1.8 m of any part of the main earthing
system or equipment bonded thereto, the fence and outer conductor rings shall but be
connected to the main earthing system unless the approved design calculations show
otherwise.

Any meshes formed by bonding the outer conductors to he main earthing system shall be
sub-divided by additional conductors, if required, to give acceptable touch, step and mesh
potentials.

vii) Conductors

All conductors used for earthing and bonding the fences and components and for outer

374
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 rings shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than 70 mm2.

vii) Portable earthing devices

Portable earthing devices for use with outdoor 33 KV apparatus in substations shall be
supplied in the numbers stated in Schedule of Technical Requirements and shall comprise:

(a) Copper alloy earth end clamp for connection to the rigid loops in equipment earth
bonding connections.
(b) Aluminum ally line and bus bar end clamp to suit the type supplied under the Contract.
(c) Flexible stranded aluminum alloy conductor with clear protective PVC sheath, size
suitable for the specified fault level and duration.
(d) Telescopic operating pole of glass fibre or similar material, of sufficient length to reach
the height of connections to high voltage equipment from ground, but retractable into
a carrying length not exceeding 2.5m, and complete with non-slip hand grips.

K. SUB-STATION EARTHING AND EARTHING ERECTION

General earthing of all equipment shall be in accordance with the IEC recommendation
No. 80 :1976-Guide for safety in alternating current sub-station Grounding, the British
standard code of practice CP-1013: 1965 or other approved standard.

i) Earthing System

Each site shall be provided with an earth grid of buried copper strip conductors designed
for an earth fault current of 31.5 KA for 3 seconds for all S/S. For the purpose of preliminary
design it shall be assumed that the distribution of the fault current will be such that the
ground potential rise of each site will not exceed 2 KV.

The preliminary design shall be based on clay silt having an assumed resistively of 100
ohm meters.

Step and touch voltages both inside and outside the station shall not exceed 50 V.

The design of earth grid over the area occupied by switchgear and associated apparatus
shall be based on a maximum grid spacing of 5m x 5m. Conductors shall be buried at
800mm depth.

Earthing points will be provided so that the combined resistance of the earth grid and
earthing points shall be less than 0.5 ohm under dry climatic conditions.

The operating mechanisms of isolators, earth switches and circuit breaker kiosks not
integral with the circuit breaker shall be connected to the earth system by a branch entirely
separate from that employed to earth their bases. The branch is to be installed such that
the connection would pass beneath where and operator would stand, so as to minimize
step potential.

Fences shall be earthed independently of the sub-station grid.

Connections to plant and equipment shall be made using the earthing terminals specified
in the contract where a strip has to be drilled to fit an earth terminals the diameter of the
hole shall not be greater than ½ the width of the strip.

Joints in earthing strip shall employ chemical welding or high compression joints or

375
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 clamps.

ii) Earthing Electrode

Each Earhting point shall consist of a group of copper rods drawn into undisturbed soil to
a minimum depth of 4m. Each copper electrode shall be complete with approved non
ferrous clamps for the connection of earthing conductors and with a hardened steel tip and
cap for driving by means of a power hammer. The number of electrodes per group shall
be not less than four and not more than eight, 16mm diameter rods and each copper
electrode rod shall be 4 meter length and the number of rod groups per sub-station have
been declared in the price schedule.

The electrodes of an earthing point will be arranged in two sub-groups with a conductor
from each sub-group to the test link of the earth grid.

In addition to the above a single electrode is to be driven as close as possible and

connected to the following :

i) Three phase set of surge diverts.

ii) Three phase set of voltage transformers.
iii) Three phase set of power transformers.
iv) The fence where an overhead line crosses at gates and at fence corners. The distance
between electrodes is not to exceed 50 m.

Separate Earthing Electrode with special earth pit shall be provided for the following two items:
(i) Power Transformer neutral earthing (2 Nos.)
(ii) Lightning Arrester earthing (1 No.)
It has to be ensured that the earthing resistance of these separate earth electrode
satisfies the basic requirement of earthing resistance.

iii) Insulated Earthing Conductors

Conductors for interconnection between the electrodes in any group and between groups
and the connections between the link chambers and sub-station earthing main grid shall
have twin conductors with a combined rating of 31.5 KA for three seconds for all S/S .
The neutral points of the 11 KV system shall be connected to the link chamber with twin
conductors as above.

Earthing conductors shall be of annealed high conductivity copper and shall be stranded
in accordance with IEC-228 table VII class-2. They shall be protected with an extruded
PVC sheath of 100 volts grade.

iv) Sub-station Earthing Screen

Approved earth screens shall be provided to protect the equipment from direct lightning
strikes. The screens shall be of the steel corned aluminum wires of not less than 35 Sq.mm
total cross section and connected to provide low impedance paths to earth.

The layout of the earth wires shall be such that generally equipment to be protected lie
within areas bounded by lines drawn from the earth wire at 35 degree to the vertical in a
plane perpendicular to the axes of the earth wire. The earth screen shall be suitable for
extension to protect the sub-station equipment to be installed in suitable stages of
development.
376
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Connections shall be made of copper strip of 150 Sq.mm cross section between each
support for the overhead earthed screen wire and the main sub-station earthing system.
Earth wires shall be held in clamps with free pin type joints between clamps and supports
connections shall be provided for the terminations of the earth wires of the overhead lines
including bimetal connectors where necessary.

The necessary stays, fittings, anchors, flying stays and additional masts shall ensure
clearance of not less than 4600 mm over roadways for circuit breaker or transformer
removal. The design of all structures shall ensure that in the event of breakage of either
one earth wire or one stay wire the factor or safety is not less than 1.5.

L. REQUIREMENT EARTHING

i) 11 kV Switchgear
All metal parts including any relay instrument etc. mounted on the switchboard shall be
connected to a copper earth bar which runs along the full length of the switchboard.

The cross section to the bar shall be sufficient to carry the rated short time withstand
current of the switchgear for three seconds.

The frame of the draw-out circuit breakers shall be connected to the earth bar through a
substantial plug type contact.

ii) Low Voltage Switchboards

Earth metal of switchboards fuse and distribution boards and distribution boards shall be
bonded together and earthed to the main sub-station earthing system. Earthing
connections shall be carried out in bare copper strip having a 3 second rating not less
than 31.5 KA for all S/S

iii) Control Panels

Each control panel shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less than 80 Sq.mm
cross-section and arranged so that the bars of adjacent panels can be joined together to
from a common bus.

The common earthing bus bar of control and relay panels shall be connected to the main
station earthing systems via a copper earthing connection of not less than 80 Sq.mm.

iv) Neutral Earthing

The 11 KV neutral of the 33/11 KV transformer shall incorporate provision for the
scheduled current transformers and shall be directly connected to the main station
earthing system. The connection shall be formed of twin conductors and shall be capable
to carrying 31.5 KA for 3 (Three) seconds for all S/S.

7.1.28

FIRE DETECTION FACILITIES

7.1.28.1 Design Requirements
All fire protection installations shall comply with the requirements of the
codes of practice of the National Fire Protection Association, Boston,
377
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Massachusetts, U.S.A. as appropriate for the respective systems, subject to
the approval of the Project Manager. The Codes and practice of the Japanese
Fire Protection may also be considered.
7.1.28.2 Fire Detection and Alarm system
Fire detection shall be by means of smoke detectors/heat detectors with a
backup system utilizing rate-of-rise temperature detectors along with alarm
system. The system and its components must conform to the applicable
appropriate standards. The use of these detectors shall be subject to specific
approval by the Project Manager as regards their type and location.
(a) Fire Alarm Panel: 16 Zone Capacity :
Supply and Installation of 16 Zone Conventional Fire alarm control panel
with power supply unit, batteries and other accessories. The panel shall be
complete with zone indicating LED, Fault Indication and optional telephone
Jack etc. The panel shall be input 220V AC and output 24V DC. Panel shall be
confirmed UL Listed or EN54.
Country of Origin: Japan / Italy/ UK / USA or equivalent approved by the Project
Manager.
(b) Fire Alarm Bell:
Supply and installation o f Conventional type Fire Alarm Bell of 150mm dia, red
color, shall
be UL / ULC / CSFM / FM / MEA / BFP / EN54 approved. Power supply shall
be 24VDC.
Sound level shall be not less than 92 dBA @ 3meter. Color of the Bell shall be red.
Country of Origin: Japan / Italy / UK / USA or equivalent approved by the Project
Manager.
(c) Optical / Photoelectric Smoke Detector:
Supply and installation of Smoke Detector complete with base. Shall be UL /
ULC / CSFM / FM / MEA / BFP / EN54 approved. Integrated alarm LED.
Remote LED connection.
Power supply shall be 24VDC.
Country of Origin: Japan /Italy/ UK / USA or equivalent approved by the Project
Manager.
(d) Heat Detector:
Supply and installation of Heat Detector complete with base. Shall be UL /
ULC / CSFM / FM / MEA / BFP / EN54 approved. Integrated alarm LED. Remote
LED connection. Power supply shall be 24VDC.
Country of Origin: Japan /Italy/ UK / USA or equivalent approved by the Project
Manager.

378
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 SECTION 7.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
OF

POWER TRANSFORMERS
AND
STATION AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS

379
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.2.1 Technical Specification of 33/11 KV, 10/13.33 MVA Power Transformer

7.2.1.1 GENERAL
This section of the document includes the design, engineering, manufacture, supply,
delivery, offloading, testing & inspection and performance requirements of 33/11KV,
10/13.33 MVA MVA Power transformers and accessories as specified.
7.2.1.3 CLIMATE DATA
The distribution transformers to be supplied against this tender shall be suitable for
satisfactory use under the following climatic condition:
Climate : Tropical, intense sunshine, heavy rain,
humid.
Maximum Temperature : 450 C
Minimum Temperature : 030 C
Maximum yearly weighted average : 300 C
temperature
Relative Humidity : 50-100%
Annual mean Relative Humidity : 75%
Average annual rain fall : 3454 mm
Maximum wind velocity : 200 km/ hour
Maximum altitude above the sea level : Sea level to 300 metres
Atmospherically, Mechanical and : Moderately polluted
Chemical impurities
The information is given solely as a guide for Tenders and no responsibility for its,
accuracy will be accepted nor will any claim based on the above be entertained.
Transformer supplied under this contract will be installed in tropical locations that can
be considered hostile to its proper operation. Particular problems that shall receive
special consideration relate to operation in a hot environment and presence of the
insects and vermin.
7.2.1.4 SYSTEM PARTICULARS
SL.
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS VOLTAGE LEVEL
NO.
1. Normal System Voltage, kV (Voltage Class) 230 132 33 11
3. Maximum System Voltage, kV 245 145 36 12
4. System Frequency, Hz 50 50 50 50
5. Phase Rotation (Anti-Clock wise) RST RST RST RST
6. Type of System Grounding Solid Solid Solid Solid
7. Rated Fault Level (3-Phase Symmetrical),
16000 7200 1800 600
MVA 3 sec.
8. Basic Insulat ion Level, kV p 750 650 170 75

High Voltage current carrying equipment should be capable of carrying the three phase
fault level for a period of 3 Sec.

7.2.1.5 STANDARDS

380
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The equipment specified in this Section of the contract shall conform to the latest
edition of the appropriate IEC specifications and other recognized international
standard. Equipmet shall conform to all the related latest IEC 60076 series . In
particular:
IE 60076-1 Power transformers (General).
C
IE 60076-2 Power transformers (Temperature Rise).
C
IE 60076-3 Power transformers (Insulation Levels, Dielectric Tests and External
C Clearance in air).
IE 60076-5 Power transformers (Ability to Withstand short circuit)
C
IE 60137 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1 kV.
C
IE 60156 Method of determination of electrical strength of insulating oils
C .
IE 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and
C switchgear.
IE 60551 Measurement of transformer and reactor sound levels.
C
IE 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformers.
C
IE 722 Guide to lightning and switching impulse testing of power transformers.
C
IE 5493 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion.
C
IE 551 Noise and Vibration of power transformer.
C

7.2.1.6 Technical Specification:

1. Rated MVA (ONAN/ONAF) 10/13.33 MVA
2. Number of Phases 3 (Three)
3. Frequency 50 Hz
4. Winding Insulation Uniform
5. Normal Transformation Ratio at No- 33/11.55 KV
load
6. Rated HT Voltage (Phase to Phase) 33 KV
7. Maximum HT Voltage (Phase to 36 KV
Phase)
8. Rated LT Voltage (Phase to Phase) 11 KV
9. Maximum LT Voltage (Phase to 12 KV
Phase)
10. Rated Current HT
10/13.33 MVA 175/233 A
( ONAN/ONAF)
11. Rated Current LT (ONAN/ONAF)
381
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 10/13.33 MVA 525/700 Amps
( ONAN/ONAF)
12. Basic Insulation Level :
a) High voltage winding 170 KVp
b) Low voltage winding 75 KVp
13. Installation Outdoor, Tropical, High rainfall & Humidity.
14. Type Core, Conservator & Oil Immersed
15. Type of Windings Double Wound of Electrolytic Copper, free
from burs and splinter.
16. Type of Cooling ONAN/ ONAF
17. Coolant Mineral Oil as per IEC-60296
18. Type of System Earthing Effectively Earthed
19. Bushing Material Porcelain
20. Type of Base On wheels with adequate size and 10 M
length of rails and fixing arrangement.
21. Direction of Normal Power Flow HT-LT
22. Phase connection :( -)
a) 33 KV winding with bushing CT Delta
b) 11 KV winding with bushing CT Star
23. Vector Group Dyn11
24. Neutral to be brought out :
a) HT Nil
b) LT Yes
25. Neutral Insulation Full uniform insulation and 100% loading
capacity
26. Maximum Temperature rise over 400C
ambient at full load & tap change is at
normal position :
a) Winding by Resistance (0C) 60 0C
b) Oil by Thermometer (0C) 50 0C
27. Impulse Front Wave Test Voltage
(1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave Shape) :
a) High voltage side 170 KVp
b) Low voltage Side 75 KVp
28. Power Frequency withstand Test
Voltage for 1 (one) Minute :
a) High voltage side 70 KV
b) Low voltage Side 28 KV
29. Impedance Voltage at 750C, at normal 8.0 %
ratio and rated frequency, and at
ONAN condition.
30. Type of tap changer control

382
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Features The tap changer will be on load auto
regulation, remote control and manual. The
on load tap changer will immersed in the
transformer tank. The diverter switch
compartment will be provided with its own oil
conservator which, will not be connected to
the transformer oil tank.
The diverter switch can easily be lifted out of
its tank for maintenance and inspection
without opening the transformer cover. The
on load tap changer will operate by means
of a motor drive unit. This unit will install on
the side of the transformer.
On Load Tap changer with motor drive MR, Germany/ABB, Sweden.
unit manufacturer’s name & country
Tapping Range :
a) HT 17 Tapping  10% in steps of 1.25% i.e. 33
KV  8 x 1.25%
b) LT Nil
31. Bushing CT for differential protection 300/5A on HV, 900/5A on LV of accuracy
class 5P30, burden 30 VA.
32. Neutral Bushing CT for Standby Earth . 900/5-5A on LV neutral of accuracy class
Fault (SEF) & Restricted Earth Fault 5P20, burden 30 VA.
(REF) protection
33. Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation
and Performance shall be in accordance to
the latest editions of the relevant IEC
standards.
34. Transformer Oil
Application Insulating mineral oil for Transformer. It will
be free from PCB (polychlorinated biphenyl)
Grade of oil Class-1
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance Liquid and free from suspended matter or
sediment
Density at 200 C 0.895 g/cm3 (maximum)
Flash point (Closed cup) 1400 C (minimum)
Kinematics Viscosity at -150 C 800 c St. (Maximum)
0
Kinematics Viscosity at 20 C 40 c St. (Maximum)
Pour point -300 C (maximum)
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
Dielectric Strength at 50 Hz (with 2.5 New untreated oil, shall go through filtration
mm standard gap and 40 mm treatment before the oil are introduce into the
standard depth) apparatus or equipment. The break down
voltage of this oil shall be at least 50KV.
383
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Loss tangent/Dielectric dissipation 0.005 (maximum)
factor at temp. 900 C, stress 500V/mm
to 1000 v/mm and frequency 40 Hz to
62 Hz.

CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Neutralization value 0.03 mg KOH/g (maximum)
Neutralization value after oxidation 0.40 mg KOH/g (maximum)
Total sludge after oxidation 0.10% weight (maximum)
PCB Content Free from PCB
STANDARDS Performance and testing of oil shall comply
with the latest revision of the relevant
standards BS 148 : 1972, IEC-60296 or
latest revision there on.

384
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 35. FEATURES & ACCESSORIES OF TRANSFORMER:
a) Bushing Insulator on HT and LT.
b) Arcing horns on HT and LT bushings.
c) Remote Tap Changer Control (RTCC) facility with AVR Relay in separate
RTCC PCM Panel.
d) Oil conservator.
e) Buchholz relays in main conservator oil pipe.
f) Tap Changer Protective Relay in between conservative and tap changer oil
pipe.
g) Conservator drain valve, breather and oil level gauge with alarm contact.
h) Pressure Relief Device (PRD).
i) Dial type thermometers with alarm and trip contracts.
j) CT for winding temperature shall be located at mid-phase (Y-phase) of the
transformer.
k) Radiators with valves.
l) Bladder/Airbag in conservator to separate air from oil.
m) One inspection hole with cover.
n) Facilities for lifting cover and coil assembly from tank.
o) Lifting lugs for lifting complete Transformer.
p) Base designed for rollers with bi-directional flanged rollers parallel to either
Centre line.
q) Tank oil sampling, draining valve and oil centrifuging outlets.
r) Tank earthing points.
s) Fans for forced cooling (ONAF).
t) All mounting accessories including rails (2 Nos. rails each 10 Meter long).
u) All equipment should be fully tropicalized.
v) Painting to approved colour and shade.
w) Rating nameplate and diagram plate of stainless steel having engraved letters
filled with black enamel paint.
x) The oil shall be supplied/ delivered in non-returnable sealed containers/
drums.
y) The oil shall be fresh, unused, cleaned and free from suspended matter or
sediment.
z) The test shall be carried out on the oil as to be supplied without drying and
degassing.
aa) Uninhibited oils must not contain anti-oxidant additives.
bb) Laminated, detailed Schematic Diagram of Control Circuit of Transformer & Tap
changer inside Marshalling kiosk.
cc) Dehydrating Silica-gel breather.
dd) Air release plug.
ee) Earthing terminals with lugs.
ff) Thermometer pockets.
gg) Winding temperature indicator with two contacts
hh) Bottom mounting channel for 20/26.66MVA & 10/13.33 MVA
ii) Operation and maintenance manual along with troubleshooting procedure and
installation guideline/manual shall be supplied with each transformer.

385
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 36 Following instructions to be followed for Submission of Test reports &
Calculation during drawing approval:
aa) All Type test Report and related routine test report shall be of same
transformer of same name plate serial no.
bb) Calculation of load loss shall be provided for load loss in all 3( three) tap
position (Nominal, Maximum, Minimum).

7.2.1.6 INFORMATION REQUIRED

The Tenderer/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information/Documents have to be submitted along with the
tender:-
(a) The Tenderer/Manufacturer shall submit with the bid the testing procedure & list of
testing/ measuring equipment, meters etc. used for Factory test witness.
(b) Construction, Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual.
(c) Manufacturer's authorization for (On Load tap Changer) OLTC from MR, Germany/
ABB, Sweden in prescribed Form (PG5A-5).
(d) Cross-sectional Drawing showing the arrangement of core and windings of the offered
type Transformer.
(e) Loss calculation, short circuit calculation and temperature rise calculation. Tenderer’s
quoted No load Loss and Full load loss shall be supported by loss calculation.
Moreover, Tenderer shall submit the characteristic curve (flux vs Loss/Kg) of core
materials.

7.2.1.6.1 TEST REPORTS:

Type Test Certificates, Reports & Special Tests for offered type similar MVA rating power
transformer for same voltage class from any short-circuit testing liaison (STL) Member
[http://www.stl-liaison.org/web/03_Members.php] Testing Organization or Laboratory
as per relevant IEC standard are to be furnished with the Bid, otherwise the bid will be treated
as non-responsive and will not be considered for further evaluation. The type test report shall
include at least the following tests along with results:

7.2.1.6.2 ROUTINE TESTS

a) Measurement of insulation resistance.
b) Measurement of Voltage ratio test.
c) Measurement of Winding resistance at each Tap position.
d) Vector group test.
e) Measurement of No-load loss & current.
f) Measurement of short circuit impedance and load loss.
g) Power Frequency (Separate source voltage) withstands test.
h) Transformer Oil test.

7.2.1.6.3 TYPE TESTS

a) Temperature Rise Test
b) Lightning Impulse Test
7.2.1.6.4 SPECIAL TESTS
a) Short Circuit withstands test report of HV-LV.
7.2.1.7 CAPITALIZED COST:

386
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Bidder shall declare guaranteed No Load Loss and Full Load Loss value in GTP. Any
Tenderer quoted the No Load Loss & Full Load Loss above the upper limit of the loss
as mentioned in GTP (Section 8, Clause 8.18, Sl No.3.9) in Tender Document will not
be considered for further evaluation & treated as non- responsive. The Tenderer who
will quote the No Load Loss & Full Load Loss below the lower limit of No Load Loss &
Full Load Loss as mentioned in GTP (Section 8, Clause 8.18, Sl No.3.9) In that case
during evaluation Capitalization cost will be calculated only on the basis of the lower
limit of No Load Loss & Full Load Loss. Tenderers quoted No load Loss and Full load
loss shall be supported by loss calculation, otherwise the bid will also be treated as
non- responsive.
The fixed and running losses are to be low as consistent with reliable and economical
use of materials. The cost of losses is to be minimized and the following capitalized
parameters will be used in the evaluation of the transformer:
C = 68,706 x e x P0 + 54,964 x e x PFL
Where,
C = Capitalized cost of transformer loss in Bangladesh Taka.
e = Energy Cost, Tk. 6.00/KWh
PF = Full Load losses at rated voltage, normal ratio and rated frequency in ONAF
L condition at 750C in KW + Auxiliary loss in KW
P0 = No load losses at rated voltage, normal ratio and rated frequency in KW
The cost of energy (C) will be added to the quoted prices to arrive at the evaluated
cost of the transformer.
The contract will be cancelled if losses exceed the guaranteed value by an amount in
excess of followings:
Total losses : 10%
Component : 15% of each component loss (Unless the total losses exceeds 10%).
7.2.1.8 SHIPPING:
All the delicate components shall be dismantled and packed in strong wooden boxes
having inside lined with metallic sheets with proper sealing to protect the content from
accidental direct exposure to weather during storage. The holes of the transformer
tank shall be sealed with proper metal plate and gaskets to prevent leakage of oil and
its contamination with atmospheric moisture. The transformer shall be shipped with
radiators, busing conservator etc. dismantled but the tank filled with oil. The
transformer oil from radiators and conservator shall be shipped in non-returnable
drums. The bushing shall be shipped in oil sealed containers to avoid moisture
absorption during shipment and storage. Oil shall be complying with IEC-60296.

7.2.1.9 The bushings shall have high factor of safety against leakage to ground and shall be
so located as to provide adequate electrical clearances between bushings and
grounded parts. Bushings of identical voltage rating shall be interchangeable. All
bushings shall be equipped with suitable terminals of approved type and size & shall
be suitable for bimetallic connection. The insulation class of the high voltage neutral
bushing shall be properly coordinated with the insulation class, of the high voltage
winding.Each bushing shall be so coordinated with the transformer insulation so that
all flash over will occur outside the tank.All main winding and neutral leads shall be
brought out through “out door” type bushings which shall be so located that the full

387
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 flashover strength will be utilized and the adequate phase clearance shall realised.All
porcelain used in bushings shall be of the wet process, homogeneous and free from
cavities or other flaws. The glazing shall be uniform in colour and free from blisters,
burrs and other defects.

7.2.1.10 HT BUSHING:
Provide 3 porcelain outdoor type, oil filled, impulse tested bushing with arcing horns of
standard gap and bolted type terminal connectors, with head shrink rubber insulated
cap suitable for connection to the incomes leads of ACSR Grosbeak (636 MCM)
conductor.

7.2.1.11 LT BUSHING:
Provide 4 porcelain outdoor type bushing with bolted type connectors, suitable for
connection to outgoing leads of two numbers of 300 Sq.mm XLPE, single core copper
conductors per phase and suitable for head shrink termination.

7.2.1.12 FAULT CONDITIONS:

The transformer shall be capable of withstanding, on any tapping, for three seconds
without damage an external short circuit between phases. The transformer winding
shall be capable of withstanding for three seconds without damage a short circuit
between one phase and earth with the neutral of the transformer directly earthed. For
the purposes of this clause a fault level of 1800 MVA at the transformer 33KV terminals
shall be assumed.

Evidence shall be submitted with the Tender as to the extent to which the manufacturer
has provided or is able to prove either by calculation or test the ability of the specified
transformers to withstand on any tapping, without damage under service conditions,
the terminal and dynamic effects of external short circuit.

The Bid shall state tin the Technical Schedule a brief description of those transformers
or parts thereof, which have been subjected to short circuit tests or for which short
circuit calculations are available. It is preferred that this information relates to designs
comparable with the transformers bidder but in the event this is not so the Engineer
reserves the right to require calculating to prove that the design of transformers
tendered will satisfactorily comply with this clause : such calculations being in
accordance with the latest revision of IEC/ BS standard.

7.2.1.13 NOISE:
Vibration and noise levels of all transformers and auxiliary plant shall be in accordance
with the IEC 60076-10 and its latest version. The contract price shall include noise
level tests to be carried out on one transformer.

7.2.1.14 HARMONIC SUPPRESSION:

Transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of harmonic
voltages especially the third and fifth harmonics and to minimize the detrimental effects
resulting there from.

388
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.2.1.15 IMPEDANCE AND REGULATION:
The Bidder shall be state in the Technical Schedules guaranteed values of impedance
measured on normal and extreme tapping and the voltage regulation from no load to
CMR at unity power factor and at 0.9 lagging power factor with constant voltage across
the higher voltage windings.
7.2.1.16 MAGNETIC CIRCUIT:
The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharge
development of short circuit paths internally or to the earthed clamping structure and
the production of flux components normal to the plane of the laminations. Each
lamination shall be insulated with a material stable under the action of pressure and
hot oil.
The winding structure and major insulation shall be designed to permit an unobstructed
flow of cooling oil through core cooling oil ducts to ensure efficient core cooling.

The magnetic circuit shall be insulated from all structural parts and shall be capable of
withstanding a test voltage to core bolts and to the frame of 2000 volts rms for one
minute.

7.2.1.17 FLUX DENSITY:

Cores shall constructed from clod rolled grain oriented steel sheets. Provided the
contractor can provide adequate evidence that there will be no adverse effects due to
stray flux heating of core with the quality of steel employed, designs may be offered
such that when operating under the most onerous conditions, flux density in any part
of the magnetic circuit does not exceed 1.7 Tesla.

The Contractor shall determine the operating conditions under which the maximum
flux density will be attained within the following simultaneously applied limits.

- Frequency : 50 Hz
- LV and HV : Up to but not exceeding the specified maximum System voltage.
Voltage
- Load : The transformer may be subjected to intermittent overloading of
150% rated MVA at 0.8 power factor lagging in accordance with IEC
60076-7.

The maximum flux densities anticipated under these conditions are to be stated in
Technical Schedules (GTP).
7.2.1.18 WINDINGS:

a) The windings shall be of high-conductivity electrolytic copper.

b) The transformer windings shall have uniform insulation as defined in the
latest revision of IEC standard. The insulation of the coils shall be such as
to develop the full electrical strength of the windings. All materials used in
the insulation and assembly of the windings shall be insoluble, non-catalytic
389
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 and chemically inactive in the hot transformer oil, and shall not soften or
otherwise be adversely affected under the operating conditions.
c) The transformers shall be designed to withstand the impulse voltage levels
and the power frequency voltage tests specified in the Technical Schedules.
d) The winding shall be located in a manner which will ensure and that they
remain Electro-statically balanced and that their magnetic centers remain
coincident under all conditions of operation.
e) The winding shall also be thoroughly seasoned during manufacture by the
application of axial pressure at a high temperature for such length of time
as will ensure that further shrinkage is unlikely to occur in service.
f) All electrical connections within windings shall be brazed to withstand the
shocks, which may occur through rough handling and vibration during
transport switching and other transient service conditions.
g) Coil clamping rings shall be of the on on-magnetic steel or insulating materials built
up from flat laminations. Auxiliary laminated material other then Bakelite paper is
not to be used. Where Bakelite paper rings are used with the layers of paper lying
in the axial direction, the rings may be relied upon to provide the major insulation
between the windings and frame subject to there being adequate creepage
distance. Any metal pieces in contact with laminated rings shall be designed and
secured so that they do not weaken the electrical or the mechanical properties of
the rings. If the winding is built up of section or of disc-coils separated by spacers,
the clamping arrangement shall be ensure that equal pressure are applied to all
columns of spacers.
h) The winding shall be so designed that all coil assemblies of identical voltage
ratings shall be interchangeable and field repairs can be readily done,
without special equipment. The coils shall be supported between adjacent
sections by insulating spacers and the barriers, bracings and other
insulation used in the assembly of the windings shall be arranged to ensure
a free circulation of the oil and to reduce hot sports in the windings. The
insulation paper shall be of high quality and the value of degree of
polymerization shall not be less than 1200 dp and the necessary test
certificate shall be submitted along with the Pre –delivery inspection report.
Provision shall be made in the tank, for taking sample, in future, of paper for
testing purpose and location shall be easily accessible and indicated on the
transformer tank by affixing special caution plate.

7.2.1.19 INTERNAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENT:

All metal parts of the transformer with the exception of the individual core lamination,
core bolts
and associated individual clamping plates, shall be maintained at some fixed potential.
The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a copper
strap and the bottom main core clamping structure shall be earthen by one or more of
the following methods:
- by connection through vertical tie rods to the top structure.
- by direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of
the core and windings.
390
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - by connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main
earth connection to the tank.
The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point through a
removable link placed in an accessible position just beneath an inspection opening in
the tank cover and which, by disconnection, will enable the insulation between the core
and clamping plates, etc. to be tested at voltages up to 2 KV for the purpose of
checking deterioration during service. The connection to the link shall be on the same
side of the core as the main earth connection. These requirements are mandatory.
Magnetic circuits having an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with a
separate link for each individual section and the arrangement of the connections shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Where oil ducts or insulated barriers parallel to the plane the laminations divide the
magnetic circuits into two or more electrically separates parts, the ducts and insolating
barriers which have the thickness greater than 0.25, mm are to be bridged with tinned
copper strips so inserted as to maintain electrical continuity.
Where coil-clamping rings are of metal at each potential, each rings shall be connected
to the adjacent core clamping structure on the same side of the transformer as the
main earthing connection.

Main earthing connections shall be a cross-sectional area of not less than 100mm2
but connections inserted between laminations may have cross sectional areas
reduced 20mm2 when in close thermal contact with the core.
7.2.1.20 CORE

The core shall be constructed from high grade cold rolled non-ageing grain oriented
silicon steel laminations, M4 or Superior Grade. Only prime quality CRGO sheets
should be used in the transformers and no Second/Defective/Scrap CRGO finds way
into transformers. Therefore regarding quality control following documents are to be
furnished with the Post – delivery inspection report.

1. Invoices of supplier
2. Mill’s test certificate
3. Packing list.
4. Bill of lading
5. Bill of entry certificate by custom
6. Description of material, electrical analysis, Physical inspection, certificate for surface
defects, thickness and width of the material.

It is to note that, using seconds/defective CRGO sheets or load losses found to be

more than stipulated limit, heavy penalty will be imposed or the suppliers will be black
listed.

7.2.1.21 TRANSFORMER TANK

The Transformer Tank shall be welded construction fabricated from high tensile steel
plate and shall be designed to withstand full vacuum. The transformer shall have air
seal type oil conservator tank at the top.

391
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 a) The transformer tank and cover shall be fabricated from good commercial
grade low carbon steel suitable for welding and of adequate thickness.
b) The transformers tank shall be capable of withstanding full vacuum without
deflection.
c) The plates (tank & Cover) shall have the following minimum thickness.
d)

Length of Transformer Tank Minimum Thickness

Side Plates Bottom Plates
Less than 2500 mm Min 6 mm Min 9 mm

Greater than 2500 mm Min 9 mm Min 12 mm

e) The base of each track shall be so designed that it is possible to move the
complete transformer unit in any direction without injury when using rollers,
plates or rails. A design, which required that slide rails be placed in a
particular position, is not to be used. 20/26 MVA and lower rate
transformers shall be provided with base plates having bi-directional wheels
for placing on rails.
f) An inspection window with a welded flange & a bolted cover shall be
provided on the tank cover. The manhole shall be of a sufficient size to ease
access to the lower ends of the bushings, terminals etc.
g) Lifting eyes or lugs shall be provided on all parts of the transformers
requiring independent handling during assembly or dismantling. In addition,
the transformer tank shall be provided with lifting lugs and bosses properly
secured to the sides of the tank for lifting the transformers either by crane
or by jacks. The design of the tank, the lifting lugs and bosses shall be such
that the complete transformer assembly filled with oil can be lifted with the
use of those lugs without any damage or distortions.
h) The tank shall be provided with two suitable copper alloy or any other
suitable material lugs for the purpose of grounding.
i) The tank shall be so designed that with the cores and windings in position
there shall be no possibility of air or gas being trapped when filling the tank
with oil. Likewise, water shall not be trapped on the exterior of the tank.
j) The tank shall be fitted with pockets for a thermometer and the bulb of a
winding temperature indicator and an oil temperature indicator.
k) Necessary drain valves, filter valves, vales to take oil sample etc shall be
provided.

7.2.1.21.1 Conservator Tank

A conservator tank shall be mounted above the highest point of the oil circulating
system of the equipment. Tanks shall be formed of substantial steel plate. Connections
between the main tank and the conservator shall be such that air or gas is not
392
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 entrapped and the Buchholz relays can be correctly installed. One end of the
conservator shall be fixed by bolts so that it can be removed to enable the tank to be
cleaned. The capacity of each conservator tank shall be adequate to accommodate
the expansion and contraction of oil in the whole system, over the extreme range
possible in operation, i.e. equipment unenergised in an ambient temperature of 5 deg.
C to the condition corresponding to maximum oil temperature rise. Conservator shall
be fitted with:-
(a) A hydro compensator for separating oil and air. A dehydrating breather shall be
used for the air intake of the hydro compensator. Alarm for leak of the hydro
compensator shall also be provided.
(b) At least one magnetic oil level indicator type visible from ground level and
indicating the oil levels over the range specified above. The oil level indicator shall be
marked to indicate the correct oil level with the oil at a temperature of 5 deg. C, 30
Deg. C and 90 deg. C. The temperature markings shall preferably be integral with the
level indicating device but subject to the approval of the Authority.
(c) Low oil alarm initiating device.

7.2.1.21.2 Pressure Relief Device

The transformer shall be fitted with a pressure relief device designed to protect the
tank from damage and to control the expulsion of oil during an internal fault. The
pressure relief device shall be of the spring-loaded diaphragm type capable of opening
fully within two milliseconds of detecting an excess pressure, and shall fully reseal after
release of the exceeded pressure. Corrosion resistant materials shall be used and a
visual indication of operation shall be provided. Two pairs of normally open contacts
and a suitable terminal box shall be provided for remote electrical indication and
tripping.

7.2.1.21.3 Gaskets
Any gaskets provided with the transformers shall be suitable for making oil tight joints,
and there shall be no deleterious effects of either gaskets or oil when the gaskets are
continuously in contact with hot oil. No gaskets shall be used in which the material of
the material of the gasket is mounted on a textile backing. Exterior gaskets shall be
weatherproof and shall not be affected by strong sunlight.

7.2.1.21.4 Oil
All transformers shall be filled to the required level with new, unused, clean, standard
mineral oil after treatment in compliance with IEC 60296 & BS 148.

7.2.1.22 ACCESSORIES

7.2.1.22.1 Winding Temperature Indicator

The transformer shall be provided with a winding temperature indicator and combined
alarm and trip relays of approved design. The alarm and trip settings shall be
adjustable. The winding Temperature Indicator shall also be provided with badditional
contacts for automatic 'start/stop' of cooling plant (fans). It shall be fitted with dial

393
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 indicator calibrated in degrees Celsius and fitted with a hand reset pointer the highest
temperature attained. The winding temperature indicator shall be so mounted in the
transformer marshalling kiosk so that the dial is not more than 1500 mm from ground
level. The cover shall be equipped with a viewing aperture of adequate size, fitted with
clear, reinforced glass.

7.2.1.22.2 Oil Temperature Indicators

The transformer shall be provided with an oil temperature indicator of approved design
incorporating contacts and relay(s) for initiating alarms and trips. The indicator shall
be fitted with a dial calibrated in degrees Celsius, with a hand reset pointer to register
the highest temperature attained.
The oil temperature indicator shall be mounted in the transformer marshalling kiosk so
that the dial is not more than 1500 mm from the ground level and the cover shall be
equipped with viewing aperature of adequate size, fitted with clear, reinforced glass.

7.2.1.22.3 Buchholz relay

A Buchholz relay with alarm and tripping contacts to detect accumulation of gas and
sudden changes of oil pressures, complete with two shut-off valves and flange
coupling to permit easy removal without lowering oil level in the main tank, a bleed
valve for gas venting and test valve shall be provided. The relay shall be provided with
a test cock suitable for a flexible pipe connection for checking its operation & taking
gas sample.

7.2.1.22.4 Breathers
Each transformer and tap changer conservator shall be provided with a silica gel
breather complete with oil seal, oil level indication window and a sight glass for
inspection of the silica gel. Due to the climatic conditions at site, this breather shall be
liberally sized and one size larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate climate.

A visual indication of the extent to which the drying agent has absorbed moisture is
preferred, showing how much active material remains effective.

Maintenance free breather shall have sensor controlled heating apparatus. The supply
voltage shall be 230V AC. Adequate cable shall be provided to connect with
marshalling box.

7.2.1.22.5 Padlocks
The supplier shall provide padlock able handles and non-ferrous padlocks with
duplicate keys for tap changer control panel and kiosks door to prevent all
unauthorized access and operation.

7.2.1.22.6 the other accessories shall be provided is listed below

a) Ladder permanently fixed with transformer tank
b) Dial Thermometer with pocket for oil temperature indicator with one set of alarm and
one set of trip contacts and maximum reading pointer.

394
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.2.1.22.7 Marshalling Kiosk (box):

Marshalling box shall be connected at one side of transformer. It shall consist of

WTI(winding temperature indicator) and OTI(oil temperature indicator), magnetic oil
gauge and Buchholz relay and other control terminals. WTI are in two numbers, one
for HV and other for LV. It shall also consist of all auxiliary contactors as required in
the order to make necessary potential free contacts for remote alarm and tripping, a
heater which is used to absorb the moisture in the box, SPN socket outlet, complete
with switch and HRC fuse for hand lamp connection.
7.2.1.22.8 Painting
The minimum standards acceptable are :
a) cleaning by shot blasting to Grade Sa 2.5 of ISO 8501-1
b) All sheet steelwork shall be degreased, pickled and phsphated in
accordance with IEC 60076.
c) Interior surface of mechanism chambers, boxes and kiosks, after
preparation, cleaning and priming shall be painted with one coat of zinc
chromate primer, one coat of phenolic based undercoating, followed by one
coat of phenolic based finishing paint to white colour followed ba a final coat
of anti-condensation white paint of a type and make to the approval of
purchaser. A minimum overall paint film thickness of 150 micons shall be
maintained throughout.
d) Exterior steel work and metalwork, after preparation and priming shall be
painted with one coat od xinc chromate primer, one coat of phenolic based
under coating and two coat of micaceous iron oxide paint, then painted with
final coat of phenolic based hard gloss finishing paint of the light grey shade
to provide an overall minimum paint thickness of 200 microns.

7.2.1.22.9 Galvanizing

All galvanizing shall be carried out by the hot dip process, in accordance with
specification ISO 1460. However, high tensile steel nuts, bolts and spring washers
shall be electro galvanized. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous and
uniform. It shall be free from acid spots and shall not scale, blister or be removable
by handling or packing. There shall be o impurities in the zinc or additivies to the
galvanic bath which could have a detrimental effect on the durability of the zinc
coating.
Before pickling, all welding, drilling, cutting, grinding etc must be complete and all
grease, paint, varnish, oil, welding slag etc completely removed.
The weight of zinc deposited shall be in accordance with the staed in BS 729, ISO
1460 and shall be not less than 0.61Kg/sq. mtr. with minimum thickness of
86microns for items of thickness more than 5mm, 0.46Kg/sq.mtr. (64microns) for
items thickness between 2mm and 5 mm and minimum 0.33kg/sqmm (47microns)
for the item less than 2mm thick. Repair of galvanizing on site will generally not
permitted.

395
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.2.1.22.10 Terminal marking
Each terminal including the neutral shall be clearly marked on both the primary and
secondary side in accordance with the diagram of connection supplied with the
transformers.
The terminal marking shall be clear and permanent. Painted markings are not
acceptable. the winding shall be leveled as follows:
High voltage : 3 phases A B C
Low voltage : 3 phases and neutral a b c n

7.2.1.23 EVALUATION CRITERIA

a) The Tenders will be evaluated on the basis of the capitalized cost of the
Transformer losses.
b) Bidder will declared/ guaranteed No-Load loss and Full load loss value, otherwise
the bid will be rejected.
c) Bidders declared/ guaranteed percentage impedance value shall be within the
specified value, otherwise the bid will be rejected.

7.2.1.24 Acceptance criteria of transformer loss and percentage impedance during

factory test :
Transformer will be tested during technical orientation & quality acceptance and will
be accepted if the measured transformer losses are within the offered value or within
the following tolerance with deduction of amount from the contract price as below:
i) Any component loss (No load loss or Full load loss) may exceed up to 15% of the
offered component loss, provided that the total loss((No load loss + Full load loss)
shall not exceed 10% of the offered total loss. If any component loss exceeds 15% of
the offered component loss, the full consignment will be rejected.
ii) Total loss (No load loss + Full load loss) may exceed up to 10% of the offered total
loss. If it exceeds 10%, the full consignment will be rejected.
iii) Percentage Impedance may vary up to 10% of the specified value. If the value
exceeds the tolerance (10%), the full consignment will be rejected.
Transformer will be tested during factory test witness and will be accepted if the
measured transformer losses are within the offered value or within the acceptable limit
as specified in (i), (ii) and (iii) provided an amount will be deducted from the Contract
price for the loss(s) exceeding the offered/declared loss(s) according to the following
formula:-
Amount to be deducted from the Contract price.
= Contract Price x {(Measured loss - Specified loss /declared loss) ÷ Specified
loss/declared loss} X %MT
Where,
Measured Loss (in = Measured Average No load Loss* 1+ Measured
KW) Average Full Load Loss* 2.
Offered Loss (in KW) = Offered No Load Loss + Offered Full load loss
Transformer Economic = 20 Years
Life
%MT (Percentage of Monetized Transformer) = % of the Monetized Transformer found
during factory test witness by NESCO's inspection team whose measured loss(s) (No
396
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 load loss or Full load loss or Both) exceed the offered loss (No load loss or Full load
loss or Both) but remain within acceptable limit. For example : If total no. of
transformers to be inspected is 80 and the no. of selected transformers during
QAT/pre-delivery inspection is 8, 6 nos. are found within the offered losses and 2 nos.
are found exceeding the offered losses then the %MT will be (2/8)x100=25%
* 1Measured Average No Load Loss = [Sum of the measured No-load losses of
the tested transformer(s) exceeding the offered No-load loss ÷ Nos. of tested
transformer(s) which exceeds the offered No-load loss]
* 2Measured Average Full Load Loss = [Sum of the measured Full-load losses of
the tested transformer(s) which exceeding the offered Full-load loss ÷ Nos. of tested
transformer(s) which exceeds the offered Full-load loss

7.2.1.25 Mandatory SPARE PARTS

The Supplier shall provide for every two transformers the following mandatory spares:
•One HV Bushing
•One LV Bushing
•One complete set of bi-metallic connectors for both HV & LV bushings. (not only
connector, complete set of connector (connector, other parts & accessories) must
be provided)
• One OTI and one WTI (for every four transformers).

7.2.1.26 Approval of Drawings

Design, Drawing diagrams, Specification and Technical Particulars & Guarantees etc,
shall be submitted to the Superintending Engineer, Design & Inspectoin, NESCO Ltd,
Rajshahi by the Supplier for approval, prior to the manufacturing of the goods. The
Supplier shall have to submit 3 (three) sets of the same for approval within 15 (fifteen)
days from the date of signing Contract. The submitted Design, Drawing diagrams,
Specification and Technical Particulars & Guarantees etc must be approved by Design
& Inspectoin, NESCO Ltd, Rajshahi prior to the manufacturing of the goods.

The supplier shall submit the following drawings in AutoCAD format and in hard copy
for the approval of the purchaser within commencement period.

Full Technical Specification and Guaranteed Technical Particulars

Max. Temp. Rise of Winding & Oil over 400C ambient supported by Load Losses and
Heat Dissipation by Radiator and also Short Circuit Calculation along with thermal &
mechanical calculations on the basis of proposed Design Data
General outline drawing showing front, side elevation and plan of the transformer and
accessories with detailed dimensions. The clearances between HV and LV terminals
and ground should also to be shown.
Drawings of each type of bushings, lifting dimensions, clearance between HT and LT
terminals and ground, quantity of insulating oil, name plate details etc.
Large scale drawings of high and low-tension windings of the transformers showing
the nature and arrangement of insulators and terminal connections.
Schematic control and annunciation wiring diagram for all auxiliary equipment
(temperature indicator, alarm circuits, Buchholz relay, PRV, WTI, OTI, OLTC, cooling

397
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 control etc,Schematic diagram showing the flow of oil in the cooling system, Large
scale drawing of high and low tension winding of the transformer showing the nature
and arrangement of insulation and terminal connections
Drawing/ Wiring diagram showing construction and mounting details of marshalling
boxes.
Operation and maintenance guide for transformer and OLTC.
Detailed loading drawing to enable the Purchaser to design and construct foundations
for the transformer.
Installation, Operation and maintenance manual along with troubleshooting procedure.

No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the
Testing Equipment until the technical data and drawings have been approved. The
manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
purchaser.
The cost of supplying drawings and specifications shall be borne by the supplier.

At the time of delivery of Equipment, the supplier shall supply Five (5) sets of all
approved technical data and drawings in bound book form along with manufacturer’s
original catalogue of the Equipment to the Project office.

7.2.1.27 Tests at Manufacturers Works:

7.2.1.27.1 General
Functional electrical, material, mechanical and hydraulic tests shall be carried out at
manufacturers’ premises. The extent and method of recording the results shall be
agreed by the Purchaser in ample time to enable the tests to be satisfactorily witnessed
or to make any changes to the proposed program of tests.

7.2.1.27.2 Material Tests:

The supplier shall provide test pieces free of charge as required to enable the quality
of the material to be determined at the supplier’s expense. Purchaser may at its own
discretion and by specific arrangement accept certified particulars of tests carried out
in the absence of his authorized representative.

7.2.1.27.3 Type Test:

Type tests are required on all items to prove the general design of the goods
offered. The Bidders shall submit the type test report of offered item from STL
member testing laboratories.

7.2.1.27.4 ROUTINE TESTS:

All items shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with the relevant latest
version of IEC, BS & BDS standards at the manufacturers works and shall include, but
not be limited to, an operational test.

398
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.2.1.28 TECHNICAL ORIENTATION AND QUALITY TEST WITNESS :
The following test shall be carried out as per latest version of IEC or equivalent standard
unless otherwise mentioned at the manufacturer premises or other places where the
test facilities are available:-

Acceptance Tests:-
1. Measurement of turn ratio test;
2. Vector group test;
3. Measurement of winding resistance;
4. Measurement of insulation resistance;
5. Measurement of no load loss & no-load current;
6. Measurement of impedance voltage & load loss;
7. Dielectric withstands Tests;
8. Transformer oil test;
9. Temperature rise test.
10. Separate source voltage withstand test.
12. Tap-changer operation test
14. Dimension and physical check.
15. Magnetic Balance Test
16. Bucholz, PRD, WTI, OTI Operation Check
17. WTI, OTI Operational Accuracy Check
18. Bushing CT Test

The purchaser can carry-out the testing of any no. of transformers during Quality Test
Witness. But, the testing of transformers during Quality Test Witness will not be less
than 10% at random basis of the transformer ready for inspection but in any case it will
not be less than 3 nos. The manufacturer will provide all arrangements for the testing
of transformers desired by the purchaser in his factory.

Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of
charge such assistance, labor, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and
instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out
such test efficiently. These test shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard
or equivalent and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed.

As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes
the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to
that effect.

Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser
shall have the right to reject any of the item or complete batch if necessary. In that
case Supplier have to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any
financial involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not
conforming with the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier
will in no way be relieved from the responsibility of replacing them on making them
good at their own cost, despite the Equipment were found good at the time of Factory
Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any
399
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 warranty or other obligations under the contract. No goods shall be packed, prepared
for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved and written instruction have been
received by the Purchaser.

REMOTE CONTROL PANELS:

The remote control panels shall be floor mounted sheet steel cubicles of approved
type, layout and color RAL7035 shall be provided for each transformer. Panel width
will be not more than 600mm. Each shall form a complete enclosure with lockable rear
doors and shall be fitted with interior lamp, door switch, heaters, cable gland plates for
bottom entry of cables and all other equipment to provide the features specified, the
standard requirements (which may be varied to suit manufacturer’s design) being as
follows:
Instruments:
Voltmeter (voltage at the low voltage terminals of the transformer)
Tap position indicator with integral or separate scale to indicate the no-load LV Voltage
in kV appropriate to each winding tap.

Relays:

AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE CONTROL

Controls:
Automatic/Non-automatic voltage control selector switch
Remote/Supervisory tap change control selector switch
Pistol grip selector switch with centre zero
AVR voltage reference adjuster

Indications and Alarms:

Tap change in progress – white lamp
Tap change out of step – amber lamp
Tap change incomplete – amber
Tap change control on “local”
Tap change control on auto/manual
Group 1 Air forced Cooling equipment running – white
Group 1 Air forced Cooling over current alarm – amber
Group 2 Air forced Cooling equipment running – white
Group 2 Air forced Cooling over current alarm – amber
Forced cooling failure–amber lamp
VT Fail alarm – amber
Supply voltage to OLTC failure – amber lamp
Remote control schemes shall be entirely suitable for operation with the distance between the
transformer and remote control panels as shown on the Specification drawings.

SUPERVISORY CONTROL

Requirements

Transformer tap change control will be effected from the sub-station control room with facilities
for remote control from the Distribution Control Centre. All necessary connections, indications,
auxiliary switches, relays and changeover switches to meet supervisory control requirements
shall be provided and connected under this Contract to terminal blocks in the remote control
panels. The supply and installation of the multicore control cables between the remote control
panels and the Plant/Telecontrol Interface Cubicle shall be provided under the Contract.

400
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
The following supervisory facilities are required:

Controls:

i) Supervisory selection of auto/non-auto voltage control.

ii) Tap change raise/lower by direct operation of tap changer.
iii) Tap change blocking on/off.
iv) Remote/Supervisory selection “Override”
v) Parallel/Independent control.

Indications and Alarms:

i) Tap position indication by means of transducer with 4 – 20mA dc output range proportional
to step increment.
ii) Tap change out of step alarm.
iii) Buchholz and winding temperature non-trip alarm.
iv) Tap change control on Local/Supervisory.
v) Parallel/Independent, master/follower.
vi) Tap change blocking on/off.
vii) Tap change control on Automatic/Manual.

All contacts for supervisory alarms and indications shall be potential free.

7.2.2 Technical Specification of 33/.415KVA, 200KVA Transformer

7.2.2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION:

1. Installation Outdoor, Tropical, High Rainfall &

Humidity
2. Type Core
3. Coolant Mineral oil
4. Method of Cooling ONAN
5. Phases 3 (Three)
6. Frequency 50 Hz.
7. Winding Two windings of high conductivity
copper
8.
KVA Rating 200 KVA
9.
Rated Voltage at no-load 33/0.415 kV
10.
Vector Group Dyn11
11.
Percentage Impedance at 4%
750C, %
12. No Load Loss Max 430 Watts
13. Load loss at 750 C Max 2800 Watts
14. Maximum Temperature Rise at a 600C for Winding measured by
full load Over 400C ambient ) Resistance Method.
temperature with tap changer in b 500C for Top Oil measured by
principal position. ) Thermometer Method.
7.2.2.2 Major Components

H.T WINDING :
Nominal rated voltage 33 kV
Maximum system voltage 36 kV
401
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Basic insulation level 170 kVp
(minimum)
+1x2.5%, 0, -3x2.5% of rated kV & all fully
rated capacity. Tap Changer shall be off
Tap Changer
load type, manually operated from an
external five-position mechanism.
Inter phase connection Delta
Bushings Porcelain, outdoors type with arcing horns
of standard gap, mounted on top of tank.
Quantity - 3 Nos.
Power frequency withstand 70 kV
voltage for one minute
L.T WINDING :
Nominal rated voltage 415 volts
Highest system voltage 457 volts
Inter phase connection Y (Wye) with neutral brought out.
Bushings Porcelain, outdoor type, mounted on the
side of tank. (Longest side) Quantity – 4
nos.
Power frequency withstand
voltage for one minute 2.5 kV

Transformer Oil :
Application Insulating mineral oil for Transformer. It
will be free from PCB (Poly Chlorinated
Biphenyl)
Grade of oil Class-1
a) Physical Properties
Appearance Liquid and free from suspended matter
or sediment
Density at 200 C 0.895 g/cm3 (Maxm.)
Flash point (Closed cup) 1400 C (Minm.)
Kinematics Viscosity at -150 C 800 cSt. (Maxm.)
Kinematics Viscosity at 200 C 40 cSt. (Maxm.)
Pour point -300 C (Maxm.)
b) Electrical Properties
Dielectric Strength at 50 Hz (with New untreated oil, shall go through
2.5 mm standard gap and 40 mm filtration treatment before the oils are
standard depth) introduced into the apparatus or
equipment. The break down voltage of
this oil shall be more than 50 kV.
Loss tangent/Dielectric
dissipation factor at temp. 900 C,
0.005 (Maxm.)
stress 500V/mm to 1000 V/mm
and frequency 40 Hz to 62 Hz.
c) Chemical Properties
Neutralization value 0.03 mg KOH/g (Maxm.)

402
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Neutralization value after 0.40 mg KOH/g (Maxm.)
oxidation
Total sludge after oxidation 0.10% weight (Maxm.)
PCB Content Free from PCB (Poly Chlorinated
Biphenyl)
d) Standards Performance and testing of oil shall
comply with the latest revision of the
relevant standards BS 148 : 1972, IEC-
60296 or latest revision there on.

7.2.2.3 Features and Accessories

a) All bolts and nuts connected with transformer tank, conservator, radiator etc.
shall be of non-ferrous metal. If it is ferrous metal, it shall be hot dip galvanized
as per standard ASTM A90/ BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
b) Lugs for lifting & towing complete unit.
c) Facilities for lifting core & coil assembly.
d) Base designed for platform mounting on poles.
e) First filling of new oil shall comply to the latest revision of IEC-60296 standard
or other equivalent standards.
f) Each H.T. bushing shall have bolted type bimetallic connector suitable for
accommodating ACSR conductor having Dia. range from 9mm to 14.5mm.
g) Each L.T. bushing shall have bolted type bimetallic connector for
accommodating copper/AAC of area range 2x70mm2 to 2x120mm2 .
h) The L.T. bushing shall be installed on the side/ top lengthwise of the transformer
body. However radiator shall be avoided on this side on the body.
i) Dial thermometer for oil temperature mounted on L.T. side of the tank.
j) Earthing terminals at the bottom corners of Tank.
k) Name plate with transformer rating & winding diagram made of stainless steel
shall have engraved letters filled with black enamel.
l) The tank & radiator or flanged radiator shall be painted with two coats of gray
finishing paint on suitable prime coats.
m) Transformer capacity with Sl.No. and NESCO Contract No. should be marked
with emboss/ engrave on the transformer tank adjacent to name plate easily
visible from ground.
n) HT and LT bushing shall be outdoor porcelain type
o) Set of sundries such as similar wiring terminals boards and glands for multi-
core 0.415KV Power cables, 33KV terminal connectors suitable for ACSR etc.

For Conservator Type :

a) Transformer tank completes with covers, necessary openings & gaskets.
b) Complete oil preservation system consisting of an oil conservator with shut-off
valve oil level gauge. The system shall have valve for filter press inlet & oil
drain. The oil sampling valve & dehydrating breather shall be provided.

7.2.2.4 Information Required

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing Specification and Technical Data for
crucial components of offered 33/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11 distribution
transformer.
403
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 b) Detail dimensional drawings of offered 33/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11
distribution transformer.
c) Manufacturer's valid ISO 9001 Certificate;

7.2.2.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA OF TRANSFORMER LOSS AND PERCENTAGE IMPEDANCE DURING

FACTORY TEST WITNESS
Transformer will be tested during factory test witness and will be accepted if the
measured transformer losses are within the specified value or within the following
tolerance with deduction of money from the quoted/ contract price as below :
i) Each component loss (No load loss or Full load loss) may exceed up to 15% of the
specified component loss, provided that the total losses cannot be exceeded 10%
of the specified total losses.
ii) Percentage Impedance may vary up to ± 10 % of the specified value.
iii) The purchaser can carryout the testing of any no. of transformers during pre-
delivery inspection. But, the testing of transformers during pre-delivery inspection
will not be less than 10% at random basis of the transformer ready for inspection
but in any case it will not be less than 3 nos. The manufacturer will provide all
arrangements for the testing of transformers desired by the purchaser in his
factory.
iv) If the results of any transformer exceeds the specified losses and impedance (each
component loss exceeds more than 15% or total loss exceeds more than 10% of
the specified losses or percentage impedance exceeds 4%±10% then the whole
lot will be rejected or on request of the supplier/manufacturer every transformer
may be tested (Transformer losses, percentage impedance, vector group test etc.)
at his factory premises/CERS, NESCO by the NESCO inspection team. If the said
transformers are tested by the NESCO inspection team at the
manufacturers/suppliers premises, then the testing fees at the rate of Tk. 2000/-
(Two thousand) per transformer shall be paid by the supplier through invoice in
advance. If the said transformers are tested at CERS, NESCO all the expenditure
for carrying, loading/unloading and testing fees fixed by the CERS are to be borne
by the supplier in advance. After completion of the test, the transformer passes the
test will be properly sealed by the inspection team. The supplier will be liable to
protect those seal up to delivery to the NESCO’s designated Store(s).
The transformers which pass the tests will be accepted by NESCO subject to
fulfillment of the other qualification criteria as per contract. The remaining
transformers failed to qualify the tests will be rejected.
v) If the measured loss(es) (No load loss or Full load loss or Both) of the tested
sample transformer(s) during factory test witness by the NESCO's inspection team
and test performed by BUET/ DUET/ CUET/ KUET/ RUET exceed the specified
loss (No load loss or Full load loss or Both) but remain within acceptable limit as
specifiec in clause 7.11(i) & (ii), then an amount will be deducted from the Contract
price for the loss(s) exceeding the specified loss(s) (No load loss or Full load loss
or Both) according to the following formula :
Amount to be deducted from the Contract price
= Contract Price x {(Measured Loss - specified Loss) ÷ specified Loss} x %MT
Where, Contract = Total Contract Price
Price
Measured = Measured Average No-load Loss* 1
+ Measured Average
Loss Full Load Loss* 2.

404
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Specified = Specified No Load Loss + Specified Full load loss
Loss

%MT (Percentage of Monitized Transformer) = % of the Monitized Transformer

found during factory test witness by the NESCO's inspection team and test
performed by BUET/ DUET/ CUET/ KUET/ RUET whose measured loss(es) (No
load loss or Full load loss or Both) exceed the specified loss (No load loss or Full
load loss or Both) but remain within acceptable limit. For example : If total no. of
transformers to be inspected is 100 and the no. of selected transformers during
pre-delivery inspection is 10, 8 nos. are found within the specified losses and 2
nos. are found exceeding the specified losses then the %MT will be
(2/10)x100=20%
*1
Measured Average No Load Loss = [Sum of the measured No-load losses of
the tested transformer(s) exceeding the
specified No-load loss ÷ Nos. of tested
transformer(s) which exceeds the specified
No-load loss]
*2
Measured Average Full Load Loss = [Sum of the measured Full-load losses of
the tested transformer(s) which exceeding the
specified Full-load loss ÷ Nos. of tested
transformer(s) which exceeds the specified
Full-load loss]

It is to be noted that if the measured value found less than or equal to specified value,
no benefits will be given to the supplier/ manufacturer. In this case, the tested
transformers whose loss (No load loss or Full load loss or Both) have not exceed the
specified loss, will not be taken into account for averaging the measured loss for using
the above formula.

7.2.2.6 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS

Calculation for the Max. Temp. Rise of Winding & Oil over 400C ambient supported by
Load Losses and Heat Dissipation by Radiator and also Short Circuit Calculation along
with thermal & mechanical calculations on the basis of proposed Design Data.

7.2.2.7 TRANSFORMER CORE AND COILS

Transformers core and coils must be new, unused, and clean.
Supporting frames of the core and coils of transformers shall be designed to
accommodate variations in tank height.
The core and coil assembly shall have the core and coils rigidly connected to the tank
and suitably closed lugs shall be provided for removing the core and coil assembly
from the tank.

Transformer Sl. no. should be marked with emboss on the Supporting frames of the
core and coils of each transformers minimum in 2(two) places.

7.2.3.8 TRANSFORMER SEALING

A satisfactory lid-sealing gasket shall be provided on each of these transformers to
maintain the seal at extremes of operating temperature. A cold oil level (COL) mark
shall be provided inside each transformer marked COL.

405
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.2.2.9 FINISHES
a) Painting
Painting ferrous metal work is to be provided with an effective vapour sealing paint
finish, applied generally in accordance with BS 5493 and /or other recognised
international standard.
Paint shall be applied to produce a uniform film. Edges corners, crevices, welds,
bolts, and rivets shall receive special attention to maintain the required thickness.
Before painting or filling with oil or compound, all un-galvanised parts shall be
completely clean and free from rust, scale and grease and all external rough metal
surfaces on the casting shall be filled.
The paint system shall be in accordance with best practice for hot and humid
locations in a highly aggressive environment. A description of the paint system to be
used and the proposed method of application shall be fully described in the Tender.
All external surfaces shall receive a minimum of three coats of paint. The primary
coat shall contain an approved rust inhibitor and shall be applied as soon as possible
after the completion of the surface preparation. The second coat shall be of oil and
weather resisting nature and have a shade of colour easily distinguishable from the
primary. The final coat shall be of oil and weather resisting and non-fading glossy
paint of a colour agreed by the Engineer.

b) Non-ferrous parts and Bright Steel parts

All exposed metal liable iron corrosion during transport is to be appropriately protected
by casting with an approved anti-rusting composition. Other non-ferrous parts shall be
adequately protected against corrosion during shipment or in service.

c) Galvanizing
Galvanizing where applicable shall be applied by the hot dipped process generally in
accordance with ASTM A90/ BS EN ISO 1461:1999 or equivalent standard of metal
surface unless specified otherwise.
The zinc coating shall be smooth clean and of uniform thickness and free from defects.
The preparation of galvanizing itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical
properties of the coated material.
All drilling, punching, cutting, shaping and welding of parts shall be completed and all
burrs shall be removed before the galvanizing process is applied.
Surfaces that are in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.

7.2.2.10 RATING PLATE

A brass or stainless steel rating plate shall be fitted to each transformer. The
information shall deeply etched including the diagram of the connections of the
windings, the vector diagram showing the general phase relations of the transformer,
and a diagrammatic plan of the transformer cover showing the terminal positions and
marking and other essential particulars. The plate shall be mounted in an accessible
position and preferably adjacent to the tapping switch if this is located on the side of
the tank.
The rating plate shall be fitted below the LV terminals. Rating and diagram plates shall
be attached by a 5 mm brass screw in each corner to 20 mm mild steel brackets welded
horizontally approximately 20 mm from the tank side. The following information is to
be provided on the rating and diagram plate in the English language – clearly and
indelibly marked.

406
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 ‫٭‬ Transformer type
‫٭‬ Manufacture’s name
‫٭‬ Manufacturer’s serial number
‫٭‬ Year of Manufacture
‫٭‬ Number of phases
‫٭‬ Rated power
‫٭‬ Rated frequency
‫٭‬ Rated voltages
‫٭‬ Rated currents
‫٭‬ Connection symbol
‫٭‬ Impedance voltage at rated current
‫٭‬ Type of cooling
‫٭‬ Total mass
‫٭‬ Mass of insulating oil
‫٭‬ Insulation levels
‫٭‬ Details regarding tapings
Each Transformer should be marked with emboss or welded on the body easily visible
from the ground, with letters of size mentioned against each word(s)/ sentence(s)
below:

NESCO (40 mm)

Contract No & Date: (20 mm)

Sl. No. :--------- of ------------KVA ---------- (20 mm)

Note :
a) Sl. No. ......................of ..............KVA ...... is meant for particular No. of the
Transformer out of the contracted quantity under this contract.
b) The above marking on the body of the transformer shall be done in addition
to the normal nameplate of the transformer. The nameplate shall be
continuous welded on the body of the Transformer before Pre-delivery
inspection. 7.2.2.11 TERMINAL MARKING
All transformers shall have the primary and secondary terminal markings
plainly and indelibly marked on the transformer adjacent to the relevant
terminal. These markings shall preferably be 25 mm in height. The terminal
marking shall be embossed on the body of the Transformer with respective
color code.

7.2.2.12 TERMINAL LEADS

Outgoing leads shall be brought out through bushings. The leads shall be such that
the core and coils may be removed with the least possible interference with these
leads, and they shall be specially supported inside the transformer to withstand the
effects of vibration and short circuits.

7.2.2.13 BUSHINGS
All bushings shall be porcelain clad, and shall be of the highest quality. They shall be
sealed in a manner to prevent ingress of moisture and to facilitate removal. The
neutral bushings and stems shall be identical to those provided for phase
terminations. Bushing stems, nuts and washers shall be made of brass.

407
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.2.2.14 EARTHING CONNECTIONS
Earthing connections shall be provided with connection facilities for 2x50 mm2
copper stranded conductor. The bolts shall be located on the lower side of the
transformer and be of M12 size; each shall be clearly indicated with an engraved
‘earth symbol’. Two earthing connections are required on each transformer.
7.2.2.15 GASKETS
Any gaskets provided with the transformers shall be suitable for making oil tight
joints, and there shall be no deleterious effects of either gaskets or oil when the
gaskets are continuously in contact with hot oil. No gaskets shall be used in which
the material of the material of the gasket is mounted on a textile backing. Exterior
gaskets shall be weatherproof and shall not be affected by strong sunlight.

7.2.2.16 OIL
All transformers shall be filled to the required level with new, unused, clean, standard
mineral oil after treatment in compliance with IEC 60296 & BS 148.

7.2.2.17 TAPINGS
Five voltage tapings shall be provided on the primary side of each transformer and
shall give: + 2.5%, 0,- 2.5%, – 5% and –7.5% steps of the primary nominal voltage.
The tapings shall be selected by an ‘off load’ tapping switch with an external hand
wheel with provision for looking onto a selected tapping. The switch shall have a
positive action designed to eliminate the possibility of stopping in an intermediate
position. The shaft shall be adequately sealed so that no seepage of oil occurs under
all conditions of service. The voltage operating positions, together with tap change
positions shall be clearly and indelibly marked.

408
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 SECTION 7.3

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF POWER CABLES &

CONDUCTOR

409
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.3 Power Cables, Conductor and Control Cables
7.3.0 11 KV XLPE Power Cables
7.3.1 General

Where a Manufacturer’s Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the

appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser,
any material or goods supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in
accordance with the latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified.
Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new
standard prior to the date of the letter or invitation to Bid, the reference shall be
deemed to be to such superseding standard.
Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be mentioned
in the Bid and shall be taken into consideration by the Purchaser before contract
placement.
The goods shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition
at the site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and
repairs. All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty
and the specified ambient temperature.

7.3.2 References
The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. It shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any
proposed Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or BS. All costs for
proving such equivalence are deemed included in the Contractors Bid Prices.

7.3.3 Climatic Condition

The offered XLPE U/G cables with jointing Kits must be suitable for working in the
climate conditions of Bangladesh as described below:
• Altitude : 0-300 meters above the sea level
• Maximum ambient temperature : 45 C
• Minimum ambient temperature : 2 C
• Humidity : 98 %
• Mean annual rainfall : 1500-3000 mm
• No. of annual rainy days : 80-120 days
• Average isokeraunic level : 80 days/year
• Pollution of ambient air : dust, salt, chemical.

410
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.3.4 General Requirement of 11KV XLPE 1x300 mm2,11KV XLPE 3x185 mm2 ,
150mm2, 95 mm2 Copper Cable.

11KV, XLPE, 1Cx 300-mm2 Copper Cable.

Item
Description of Items Unit Particulars
No.
1 System Voltage KV 11
2 Rated Voltage KV 6/10(12)
Cross sectional Area of
3 mm2 300
Conductors
Average thickness shall not be less
than 3.40 mm nominal value as per IEC
60502. However, thickness at any
4 Insulation thickness mm point may be less than nominal value
provided that the difference does not
exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal
value.
5 Manufacturing process Manufactured through VCV/CCV.
6 Conductor Material Copper
7 Shape of Conductor Compact Circular
8 Type of Conductor Screen Semi-conducting XLPE
Conductor Temperature at
9 C 250
end of short Circuit

Straight-through joint box for 11KV XLPE, 1-Core, 300 mm2 Copper cable

Item
Description of Items Particulars
No.

I Application For 11KV, 1-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper

Conductors
Ii Installation For underground horizontal mounting
Iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
Iv Cable conductor 300 mm2 1-core, Copper Conductors
The joint shall be proof against ingress of
V Construction
moisture and water
- Compression ferrules
- Valid filling tape
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating tape
- Heat shrinkable black/red dual wall
Vi Kit content
- Estomeric tube
- Roll spring
- Heat shrinkable outer jacket tube
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Misc. other material
411
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - Installation instructions

Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV, XLPE, 1-Core, 300 mm2 Copper cable

I Application For 11KV, 1-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper

Conductors
Ii Installation For Indoor switchgear terminations
Iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
Iv Cable conductor 300 mm2 1-core, Copper Conductors
V Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-
tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 300 mm2 Copper
Conductors
- Installation instructions

Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV, XLPE, 1-Core, 300 mm2 Copper
cable
I Application For 11KV, 1-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper
Conductors
ii Installation For outdoor installation on poles/structures
iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
iv Cable conductor 300 mm2 1-core Copper Conductors
v Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-
tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt
- Support insulator
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 300 mm2 Copper
Conductors
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
- Installation instructions

11KV, XLPE, 3Cx 185 mm2 Copper Cable

Item
Description of Items Unit Particulars
No.
1 System Voltage KV 11
2 Rated Voltage KV 6/10(12)

412
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Cross sectional Area of
3 mm2 3x185
Conductors
Average thickness shall not be less
than 3.40 mm nominal value as per IEC
60502. However, thickness at any
4 Insulation thickness Mm point may be less than nominal value
provided that the difference does not
exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal
value.
5 Manufacturing process Manufactured through VCV/CCV.
6 Conductor Material Copper
7 Shape of Conductor Compact Circular
Type of Conductor
8 Semi-conducting XLPE
Screen
Conductor Temperature
9 C 250
at end of short Circuit

Straight-through joint box for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 Copper
cable
i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2 Copper
Conductors
ii Installation For underground horizontal mounting
iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
iv Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductors
v Construction The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture
and water
vi Kit content - Compression ferrules
- Valid filling tape
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating tape
- Heat shrinkable black/red dual wall
- Estomeric tube
- Roll spring
- Heat shrinkable outer jacket tube
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Misc. other material
- Installation instructions

Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 Copper cable
i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2 Copper
Conductors
ii Installation For Indoor switchgear terminations
iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
iv Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductors
v Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-
tracking tubing
413
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 185 mm2 Copper
Conductors
- Installation instructions

Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 Copper cable
i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2 Copper
Conductors
ii Installation For outdoor installation on poles/structures
iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
iv Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductors
v Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-
tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt
- Support insulator
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 185 mm2 Copper
Conductors
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
- Installation instructions

Technical Requirements:
Cross Link Polyethylene (XLPE) cables shall be suitable for operation at voltage of
11KV between phases at continuous maximum conductor temperatures of 90 deg.
C. The cable shall be suitable in all respect for use on 11KV system with a nominal
three-phase fault level of 31.5 KA. The cables and associated fittings, joints and
termination shall be so designed to prevent damage to the cable or fittings, except
in the immediate vicinity of the fault, in the event of an insulation failure at any point
which results in a fault current to earth of 31.5KA for 1 sec.
Each core of Power Cable shall comprise 1x300 q. mm, 3x185 sq.mm. & 95 sq.mm
Copper Conductor XLPE Insulated, Copper screen and shall comply with IEC
60502, except as modified or extended by the requirement of the specification. The
length of cable on a drum shall be 500 Metre continuous or as specified by the
Purchaser and it shall be shipped on standard non-returnable steel drum, each

414
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 drum having stencilled on its side; size, type and length of cable, together with its
gross weight, net weight and contract number.

7.3.4.1 Conductors
The conductor shall be stranded compacted round copper conductor complying
the requirement of flexibility Class-2 of IEC 60228. The wires shall be made of high
conductivity copper and shall be stranded mid compacted. The copper used for
the conductor shall be of highest purity. The nominal area of conductor shall be 1×
300 sq. mm , 3× 185 sq. mm.
The minimum number of wires in conductor and the maximum DC resistance of
conductor shall be as per relevant IEC standard.

7.3.4.2 Conductor Screening

The conductor screen shall consist of an extruded layer of thermosetting semi
conducting compound and shall be continuous and cover the whole surface of the
conductor. The screen shall be firmly bonded to XLPE insulation. The minimum
thickness of conductor screen shall be 0.8 mm. (approx.)
The outer surface of the conductor screen shall be circular and free from
irregularities.
7.3.4.3 Insulation
The insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethylene tightly extruded over the
conductor screen. The insulation shall generally comply with IEC 60502.
The highest possible purity of insulation material is required. The Bider shall
confirm that adequate precautions are taken to remove contaminants and to
eliminate the introduction of particles of contaminants during material handling or
extrusion process.
The Cable shall be manufactured through VCV/CCV.
The insulation material shall be cross-linked by a dry process. A cross-linking
process using steam curing will not be permitted.

7.3.4.4 Insulation Thickness

The thickness of insulation shall be determined by taking the average of number
of measurements and shall be not less than the values tabulated in IEC Publication
60502.
Insulation thickness shall not depart from the specified nominal value by an amount
exceeding the tolerances specified in IEC Publication 60502.
The thickness at any point, however, is less than the specified value, provided the
difference does not exceed 10 percent plus 0.1mm.
The thickness of the semi conducting screens on the conductors and over the
insulation shall not be included in the measurement of insulation thickness.
7.3.4.5 Insulation Screening
The insulation screen shall comprise a non-metallic semi-conducting polyethylene
part in combination with a metallic part.

415
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The non-metallic semi-conducting part shall be applied directly upon insulation of
the core and shall comprise a layer of extruded semi-conducting polyethylene
compound.
The conductor screen, insulation and semi-conducting part of insulation screen
layer shall be applied to the conductor in common extrusion process with dry curing
system.
The metallic part shall be stranded copper applied over the layer of semi
conducting compound.
There shall be single layer of copper wires adequately spaced apart on each core
of Power cable.
The non-metallic part shall be applied directly upon the insulation and shall be a
layer of extruded semi-conducting compound. This screen shall be formed in such
a way that it can be readily removed for jointing.
The insulation screen shall be capable of withstanding a fault current of 10KA for
1 sec. without damage.

7.3.4.6 Metallic Screen

The metallic Screen shall consist of a concentric layer of copper wires or a
combination of copper wires and helically applied copper tape(s) as per IEC
Standard.
The metallic Screen shall be so designed to carry the specified earth fault current
of 31.5 KA for 1 second.
7.3.4.7 Separation Sheath
The Separation Sheath should covering the whole surface area of the metallic
screen as per IEC Standard.

7.3.4.8 Over sheath

The cable shall be sheathed overall with a Medium Density Polyethylene (MDPE)
outer sheath. The outer sheath shall be of smooth and uniform composition and
free of holes, cracks, and bisectors.
As a protection against termite attack, the outer covering shall contain the termite
repellent substance of Pb napthanate.
The outer sheath shall have adequate strength and thickness to withstand the test
voltage and mechanical tests and be suitable for ambient conditions at site.
The outer sheath material shall be capable of withstanding the highest temperature
achieved with the cable at its rated current without damage or deformation at site
ambient conditions.
The outer surface of the polyethylene outer sheath shall be as specified in IEC
60502.
7.3.4.9 Armour
The armour shall be Aluminium Alloy round wires or Corrugated Aluminum sheath
as per IEC Standard.
416
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The joints are brazed or welded and any wire shall be not less than 01 mm from
the nearest joints in any other armour wire in the complete cable.
7.3.4.10 Continuous Current Rating
The continuous current rating of the cable shall be calculated in accordance with
the procedure described in IEC 60287 based on the site ambient condition, with
the insulation parameters as specified. The Cable current ratings shall base on site
ambient conditions, with the general methods of installation and bonding.
The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90 deg. C when carrying
the rated current under the most onerous site conditions.
The successful Bidder must provide IEC 60287:2020 SER Series
standards (all the standards in the series) immediately after
contract signing.

7.3.4.11 Short Circuit Rating

The cable shall be capable of withstanding the specified maximum short circuit
current for the specified times without damage or permanent distortion.
The temperature of the conductor at maximum fault current for the specified time
shall not exceed 250 deg. C as specified in IEC 60502.

7.3.4.12 Manufacturer Identification

The external surface of the cable shall be marked by the following at an interval of
1000 mm with 30mm high character throughout the length of the cable:
(i) 11KV, XLPE, 1Cx 300 sq.mm Cu”
(ii) 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx 185 sq.mm Cu”
(iii) 11KV, XLPE, 1Cx 150 sq.mm Cu”
(iv) 11KV, XLPE, 1Cx 95 sq.mm Cu”
(v) “NESCO”, “Manufacturer's Name"
(vi) Year of manufacturing
7.3.4.12.1 Information Required
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all
information. Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.
c) The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall submit the list of available testing/ measuring
equipment, meters, etc., along with valid Calibration Certificate(s) from
competent authority used in manufacturer's laboratory for performing Routine
Test as per IEC standard.
e) Copy of relevant IEC standards (to be submitted with design and drawing
for approval after the contract).

150 mm2 PVC Copper Cable

7.3.5 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS :

417
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
These single core cables shall be designed as per above standards and suitable for
operation at a maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use underground
buried in earth or in ducts and above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient
conditions.

The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and shall be
supplied on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having
stenciled on each side: drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length
together with gross and net weight, the manufacturer name, the purchaser's name and
contract number with date. The cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.
Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally
acceptable standard. Conductors shall be circular plain annealed copper in
accordance with IEC 60228. Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC
60502-1. The over sheath shall be an external layer of black PVC.
A means of identifying the cable size, manufacturer name and NESCO ownership,
year of manufacturing shall be inscribed throughout the length of the Cable in a single
line on the PVC Insulation. The letters shall be upright block characters embossed on
the surface; they are being not more than 300 mm between each group. The
manufacturer’s name with year of manufacture and Progressive Meter Marking shall
be provided throughout the length of the cable.

Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length as
tolerance. However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered quantity.
Only one short length of conductor on a drum is considered for acceptance, if
necessary. For the other requirements, the given data shall be considered as minimum
and maximum where necessary. No negative tolerances for the diameter and thickness
are acceptable.

Description Unit Requirements

Cable Size mm2 1CX150
Material PVC Insulated
plain annealed copper.
Numbers & Diameter of wires No/mm min 37 wires with
sufficient dia.
Maximum resistance at 20 °C /KM 0.124
Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.8
Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8
Colour of sheath Black
Approximate outer diameter mm 21.9
Approximate weight Kg/KM 1640
Continuous permissible service V 600/1000
voltage
Current rating at 30 °C ambient Amps 350
temperature U/G
Current rating at 35 °C ambient in Amps 405
air

7.3.5.1 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:

418
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 o Conductors shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden
drum. The central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95
mm diameter. The interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with
bituminous paper to prevent the conductor from being in contact with timber
or Aluminium water proof paper and felt lining shall overlap at seams by at
least 20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.
o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial
wooden battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by
means of hoop metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an
approved manner to resist termite and fungus attacks and shall be suitable
for outside storage for a minimum period of 3 years in an equatorial climate
with out undue deterioration.
o The PVC covering shall be complete with PVC/A for Insulation and PVC-
ST2 for Sheath as per requirement of IEC60502-1.
o There shall be only one length of conductor on a drum.
o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –83.

7.3.5.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED:

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all
information. Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical
data for offered cable.
b) Cross-sectional drawings of offered cable.
c) Detail description of testing facilities (Routine & Type Test) at
manufacturer's plant.

95 mm2 PVC Copper Cable

7.3.6 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS :

These single core cables shall be designed as per above standards and suitable for operation
at a maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use underground buried in earth
or in ducts and above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient conditions.

The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and shall be
supplied on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having
stenciled on each side: drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length
together with gross and net weight, the manufacturer name, the purchaser's name and
contract number with date. The cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.
Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally
acceptable standard. Conductors shall be circular plain annealed copper in
accordance with IEC 60228. Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC
502-1. The over sheath shall be an external layer of black PVC.
A means of identifying the cable size, manufacturer's name, NESCO ownership and year of
manufacturing shall be inscribed throughout the length of the Cable in a single line on the PVC
Insulation. The letters shall be upright block characters embossed on the surface; they are
being not more than 300 mm between each group. The manufacturer’s name with year of
419
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
manufacture and Progressive Meter Marking shall be provided throughout the length of the
cable.

Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length as tolerance.
However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered quantity. Only one short length
of conductor on a drum is considered for acceptance, if necessary. For the other
requirements, the given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where
necessary. No negative tolerances for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.

Description Unit Requirements

Cable Size mm2 1CX95
Material PVC Insulated
plain annealed copper.
Numbers & Diameter of wires No/mm 19/2.52
Maximum resistance at 30 °C /KM 0.1964
Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.6
Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8
Co lour of sheath Black
Approximate outer diameter mm 19.4
Approximate weight Kg/KM 1129
Continuous permissible service V 600/1000
voltage
Current rating at 30 °C ambient Amps 270
temperature U/G
Current rating at 35 °C ambient in Amps 300
air
7.3.6.1 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:
o Conductors shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden
drum. The central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95
mm diameter. The interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with
bituminous paper to prevent the conductor from being in contact with timber
or Aluminium water proof paper and felt lining shall overlap at seams by at
least 20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.

o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial

wooden battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by
means of hoop metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an
approved manner to resist termite and fungus attacks and shall be suitable
for outside storage for a minimum period of 3 years in an equatorial climate
with out undue deterioration.

o The PVC covering shall be complete with PVC/A for Insulation and PVC-
ST2 for Sheath as per requirement of IEC60502-1.

o There shall be only one length of conductor on a drum.

o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –83.
420
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.3.6.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED:
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all
information. Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical
data for offered cable.
b) Detail description of testing facilities (Routine & Type Test) at
manufacturer's plant.
For XLPE Power Cable:
1. Type Test Certificates & Reports for XLPE insulated Copper cable of
similar or higher size of similar or higher voltage class from any short-
circuit testing liaison (STL) Member [http://www.stl-
liaison.org/web/03_Members.php] Testing Organization or
Laboratory as per relevant IEC standard.
2. Short circuit earth fault current with details Calculation for metal sheath.
3. Detail cross sectional drawing of the offered type cable showing dimension
& identification name.
Note: If required, Purchaser will authenticate Type Test/Calibration Certificates
& Reports from the Certificates & Reports issuing laboratory and if any
applicable charge /cost impose by issuing laboratory for said authentication
shall be borne by Tenderer. The certificates and Reports shall contain
laboratory’s full mailing address, e-mail address, website address and
fax/telephone number for the convenience of authentication. If these
information are not mentioned in the Certificates & Reports, all this
information should be mentioned in the Letterhead pad of the manufacturer
duly seal & signed by the manufacturer reprise Others:
4. The Tenderer shall mention maximum days required to complete the supply
of equipment/ materials (at site) and maximum days required for the
completion of actual design, erection, installation, testing, commissioning
& Civil work in bar chart form within the completion time.
5. All Tender Forms as thereof
6. Site visit Report.

7.3.7 Technical Specification of ACSR MARTIN

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
This conductor shall be designed as per above standards for operation in overhead
lines in air under local ambient conditions. The conductor shall be constructed from
hard drawn Aluminium and Zinc Coated Steel wires where the centre wire or wires are
of Zinc Coated Steel and the outer layer or layers are of Aluminium. The wires shall
be smooth and free from all imperfections not consistent with good commercial
practice. No joint of any kind shall be permitted in the Zinc Coated Steel wires.

421
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the
outermost layer being right handed. The lay ratio of any Aluminium layer shall not be
greater than the lay ratio of Aluminum layer immediately beneath it. The lay ratio of
different layers shall be within the limit as per above standards.

The maximum acceptable length of conductor in a drum shall be as stated below and
shall be supplied on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having
stenciled on each side : drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length
together with gross and net weight, the manufacturer's name, the purchaser's name
and contract number with date. The cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.

Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length
as tolerance. However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered
quantity. Only one short length of conductor on a drum is considered for
acceptance, if necessary. For the other requirements, the given data shall be
considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative
tolerances for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.

ACSR MARTIN
Code name ACSR MARTIN
Installation Overhead
Type Stranded
Material Hard drawn Aluminum steel
reinforced
Overall diameter of the conductor 36.17 mm
Nominal cross sectional area of the 772.10 sq. mm
conductor
Number/diameter of Aluminum Strand 54/4.02 mm
Nominal Aluminum cross sectional area 685.40 sq. mm
Number/diameter of Steel Strand 19/2.41 mm
Nominal Steel cross sectional area 86.70 sq. mm
Weight of conductor 2590 Kg/KM
Drum wound length 500 M
Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor 0.0425 /Km
at 20 °C
Minimum breaking Load of Conductor min 11400 Kg
Lay direction for Outermost Layer of Right hand
Aluminium
Rated Strength Min 206

7.3.7.1 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:

o Conductors shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong
wooden drum. The central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on
422
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 axle size 95 mm diameter. The interior of the conductor drum shall be
lined with bituminous paper to prevent the conductor from being in
contact with timber or Aluminium water proof paper and felt lining shall
overlap at seams by at least 20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.
o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial
wooden battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured
by means of hoop metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an
approved manner to resist termite and fungus attacks and shall be
suitable for outside storage for a minimum period of 3 years in an
equatorial climate with out undue deterioration.
o There shall be only one length of conductor on a drum.
o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5
–83.

7.3.8 SPECIFICATION FOR COPPER CONTROL CABLE

7.3.8.1 STANDARDS:
The cable as specified in this Section shall be conforming to the latest edition
of the following standards for operation under local ambient conditions. Design,
Manufacture, Testing and Performance of the cable shall be in accordance with
the IEC 60502-1, BS 6004:1994 or equivalent International standards.

7.3.8.2 SPECI FICATIONS:

These cables shall be designed as per above standards and suitable for
operation at a maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use
underground buried in earth or in ducts and above ground in air or in buildings
under local ambient conditions.
The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 1000M and shall
be supplied on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum
having stencilled on each side, drum number, code name of conductor, drum
wound length together with gross and net weight, the manufacturer name, the
purchaser's name and contract number with date. The cover of the drum should
be of same treated wood.
Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any
internationally acceptable standard. Thickness of PVC insulation shall be in
accordance with IEC 502-1. The over sheath shall be an external layer of black
PVC.
A mean of identifying the cable size and NESCO ownership shall be inscribed
throughout the length of the Cable in a single line on the PVC Insulation. The
letters shall be upright block characters embossed on the surface; they are
being not more than 300 mm between each group. The manufacturer’s name
shall be provided throughout the length of the cable with year of manufacture.

Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length
as tolerance. However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered
quantity. Only one short length of conductor on a drum is considered for
423
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 acceptance, if necessary. For the other requirements, the given data shall be
considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative
tolerances for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.
Description Unit Requirements
Cable Size mm2 4CX2.5 4CX4m 4CX6m 8CX2.5 16CX2. 24CX2.
mm2 m2 m2 mm2 5 mm2 5 mm2
Material plain plain plain plain plain plain
anneale anneale anneal anneale anneale anneale
d d ed d d d
copper copper copper copper copper copper
Numbers & No/m 7/0.67 7/0.85 7/1.04 7/0.67 7/0.67 7/0.67
Diameter of m
wires
Diameter of mm 1.4 4×0.8 4×0.8 4x0.8 4x0.8 4x0.8
Steel wires/
Strips
Thickness of mm - 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Steel Tape
Maximum /KM 7.28 3.20 3.20 7.69 7.69 7.69
resistance at
30 °C
Nominal mm 0.8 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.8 0.8
thickness of (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
PVC insulation
Nominal mm 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8
thickness of (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
PVC sheath
Co lour of Black Black Black Black Black Black
sheath
Approximate mm 17 20 21 20 25 28
outer diameter
Approximate Kg/K 670 810 920 1040 1630 1730
weight M
Continuous V 600/100 600/10 600/10 600/100 600/10 600/10
permissible 0 00 00 0 00 00
service
voltage

7.3.8.3 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:

o Cables shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden drum.
The central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95 mm
diameter. The interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with bituminous
paper to prevent the conductor from being in contact with timber or
Aluminium water proof paper and felt lining shall overlap at seams by at
least 20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.
o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial
wooden battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by
means of hoop metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an
424
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 approved manner to resist termite and fungus attacks and shall be suitable
for outside storage for a minimum period of 3 years in an equatorial climate
with out undue deterioration.
o There shall be only one length of cable on a drum.
o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –
83.

7.3.8.4 INFORMATION REQUIRED:

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all
information. Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and
technical data for offered cable.
b) Cross-sectional drawings of offered cable.
c) Detail description of testing facilities (Routine & Type Test) at
manufacturer's plant.
d) Manufacturer's valid ISO 9001 Certificate.

425
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 7.4 CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURE
CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURE GENERAL PROVISION FOR
AIS SUB-STATION

7.4.1 References

7.4.1.1 General

The design and construction shall conform to the latest edition of the relevant codes and
standards. Any proposed substitution for the listed standards by an equivalent standard
will be subject to approval by the Engineer. Relevant standards include.

7.4.1.2 Design and Construction Standards

BS 12 Portland Cement
BS EN 124 Gully and Manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian
areas
BS 812 Testing Aggregates
BS 882 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS 1377 Methods of test for soil for civil Engineering purposes
BS 1722:Part10 Anti-intruder fences
BS 1881 Testing concrete
BS 2853 Design and testing of overhead runway beams
BS 3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete
BS 3921 Clay bricks
BS 4449 Steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 5262 External renderings
BS 5395 Stairs, ladders and walkways
BS 5572 Sanitary pipe works
BS 5628 Code of practice for use of masonry
BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations
BS 6031 Code of practice for earth works
426
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 BS 6367 Code of practice for drainage of roofs and paved areas
BS 6399: Part1 Code of practice for dead and imposed loads
BS 6399: Part 2 Code of practice for wind loads
BS 6465 Sanitary installations
BS 6651 Code of practice for protection of structures against
lightning
BS 6700 Design, installation, testing and maintenance of services
supplying water for domestic use.
BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations
BS 8005 Sewerage
BS 8100 Lattice towers and masts
BS 8102 Code practice of protection of structures against water the
ground structural use of concrete.
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
BS 820 Lightning of buildings
BS 8215 Code practice for design and installation of damp-
proof courses in masonry
BS 8290 Suspended ceilings
Bs 8301 Code of practice for Building drainage

7.4.1.3 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The engineering & execution of all Civil, Structural & Architectural works shall
be based on the latest edition or revision of the applicable portion of the
following Codes and Specifications. In case any particular aspect of work is not
covered by these Standards, other standard specifications, as may be specified
by the Engineer, shall be followed.

a) The Bureau of British Standard Codes.

b) Bangladesh National Building Code

c) Environmental protection agency

d) American Codes and standards (ASTM, ACI, AASHTO,AASHO)

e) Local Statutory regulations

f) Rules & Regulations of local authorities

The Civil Works shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the
Specifications, relevant Standards and Codes of Practice approved by the Engineer.
Local code of practice shall be followed where not mentioned. The Contractor shall
submit together with his bid a schedule of standards and codes of practice to be
followed in the design and construction of the Works. Copies of these codes and stand-
ards shall be made available to the Engineer during the design and construction period.
In the case of the Standards and Codes not published in English, the Contractor shall
obtain English translations when required and send them to the Engineer.

427
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The Contractor shall be responsible for the establishment of design parameters to
satisfy the requirement of the project.

Basic design conditions shall be as follows: -

a. Seismic coefficient at Ground

Level (Horizontal) (PGA) : Seismic Zone-1, Zone coefficient, Z=0.12 (as

per BNBC, 2015).

b. Design Storm : Based on frequency-intensity Duration

curves prepared for Rajshahi Zone

c. Wind velocity : 177.12 km/hr

d. Design load for road : H-20-S16-44 (AASHO)

e. Standards and codes of practice : ASTM, ACI, BNBC and inter-national

codes of practice and other Standards to
be approved by the Engineer

7.4.2 Design

Both Architectural and Structural Design shall be submitted by the contractor to the
employer for approval.

7.4.2.1 Architectural and structural Requirements of Buildings

The details Architectural, Structural & other related drawing and design with Green
Building concept shall be submitted by the contractor to employer for approval.

1. Structure : Modern Architectural designed R.C.C or Steel Framed Structure

featured by Green Building Technology.

2. Partition Wall:
• For all Exterior wall thickness should be 10 (ten) inches
and interior wall thickness should be 5 (five) inches and to
be used 1st Class Bricks.
• All Brick wall should be plastered both sides as per
standard (Except where Fare-Facing Treatment to be
used)
• In case of R.C.C. works 20mm down graded Stone chips
should be used.

3. Covered Area : Minimum required area in Building are included with

service areas & Other

Specific Functions - Control Room, Battery room, Cable Trench,

Store, Office Rooms, walkway, open Space & stair case etc.

428
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 4. Foundation : Considering 02 storied building (no Basement) (G+1) with
three storied foundation
• Plinth Level at +3ft above from Ground Level
• Ground Floor clear height 9’-6” ft Cable Trench & Ancillary
Facility
• 1st Floor clear height 13’-6” ft for Control room

5. Floor/Roof Finish :
• To be used 24 inch x 24 inch size European standard
Mirror Polished

•
Homogeneous tiles for 1st Floor.
• Standard Quality Tiles for walk way or other common
space.
6. Toilet/ Sanitary:
• Floor and full height wall of the Toilet should be
furnished by European Standard Tiles (tiles type & quality is
subject to approval of NESCO Engineer) with decorative
boarder. Floor tiles should be non-slippery. The floor of
the toilet should have adequate slope so that water doesn't
get clogged on the floor.
• To be used European Standard Commode, Basin and
others Sanitary Fittings & Fixtures (such as Pillar Cock,
Bib Cock, Push Shower etc.) should be European
Standard as well as approved sample and design.
• To be Constructed 10 users septic tank, inspection pit,
sewerage line, apron, drain etc.
• To be provided water supply system with Deep Tube
well & over head water tank.
7. Electrical Fittings & Fixture :
• Concealed Electrical wiring by
Eastern/BRB/Paradise
Fire Resistant Cable
• European Made MK type Gang switch,
socket MCB etc
• Provision for Internet facilities system, Dish
Line, Telephone & Intercom wiring.
• Sufficient Earthing facilities.
• To be used LED Light
• To be provided sufficient Air Conditioner
• To be provided sufficient Ceiling Fan

8. Interior Wall Finishing : Smooth Finished & soft colored Plastic paint
should be used over the Plastering work of interior wall and ceiling.

9. Exterior Wall : Smooth Finished & Architectural approved

colored weather coat should be used over the Plastering work of Exterior
wall. Some

429
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 where should be used Ceramic Facing brick / Rustic Tiles

10. Window : Window should be made Standard Quality Thai

Aluminum frame and minimum 5mm thickness glass using U.S (AAMA)
Standard.

11. Door : Door Frame and Shutter should be made by solid wood
such as Burma Teak, Teak Chambal, Chapalish etc. which shall be
approved by the owner's engineer.

12. Stair Railing : Should be used approved designed SS Railing

in the Stair case.

13. Sign, Signal & Annotation : ● Integrated Design of Different kind of

Indicators like-
Acrylic Sign Board, LED Sign Board, Neon Sign Board,
Reception Sign Board, Safety Sign, PVC
Letters, Glow
Sign Board, Customized Display Boards,
Overhead
Signage, Metal Nameplates, Commercial Sign
Boards,
Outdoor Signs, Electronic Sign Boards etc.
should be
provided in the design & construction.

● Digital
LED Signboard with the features of-
Excellent visibility (even in daylight); Good quality
at reasonable price and light weight; Simple installation, Safe to touch and
clean; Changing color for attracting attention; Extremely low power
consumption.

● Should be provided the Accessories like Adaptor

and chains etc.

14. Approval & Test : The set of plans, designs and specification of a
building have to be submitted to the Authority as per provision of this Code
and duly approved and sanctioned by the Authority.Materials & Item (if
required) should be tested from any authorized Institutions of Bangladesh
furnished by the Contractor.

The columns of the ground story shall be extended above roof level to permit starter bars
to be left in place for a future story. An external concrete open staircase shall be provided
up to the roof. The slab shall be a RCC slab designed. The floor slab shall be 5.5 kN/m2
for control room floor and for live load for all floor as per BNBC-2006. If a future story is
not required, a fixed ladder of galvanized steel shall be provided up to the roof or provide
temporary CI sheet shade over the stair case as per direction of the employer.

430
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
The main entrance to all buildings shall be shaded, either by a projection of the roof over
the entrance verandah or by a separate roof at a lower level. This area of roof shall also
be lime terraced and drained by rainwater pipes.

The head of each down pipe shall be fitted with an enlarged hopper and purpose made
cast iron grill set into recess in the roof projection.

Window openings shall be fitted with protruding concrete sunshades above and at the
sides of the openings.
All external walls shall be 250 mm first class brick work also provide 237.5mm x 68.75mm
x 12.5mm (9.5”x2.75”x0.5” ) or any other standard sizes of Mirpur ceramics facing bricks
or similar approved, or rendered Rustic Tiles as required by the architectural plan. The
internal walls shall be generally of 125 mm thick first class brick work. Internal walls shall
all be rendered and receive one sealer coat plus two finishing coats of Plastic emulsion
paint. All brickwork shall be tied into the RCC frame by galvanized ties.
Externally, rendered walls shall receive primer plus two finishing coats of PEP acrylic
external quality paint or similar approved.
The height of control rooms shall be provided about 1 (One) meter clearance over the top
of the cabinets to the underside of the false ceiling. In the switch gear rooms, about 1
meter clearance shall be provided over the switch gear to the underside roof slab but the
Contractor shall provide a greater clearance if it is required to remove equipment. The
clearance may be reduced below down stand beams provided no equipment is required
to be removed from the top of the switch gear. All rooms in any building shall be one
height.
Control buildings housing switch gear and control equipment shall include a cable
basement to facilitates connection to the equipment. Basements shall be constructed so
as to protect the building sub structure from water in accordance with BS 8102.

15. Fire fitting & Fixture:

Provision for Fire fitting & fixture for Installation of fire equipment, fire detection, fire
protection etc. Control room building should have the standard sized fire exit/scape with
facilities and the fire scape should be designed according to floor area accommodation.

7.4.2.2 Ground conditions, Foundations and Site Investigation

(a) Fill Sites
On fill sites where the depth of fill exceeds 3 meters the contract assumes piled
foundations shall be installed below buildings. If placed foundations are found to be
unnecessary in the final site investigation report, a reduction in contract value shall be
agreed on the basis of schedule rates.

Piles shall be concrete (cast in situ or pre-cast) complying with BS 8004. Where timber
piles are used, adequate strip footings shall be provided to support the building after the
timber piles have deteriorated by which time settlement will be complete.
On every fill site the Contractor shall prove that his switchyard foundation will not suffer
settlement greater than 20 mm by constructing a foundation and load testing this to twice
the design bearing pressure for a minimum of 20 days.
Outdoor equipment shall be provided with spread footings. The Contractor will be provided
by the Employer with a survey of soil levels prior to filling. The Contractor shall impose the
431
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
site layout on the survey to check for uneven depth of fill below any foundation and where
uneven depth of fill exists his foundation proposals shall restrict final differential settlement
to a 1 in 400 slopes.
If a fill site has not been exposed to one wet season before foundation work starts, the
Contractor shall flood the site to a depth of 50 mm for 10 days (Not required on hydraulic
fill site). This requirement is because silty sands will generally compact to a denser
condition on first time flooding.
On all fill sites the Contractor shall pipe rainwater from pipes down to paddy level and shall
prevent water pond in open foundations and backfill all foundations as soon as possible.
The Contractor shall monitor settlement of the fill (by placing concrete posts 50x50x750
mm deep on a 10 meter grid and taking readings) at 30 day intervals from the time he is
given access to each fill site.
When a fill site is handed over to the Contractor, The Contractor shall become responsible
for maintaining the entirely of the fill in good condition, including all batter slopes.

(b) Unfilled Sites

Original delta levels are generally 4 meters below road level. Therefore most sites are
historically fill sites but fill settlement can sensibly be considered complete, where fill is
over 3 years old.
(c) Site Investigation
The Contractor may appoint a sub contractor to carry out the site investigations but all
work and all lab work shall be witnessed by one of his own staff who shall countersign all
recorded data.
The site investigations and analysis of the data in a final report giving full details of
foundation proposals shall be completed at each site by the programmed date.
Boreholes shall be taken on a 25 meter grid with at least three additional boreholes beside
each building. Additional boreholes may also be required where uneven fill depth is
encountered. The boreholes shall be located to an accuracy of ±0.5 m and shall be located
to site layout.

Boreholes shall be a minimum of 20 meters depth or twice building footing width,

whichever is greater or as per site condition & decision of the employer. All boreholes shall
be back filled with compacted sand.

In each bore hole the following tests shall be carried out :

Standard penetration tests at 1.5 meter intervals.

Undisturbed samples shall be taken at around 1.5 meters depth and 3 meters depth and
tested by unconfined compression tests.

One dimensional consolidation tests shall be carried out on undisturbed samples taken at
1,5,3 and 4.5 meters depth. The samples shall be saturated and the range of applied
pressure shall fully reflected the in situ conditions. Graphs showing void ratio(e) and
applied pressure shall be submitted along with the coefficient of compressibility for the
range of loading anticipated. Mv shall be in m2/MN and shall be recorded at each stress
increment. The coefficient of consolidation, cv, shall be given in m2/year.

432
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Particle size analysis shall be carried out for each stratum and specified gravity, moisture
content, liquid limit and plastic limit determined.

Ground water level shall be determined by dipping the boreholes. Where collapse of the
boreholes occurs, casing shall be used and left in until the water level remains constant
for two days.

In cohesive soils a vane test to BS 1377 : part 9 shall be carried out at three different
depths. The Contractor shall check the aggressively of soil and ground water at each site
to concrete and take all measures necessary to ensure the long term durability of concrete.

(d) Site Investigation Report

The report shall be submitted by the key date at each site given in the program. The
Contractor shall submit 2 copies of the report to the Engineer. The report shall propose
full details of foundations and loading thereon and shall provide estimates of likely
settlements and differential settlements. The report shall be the work of the Contractor’s
own foundation Engineers.
If the Contractor uses a local site investigation contractor, he shall appoint one of his own
staff to oversee the entire operation and each piece of data shall be countersigned by this
person.
The Contractor shall supply, install and test at least one of the types of Pile in accordance
with the approved design and the drawing showing the Piling arrangement. Each Pile shall
be suite existing the sub-strata at the site.

(e) Foundations
The minimum depth of all foundations shall be :

(i) Transformer bases bound 1.5 m

(ii) All other switchyard foundations 1.1 m

(iii) Control building foundations, 1.5 m

including all wall foundations
and internal wall foundations
(iv) Boundary wall foundations 1.1 m

All formations shall be hand rammed or mechanically compacted before placing 70 mm

minimum thickness of Class B concrete blinding, within 24 hours of bottoming excavation,
which blinding shall project 300 mm minimum distance beyond all footings. Each footing
shall be inspected by the Engineer. Where soil condition is poor (on fill sites or already
filled sites) or where the Contractor leaves foundations exposed and soil conditions
deteriorate, one of the following measures shall be carried out as agreed with the
engineer.

(i) Blinding depth and projection shall be increased

(ii) Soft soil shall be removed and replaced with compacted viti sand with the
top 200 mm consisting of viti sand and brick chips.

The cost of this work shall be borne by the Contractor.

433
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Between column footings all walls, including all internal wall shall be provided with a
reinforced concrete strip footing of minimum dimension 800 mm wide by 250 mm deep
placed at the same level as column footings and linked structurally to the footings. In
addition column footings shall be tied at foundation level and also floor level by beams to
every adjacent column in both orthogonal directions. These beam shall be designed to
resist 1 in 200 differential settlement without distress and shall be capable of resisting the
earthquake load of Rajshahi region as per BNBC 2015.
The deepest parts of any foundations shall be completed first. All foundations shall be
completed and back filled, including all cable tunnel and cable trench work inside
buildings, before walls are raised above floor levels. All other foundations shall be back
filled within 7 days of completing concerning.
All exposed concrete and outer surfaces of cable trenches and cable tunnels shall receive
two coats of bitumastic paint before back filling to reduce ingress of water. The Concrete
surface shall be ground smooth and all air holes etc. filled (rubbed down with a cement
slurry) before painting.
The Contractor shall monitor settlement of all foundations each month and report this
settlement to the Engineer until settlement has reduced to less than 1.5 mm in 3 months.

The tops of all foundations shall terminate 1000mm above site average finished surface
level. All exposed edges shall have 20 mm x 20 mm chamfers.

Excavation shall only be carried out when the ground water table at least 1000mm below
foundation level. The excavation shall be kept dry during the construction period by
providing sumps and pumps as required. During the rain season, shelters shall be erected
over all open excavations.

Any over excavation shall be filled with Class B concrete.

All back fill shall be completed to 95% maximum dry density as defined by BS 1377 test
method. 2.5 Kg rammer.

Before starting foundation work the Contractor shall clear all sites of trees, tree roots
shrubs, debris, surplus soil, and any buildings.

Foundations shall be designed to resist uplift, assuming the water table is at ground level
and the weight of soil resting on a foundation is that included within a 150 frustum.

On fill sites where the depth of fill exceeds 3 meters, the Contractor shall provide piled
foundations in accordance with BS 8004 for control buildings. If timber piles are used,
adequate strip footings shall be provided to support the structure after the timber pile has
deteriorated, by which time the fill will be fully consolidated. One working pile chosen by
the Engineer shall be load tested at each site to 150% of design load in accordance with
BS 8004.

7.4.2.3 Drainage

The entire surface within boundary walls shall be of uniform sloping site, sloping at q in
150 minimum slope to open channels around the entire perimeter. These channels shall
be designed for a rainfall intensity of 60 mm per hour. Out side the boundary wall the
contractor shall be responsible for drainage up to 20 meters from the wall and will at some
sites need to construct outlets with suitable erosion protection down to paddy level.

434
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
The concrete wall of cable trenches shall project at least 70 mm above brick paving level
to prevent run off entering the cable trench. The floors of all cable trenches /tunnels shall
be sloped to soak ways.

The cable trenches shall be free from surface water drainage. If the cutoff area exceeds
30 m2 it shall be drained by a 200 mm minimum diameter concrete pipe to the boundary
drain. The Contractor’s drainage design shall avoid all pond water to avoid forming a
mosquito breeding ground .
All drainage pipe work within buildings shall be ductile iron, generally of 100 mm diameter.
Floor drains shall be placed in each battery room and toilet.

External Pipe work shall be 150 mm minimum diameter concrete pipes at a minimum
depth of invert of 700 mm. Where pipes, including existing pipes along with site, are less
than 400 mm above adjacent foundations they shall be surrounded in concrete. Where
required, drainage pipes shall be kept below cables, allowing 1.1 m cover to top of pipes.

Manholes shall be of brick construction with 600mm x 600mm clear openings and air tight
ductile iron covers to BS EN 124. Manholes shall be located at each change of direction.
Minimum fall on all pipelines shall be 1 in 80. Manhole shall not be located in roads.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations with local authority WASA where
a connection to a public sewer is proposed. Where high water levels in public sewers may
cause effluent to back up into a site, non return valves shall be fitted. The Contractor shall
provide all protection required to existing sewers and shall deepen foundations, including
boundary wall foundations, where required all foundations are below adjacent sewers.
The Contractor shall draw longitudinal sections of all pipelines.
Each control building shall be provided with a septic tank designed for 10 users and a
soak away of open brick construction 10 m deep by 2.2 m diameter filled with broken
bricks. The septic tank shall be located at least 15 meters from buildings. Other buildings
shall have septic tanks designed for the required number of users. All foul drains shall
vented by a vent pipi to above roof level. The inner surface od all manholes and septic
tanks shall be painted with 2 coats of bitumastic paint to protect it against sulphate attack.
The septic tank shall have access holes directly over the inlet pipes and outlet pipes.
Where public sewers exist alongside a site, the Contractor shall connect directly to the
foul sewer, provided effluent from the sewer is treated.

The Contractor shall construct the drainage first to ensure that at no stage is rainwater
ponded on any part of the site. All rainwater shall be able to run off the site or shall be
immediately pumped off site by the Contractor. The Contractor shall complete all
necessary drains before casting any roof and large concrete area which will create large
run off. The condensate drains for the air conditioning shall also be connected to the
drainage. Two vents of minimum height 2.2 m shall be provided on each septic tank.
If a town’s water supply is unreliable, the roof rain water shall be collected in an
underground tank of standard Employer’s design. Scope of this work shall be agreed at
Bid stage.

7.4.3 Earth Work

7.4.3.1 Scope
This clause covers the performance of all works in connection with the required excavation
for the various type of foundations and equipment, as shown in the drawing, or any other

435
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
excavation and banking that may be necessary during the progress of works including the
removal, use or disposal of all excavated materials.
7.4.3.2 Clearing
(1) Clearing shall mean include the remove of trees and shrubs, stumps and other
objectionable matters from the area necessary for the works. The contractor shall
cut and remove them from the project area or turn them as approved by the
Engineer.
(2) By no means shall the contractor fell any trees outside the premise of the
construction site without permission of the parties concerned even if such trees
cause obstacle against smooth execution of the work. Therefore, any such trees
shall be felled upon negotiation with and permission of the possessor.
7.4.3.3 Excavation
(1) Excavation under this section shall consist of the removal, hauling, dumping and
satisfactory disposal of all materials from required excavations.
(2) The excavated slope surface shall be protected against any erosion due to heavy
rains during construction period. Should any damage be caused on any face of
slope, the contractor shall immediately repair any such damage at his expense.
(3) Excavation shall be carried out by adopting a suitable excavation for the ground so
as not to loosen the ground outside the excavation. If necessary, temporary
sheeting shall be constructed.
(4) During excavation, work shall be performed carefully so as not to cause any
damage to adjacent structures and buried structures.
(5) If the excavated material is to be temporarily stockpiled, designated spaces shall
be kept from the shoulder of the road while considering the earth pressure at the
excavated surface and the working space. Temporary sheeting or other such
structures, if necessary, shall be constructed so that the stockpile can be protected
from damage or being washed away.
(6) Excavation of road, if any, shall be done in such a manner as not to hamper
vehicular traffic. If excavation is to be performed in the vicinity of residences,
appropriate care shall be taken so as not to hinder the passage of residents.
Spoils, materials and equipment shall be carefully handled.
(7) After completion of excavation, excavated widths and bottoms shall be subject to
inspection by the engineer.

(8) Blasting shall not be employed during excavation.

(9) Any and all excess excavation for the convenience of the contractor or over-
excavation performed by the contractor for any purpose or reason, except may be
ordered in writing by the engineer, and whether or not due to the fault of the
contractor, shall be at the expense of the contractor. All such excess excavation
and other excavation shall be filed at the expense by the contractor with materials
approved by the engineer.
(10) The contractor shall be entitled to request the engineer in writing to change the
excavation line as required according to the soil conditions of the foundation
following the progress of excavation. In such a case, upon excavation up to the
laid excavation line, the contractor shall prepare the detailed design drawing of the
said foundation and submit it to the engineer for his approval.

436
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(11) All objectionable materials such as, oil, mud, rock fragments, loose rock, chips,
mortar, organic matters and stagnant water, shall be removed from the surface of
the foundation.
7.4.3.4 Sheeting
(1) Sheeting shall be of the type that is suitable to the condition of foundation and
Ground water and shall have a safe structure.
(2) If sheet piles on retaining piles are to be driven at the piling location in the vicinity
of buried structures, where they shall be investigated and confirmed by manual
trench excavation etc. prior to piling in order to protect these structures from being
damaged when piles are to be pulled out, carefulness shall be taken into account
to cause no damage to the buried structures.
7.4.3.5 Banking
Foundation of banking shall be treated as follows:
(1) Any material having a harmful effect on banking shall be removed.
(a) Where inflow of ground water is expected, it shall be treated so as not to cause
inundation.
(b) In case of sloped ground with unfavorable conditions, such as unsuitable soil,
poor drainage, etc, a method, such as excavating the ground into steps in
advance in order to increase its stability, shall be planned and reported to the
Engineer.

(2) Unless otherwise specified, settlement allowance shall be 3 per cent of the height
of the banking and the surface shall be graded evenly within =5 cm.
(3) Materials for banking shall not include any harmful materials, such as fertile soil or
pieces so wood.
(4) Materials for banking shall not be of an extremely swelling nature.

(5) Impermeable clay shall not be used for back-filling of a structure which is
susceptible to earth pressure.

(6) Banking shall be formed by spreading soil of less than 50 cm in thickness and by
sufficiently compacting each layer.

(7) The type of compactor shall be one that is suitable or banding materials.

(8) Materials for banking shall be so treated as to have optimum water content in
percent of dry weight.

(9) Rocks shall be spread out evenly so as not to form any void space.

(10) Temporary facilities shall not be buried in banking. If it becomes inevitable to do

so, it shall be reported to the engineer and shall be approved by the engineer, upon
which appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent any unfavorable effect on
the banking.

(11) As a standard, extent of satisfactory compaction shall be as follows :

K75 =1.5 Kg./cm3 or more

437
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Where : K 75 is a coefficient of bearing capacity determined by the plate
load test.

When required by the engineer, the contractor shall perform in-sity tests
and penetration test to confirm the extent of compaction and the result shall be
submitted to the engineer.

(12) Any banking work on rainy day shall be carried to upon approval of the Engineer.

7.4.3.6 Back-Filling

(1) Back filling shall be executed as construction proceeds along with the removal of
shoring and other materials at the back filling site.

When sheeting is to be left and buried in order to prevent shear failure of

soil or due to some other inevitable reasons, it shall be done so according to the
direction of the engineer.

(2) Except those which are specified in the specifications or the drawings, all the
materials for back filling shall be in accordance with the clauses of “Banking” 2.5
of these specifications.
(3) If the inflow of water exists at the site of back filling it shall be appropriately treated.

(4) In back filling, the layer of spreading shall be around 50cm or less per lift, and it
shall be graded as horizontally as possible, and shall be sufficiently compacted by
hydraulic filling or by use of an appropriate compactor such as a rammer.
(5) Extent of compaction shall be such that it will prevent future settlement and such
that the designated bearing capacity can be obtained. If necessary, the extent of
compaction shall be measured by a cone penetrometer etc. and the record shall
be submitted to the engineer.

(6) If there is any surface or buried structure owned by the public or the third party at
the site of back filling, care shall be taken so as to cause no harmful effect to them,
and the execution of the work shall be carried out following direction by the
engineer and in the presence of relevant administrators.

(7) For back filling adjacent to a structure, compaction and back filling shall be carried
out in such a manner that will prevent damage to the structure.

No stones or the like shall be used for back filling.

7.4.3.7 Disposal of Excavated Materials

(1) Spoils produced by excavation shall be piled, graded, sloped or disposed of at the
locations specified by the Board or Engineer and it shall be subject to inspection
by the engineer.

Spoil, whose disposal areas are not specified by the engineer, shall be
disposed of by the contractor at his responsibility.

438
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(2) In transporting the spoils, care shall be taken so as to neither hamper traffic nor
cause trouble to the third party by scattering the spoil over the road.

7.4.3.8 Gravel Layer

(1) Gravel and rubble produced locally shall be used. Gravel layer shall, in principle,
be laid in a single layer with no large gaps, stand on end and interstices shall be
filled with granular gravel.

(2) The compaction shall be executed by a compaction machine (rammers, etc.)

(3) Gravel layer shall be well compacted together with covering gravel and shall be
graded and finished to the designated level.

7.4.4 Piling
7.4.4.1 Pile Driving

(1) Piles shall be driven by a pile driver, suitable for the type and size of the piles,
geological conditions and construction environment, and in such a manner as to
cause no public nuisance, such as noise, to the third party.

(2) The method for construction joint of piles shall be submitted in writing to the
engineer and shall be subject for approval by the engineer.

(3) Records shall be kept during the poling operation and these shall be submitted to
the engineer.

(4) Piles shall be driven vertically and at the exact locations indicated in the drawings,
and pile driving shall be continuous without interruption to avoid deviation of pile
head.

(5) Caps and other suitable materials shall be used as a cushion to protect the head
of piles.

(6) Toward the end of driving the amount of penetration shall be measured for each
pole as directed by the engineer.

(7) Should it be difficult to drive any pile up to the specified depth, the contractor shall
carry out such pilling work in accordance with the instructions of the engineer.

(8) Method and equipment of pile driving to be employed for construction works shall
be subject to approval of the engineer prior to execution.

(9) When driving a group of piles, driving shall begin from the center and gradually
moved outward.
(10) When eccentric error exceeds the allowable values shown in the table below or
when a pile is damaged or creaked during piling operation, it shall be reported to
the engineer, and the pile shall be replaced or an additional pile shall be driven.
Type of Foundation Allowance Remarks

All foundations 10 cm or less

439
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(11) Upon completion of piling, any void portions inside piles shall be filled back with
soil obtained from at site excavation.

7.4.4.2 Field Joining of Piles

(1) Field joining of piles shall be carried out by arc welding.

(2) Welders shall have not less than 6 months continuous experience in welding of
pile, and shall be qualified by JIS Z-3801, “Standard Qualification Procedures for
welding Technique”, or equivalent BDS.

(3) Are welding rods shall be standard items specified in IETC (International Electro
technical Commission) or equivqlent “Covered Electrodes for Mild Steel”, or
equivalent.
Welding rods shall be completely dry prior to use.

(4) The welding surface of parent metal shall be carefully cleaned of slag, moisture,
dust, rust, oil, paint or other foreign matter.

(5) The root face of steel pipe pile shall be 2mm,

(6) Welding shall be performed carefully by selecting welding current and welding
speed which ensure complete penetration of welding rood to avoid cracks in any
portion of the weld.

(7) Welding shall not be performed when the parent metal is wet from rainfall or when
strong winds are blowing. However, when the portion to be welded in suitable
protected, welding may be performed upon approval of the engineer.

(8) If harmful defects or cracks have been found in the weld, the deposited metal shall
be carefully chipped off and the affected part shall be re-welded and then inspected
by the engineer.

7.4.4.3 Treatment of Pile head

(1) The head of the piles shall be cut to the designated level and shall be embedded
into the footing.

(2) The steel pipe piles shall be anchored into the footing by a method specified
otherwise.

7.4.4.4 Transportation and Handling

Care shall be taken in transportation ad handling of pole so as to prevent damage to them.

If the pile is damaged or deformed to the extent that it is impractical for the intended use,
the contractor shall repair it prior to driving, and it shall be inspected and approved by the
engineer.

7.4.5 Reinforced Concrete Work

7.4.5.1 General

440
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(1) This clause covers the performance of all reinforced of all reinforced concrete work
for permanent structures in accordance with the drawings and these specifications.

(2) The contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment for the performance of
concrete work.

(3) Reinforced concrete work and plain concrete work shall comply with ACI (American
Concrete Institute), BNBC (Bangladesh National Building Code) or equivalent
standard .

(4) Covering

(a) The covering shall be at least one diameter of the reinforcement.

(b) In general, the covering shall be at least those shown in Table-1.

Table-1 : Minimum Covering (mm)

Conditions Slabs Beams Columns

When not directly exposed to rain or wind 20 40 40
Large and important structure, or when 25 40 65
exposed to Rain or wind
When effective coating is not applied on
the portion Which may be subjected to
injurious chemical reaction
Due to smoke, acid, oil, salts, etc. 37.5 50 75
(c) In case of footings and important members of a structure it is recommended
that the covering be at lest 7.5 cm when concrete is placed directly facing the
ground, and at least 5 cm for bars with diameter of more than 16cm and 4 cm
for bars with the diameter of less than 16 mm when the concrete is buried
and directly facing the ground or when it is subjected to severe weather
conditions. However, the covering at the bottom side of slabs may be at least
2.5cm even if the portion of it is subjected to extreme weather condition.
(d) The covering in structures which are required to be especially fire-proof shall
be determined based on the temperature of the fire, duration, characteristics
of aggregate to be used, etc.
7.4.5.2 Quality of Concrete
(1) General
Concrete shall have the uniform quality with the required strength, durability, water
tightness etc.
(2) Strength
(a) The strength of concrete shall generally be based on 28 days compressive
strength.
(b) Compression tests for concrete shall be performed in accordance with ACI,
BNBC or equivalent standard.
7.4.5.3 Materials

Materials used for the construction of buildings shall conform to standard

specifications listed in this part of the Code. Any deviation from the type design or
441
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 architectural detail from those specified in these standards may be accepted by
the Building Official as long as the materials standards specified therein are
conformed with.
7.4.5.3.1 Cement
Cement for shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complies with the standards listed
as follows: BDS 232: 1974, Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid Hardening) or
ASTM C150, Portland Cement; ASTM C91, Masonry Cement; ASTM C595,
Blended Hydraulic Cements.
Cement for other than masonry shall conform to the following standards: BDS 232,
Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid Hardening); BDS 612, Sulphate Resisting
Portland Cement-Type A; ASTM C150, Portland Cement; ASTM C 595, Blended
Hydraulic Cements; and to other such cements listed in ACI 318.
7.4.5.3.2 Water
(1) Water shall be free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, salts, organic materials
or other materials that may be deterious to concrete.
(2) Sea water shall not be used in mixing concrete for reinforced concrete.

7.4.5.3.3 Fine Aggregate

(1) General
Fine aggregate shall be clean, strong, hard, durable, suitably graded and
free from injurious amounts of dust, mud, organic impurities, salts etc.

Beach sand shall not used for concrete.

(2) Grading
Fine aggregate shall consist of large and small particles suitably mixed, and
its grading shall, as a standard, be within the range shown in table 2.

Table-2 : Standard Grading of Fine Aggregate

Nominal Size Weight percentage Nominal size Weight percentage of

of Sieve (mm) of those passing a of sieve (mm) those passion a sieve
sieve
10 100 0.6 25 – 65
5 90 – 100 0.3 10 – 35
2.5 80 – 100 0.15 2 – 10
1.2 50 – 90

Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with JIS A 1102, or equivalent BD standard.

7.4.5.4 Coarse Aggregate

(1) General

Coarse aggregate shall clear, strong, hard, durable, suitably graded and free from
injurious amount of flakes, elongated pieces, organic impurities, salts etc.
(2) Grading
Coarse aggregate shall consist of large and small particles suitably mixed, and its
grading shall be within the range shown in Table 3 as a standard.

442
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Sieve analysis shall be performed in accordance with JIS A 1102, or equivalent BD
standard.

Table-3 : Standard Grading of Coarse Aggregate

SS (mm) Weight percentage of those passing a sieve

SA (mm) 50 40 30 25 20 15 10 5 2.5
95 40 10 0
40 100
100 65 30 5
95 30 0 0
25 100
100 70 10 5
SS : Nominal Size of Sieve
SA : Size of Aggregate

7.4.5.5 Reinforcement

Reinforcement in masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM

A82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement; ASTM A615M, Deformed
and Plain Billet Steel Bars; ASTM A616M, Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars;
ASTM A617M, Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; ASTM A706M, Low-Alloy
Steel Deformed Bars; ASTM A767M, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars; and
ASTM A775M, Epoxy - Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
7.4.5.6 Crushed Stones

Crushed Stone to be used as coarse aggregate shall conform to the following

standards:
BDS 243 : 1963, Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete;
ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates; ASTM C330, Lightweight Aggregates for
Structural Concrete; ASTM C637, Aggregates for Radiation-Shielding Concrete;
ASTM C332 , Lightweight Aggregate for Insulating Concrete; IS: 9142 Artificial
Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.
7.4.5.7 Admixture

Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the Building

Official and shall comply with Sec. 2.4.5.1 through 2.4.5.5.
• Chloride : Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride from
admixture ingredients shall not be used in prestressed concrete, concrete
containing embedded aluminum in concrete cast against permanent
galvanized metal forms, or in concrete exposed to severe or very severe
sulphate-containing solutions (see Sec 5.5.2.1 of Part 6).
• Standards : Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260.
Water-reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures,
water-reducing and retarding admixtures, and water-reducing and
accelerating admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494, Chemical
Admixtures for Concrete, or ASTM C1017, Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Producing Flowing Concrete.
443
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 •
Pozzolanas : Fly ash (Pulverized Fuel Ash) or other pozzolans used as
admixtures shall conform to ASTM C618.
• Blast Furnace Slag : Ground granulated blast-furnace slag used as an
admixture shall conform to ASTM C989.
• Pigment for Coloured Concrete : Pigment for integrally coloured concrete
shall conform to ASTM C979.
7.4.6 Storage of Materials
7.4.6.1 Storage of Cement
(1) Cement shall be stored separately for each type in either silos or damp-proof
warehouses.
(2) Silos to store cement shall be built or equipped with suitable means so that cement
will not be retained at the bottom without being conveyed out.
In case of sacked cement, it shall be stacked on the floor rising at least 30
cm from the surface or the ground, and shall be stored in such a manner as to
facilitate conveyance and inspection. Height of each stack shall be at most 13
sacks.
(3) Any portion of Cement which has hardened during its storage shall not be used at
all. Cement stored for long period shall be tested for its quality prior to its use.

(4) Cement with excessively high temperature shall be used only after lowering the
temperature.
7.4.6.2 Storage of Aggregate
(1) Fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and other aggregate of different type and
grading shall be separately stored between each.

(2) When receiving, storing and handling aggregate, facilities shall be well maintained,
and handling shall be carefully performed so that no segregation of large particles
from small ones may occur, no foreign materials may become mixed, or in case of
coarse aggregate, no particles may be crushed.
(3) Storage facility of aggregate shall be equipped with a suitable drainage system,
and shall have a suitable capacity so that the aggregate with uniform surface water
may be used and the aggregate received may be used after being tested.
(4) In hot weather, aggregate shall be stored in a place with a facility to avoid direct
exposure to the sun etc. so that extreme drying or temperature rise in the
aggregate does not occur.
7.4.6.3 Storage of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall not be directly placed on the ground, and it shall be stored in a
warehouse or a place with suitable cover.

7.4.6.4 Storage of Admixture

(1) Admixture shall be stored so as to be free from dusts and other impurities.
Admixture in power form shall be stored in such a manner that absorption of water
and hardening are prevented, and admixture in liquid form shall be stored in such
a manner that segregation and change in quality are prevented.

(2) Admixture materials shall be carefully handled so as not to be scattered.

444
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(3) Admixture material shall be stored in silos or warehouses which are desirably
damp-proof and shall be used in the same order as they are received.

(4) Admixture stored for a long period of found to have changed shall be tested prior
to its use. Should it be found in the test that the admixture does not possess the
required characteristics, its use shall not be allowed.

7.4.7 Testing of Materials

(1) The all materials (cement, water, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, reinforcement,
admixture, etc.) to be used shall be approved by the engineer after the contractor
submits the results of tests.

(2) The testing method shall comply with the various codes of ASTM, ACI, BNBC or
equivalent standard.

7.4.8 Mix Proportions

7.4.8.1 General

(1) Mix proportion for concrete shall be determined in such a manner that the unit
quantity of water is minimized while the required strength, durability, water
tightness and the workability suitable for the work are secured.
(2) Mix proportion for concrete and results of test mixing shall be determined so as to
provide the required strength, workability, uniformity and durability. The scheme of
mix proportion shall be submitted to the engineer for approval, The attached form
of submission shall be used. The design strengths of the concrete shall be the
classes indicated below.

4 Fc = 210 kg/cm2 For Architecture and Switchyard

4 Fc = 180 kg/cm2 For Transmission
4 Fc = 120 kg/ cm2 For leveling Concrete

Where 4 Fc means concrete compressive strength at the age of 28 days.

Basic design date for mixing are indicated in the table herein.

Table – 4 : Basic Mix Data

Class Design Maximum size Slump Air

strength of (cm) entertainment
4Fc aggregate(mm) (%)
(kg/cm2)
E 210 25 10 – 15 4 1 Architecture
Switchyard
B 180 40 10 – 15 4 1 Transmission
C 120 40 10 – 15 4 1 Leveling Concrete

Note :
1. Specific gravity in design
445
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Cement – 3.15, Fine Aggregate – 2.62, COARSE Aggregate and Crushed Stones
– 2.62

2. Relationship between C/W (Cement water ratio) and maximum compressive

strength at 28 days.
ø 28 = 210 + 215 C/W
Concrete Mix Design Report

Quantity (per mixed 1 m3) (kg/m3)

Maximu Slum Air Maximu Sand Water Cemen Fi Coarse Admixture
m size entrain
p m perce W t aggreg
n s
or -ment water/ n-tage C eate
aggregat (%) cement S/a S
e W/c (%) (%)
(mm)
mm- mm-mm
mm

7.4.9 Batching and Mixing

7.4.9.1 Batching

(1) General

Each material to be used in concrete is obtained.

(2) Batching Equipment

(a) Batching method and batching equipment for each material shall be subject
to the approval of the engineer in advance.

(b) Batching equipment for each material shall be inspected and adjusted, if
necessary, prior to the commencement of the construction work and
periodically during the construction.
(3) Batching of materials

(a) Batching shall be made in accordance with the job mix. Test for surface water
of the aggregate shall be in accordance with ASTM or equivalent or as
directed by the engineer. Test for the quantity of the effective absorption of
water, in case of dried effective absorption of water, shall be as directed by
the engineer.

(b) Volume of one batch shall be determined as directed by the engineer.

(c) Each material shall be batched by weight for each batch except the water and
the solution of admixture, which may be measured by volume.

(d) Error in the measurement in each batch shall be at most the values given in
Table 5.

Table-5 : Allowable Error in Measurements

446
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Type of Materials Permissible Error (%)
Water 1
Cement &Admixture Material 2
Aggregate 3
Solution of Admixture Agent 3

7.4.9.2 Mixing
All concrete shall be mixed thoroughly until there is a uniform distribution of
materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged.
Ready mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the
requirements of "Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C94) or
"Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing"
(ASTM C685).
Job mixed concrete shall be mixed in accordance with the following:
a) Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type.
b) Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer.
c) Mixing shall be continued for at least 90 seconds after all materials are in the
drum, unless a shorter time is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing uniformity
tests of "Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C94).
d) Materials handling, batching, and mixing shall conform to the applicable
provisions of "Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C94).
e) A detailed record shall be kept to identify:
i) number of batches produced;
ii) proportions of materials used;
iii) approximate location of final deposit in structure;
iv) time and date of mixing and placing.
(1) General
Materials for concrete shall be thoroughly mixed until the mixed concrete becomes
uniform in quality.
(2) Mixers

(a) Mixers shall be either tilting batch mixers or forced batch mixers.

(b) Any concrete mixers to be used under this project shall be subject to approval
of the engineer.

(c) Mixers shall be such that they will not cause any separation of materials at
the time of discharging.
(3) Mixing

(a) When charging a mixer, all the materials shall be charged uniformly and
simultaneously in principle.

(b) Mixing time shall, in principle, be determined based on tests. As a standard,

it shall be at least 1 minute and 30 seconds for tilting type misers and 1 minute
for forced mixers.

447
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (c) Mixing shall not be continued for more than three times the specified mixing
time.

(d) Materials for new batch shall not be charged into the mixer until all the
concrete in the mixer is discharged.

(e) Mixers shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after their use.

(f) Concrete left as mixed and commenced setting shall not be used after re-
tempering.

7.4.10 Conveying and Placing

(1) Prior to the commencement of the construction work, a plan of conveying and
placing shall be made and this shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.

(2) Concrete shall be conveyed by methods which will minimize separation and loss
of materials, shall be placed immediately and then shall be thoroughly compacted.
Even when it is impossible to place the concrete immediately due to some special
reasons, the time between mixing and the completion of placing shall not exceed
45 minutes.
During the waiting period, the concrete shall be protected against direct
exposure to the sun, wind and rain, and the concrete left for a relatively long time
shall be re-mixed without adding my water. No portion of concrete which has
started to harden shall be used.

(3) When extreme separation is observed in concrete during its delivery or placement,
it shall be made uniform in quality by re-mixing.

7.4.10.1 Conveying

(1) Conveying

Equipment to be used in conveying concrete shall be those which can easily

deposit. Should the delivery distance be long, they shall be equipped with such
facility as an agitator.

(2) Buckets

Structure of buckets shall be such that they will not cause any separation
of materials when charging or discharging concrete and that the concrete can be
easily and swiftly deposited from them.

(3) Belt Conveyors

Should belt conveyors be used, they shall be suitably located so that they
will be suitably located so that they will not impair the quality of the concrete and
the end of the line shall be provided with baffle plates and an elephant trunk so that
the separation of materials can be prevented.

(4) Buggies and Trolleys

448
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Should buggies or trolleys be used, a level runway or path shall be
constructed so that separation of materials will not occur in conveying concrete.

(5) Chutes

(a) Should any chute be used, it shall be a drop chute in principle. The drop chute
shall be connected to an elephant trunk so that the separation of materials is
minimized.

(b) Open chutes may be used, only when approved by the Engineer. Each open
chute shall be inclined at uniform angle all along its length, and the slope shall
be such that it will not cause any separation of materials of the concrete to be
placed. The distance between the bottom end of the chute and the surface
on which concrete is to be deposited shall be at most 1.5m. the discharging
end shall be equipped with a suitable elephant trunk.

7.4.10.2 Placing

(1) Preparation

(a) Prior to the placement, the arrangement of reinforcement, forms etc. shall
be approved by the engineer.

(b) Prior to the commencement of the placement, it shall be certified that

conveying equipment and placing equipment are in conformance to the plan
of placing specified in Clause-______

(c) Prior to the placement, conveying equipment, placing equipment and the
inside of forms shall be thoroughly cleaned to prevent foreign materials from
being mixed into the concrete. Portions expected to face concrete and to
absorb water shall be moistened in advance.

(d) Water in pits and sumps shall be removed prior to the placement of the
concrete. Suitable protective measures shall be taken so that water running
into these pits and sumps will not wash the concrete just placed.

(2) Placing

(a) Concrete shall be placed in accordance with the plan of placing specified in
Clause-_____should it be inevitable to change the placing method, it shall
be so done as directed by the Engineer.

(b) When concerning is done in hot weather, special attention shall be given to
the materials, placement, curing etc.

(c) Portions such as the ground and foundations which may absorb the water
in concrete shall be thoroughly wetted prior to the placement of concrete.

(d) Temperature in concrete at the time of placing shall be at most 35o C.

449
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (e) Conveying equipment for concrete shall be such that they will protect
concrete from being dried or heated.

(f) Concrete shall be protected as soon as the placement is completed or

interrupted. Special care shall be exercised to keep the surface of the
concrete moist.

(g) During the concerning operation, attention shall be paid not to disturb the
arrangement of the reinforcement.

(h) Concrete shall be embedded into concrete with abundant mortar. Should
any notable separation of materials be observed during concerning, the
concrete shall be remised to obtain the uniform quality and necessary
measures to prevent separation shall be taken before the placing operation
is resumed.

(i) Concrete for one section shall be placed continuously until it is completed.

(j) Concrete shall, in principle, be placed in such a manner that the surface of
the placed concrete will be horizontal within the section. One lift in
placement shall be at most 40 cm, in principle.

(k) Should concrete be placed in layers, each succeeding layer shall be placed
while the one below it is still plastic. Should it become necessary to place
concrete on top of a layer which has started setting, it shall be done in
accordance with Clause 4.10.

(l) When height of the form work is great, it shall be provided with openings for
concrete placing, or the placement shall be done using from chutes in order
to prevent the concrete from being segregated or from adhering to the
reinforcement or to the forms above the layer to be placed.

(m) The height of the end of buckets and hoppers shall be at most 1.5 m above
the level of placement.

(n) Should there by any water coming out and accumulated during the
placement, the concrete shall not be placed further until the water is
removed by a suitable means.

(o) When concerning high structures such as walls and columns continuously,
the consistency of the concrete and the rate of lifting shall be controlled in
such a manner that separation of materials during the placement and the
compaction is minimized.

7.4.11 Compaction

(1) In principle, internal vibrators shall be used to compact the concrete. When it is
difficult to use internal vibrators in the case of thin walls, form vibration shall be
used.

(2) Vibrators to be used shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.

450
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(3) Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted immediately after placement and shall be
thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and into the corners of the form.
Where conditions take compaction difficult, batches of mortar containing the same
proportions of cement, sand and water as used in the concrete shall first be
deposited to certify the compaction.

(4) When compaction is achieved by vibrators, it shall be inserted into the layer below
the one just placed by about 10cm. The vibrators shall be pulled out very slowly so
that no hole will form in the concrete.

(5) When concerning is to be compacted by internal vibrators, the spacing and the
time of their application shall be as directed by the engineer.

7.4.12 Additional Placing

Should additional placing be made on top of a layer which has already started to harden,
it shall be thoroughly and carefully worked on as directed by the engineer so that the top
and the lower layer becomes monolithic.

(1) Wet Curing.

(a) Concrete, after being placed, shall be sufficiently cured without being
subjected to injurious effects caused by low temperature, drying, sudden
change in temperature, etc.

The contractor shall report the said method to the engineer and obtain his
approval.

(b) Concrete shall be protected from vibrations, impacts and loads while it is
hardening.

(2) Wet Curing

(a) Concrete being placed and compacted shall be protected from the sun, wind,
showers etc.

(b) Any exposed surface of concrete which has hardened to a degree that works
can be done without impairing it shall be either covered with wet mats,
canvas, sand etc. or directly watered, and shall be kept moistened continually
for at least 5 days after the placement in case ordinary Portland cement is
used.

(c) When sheathing boards are expected to become dry, they shall be watered.

7.4.13 Joints

(1) General

(a) Location and structure of joints as shown and specified in the drawings shall
be observed.

451
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (b) Should any joint not specified in the design be made, its location, direction
and method of construction shall be determined in the plan of construction so
that it will not impair the strength and the appearance of the structure, and
this shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.

(2) Construction Joints

(a) Construction joints shall be located where the shear acting there is as small
as possible, and with their face in perpendicular, in principle, to the direction
of compression in the member.

(b) Should it be unavoidable to make a construction joint at a location where large

shear is action, it shall be reinforced by forming tenors or grooves, or
embedding suitable steel.

(3) Construction of Horizontal Construction Joints

(a) Sided of the surface of a horizontal construction joint intersecting the forms
shall be kept as horizontal and straight as possible.

(b) When new concrete is placed, the surface of the old concrete shall be
removed of all laitance, interior concrete, loosened aggregate, etc. and shall
be thoroughly wetted.

(c) Prior to the placement of new concrete, the forms shall be tightened, and
either cement paste or mortar with the same mix proportions as in concrete
shall be applied on the surface of the old concrete.

The concrete shall then be placed immediately and shall be compacted so

that is will be in tight contact with the old concrete.

(4) Construction method for Vertical Construction Joints

(a) When a vertical construction joint is to be made, the forms at the joint shall
be rigidly supported, and the concrete in the vicinity of the point shall be
thoroughly compacted by vibrators.

(b) Fresh concrete shall be placed after the surface of the aged concrete at the
joint is removed of the surface film or is roughened and thoroughly wetted,
followed by the application of cement paste or mortar, or after the surface is
treated as directed by the engineer.

(c) Fresh concrete shall be thoroughly compacted at the time of placement so

that the fresh and the aged concrete is in tight contact with each other.
It is recommended that the new concrete be compacted again after a
suitable delay by applying vibration.

7.4.14 Reinforcement Works

7.4.14.1 Processing of Reinforcement

452
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(1) Reinforcement shall be processed to the shape and the dimension as shown in the
drawings by a method which will not impair the quality of the material.

(2) Reinforcement shall be processed in ordinary temperature. When it is unavoidable

to heat for processing, the whole process shall be subject to the approval of the
engineer.

7.4.14.2 Fabrication of Reinforcement

(1) Prior to fabrication, reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from loose
rust and any other material which may impair the bond between the reinforcement
and the concrete.

(2) Reinforcement shall be placed to the designated position, and shall firmly be
fabricated so that it will not be dislocated ruining the placement of concrete.
Erection bars, if required, shall be used for this purpose.

Important crossings of reinforcement shall be fastened by either annealed

wire of at least 0.9mm in diameter.

(3) Clearance between reinforcement and sheathing board shall be maintained

correctly by use of spacers.

(4) Reinforcement shall be always inspected by the engineer after the completion of
fabrication.

7.4.14.3 Joints of Reinforcement

(1) Lap joints of reinforcement shall be made by lapping the required lengths and
fastening them together at several points with annealed wire of at least 0.9mm in
diameter.

(2) Reinforcement projecting form the structure and exposed for future jointing shall
be protected from damage, corrosion, etc.

7.4.15 Forms and Timbering

Forms and timbering shall be so designed and constructed as to have the required
strength and rigidity, to secure correct position, shape and dimension of the structure and
to secure the satisfactory quality in concrete.

7.4.15.1 Materials

Materials to be used for the form and the timbering shall be selected based on the
strength, rigidity, durability workability, effect on the concrete to be placed.

7.4.15.2 Design of Forms

453
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(1) Forms shall be those which can easily be fabricated and stripped; joints of
sheathing boards and panels shall be forced in parallel with or perpendicular to the
axis of the member so that it will have a structure which is tight against mortar.

(2) The structure of form shall be such that the corners of concrete can be moulded
even when it is not particularly specified.

(3) Temporary openings, if necessary, shall be made at suitable locations to facilitate

cleaning and inspection of the forms and the placing of concrete.
7.4.15.3 Design of Timbering
(1) Suitable types of timbering shall be selected and the load carried by them shall be
correctly transferred to the foundation by appropriate means.
(2) As for the timbering for important structures, design drawings shall be prepared by
they shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.
7.4.15.4 Construction of Forms
Stripping agents shall be applied on the inside of the sheathing board.

7.4.15.5 Construction of Timbering

(1) Timbering shall be constructed so as to have sufficient strength and stability.

(2) An amount of the settlement of the form words due to the weight of the placed
concrete shall be estimated and a chamber shall be introduced, if necessary, in
the shoring.

7.4.15.6 Inspection of Forms and Timbering

(1) Forms and timbering shall be inspected by the Engineer prior to the placement of
contents.
(2) Condition of forms and timbering shall be inspected during the placement of
concrete.

7.4.5.7 Removal of Forms and Timbering

(1) Forms and timbering shall not be removed until the concrete reaches a strength
required to carry the concrete weight and the load applied during the construction
work.

(2) Time and sequence of the removal of the removal of the forms and timbering shall
be subject to the approval of the engineer.

7.4.15.8 Loading on a Structure Immediately After Removal of Forms and

Timbering

Loading on a structure immediately after the removal of the forms and timbering shall be
subject to the approval of the engineer.

7.4.16 Finishing
454
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.16.1 General

When the uniform appearance should be obtained on the exposed surface, special
attention shall be given to place the concrete for the predetermined section continuously
without changing the materials, proportions and the method of the placement.

7.4.16.2 Surface Not Facing Sheeting Boards

(1) Surface of the concrete compacted and approximately leveled to the required level
and shape shall not be finished until the water coming out ceases or is removed.

(2) Cracks formed after finishing but before hardening shall be removed by tamping or
re-finishing.

7.4.6.3 Surface Facing Sheathing Boards

(1) Concrete which will be exposed shall be placed and compacted in such a manner
that the surface solely composed of mortar will be secured.

(2) Projections and lines formed on the surface of concrete shall be removed to ensure
surface flatness. Honeycombs and chipped places shall be removed and the
surface and the surface shall be moistened and patched with appropriately
proportioned concrete or mortar to be finished flat.

(3) Cracks formed after the removal of the forms due temperature stress, drying
shrinkage, etc. shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer.
7.4.17 Quality Control and Inspection

7.4.17.1 General

Materials of concrete, reinforcement, equipment’s and workmanship shall be controlled

produce reinforced concrete of the required quality economically.

7.4.17.2 Tests of Concrete

During construction, the following tests shall be carried out as directed by the
Engineer.
(1) Air test
(2) Compression test of concrete.
(3) Others

7.4.17.3 Inspection of Forms and Timbering

(1) Forms and timbering shall be inspected by the Engineer Prior to the placement of
contents.

(2) Condition of forms and timbering shall be inspected during the placement of
concrete.

7.4.17.5 Removal of Forms Timbering

455
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(1) Forms and timbering shall not be removed until the concrete reaches a strength
required to carry the concrete weight and the load applied during the construction
work.
(2) Time and sequence of the removal of the forms and timbering shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer.

7.4.17.5 Loading on All Structure Immediately after Removal of Forms and

Timbering
Loading on a structure immediately after the removal of the forms and timbering
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
7.4.18 Finishing
7.4.18.1 General

When the uniform appearance should be obtained on the exposed surface, special
attention shall be govern to place the concrete for the predetermined section continuously
without changing the materials, proportions and method of the placement.

7.4.18.2 Surface Not Facing Sheathing Boards

(1) Surface of the concrete completed and approximately leveled to the required level
and shaper shall not be finished until the water coming out ceases or is removed.

(2) In order to determine the suitability of the curing method and the time to remove
the forms, and in order to certify the safety for early loading, strength tests shall be
preformed on specimens cured under the conditions as similar as possible to those
of the concrete at the site.

Should the result of the test indicate that the obtained strength of the
specimen is much smaller than that of the specimens cured under the control
condition, the method of curing at the site shall be changed as directed by the
Engineer.

(3) For Compression test of concrete, six (6) test specimens shall be required for each
concrete. Three (3) specimens shall be tested for seven (7) or fourteen (14) days
strength, the remained three(3) specimens shall be tested for twenty- eight (28)
days strength.

The expense for the above tests shall be included is the unit prices.

(4) Should it become necessary after the completion of the work, non- destructive test
of concrete or tests on concrete specimens cut from the structure shall be carried
out.

7.4.18.3 Test of Reinforcement Bars

In the case where there is no test certificate of reinforcement bars (mill sheet) or
incase the Engineer deems necessary, the contractor shall carry out the characteristics
test of reinforcement bars and obtain an approval of the Engineer.

7.4.18.4 Test Method

456
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Test method shall conform the those specified in ASTM, ACI, BNBC or equivalent,
unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.

7.4.18.5 Report
The result of the tests shall be reported to the Engineer without delay.

7.4.18.6 Control of Concrete by Compressive Strength

(1) Control of concrete by compressive strength shall generally be based on 28 days

compressive strength. Specimens, in this case, shall be taken in such a manner
that they will represent the concrete of the structure.

(2) Test results of compressive strength to be used for the control of concrete shall
generally be obtained by averaging the compressive strength specimens taken
from the same batch.

(3) Should the quality of concrete be controlled by the test results, it shall be use the
control test.

7.4.18.7 Inspection of Quality of Concrete

(1) The contractor shall submit to the Engineer the results of Inspection of Quality of
concrete obtained according to the quality control test in the preceding Paragraph
8.16.6 and obtain and approval of the Engineer.

(2) Should it be found in the inspection that the quality of the concrete is not suitable,
remedial measures such as modifying the mix proportions, performance tests of
equipment’s and facilities, improvement of the working method, etc. shall be taken.
The concrete placed in the structure shall be checked if it can perform the
designated function and the suitable measures, should it become necessary as
directed by the Engineer.

7.4.19 Inspection of Structures

Structures shall be inspected after their completion as directed by the engineer.

• Brick Masonry Work

Prior to commencing the brick masonry work, the surface of brick shall thoroughly be
cleaned and sufficiently moistened in order to ensure smooth adherence of mortar to the
brick surface.

7.4.20 Road Work

The Construction work of roads shall be carried out in accordance with the
Drawing.

However, demolition and restoration of the public roads (including private roads)
shall be carried out according to the specifications designated the official in charge of road
management not with standing the provisions described in the specifications and the
Drawing.

457
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.20.1 Road Work Inside The Premises

(1) Sub –grade

a) Any excavation and banking work required for sub-grade construction shall
be carried out in accordance with the respective provisions in General
Provision SECTION-2 : EARTH WORKS.
b) The material required for banking and displacement shall be so placed that
the finished thickness of one layer after compaction will become 20 cm or
less.

c) The sub-grade surface shall be finished by proof- rolling in order to obtain the
contact pressure sufficient to permit smooth traffic of vehicles of 8 tons or
over should any defects be detected as a result of proof-rooling, such
detective sub-grade surface shall be finished again to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

d) The finished sub-grade surface shall be within + 5 cm of the design elevation.

(2) Sub base Course

(a) The materials to be used for sub base course shall be in accordance with the
specification described in the Drawing. The Contractor shall submit a report
concerning the quality of materials and the methods of sampling to the
Engineer for approval.

(b) The finished surface of sub base course shall be within –10 mm and + 5mm
of the design elevation.

(3) Surface Course (Asphalt pavement)

(a) Prior to commencing pavement, the sides of concrete side walk, manhole,
etc. shall be cleaned, and molten asphalt, etc. shall be coated over the sides.
(b) The surface to be seal-coated and prime- coated shall be finished into even
level, and after perfecting removing any bloc, dust and other foreign matters,
such surface shall be cured and dried.
(c) The mixtures shall be spread uniformly, rolled and finished into the specified
thickness. Then, the finished surface shall be measured in parallel to the
center line of the load by using a 3 m straight line ruler. In this case, the depth
of any concise sections shall not exceed 5 mm.
(d) The Contractor shall submit a report on the materials to be used for pavement
of surface course and method therefore to the Engineer to the Engineer for
approval.
(4) Inspection
The Contractor shall receive inspection of the Engineer during the
course and after completion of sub base course and surface course works.

7.4.20.2 Public Road (Including Private Road)

(1) Demolition of Pavement

458
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Demolition of Pavement for public roads including private roads shall be
carried out so carefully as not to cause any hazardous effect upon the surrounding
portions of cement, concrete or pavement.

(2) Road Keeping and Restoration

(a) The road keeping shall be of a construction applicable to the prevailing site
conditions and so provided as not to cause any danger or trouble against
traffic.

(b) The contractor shall submit the drawings for road keeping to the Engineer for
approval.

(c) The Contractor shall constantly patrol any spots of road keeping and exert
his utmost efforts perform maintenance and repair of such roads in order to
eliminate any trouble against smooth traffic.

(d) The Contractor shall carry out maintenance and repair of any pertinent roads
so carefully as not to cause any trouble against smooth traffic until the said
roads have been restored and taken over to the official in charge of road
management.

7.4.21 Drainage Work

(a) The drainage work shall be as described in the Drawing and carried out in
accordance with General Provision SECTION-2 : EARTH WORK AND
SECTION-3 : REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK.

(b) The water – plumbing facility for drainage shall be of such a construction as
not to cause any trouble against the surrounding area and structure. The
contractor shall submit the design and execution schedule for the water
plumbing work to the Engineer for approval.

7.4.22 Painting Work

7.4.22.1 General

This clause covers all painting applied to surface of plaster wood, and metal
indicated in the Drawing. No painting shall be applied to surfaces of stainless steel copper,
bronze, brass or any/all steel in contact with concrete. Painting work shall be performed
by skilled workmen. Selection of color shall be as determined by the Engineer, unless
otherwise specified.

7.4.23 Materials and Painting Coat

7.4.23.1 Materials
Materials to be used in this clause shall be as follows and shall conform PAINTS AND
VARNISHES
459
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 • Water Based Paints
Water based paints shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 500:1965 Specification for Distemper Dry (under revision);
BDS 1097:1984 Specification for Plastic Emulsion Paint.
Part I for Interior Use;
Part 2 for Exterior Use;
IS 5410-1969 Specification for Cement Paint, Colour as Required;
IS 428-1969 Specification for Distemper, Oil Emulsion, Colour as
Required
• Ready Mixed Paint and Enamels
Ready mixed paints and enamels shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 13:1960 Specification for Ready Mixed Paints, Varnish,
Lacquers and Related Products (under revision);
BDS 14:1960 Specification for Black Bituminous Paint,
Brushing for General Purposes (under revision);
BDS 397:1964 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Red
Oxide Zinc Chrome, Priming (under revision);
BDS 398:1964 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint,
Spraying, Red Oxide Zinc Chrome, Priming (under
revision);
BDS 399:1964 Specification for Aluminum Paint, Spraying for General
Purposes, in Dual Container (under revision);
BDS 400:1964 Specification for Aluminium Paint,
Brushing, for General Purposes in Dual Container
(under revision);
BDS 401:1964 Specification for Varnish, Finishing,
Exterior, Type-I, (Synthetic) (Tentative) (under
revision);
BDS 402:1989 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing,
Finishing, Semigloss, for General Purposes (First
Revision);
BDS 499:1965 Specification for Ready Mixed Paints, Brushing, for
Road Marking (white, yellow and black) (under
revision);
BDS 616:1966 Specification for Enamel, Brushing, Exterior (i)
Undercoating, (ii) Finishing, Colour as Required (under
revision);
BDS 617:1966 Specification for Enamel, Brushing, Interior (i)
Undercoating, (ii) Finishing, Colour as Required (under
revision);
BDS 926:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Petrol
Resisting, Air Drying, for Exterior Painting of
Containers, Colour as Required;
BDS 927:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Petrol
Resisting, Air Drying, for Interior Painting of Tanks and
Containers, Red Oxide (colour unspecified);
BDS 928:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Acid
Resisting, for Protection Against Acid Fumes, Colour as
Required;
BDS 973:1981 Specification for Specification and Methods of Test for
Linseed Stand Oil for Paints and Varnishes;

460
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 BDS 974:1981 Specification and Methods of Test for
Raw Tung Oils for Paints and Varnishes;
BDS 1005:1981 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing,
Finishing, Stoving, Enamel, Colour as Required;
BDS 1141:1986 Specification for Ready Mixed
Aluminium Priming Paints for Woodwork;
BDS 1151:1986 Specification for Pavement Marking
Paints.
7.4.24 Thinners and Solvents
These shall conform to the following standards:
IS 324-1959 Specification for Ordinary Denatured Spirit (revised);
IS 533-1973 Specification for Gum Spirit of Turpentine (Oil of
Turpentine) (First Revision);
IS 82-1973 Methods of Sampling and Test for Thinners and
Solvents for Paints (First Revision).
• Varnishes and Lacquers
These materials shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 401:1964 Specification for Varnish, Finishing,
Exterior, Type-I, (synthetic) (under revision);
BDS 1064:1983 Specification for Varnish, Staving;
BDS 1065:1983 Specification for Varnish, Acid
Resisting;
BDS 1066:1983 Specification for Varnish, Finishing,
Interior;
IS 197-1969 Methods of sampling and Test for Varnishes and
Lacquers (First Revision);
IS 340-1978 Specification for Varnish, Mixing (First Revision);
IS 346-1952 Specification for Varnish, Spirit, Clear, Hard;
IS 347-1975 Specification for Varnish, Shellac for general purposes
(First Revision);
IS 348-1968 Specification for French Polish (First Revision);

7.4.23.2 Painting Coat

Number of coats shall be as indicated in the table below.

Number of coats
Material to be painted Primary Secondary Finishing
Steel Outdoor 2 2 1
Indoor 2 1 1

Wood Outdoor 1 2 1
Indoor 1 1

Concrete Plaster Outdoor 1 2 1

and board Indoor 1 1 1

Acid – proof Indoor 1 3 1

Galvanized steel Outdoor 2 1 1
Indoor 1 1
Touch –up of galvanized steel 1 1 1

461
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.23.3 Workmanship

(1) Smooth Finished & soft colored Plastic paint should be used over the Plastering
work of interior wall and ceiling.
(2) Smooth Finished & Architectural approved colored weather coat should be used over
the Plastering work of Exterior wall. Some where should be used Ceramic Facing
brick (Strip)/ Rustic Tiles as per direction/decision of Architecture or approved
3D view.

(3) Painting shall be applied by spraying, brushing or rolling.

(4) Surfaces to be painted shall be smooth, dry and free from dirt, loose mill scale,
rust, grease, or other deleterious material

(5) The contractor shall submit the samples and catalogue of paint of the Engineer for
approval.

7.4.23.4 Protection
Drop clothes shall be furnished and place to fully protect all parts or work during execution
of the contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for paint droppings on cement
floor and base.

Paint droppings shall be entirely removed, and damaged surfaces shall be repaired in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

No work shall be accepted which shows laps. Stains, flat or glossy spots or imperfections
in surface over which paint or other finish is applied.

All rubbish, waste, or surplus materials shall be removed from time to time, and all
woodwork, hardware, floors or other adjacent work shall be cleaned.

All glass throughout the building shall have all paint or varnish sports and brush marks
removed, and upon completion of the painting work, all glass that is scratched or damaged
by the painter’s work, shall be replaced at the contractor’s responsibility.

Hardware and other unpainted metal surfaces shall be cleaned.

CONTROL BUILDING

7.4.24 Temporary Work, Earth Work and Piling Work

7.4.24.1 General

The work of the above items shall be specified in clauses “TEMPORARY WORK”,
“EARTH WORK” and “PILING WORK” in Section 1 “GENERAL PROVISIONS”, unless
otherwise specified.
7.4.24.2 Materials of Pile

The pile to be used for Control Building shall be RCC.

7.4.25 Concrete Work

462
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.25.1 General

Concrete work shall be as specified in Clause “CONCRETE WORK” in SECTION

1 “GENERAL PROVISIONS”, unless otherwise specified.

7.4.25.2 Classification of Materials to Be Used for Buildings

7.4.25.2.1 Concrete

The classification to be used for structural concrete shall be 4 Fc= 210 kg/cm2
concrete. (class E 210-10-25)
The classification to be used for leveling concrete shall be 4 Fc = 120 kg/ cm2
concrete. (class C 120-10-40)

7.5.25.2.2 Reinforcing Bar

Reinforcement and welding of reinforcement to be placed in concrete shall conform

to the requirements of this section.
a) Deformed Reinforcement : Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to the
following standards; BDS 1313, Steel Bars and Wires for Reinforcement of
Concrete; BDS 580, Rolled Deformed Steel Bars (intermediate grade) for
Concrete Reinforcement; Reinforcement conforming to the ASTM, Standards:
A615M, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars; A616M, Rail-Steel Deformed
and Plain Bars; A617M, Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; A706M, Low-
Alloy Steel Deformed Bars; A767M, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars; and
A775M, Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel.
b) Deformed reinforcing bars with a specified yield strength (f y ) exceeding 410
MPa may be used, provided f y shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of
0.35 per cent and the bars otherwise conform to ASTM standards noted above.
Fabricated deformed steel bar mats conforming to ASTM A184M and deformed
steel wire complying with ASTM A496 may be used. Deformed wire for
concrete reinforcement shall not be smaller than size D4 (Nominal diameter :
5.72 mm), and for wire with a specified yield strength f y , exceeding 410 MPa
fy shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent.
Welded deformed steel wire fabric conforming to ASTM A497 may be used; for
a wire with a specified yield strength (f y ) exceeding 410 MPa, f y shall be the
stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent. Welded intersections shall
not be spaced farther apart than 400 mm in direction of calculated stress,
except for wire fabric used as stirrups.
7.4.25.2.3 Form

7.4.25.2.3.1 Form Oil

Form oil shall be light colored paraffin oil or other acceptable non-staining material.
Form in contact with concrete shall be given a uniform light spray coating of the
specified form oil coating in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Form
coating shall be applied to the forms before they are set.
463
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.25.2.3.2 Form Ties

Form ties shall have sufficient strength, stiffness and rigidity to support and
maintain the form in proper position and alignment without the use of auxiliary spreaders.
The type of form ties used shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

7.4.26 Steel Reinforcement

7.4.26.1 Lapped Splices in Reinforcement

Splices at points of great stress shall be avoided wherever possible, and care shall
be exercised to avoid concentration of splices at one place.

a) Length of Lap

The lengths of laps in lapped splices shall be in accordance with the Drawings and
indicated below.

40 d without hook
35 d with hook

The length of lap in a lapped splice of reinforcing bars of different diameters shall
be based on the nominal diameter of smaller bar.

7.4.26.2 Anchorage of Reinforcement

The length of anchorage of reinforcement shall be determined in accordance with

the type of reinforcing bar, the grade of concrete and type of stress acting on the
reinforcement, and shall be as indicated in the table below, unless otherwise
indicated.

Length of Anchorage of Reinforcement

Length of
Strength of Concrete Floor,
Re-Bar Anchorage Lower
Ordinary Concrete Roof
Bar Beam
25 d or 15 d with 10 d and 15
SD30 210kg/mc2 35 d or 25 d with hook
hook cm or more

Note : “d” denotes nominal diameter of reinforcing bar.

7.4.26.3 Dowels
Dowels shall be installed at right angles to construction joints. Dowels shall be
accurately aligned parallel to the finished surface and shall be rigidly held in place
and supported during placing of the concrete.

7.4.26.4 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement

464
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The thickness of concrete cover for reinforcement shall be determined to provide
necessary fire resistance, durability and bearing strength of the member. Minimum
concrete cover shall be provided in accordance with the table below.

Table : Minimum Thickness of Concrete Cover for Reinforcement

Covering Thickness
Item Structure Element
(cm)
Floor, Wall Covered finish 2
Uncovered 3
Interior finish 3
Part not Uncovered 3
Contacting Exterior, 3
Column, Beam covered finish
wall Ground
Uncovered 4
Bearing wall 4

Table : Minimum Thickness of Concrete Cover for Reinforcement (Cont’d)

Item Structure Element Covering

Thickness (cm)
Wall, Column, beam, floor 4
Part contacting ground Foundation, retaining wall 6

7.4.26.5 Concrete Test

The test of concrete shall be executed as follows :

a) The concrete tests, necessary to maintain the quality control of concrete, shall be
executed and their test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.

b) For concrete compressive tests, six (6) test specimens shall be required for each
concrete placement.

c) Three (3) specimens shall be tested for seven (7) or fourteen (14) days strength,
the remained three(3) specimens shall be test tested for twenty-eight (28) days
strength.

d) The test of concrete shall be executed once for each 150m 3 or less of concrete to
be poured on the same day.

The expense for the above tests shall be included in the unit prices.

7.4.26.6 Tolerances for Concrete Construction

Concrete structure shall be constructed to the line shown in the drawings.

Any structure which does not conform to such lines within the tolerances listed
below shall be repaired, removed and made a new by the contractor.

465
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Tolerances limits of concrete structure shall, as a standard, be in accordance with
the table below.

Tolerance Limited

Type Item Tolerances against

base line (mm)
Column, wall A. Form Architecturally 3
formed
Others 5
B, Concrete surface 7
Beam, slab A. Form 1
B. Deflection 3
C. Concrete surface 7
A. Column line 3

7.4.26.7 Steel Thrown Finish

After the placing of concrete has been completed, steel trowel finish shall be
applied to interior concrete floors, such as bed of vinyl asbestos tile and exposed
steel trowel finish floor as indicated in the drawings.

The finished floor surfaces shall be true plane surfaces with no deviation in excess
of 3.0mm when tested with a 300mm.
Surfaces shall be pitched to drains where indicated in the drawings.

Instead of hand finishing, the contractors may use an approved power finishing
machine provided that the finished surfaces are free of machine marks or ridges.

7.4.26.8 Concrete Surfaces to Be Exposed

Form surfaces that will be in contact shall be of material that is non-reactive with concrete
and that will produce concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that
produced by new plywood panels.
Smaller size panels shall be used only where required by openings or joint details, with
each area less than 120 cm wide formed with a single panel accurately cut to the required
dimensions.

Cut surfaces shall be smooth and treated with form coating. Panel joints that will
be in contact with concrete shall be smooth and free of offset.

Form materials with defects that will impair the texture and appearance of finish
surfaces shall not be used.

Column forms shall be made with a minimum number of joints.

7.4.27 Masonry Work

7.4.27.1 Concrete Block Masonry

7.4.27.1.1 General

466
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 This clause covers walls, partitions and lintels constructed with pre-cast concrete
hollow blocks reinforced with steel bars.

7.4.27.1.2 Materials

1) Cements and aggregate

Cement and aggregates to be used in the concrete hollow block shall be as

specified in the clause “REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK”. Coarse aggregate
for blocks shall not be larger than one-fifth (1/5) of the narrowest with of hollow
block section.
2) Cement mortar and concrete

Reinforcing bars shall be as specified in the clause “ REINFORCED CONCRETE

WORK”

3) Cement mortar and concrete

Standard mix proportion shall be as follows, unless otherwise shown:

Work Mix proportion (by volume)

Cement : (slaked lime) : sand
For masonry Joint 1:3
Cement mortar For Tamping 1:3
For painted joint 1:3
Concrete For Tamping 1 : (2.5) : 3.5

7.4.27.1.3 Working Drawings

Working drawings of the block laying plan including reinforcing for arrangements
and the places of anchor bolts shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.
7.4.27.1.4 Application Method
1) Reinforcing Bars

Unless otherwise specified, reinforcing bars shall be of D10, and shall be

placed at three (3) block intervals horizontally and two (2) block intervals vertically.

Intersection of the bars shall be securely tied with wire. The extra reinforcing
bars to be used for the perimeters of the opening shall be of D 13.

2) Laying
The concrete surface to receive blocks shall be cleaned and thoroughly
wetted prior to laying the masonry units. All masonry units shall be clean and free
from surface dust before laying, and shall be laid by suing cement mortar.
Fractional parts of units will not be permitted where whole units can be used.
Joints shall be 10mm thick, and as uniform as possible.
All exposed joints shall be raked 10mm deep and tooled firmly so as to
produce a smooth, tight surface. All cell where reinforcing bars are inserted and
blocks are jointed shall be compactly filled with specified mortar (tamping mortar).

Laying of blocks shall not exceed 1.2 meters per day in height.

467
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Pipes and conduits to be inserted in the concrete hollow block walls shall be
embedded in such a manner as not to cause any damage to the block. The
contractor shall coordinate placing of all items embedded in masonry, and shall be
responsible for any changes in positions.

7.4.28 Lintel

Lintels for opening shall be of reinforced concrete and extended to a length of at

least 20mm into the adjoining walls.

All cells of the blocks directly below the extended lintels shall be filled with mortar.
7.4.29 Bond Beam

When the height of concrete block wall exceeds 30 times the wall thickness,
reinforced pre-cast or pour in place concrete bond beam shall be provided at each 30
times exceeding the wall thickness.

7.4.30 Precast Concrete Block

7.4.30.1 General

Materials, such as cement, aggregate, reinforcing bars, etc. shall be as specified

in the Clause “REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK”

Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be less than 5mm. Specific gravity of
coarse aggregate shall be 2.7 or more, unless otherwise specified.

Mix proportion of cement, sand : coarse aggregate shall be 1:2:4, respectively.

7.4.30.2 Lightweight Concrete Block for Roofing

Specific gravity of coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete shall be 1.7.- 1.9.

7.4.31 Water Proofing Work

7.4.31.1 General

This clause covers all waterproofing, built up roofing and mortar waterproof.

7.4.31.1.1 Built Up Roofing

7.4.31.1.2 Materials

(1) Asphalt Primer

Asphalt primer shall be applied by spraying or brushing. The quality of material

shall be in accordance with the table below:

Drying Time Not less than 8 hours

Remainder after drying Not less than 35%

468
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Specific Gravity Less than 1.0

Test method for the above shall comply with JIS K 5400 or equivalent BDS

(2) Asphalt Compound

The quality of materials shall conform to ASTM, and shall in accordance with the
table below.

Asphalt Compound
Penetration (25 oC, 100 gr, 5 sec.) 20 – 30 (2.0 ~ 3.0 mm)
Softening Point oC Not less than 90 oC
Carbon disulfide Not less than 97%
Matteability (25 oC) Not less than 2.5mm
Volume of Evaporation Less than 0.5%
Penetration after evaporation Not less that 70%

Flashing Point (open cup method) Not less than 230 oC

Specific Gravity 1.01 - 1.04

(3) Asphalt Roofing

Asphalt roofing shall comply with JIS A 6006 (Asphalt Roofing Felts), or
equivalent BDS and shall be 45kg. – item (21.0m x 1.0 m per roll)

The Contractor shall submit sample of asphalt roofing to the

engineering for approval.

(i) Specific roofing shall, in principle, consist of copper mesh (#38) or glass-
fiber (#23) coated with asphalt, and the weight of standard item shall be
55kg.

(ii) Perforated Roofing

Quality of material shall comply with JIS A 6006 or equivalent BDS

The Contractor shall submit the sample to the engineer for approval.

7.4.31.1.3 Grades of Water Proofing

Working Class – A Class - B

Process
1 Asphalt Primer (0.31/m2) Asphalt Primer (0.31/ m2)
2 Perforated roofing within Asphalt (0.1 kg/ m2)
layer of sand
3 Asphalt (1.2 kg/ m2) Asphalt Roofing
4 Special roofing Asphalt (1.0 kg/ m2)
5 Asphalt (1.0 kg/ m2) Special roofing
6 Special roofing Asphalt (1.0 kg/ m2)
7 Asphalt (1.0 kg/ m2) Asphalt roofing
8 Asphalt roofing
9 Asphalt (2.0 kg/ m2)
469
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Class – A shall be applied for the roof.
Class – B shall be applied for the lavatory.

Inclination of the base concrete shall be, in principle, more than 1/100.

7.4.31.1.4 Application Method

Asphalt primer shall be evenly sprayed over the base concrete or roof insulation
board. Asphalt compound shall then be vinyl poured and spread over the asphalt
primer. Compound heated to a temperature exceeding 230oC shall not be used.

In the case of class – A, perforated roofing shall be laid between asphalt primer
and asphalt compound.

Asphalt felt, roofing and special roofing shall be flatly laid over each respective
asphalt compound. The sides and ends of these sheets shall be provided with an
overlap of at least 9 centimeters. The joints shall be completely water tight and not
be concentrated.

Care shall be exercised for the roofing works surrounding anchor bolts, parapets
and roof drains to prevent any leakage.

7.4.32 Mortar Waterproofing

The waterproofing agent shall be used for mortar waterproofing of roof and
balcony.

Cement and sand to be used for waterproofing mortar shall be as specified in the
clause “PLASTER WORK”

The catalogue and mix proportion shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

The application method of mortar shall be as specified in the clause “PLASTER

WORK”

7.4.32.1 Caulking
7.4.32.2 General

The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor and equipment necessary to
complete the work as specified or as directed by the engineer.

The contractor shall submit the catalogues and work procedures to the engineer
for approval.

7.4.32.3 Material

(1) Oil caulking compound shall conform to JIS A 5751 (Oil Based Caulking
compounds Buildings ) or equivalent.

470
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (2) Thiokol caulking shall conform to JIS A 5754 (Polysulfide Sealing compound for
Buildings) or equivalent.

(3) Thiokol caulking shall be used as joint for all surroundings of exterior doors,
windows and concrete panels.

7.4.32.4 Workmanship

All joint surfaces to be filled shall be sound, clean and dry. All concrete surfaces
shall be fully cured before application of caulking.

Joint surfaces to be filled shall be primed with the manufacturer’s recommended

primer, compatible with the Thiokol base sealing compound and appropriate for
the surfaces to be sealed.

Mixing and application of filling compound shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations, and shall be submitted to the engineer for
approval.

All filler work shall be done by skilled workmen.

7.4.33 Control Joint For Roof

Control joint shall be provided between mortar finish and light weight concrete
block and at about 4.0mm of intervals in light weight concrete block area of roof.

Control joint shall consists of elastight and asphalt mortar.

7.4.34 Tile Work

7.4.34.1 General

This clause covers all works required for mosaic tile, ceramic tile and others applied on
floors and wall.

Working drawings shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.

Prior to starting work, the contractor shall submit samples of tile to the
Engineer for approvals.

7.4.34.2 Materials

7.4.34.2.1 Floor Finish

● To be used 600mmx600mm (24 inch x 24inch) size European standard Mirror Polished
Homogeneous tiles for 1st to 6th Floor.
● For Ground/Underground Floor finish to be used as per Transformer based design
such as use dry gravels for bottom of the Transformer and Rustic Tiles for walk way or
common space.
Materials to be used in the works shall be high quality, high grade and good
appearance.
471
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.34.2.2 Ceramic Tile for Interior Wall Finish (GWI) for Bath room’s wall

Special color and size of European standard Ceramic Tile with decorative Boarder shall
be used in Bath rooms & other necessary interior walls.
Materials to be used in the work shall be high quality, high grade and good appearance.

7.4.34.2.3 Ceramic Tile for Exterior Wall Finish

Ceramic tile for exterior wall finish shall be of 60mm x 227mm, colored, glazed and
manufactured by qualified manufacturer as approved by the engineer. (if required)

The color of tile shall be designated by the engineer.

7.4.34.2.4 Setting Materials

(1) Cement, sand to be used for mortar bed shall be as specified in the clause
“REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK”

(2) Bedding mortar shall be mixed with one part Portland Cement and three parts
sand.

7.4.34.3 Setting

(1) Mosaic Tile

The mortar setting bed shall be floated to a uniform plumb and level surface to
bring the finish surface to the required plane.

Thickness of mortar shall be about 10 millimeters.

Mosaic sheets shall be placed in positions on the pure coat and freshly combed
into the mortar setting bed with trowel. Sheets shall be tamped firmly into place
and made true and even with the finished surface line or plane.

Expansion joints or control joints at 6 meters on center shall continue through the
mortar bed and mosaic tile and shall be kept free from mortar and grout. Those
shall be filled with an approved caulking compound and shall be as close as
possible to the color of the grout mortar. All joints, after removal of the paper, shall
be grouted leaving then completely and uniformly filled. At no time shall sand or
any abrasive be used that will damage the natural sheen of the mosaic tile. All
excess grout and glue shall be removed from the face of the tile leaving the finished
surface clean.

(2) Ceramic Tile

Laying of ceramic tile shall comply with the specifications for “ Mosaic Tile” for
floors, tile lay out work shall begin from the center lines of areas to eliminate use
of half tiles.

For walls, tile layout work shall begin from the top of the wall and proceed
downward.
472
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Tile shall be soaked in clean water for at least one hour prior to setting and applied
to setting beds within five minutes after soaking.

(3) Protection

The contractor shall provide and install barriers or other forms of protection and
covering to prevent damages.

(4) Cleaning

Tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned after grouting and painting has sufficiently set.
A;; traces of cement or foreign matter shall be removed from tiles. Exposed
hardware and plumbing trim shall be covered with baseline during tile setting. Base
line shall be removed and metal shall be cleaned and polished.

7.4.34.4 Gun Sprayed Tile

Gun sprayed tile shall be applied on the surface of concrete as indicated in the
drawings.

Gun sprayed tile shall conform to JIS A 6910 - C or equivalent.

Sealer shall be applied on the concrete surface so as to prevent moisture from

main material and to increase adhesion of main material.

Main material shall consist of white Portland Cement, dolomite plaster and coloring
agent. The color shall be designated by the Engineer.

7.4.35 Metal Works

7.4.35.1 General
This clause covers all metal works for flooring, siding, walling, flushing, railings, roofing,
raiser, plumbing, and other pertinent fixtures. The contractor shall submit fabrication and
installation drawings to the engineer for approval.

7.4.35.2 Handrails

7.4.35.2.1 Steel Railings

For Stair case railing to be used Stainless Steel Pipe, Square Box & other decorative post
as per drawing to the engineer for approval.
Steel railings, including pipe inserts to be embedded in concrete shall conform to JIS G
3452 and shall be galvanized, unless otherwise specified.

Square pipe shall be of the size indicated in the Drawings.

Galvanizing coat damaged by bolting, welding and other field works shall be repaired and
painted with two coats of silver zinc paint.

7.4.35.2.2 Fabrication

473
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Mitered and welded joints shall be made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate
rail to post mitering comers, groove welding joints, and grinding smooth.
Railings may be bent at comers instead of jointed, provided that the bends are
made in suitable jigs and that the pipe is not crushed or damage.
Edge of the railings shall be covered with steel plates.

7.4.35.2.3 Installation

Rails shall be installed by means of steel sleeve inserts which shall be seat and
anchored in the concrete.

Ports shall be inserted into the galvanized steel sleeves embedded in concrete or
shall be welded to the stringer, beam or toe plate made level, perpendicular and
aligned.

The space between pipe posts and pips sleeve inserts except those marked
“ Removable handrail” as indicated in the drawings shall be filled solid with molten
lead or shall be welded.

7.4.35.3 Steel Ladders

Materials to be used for steel ladders shall conform to JIS G 3101 – SS 41 or

equivalent.

Steel ladders shall be fabricated of l- 65 x 6 steel angle stringers and 19mm

diameter steel bar rungs. Rungs shall be spaced 350mm apart and shall be
inserted into the stringers and welded thereto.

The ladders, including welded on bracket, shall be pointed.

7.4.35.4 Corner Guards

Comer guards for jamps, where directed by the engineer and sills of opening and
edges of concrete column and wall shall be of steel angles or steel plates,
conforming to JIS G 3101-SS 41 or equivalent, anchored into concrete with welded
steel straps or end weld stud anchors.

7.4.35.5 Stair Safety Nosing for Concrete Stair

Stair safety nosing shall be of extruded bronze or stainless steel with cross hatched
nosing.

Safety nosing shall be provided with integrally cast or bent anchors for embedding into
concrete.

7.5.35.6 Divider Strips

Divider strips shall be half hard brass and shall be placed between different types
of floorings as indicated. Divider strips shall be secured to floors by strip anchors
or by flat head countersunk brass screws set in lead plugs.

7.4.35.7 Roof Drain

474
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Roof drains shall be of cast iron baked with refined tar and shall conform to JIS A
5511, or equivalent, The size shall be in accordance with the drawings.

7.4.35.8 Corner Bead

Corner bead shall be half hard brass, and shall be placed at edges of columns and
wall where mortar or plaster is applied.

7.4.35.9 Blind Box

Blind boxes shall be provided above all windows faced to outdoor, excepting for
lavatory, storage, janitorial, kitchen and rooms which located on the first floor.

They shall be constructed of 1.6mm thick steel plate conforming to JIS G 3131, JIS
G 3141 or equivalent and shall be painted.

Hanger bracket for installation of the blind box shall be galvanized 6mm thickness
flat bar conforming to JIS G 3101 SS 41 and shall be installed at spacing of 90cm
diameter expansion blots.

Connection between blind box and hanger bracket shall be 6mm diameter bolts
and nuts.

7.4.35.10 Doorsill
Prior to commencement of floor finish work, doorsill shall be provided in place between
different types of flooring, unless other wise indicated, and shall be stainless steel
conforming to JIS G 4305 – SUS 304 or equivalent.

7.4.35.11 Flashing Plate

Flashing Plates shall be of 2.3mm galvanized steel plate conforming to JIS G

3131, G 2341 or equivalent.

Flashing plates shall be provided at wall and roof opening for piping and at
surrounding areas of windows, louvers rolling doors and doors facing outdoors.

7.4.35.1 2 Embedded Plate, Hook and Sleeve

The contractor shall provide plates, hooks and sleeves to be embedded in concrete
as required.

Embedded plates, hooks and sleeves shall have sufficient thickness, diameter and
anchorage in order to fix equipment, piping and other necessary items. Painting
shall be applied on the plates and hooks after fixing the equipment and piping.

The materials to be used for plates, hooks and sleeves shall conform to JIS G 3101
SS 41 or equivalent.

7.4.35.13 Joiner

475
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Joiners shall be provided at surrounding space of suspended ceilings and shall be
of aluminum conforming to JIS H 4000 or equivalent.

Small screws shall be of stainless steel or of high strength aluminum alloy.

7.4.35.14 Down Spout

Downspouts to be used for drains shall be steel pipe conforming to JIS G 3442 or
equivalent.

Metal bracket shall be of 50mm x 4.5mm steel plate conforming to JIS G 3101 SS
41 or equivalent and galvanized.

Downspouts shall be fixed with metal brackets at maximum of 2.0m per space.

7.4.36 Plaster Work

7.4.36.1 General

7.4.36.1.1 Treatment of Bed

(1) Concrete surfaces which are too smooth to receive plastering shall be roughened
before hand with chisels.

(2) Where wall and floors of concrete, concrete block, etc. are distorted or uneven, the
bed shall be repaired with mortar.

7.4.36.1.2 Cleaning and Wetting of Bed

The bed, scratch coat, and treated surface of bed shall be cleaned and suitably
wetted before application of the following coat.

Portions of the base or coated surface which are not bonded shall be immediately
repaired.

7.4.36.1.3 Curing

In order to prevent soiling and premature drying of plastered surface, window and
door work shall be completed prior to commencement of the plaster work sheet coverings
provided and sprinkling of water performed.

In order to prevent the soiling of neighboring members and other finished surface,
suitable protection shall be provided using paper, boarding, tarpauling sheet or other
suitable means.

7.4.37 Mortar Plastering

7.4.37.1 Materials

(1) Cement shall conform to JIS R 5210 ordinary Portland Cement or locally produced
equivalent.

476
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(2) Sand shall be of good quality free of salts, mud, trash and /or organic matters. The
gradation shall be in accordance with the table below.

Table Gradation of Sand

Gradation (by weight) Type of Mortar

Plastering
Passing 5mm sieve…………..100% First coat ad
second coat
Passing 0.15mm sieve ………not more than 10%
Passing 2.5mm sieve…………100% Finish coat
Passing 0.15mm sieve………..not more than 10%

Water shall be clean and free of sales, iron, sulfur and/ or organic matter, as
specified in he clause “ CONCRETE WORK”.

7.4.37.2 Mixing
The mix proportions of mortar shall be of standard type in accordance with the
table below.

Table Mix Proportion (by Volume)

Portion to be First Second Finish

Base
Plastered Coat Coat Coat
C:S C:S C:S Slaked
Lime
Floor 1:2
Interior Wall 1:2 1:3 1 : 3 : 0.3
Concrete Ceiling 1:2 1 : 3 : 0.3

Concrete Exterior Wall and 1:2 1:3 1:3

Block others
Wire lath Interior Wall 1:3 1:3 1 : 3 : 0.3
Metal Lath Ceiling 1:2 1:3 1 : 3 : 0.3
Exterior wall and 1:3 1:3 1:3
others
In the above table, abbreviated C and S mean cement and sand, respectively.

7.4.37.3 Plastering Thickness

The thickness of application shall be in accordance with the standards indicated in

the table below.

Table Plastering Thickness

Plastering Thickness (mm)

Bed Portion to be First Dubbing Second Finish Total
plastered coat Coat Coat Coat
Floor - - - 30 30
Concrete Interior wall 6 5 6 3 20

477
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Concrete Exterior wall 6 7 6 6 25
Block
Ceiling, others 4.5 - 4.5 3 12
Interior wall 7.5 - 7.5 3 18
Wire Lath Exterior wall 6 - 7.5 3 18
Metal Lath Ceiling, waves 4.5 - 4.5 3 12

7.4.37.5 Application Method

(1) First Coat and Dubbing Out

Mortar shall be trawled on adequately to leave on conspicuous hollow. The

surface of the first coat shall be roughened with tools such as metal combs.

The first coat shall be left standing for not less then 10 days allowing cracks
to be fully developed before applying the next coat.

Dubbing out for concrete and concrete block shall be performed by

roughening with tools such as metal combs and shall be left standing for not less then 5
days.

(2) Second Coat

For the second coat, a ruler shall be provided at external corners, internal
corners and edges applied on order to attain an even finish.

(3) Finish Coat

The finish coat shall be applied in a manner so as to be blemish free by

watching the degree of drying of the brown coat and by paying special attention to the
surface, angles and edges.

The finish shall be either steel toweled, wood troweled or brushed as

directed by the engineer.

For the exterior wall, the mortar shall first be troweled on with a wood travel,
then furnished with a steel trowel and finally brushed avoiding use of water as much as
possible.

(4) Floor Mortaring

In the case of concrete which is several days old, concrete paste shall be
buttered on in adequate quantity and spread out with brooms and the like after which
application of mortar shall be started.

Application of mortar shall be performed using stiff mortar containing a

minimum of water and the mortar shall be tamped to bring moisture to the surface. The
mortar shall be screened while paying attention to the grade upon and then shall be
troweled smooth.

The crack control joint should be provided at intervals of approximately

3.0m. The joints shall be tooled.

478
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (5) Base for Tile Fixing

In the case of using adhesives of wall tile or mosaic tile, mortar application
shall be to the second coat.

7.4.38 Plastering

7.4.38.1 Materials

Plaster shall comply with JIS A6904 (Gypsum Plaster) or equivalent. Cement
which is more than six (6) months aged shall not be used.

7.4.38.2 Mix Proportion

The mix proportions shall be as follows :

Applied
Plaster
Thickness
White
For For
Bed Layer Sand Fiber Ceiling Wall
Finish Bed
(g)/25kg
Concrete
and
2nd coat - 1 2.0 250 6.0 7.5
concrete
block
Finish
1 - - - 1.5 1.5
coat

7.4.38.3 Application Method

The surface to receive gypsum plastering shall be leveled with a coat of cement
mortar of which the mix proportion of cement and sand is 1:2 prior to the application of
plaster and the leveled surface shall be scratched to insure satisfactory adhesion of the
plaster.
Before applying plaster, the receiving surface shall be pre pared by removing all
foreign substances and shall be dampened.

7.4.39 Doors, Windows and Louvers

7.4.39.1 Wooden Doors and Frames

7.4.39.1.1 General

This clause covers wooden doors and wooden frames, including finish hardware,
such as butts, hinges, locks, knobs, stops, strikes, holders, door chains and closures.

7.4.39.1.2 Materials

All doors shall be flush type, of sizes as shown in the drawings. Materials shall be,
in principle, locally principle, locally produced. Standard flush doors be double paneled
479
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
door of 6mm thick plywood and shall have stiffening ribs spaced at intervals of 15cm.
Plywood shall be bended to the frames with a suitable adhesives which shall conform JIS
K 6801 and 6803 or equivalent.

Waterproofed plywood shall be used for wooden doors for the lavatory.

The waterproofed plywood shall be of 6mm thickness five (5) play and the weight
shall be 4.79 kg/m2.

The each layer shall be completely pressed and adhered by using phonetic resin
adhesives and the plywood shall be passed a boiling test and a dry and wet repeating
test.

All wooden doors and frames shall be painted as specified in clause “PAINTING”
unless otherwise specified.

7.4.39.1.3 Shop Drawings

The contractor shall submit stop drawings of fabricated items to the engineer for
approval. The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication, installation,
sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other pertinent details required for the
installation thereof.

7.4.39.1.4 Wooden Door Frames

All frames shall be accurately set, plumb, level and shall be securely nailed to the wooden
blocks embedded in the concrete or mortar.
Door Frame and Shutter should be made by solid wood such as Burma Teak as per
direction/decision of the employer
7.4.39.1.5 Installation

Each door shall be accurately cut, trimmed and fitted to its frame and hardware
with allowance for paint finish and possible swelling or shrinkage.
The clearance at the top shall not exceed 6mm.
7.4.39.1.6 Hardware for Wooden Doors

Hardware for wooden doors shall in principle be stainless steel conforming to The
applicable standards are listed below :
BDS 113:1986 Specification for Latches and Locks for Doors in
Buildings;
IS 204-78 Specification for Tower Bolts;
Part I Ferrous Metals (Fourth Revision);
Part II Nonferrous metals (Fourth Revision);
IS 205-1978 Specification for Nonferrous Metal Butt Hinges (Third
Revision);
IS 206-1981 Specification for Tee and Strap Hinges (Third Revision);
IS 208-1979 Specification for Door Handles (Third Revision);
IS 281-1973 Specification for Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts for Use
with Padlock (Second Revision);
IS 362-1982 Specification for Parliament Hinges (Fourth Revision);
IS 363-1976 Specification for Hasps and Staples (Third Revision);
IS 364-1970 Specification for Fanlight Catch (Second Revision);
480
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 IS 452-1973 Specification for Door Springs, Rat-tail Type (Second
Revision);
IS 453-1973 Specification for Double Acting Spring Hinges (Second
Revision);
IS 729-1979 Specification for Drawer Locks, Cupboard Locks and
Box Locks (Third Revision);
IS 1019-1974 Specification for Rim Latches (Second Revision);
IS 1341-1981 Specification for Steel Butt Hinges (Fourth Revision);
IS 1823-1980 Specification for Floor Door Stoppers (Third Revision);
IS 1837-1966 Specification for Fanlight Pivots (First Revision);
IS 2209-1976 Specification for Mortice Locks (vertical type) (Third
Revision);
IS 2681-1979 Specification for Nonferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts for
Use with Padlocks (Second Revision);
IS 3564-1975 Specification for Door Closers (hydraulically regulated)
(Second Revision);
IS 3818-1971 Specification for Continuous (piano) Hinges (First
Revision);
IS 3828-1966 Specification for Ventilator Chains;
IS 3843-1966 Specification for Steel Backflap Hinges;
IS 3847-1966 Specification for Mortice Night Latches;
IS 4621-1975 Specification for Indicating Bolts for use in Public Baths
and Lavatories (First Revision);
IS 4948-1974 Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for General
Use (First Revision);
IS 4992-1975 Specification for Door Handles for Mortice Locks
(vertical type) (First Revision);
IS 5187-1972 Specification for Flush Bolts (First Revision);
IS 5899-1970 Specification for Bathroom Latches;
IS 5930-1970 Specification for Mortice Latch (vertical type);
IS 6315-1971 Specification for Floor Springs (hydraulically regulated)
for Heavy Doors;
IS 6318-1971 Specification for Plastic Window Stays and Fasteners;
IS 6343-1982 Specification for Door Closers (pneumatically
regulated) for Light Doors Weighing up to 40 kg (First
Revision);
IS 6602-1972 Specification for Ventilator Poles;
IS 6607-1972 Specification for Rebated Mortice Locks (vertical type);
IS 7196-1974 Specification for Hold Fast;
IS 7197-1974 Specification for Double Action Floor Springs (without
oil check) for Heavy Doors;
IS 7534-1974 Specification for Mild Steel Locking Bolts with Holes for
Padlocks;
IS 7540-1974 Specification for Mortice Dead Locks;
IS 8756-1978 Specification for Ball Catches for use in Wooden
Almirah;
IS 8760-1978 Specification for Mortice Sliding Door Locks, with Lever
Mechanism;
IS 9106-1979 Specification for Rising Butt Hinges;
IS 9131-1979 Specification for Rim Locks;
IS 9460-1980 Specification Flush Drop Handle for Drawer;
IS 9899-1981 Specification for Hat, Coat and Wardrobe Hooks;
481
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 IS 10019-1981 Specification for Steel Window Stays and Fasteners;
IS 10090-1982 Specification for Numericals;
IS 10342-1982 Specification for Curtain Rail System
or equivalent.

7.4.40 Steel Fittings

7.4.40.1 General

This clause covers steel fittings, including finish hardware, such as butts, hinges,
locks, knobs, stops, strikes, holders, door chains and closures.

7.4.40.2 Materials

Steel sheet shall conform to JIS G 3131, G 3141 or equivalent.

The thickness of steel plates shall be as designated below, unless otherwise

specified.

Door Frame 1.6 mm

Architrave 1.2
mm
Threshold
2.3 mm
Door Leaf Frame and flush plate 1.6 mm
Stiffener and anchor plate 2.3 mm

Machine screws and rivets shall conform to JIS B 1101-1106, JIS B 1201-1205
and JIS B 1131-1133 or equivalent.

7.4.40.3 Steel Doors

Steel doors shall be single or double hollow core, single or double swig type or
sliding type and with dimension and location as indicated in the drawings. All doors shall
be complete with door frames, hard wares and any / all necessary accessories.

Shop fabricated frames without threshold shall be provided with temporary spreads
at bottom to preserve proper shape during transportation and erection.

All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and given two costs or rust inhibitive
paint after being zinc plated in shop.

Field paint for finish shall be provided as specified in the clause “ PAINTING”

7.4.40.4 Steel Louver

Steel louvers shall be of 45o slits and 100mm thick louvers and frame assembly.

The sizes shall be indicated in the drawings.

7.4.40.5 Shop Drawings

482
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of fabricated items to the engineer for
approval. The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication, installations,
dimensions, sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other pertinent details
required for satisfactory installation.

7.4.40.6 Installation

All frames shall be erected plumb, square and true to line and level, with secure
fattening to structures and anchors.

Doorframes shall be installed by authorized representatives of the manufacturer,

but before all plastering works are completed.

7.4.41 Aluminum Fitting

7.4.41.1 General
This clause covers all types of aluminum door, window, casements, and swing,
sliding, pivoted, projected, fired and combination doors and windows, including operation
hardware.

7.4.41.2 Materials

Extruded aluminum shape and sheet shall conform to JIS H 4100 and H 4000 respectively
or equivalent.
Reinforcing strips, reinforcing struts anchors, etc. shall be of zinc plated steel plate
conform G 310-SS41.

Small screws shall be of stainless steel conforming to JIS G 5121 SUS 304or of
high strength aluminum alloy conforming to JIS H 4040 or equivalent.

7.4.41.3 Shop Drawings

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of fabricated items to the engineer for
approval.

The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication, installation,
dimensions, sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other pertinent details
required for satisfactory installation.

7.4.41.4 Installation

All aluminum windows shall be installed by the manufacturer or his authorized

representative and shall be set plumb, square, level and true to line.

Frames shall be set and securely anchored to the structure.

Aluminum surface in contact or other masonry materials shall be provided one

heavy brush coat of bituminous paint. Upon completion of the work the contractor shall
remove and clean all surplus materials from these areas.

483
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.42 Glass And Glazing

7.4.42.1 General
The contractor shall furnish and install all glass required in doors and windows in
accordance with the drawings and any direction of the engineer.
The applicable standards for glass and glazing are listed below :
ASTM C1036-90 Specification for Flat Glass;
ASTM C1044-90 Specification of Heat-Treated Flast Glass Kind HS, Kind
FT Coated and Uncoated Glass;
ANSI Z 97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of
Tests for Transport Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Building;
CPSC 16 CFR Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
7.4.42.2 Materials
(1) Ordinary sheet glass shall conform to JIS R 3201 (Sheet Glass) or equivalent.

(2) Polished plate glass shall conform to JIS R 3202 (Polished plate Glass) or
equivalent.

(3) Figured glass shall conform to JIS R 3203 ( Figured Glass) or equivalent.

(4) Wired glass shall meet conform to JIS R 3204 (Wired Glass) or equivalent.

(5) Laminated glass shall conform to JIS R 3205 (Laminated Glass) or equivalent.

(6) Tempered glass shall conform to JIS R 3026 (Tempered Glass) or equivalent.

(7) Multiple glass shall conform to JIS R 3209 (Multiple Glass) or equivalent.

(8) Putty shall conform to JIS A 5752 (Putty for Metal Sash Glazing) and JIS A 5753
(Putty for wooden Fittings).

Putty for steel fittings, the quality shall be class 1, for aluminum fittings, class 2 as
specified in JIS A 5752.

(9) The thickness of sheet glass and polished plate glass shall be 3.0mm for figured
glass 4.0mm and for wired glass 6.8mm unless other wise specified in the drawings.

7.4.42.3 Workmanship

No glazing work shall be carried out during rain or when the frames or glass is wet.

Frames shall be thoroughly cleaned before application of glazing compound.

All glass in windows and doors, except wooden doors, shall be set in full beds of
glazing compound and pressed to a firm and even bearing without springing or forcing.
Glass in windows shall be held firmly in place with snap type glazing beads and in doors
with glazing channels or beads. Upon completion of construction work, all dirt, stains and
mis-applied glazing compound shall be removed, and all glass shall be thoroughly cleaned
on both faces.

7.4.43 Painting Work

484
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.43.1 General

Painting work shall be specified in clause “PAINTING WORK” in SECTION 1

“GENERAL PROVISIONS”, unless otherwise specified.

7.4.44 Interior Finish Work

7.4.44.1 General

This clause covers the performance of all works in connection with the following.

1) Vinyl asbestos tile

2) Acid proof vinyl tile
3) Vinyl base
4) Asbestos cement board
5) Acoustic board
6) Suspended ceiling
7) Ceiling Access
8) Insulation
9) Nameplate for rooms
10) Accordion partition
11) Toilet Partition

Prior to starting work, samples of interior finish materials and shop drawings shall
be submitted to the engineer for approval.

Types and sizes of nails, screws, bolts and quality of adhesives for fixing of interior
finish shall correspond and match to characteristics of the interior finish materials
and shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.

7.4.44.2 Fixing

Fixing shall not commence until after drying and cleaning of the base.

Fixing method of specified materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

specification and shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.

In performing fixing, adequate precautions shall be provided to avoid off set, gap
and/or unevenness.

Suitable protection measures shall be provided on the interior finish until all
finishing works are completed.

7.4.44.3 Vinyl Asbestos Tile For Floor Finish

Sizes of vinyl asbestos tile shall be 300mm x 300mm x 3mm thick conforming to
JIS A 5705 or equivalent.

- The tiles shall be resistant to alkali, grease or oils.

- The vinyl tiles shall be bonded with asphalt adhesives.

485
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.44.4 Acid-Proof Vinyl Tile

The tiles shall be of acid proof type vinyl tile. The shape and dimensions shall be
the same as those of vinyl asbestos tile.

7.4.44.5 Vinyl Base

Vinyl base shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendation of vinyl asbestos

tile for flooring unless otherwise indicated, the height of the base shall be 100mm.

7.4.44.6 Asbestos Cement Board

Materials shall conform to “ Flexible Board” in JIS A 5403 (Asbestos Cement

Sheets) or equivalent.

When necessary, chamfering shall be carried out so as to facilitate the making of

joints and prevent their irregularity.

Hardware fixings shall be countersunk screws of stainless steel.

7.4.44.7 Acoustic Board For Ceiling

(1) The material shall be of incombustible rock wool and perforated . The thickness of
board shall be 12mm.

Acoustic boards shall be fixed on the base board with suitable adhesives or
nails so as to facilitate the making of joints and prevent their irregularity.

(2) Base Board for Ceiling

Base Board shall be plaster boards conforming to JIS A 6901 (Gypsum

Board) Grade 2 or equivalent.

The thickness of board shall be 9mm.

7.4.44.8 Suspended Ceiling

The Contractor shall provide a light weight suspension system.

The system shall have the means to properly support the entire ceiling when it is
in place.

7.4.44.8.1 Main Runner

Main runners for all suspension system, unless otherwise specified, shall be of cold
rolled zinc bonded light channel steel (-38mm x 15mm x 1.6mm) conforming to JIS
G 3350.

The channel runner shall be installed 90cm on centers and suspended by steel
bars of 6mm dia. Hangers with level adjustable nuts at 90cm intervals.

486
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The grid shall be leveled to within 1/500.

7.4.44.8.2 Cross Furring

Cross furring for ceiling shall be of cold rolled zinc bonded steel (M-23-mm
x23mm).

The M-furring shall be installed 30cm on centers and at right angles to the main
runner by wire clips. All M-furring shall be straight in alignment and hold so as to
enable level placement of plaster board on the suspension system.

7.4.44.8.3 Workmanship

The installation and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s specifications and shall be made by skilled workmen.

7.4.44.8.4 Insulation

The contractor shall provide insulation boards under the roof slab.

The insulation boards shall be of 25mm thickness cemented excelsior boards

conforming to JIS A 5404 or equivalent.

The insulation boards shall be fixed to forms of slab concrete by using nail.

7.4.44.9 Ceiling Access

Ceiling accesses shall be located at suitable places for maintenance of the lighting
system and air conditioning ducts and shall be the size of 600m x 600mm.

The materials of the frame for reinforcement of access board shall be made of the
same materials as the ceiling, shall be of aluminum conforming to JIS G 4100.

7.4.44.10 Nameplate For Rooms

Name plates shall be provided on all doors of rooms facing out doors, corridors
and other rooms.

The size, materials and name on the plates shall be designated by the engineer.

7.4.44.11 Accordion Partition

Accordion partition shall be provided as indicated in the drawings.

Accordion partition shall be of vinyl chloride leather, runner, hinge plate (JIS G
3141 Spec. 1.2mm galvanized), wire rods (JIS G 3505 or equivalent ) hanger rail
(JIS H 4100-6063, T5 or equivalent) frames, (HIS H 4100-6063, T5 or equivalent)
magnet, cushion rubbers and frame holder weight of partition 1m2 shall be 7 Kg or
less.

Panel shall be of plastic laminated board or steel and paper honeycomb.

487
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Doors shall be of the same materials as panels and door frames shall be of
Aluminum Alloy Extruded shapes.

7.4.44.12 Toilet Partitions

In Case of common toilet:
Melamine coated plywood toilet partitions shall be furnished and installed at the
locations indicated in the drawings and as described herein.

Toilet partitions shall supported by stainless standing supporters anchored into the
floor and y head connection (galvanized square tubing).

Partitions shall be flush type, consisting of two sheets of waterproof plywood. The
plywood shall be coated with melamine. All partitions and screen shall be erected
plumb, level and in perfect alignment, with hardware fully equipped for proper
operation.

7.4.45 Sodding And Planting

7.4.45.1 Sodding

7.4.45.1.1 General

The Contractor shall furnish all work including labor equipment, materials,
construction, etc., in connection with sodding work.

7.4.45.1.2 Top Soil with Fertilizer

Stones, leaves, pieces of wood and all foreign matter shall be cleared away before
placement of the top soil.

Top soil shall be approved by the engineer. The soil shall be hauled and placed
when it is sufficiently dry for spreading.

Manure fertilizer shall be well rotted, unleashed, and free from sawdust, shaving,
refuse and / or harmful chemicals.

All manure delivered shall be free from any degree of fly manifestation. All manure
fertilizer shall be spread and mixed with the top soil within 48 hours after arrival on
the site. Fly breeding prevention shall be by the use of insecticides and / or
larvaecides as approved by the engineer.

Areas to be sodded shall be prepared by placing top soil in the areas to the required
thickness.

The central part of such areas shall be made higher in comparison to the
surroundings to ensure proper drained.

7.4.45.1.3 Sod Planting

Sod planting shall be carried out where indicated in the drawings. Sod shall be
planted in firm contact with the bed, and planting work shall be carried out by skilled
workmen.
488
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Density of sod planting shall be 70% or more of the area. After fixing the sheets of
turf, sandy soil shall be spread at the rate of 0.01-0.02m3 per square meter by
using a sieve.

7.4.45.1.4 Leveling of Ground

Before planting the sod, the contractor shall remove all foreign matter, such as
weeds, stones and pieces of wood and level the ground. The cost of the leveling
of the ground shall be included in the price of the grass planting.

7.4.45.1.5 Watering

Watering equipment of the type which prevents damage to finished surfaces shall
be used.

Should the sod become dry, it shall be watered so as to wet the transplanted sod
through to t he bottom and through to at least 5cm of the sod bed as well.

Additional watering shall be made as directed by the engineer.

7.4.45.1.6 Protection

Protection of seeded beds against traffic, human or otherwise, shall be provided

by erecting barricades immediately after work is completed and by placing warring
signs, markers etc. as directed by the engineer.

7.4.45.1.7 Maintenance

Sodden areas shall be maintained (watering, cutting, etc.) by the contractor until
taking over.

7.4.45.1.8 Clean Up

After the turning operation has been completed, the surface shall be cleared of all
tones larger than 2cm in diameter and of all roots, brush, trash or other matter that
may interfere with maintenance operations.

Any paved area over which hauling operation is conducted shall be kept clean and
any top soil or other materials which may lie upon the paved surface shall be
promptly removed.

7.4.45.2 Planting

7.4.45.2.1 General

The Contractor shall furnish all work including labor, equipment, materials,
construction etc. in connection with planting work.

The Contractor shall submit colored pictures of all varieties of trees and flowers to
be planted to the engineer for approval. Every free space (if there is no other

489
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 important issue) in the substation area has to be filled with tree. The trees to be
planted has to be of following quality-
a) Beneficial for environemnt
b) Attractive aesthetically

7.4.45.2.2 Planting Concept

The number of plantings and specie of trees and shrubbery shall be as follows.

Trees : 15-50 (according to space available in the substation)

Shuddery : 38-100m2(according to space available in the substation)

Notes : Tree………………around 4.0m

Shrubbery…………less than 1.0m

Trees shall be planted so as to provide suitable shade.

The contractor shall survey the soil condition of the site for planting of the trees
and shrubbery stated above and shall then carry in soil suitable for the said plants.

7.4.45.2.3 Workmanship

Before plants are carried to the site, the contractor shall prune one-fifth of the trees
leaf areas but shall retain the natural form. Spray shall not cause wilting of the
leaves. Planting details are shown in the next sheets.

Ground Line to be the

Same as at the nursery Drawings Surveyor’s Flagging
Tape (white)

Fixing wire

Spread 120o Apart

50 x 100 x 900 Stake

Construct Earth Saucer with

100mm high

Backfill with Fertilizer

SHRUB PLANTING DETAILS

7.4.46 Plumbing Equipment Work

7.4.46.1 General

This clause covers the performance of all water supply, sewage and sanitary
equipment works to be executed according to the drawings and these
specifications.
(1) Water Supply Equipment
490
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (2) Sewage and Air Vent Equipment
(3) Sanitary Equipment
(4) Clarification Tank Equipment

The contractor shall submit shop drawings of the fabricated items to the engineer
for approval. The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication,
installations, dimensions, sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other
pertinent details required for satisfactory installation and the contractor shall submit
the result of tests at designated date specified here-in-after.
The contractor shall provide the spare parts for three years normal operation,
unless otherwise specified.

7.4.46.2 Equipment and Material

The equipment, materials and accessories as specified herein shall be furnished

together with spare parts for three (3) years normal operation except as indicated
otherwise.

7.4.46.2.1 Drinking Water Tank

(1) Type of Drinking Water Tank

Drinking water tanks shall be of earthquake proof construction and consist of a

sandwich construction panel with facing materials comprising fiberglass reinforced
polyester (F.R.P.) mad from unsaturated polyester resin and glass fiber of which
the core shall be formed plastic.

(2) Materials

The unsaturated polyester resin to be used for the facing material shall be
waterproof and weather proof and harmless to humane health.

The fiberglass shall be made from non alkali fiberglass as stipulated in JIS R
346~3417.

The foamed plastic materials to be used form the core shall be rigid and
closed cell.

Any fillers and coloring agents shall be harmless to human heath.

(3) Accessories

The drinking water tank shall be provided with the following accessories.

(a) Water inlet pipe connections ( F.R.P.) 1 set

(b) Water outlet pile connections (F.R.P) 1 set

(c) Drainage pipe connections (F.R.P) 1 set

(d) Connections for overflow hole and overflow

With insecticide nets (The insecticide nets shall
491
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 be made of plastic and the connections shall be
made of F.R.P) 1 set

(e) Air passage and air vent with insecticide nets

(The insecticide nets shall be make of plastic and
the passage ad vent shall be made of F.R.P) 1 set

(f) Locking type manhole ( Plastic Diameter : more

than 500mm) 1 set

(g) Reinforcing materials, support metals and stands

for elevated water tank. 1 set
(Rolled steel having properties in accordance with
JIS G3101 and with dimensions and shapes in
accordance with JIS G3192)

(h) Steel ladder 1 set

(i) Electrode mount

(j) Breakwater cover 1 set

(4) Shapes, Dimensions and Performance

The shapes and dimensions of the elevated water thank shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s specifications, and the performance shall be as specified
in “ List of Equipment” in the Design Drawing.

7.4.46.2.3 Pressure Pump Unit

(1) Type

Pressure pump unit shall be factory built and factory tested product.

The unit is consist of two pumps, small pressure tank, control panel, necessary
pipes, cable and pressure gauge these components are arranged on the common
steel frame.

(2) System Operations

(a) In initial operation, one pump starts by push button provided on control
panel and starts to supply water in the pressure tank. The pump stops
when the pressure rise of the pressure tank.

(b) When by consumed water in the pressure tank the pressure in the
pressure tank fall the other pump starts to run and supply water to
pressure tank.

(c) All the signal of pumps START-STOP are controlled by a pressure

switch provided on pressure tank.

(d) Specifications

492
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Quantity 1 set
Discharge bore 40 mm
Tank Capacity 30 liters
Pump Quantity 2 set/ unit
Type End section centrifugal motor closed
coupled type
End section centrifugal motor closed
coupled type
Pump Speed 3,000rpm.
Materials Casing Cast Iron
Shaft Stainless Steel
Impeller Bronze
Motor Type Drip-proof, squirrel cage raptor
Voltage 400V
Frequency 50Hz.
Insulation Class E

(4) Accessories

Check Valve JIS 10kg/cm2 50-2 pieces

Gate Valve JS 10kg /cm2 50 – 4 pieces

7.4.46.2.4 Water Supply Pump

(1) Type

Water supply pump shall be submergible pump, using of submerged motor and
multistage centrifugal pump.

(2) Specifications

Liquid Fresh water or equivalent

Temperature 0-40 oC
Impeller Multi stage centrifugal
Shaft Seal Oil Seal
Bearing Sleeve bearing
Cashing Cast Iron.
Impeller Bronze
Shaft Stainless Steel
Flange Standard 10kg/ cm2 thin type
Motor Submerged canned type
Motor Insulation Class E

(3) Accessories

10 meters water proof cable

7.4.46.2.5 Sterilizing Equipment

(1) Type

493
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The sterilizing equipment shall be chlorine sterilizing type, including of sterilizing
chemical tank chemical feed pump, flow sensor, necessary pipes and cables.

(2) Operation

The equipment shall be designed to inject the chemical in proportion to the flow
rate of drinking water, using a diaphragm pump.

(3) Specification

(a) Sterilizing Chemical Tank

Material : Polyethylene
Volume : 50 liter

(b) Chemical Feed Pump

Type Discharge variable diaphragm type

Output : 0.025KW
Phase : 1ø
Frequency : 50 Hz
Voltage : AC 220V

(c) Flow Sensor

Flow sensor shall distribute electric pulse in proportion to the flow rate.

(4) Accessories

(a) Chemical feed pipe; high pressure blade hose 6mmø ; 3 m length
(b) Chemical suction pipe; vinyl pipe 5 mmø ;1 m length
(c) Pump base ; 1 set (including anchor bolts)
(d) Injection valve ; made of PVC ; 1 set
(e) Cable ; CVV 2 mm2 – 2C ; 3 m
(d) Sterilizing Chemical ; 1 set

7.4.46.2.6 Water Filter

(1) Type

Up-light casing, cartridge filtering element type

(2) Materials and Specification

Casing –stainless steel

Normal use maximum pressure – stainless steel
Filtering element – exchangeable plastic cartridge (reusable by water
washing type)

(3) Accessories
494
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Spare filtering element - 1 set
Drain Cock - 1 set
Air Cock - 1 set
Hole- in-anchor - 1 set

7.4.46.2.7 Sanitary Equipment and Accessories

7.4.46.2.7.1 General

(1) All sanitary wares shall be of European standard high quality or equivalent to
JIS A 5207.

(2) All fittings for sanitary wares shall be in accordance with European standard high
quality JIS A 5514 or equivalent

(3) All accessories and visible sanitary wares such as faucets, flush valves and
flushing pipes shall be nickel chromium plated.

7.4.46.2.7.2 Water Closet (Western/European Style)

● All Sanitary Fittings & Fixtures should be European Made as well as approved
sample and design.

7.4.46.2.7.5 Wash Basing (For Lavatory)

(1) Wash Basin

V.C., 6.5 & wall hanging type

(2) Accessories

(a) Pillar cock (13mm)

(b) Angle type stop cock (13mm)
(c) Washer basin trap
(d) Back hanger
(e) Liquid soap holder (Vertical type 350 cc)

7.4.46.2.7.5 Wash Basin (For Battery Room)

(1) Wash Basin

V.C., 9.5 &

(2) Accessories

(a) Pillar cock (13mm)

(b) Eye bath
(Vertical flexible type, 13mm)
(c) Angle type stop cock (13mm)
with water supply pipe
495
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (d) Wash basing trap
(e) Back hanger
(f) Liquid soap holder (push button type, 360cc)

7.4.46.2.7.6 Service Sink

(1) V.C. with Back

(2) Accessories

(a) Sink faucet (20mm with feed seat) :

(b) Trap (S type) :
(c) Trap connection fixtures :
(d) Chain and stopper :
(e) Back hanger :
(f) Rim cover :

7.4.46.2.7.7 Mirror

The mirror shall be frame-less and moisture proof, and the glass for mirror shall be 5mm
thick and 360x455 mm in size, and in accordance with JISD 3202 (Float, Polished Plate
Glass) or equivalent BDS standard.

7.4.46.2.7.5 Water Cock and Similar Items

The main structures constituting the septic tank shall be made of FRP (fiberglass
reinforced plastic) having appropriate shape, dimensions and capacity. The structures
shall have sufficient strength against soil pressure, water pressure, load etc. and shall be
of a construction permitting easy inspection and cleaning. The functional requirements
shall be as follows.

(1) Treatment Capacity

(a) Accommodation treatment for : 5 persons

(b) Estimated daily average volume of waste : 1 m 3 / day
(c) BOD concentration in discharge water : 90 ppm.

(2) Tank Equipment

The septic tank shall consists of blower unit, pre treatment tank and main tank and the
equipment required for the tank shall be of the following specifications.

Blower Motor : 0.04 m3 / min, 0.2 KW, three Phase, 415V, 50 Hz x 1 set

Accessories : Distribution board and cable, air piping and required

pertinent.

(3) Accessories

496
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Sterilization Chemical : 1 set

Sanitary appliances shall conform to the following standards:

BDS 1162: 1987 Specification for Ceramic Wash Basins and Pedestals;
BDS 1163 : 1987 Specification for Vitreous Sanitary Appliances,
Part-1, General Requirements;
Part-2, Specific Requirements for Water Closets;
Part-3, Specification Requirements for Urinal (Bowl
type);
Part-4, Specific Requirements for Foot Rest;
Part-5, Specific Requirements for Integrated Squatting
Pans.
ASHRA E90A-80 Energy Conservation in New Building Design;
ASHRA E 90B-75 Energy Conservation in New Building Design;
AWWA C700-77 Cold Water Meter Displacement Type;
AWWA C701-78 Cold Water Meter Turbine Type Class-I;
AWWA C702-78 Cold Water Meter Turbine Type Class-II;
AWWA C702-78 Cold Water Meter Compound Type,
BS 1125: 1987 Specification for WC Flushing Cisterns
(Including Dual Flash Cisterns and Flush Pipes);
BS 1244 Metal Sink for Domestic Purposes;
BS 1254:1981 Specification for C Seats (Plastics);
BS 1329:1974 Specification for Metal Hand Rinse
Basins;
BS 1876: 1992 (1977) Specification for Automatic
Flushing Cistern for Urinals

TREATMENT PROCESS
OF
SEPTIC TANK

7.4.46.2.8 Piping Materials and Pipe Fittings

7.4.46.2.8.1 Pipe

(1) Water Supply Pipes

The water supply pipe shall be the steel pipe lined with rigid PVC in
accordance with JWWA-K66.

(2) Drainage and Air Vent Pipes

The drainage and air vent pipes shall be the galvanized steel pipe in
accordance with JIS G 3442, tar-epoxy coating steel pipe in accordance with JIS
G3443 and HASS-210, and / or the centrifugal reinforced concrete pipe as
specified in JIS A 5303.

7.4.46.2.8.2 Pipe Joint

(1) Water Supply Pipe Joints

497
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The water supply pipe joints shall comprise screwed type and flange type.
Screwed type pipe joints shall be malleable cast iron pipe joints coated with plastic
in `accordance with JIS B2301. The flange type pipe joints shall be mad by welding
the flange to the end surface of the steel made joints as stipulated in JIS B 2211
or JIS B2212, and further by lining the internal surface with rigid PVC of the same
specification as that used for lining for lining of the steel pipe.

(2) Drainage and Air Vent Pipe Joints

The drainage and air vent pipe joints shall be malleable cast iron pipe joint
in accordance with JIS B2301, screwed type drainage pipe joint in accordance
with JIS B23.3 and rigid PVC pipe joint accordance with JIS K6739.

7.4.46.2.8.3 Gate Valves

The gate valve shall be the 10 kg. Cm2 bronze screwed or flanged type gate valve as
stipulated in JIS B2023, and B2044.

7.4.46.2.8.4 Check Valves

The check valve shall be the 10 kg /cm2 bronze screwed or flanged swing check valve as
stipulated.

7.4.46.2.8.5 Flexible Joints

The flexible joint shall be of a bellows type and shall have sufficient flexibility and
resistance against pressure. The bellows and protective steel band shall be make of cold
rolled stainless steel plate / sheet (SUS – 304) as stipulated in JIS G4305.
The length of one flexible section shall be 400mm.

7.4.46.2.8.6 Strainers

The strainer shall be of a Y type. The case the nominal diameter is 50mmm or less, the
strainer shall be of a screwed type made of bronze, but in case the diameter is 65mm or
over, the strainer shall be of a flanged type made of cast iron.

The clean out plug shall be make of brass, and the strainer element shall be made of
stainless steel, one spare strainer element shall be furnished.

7.4.46.2.8.7 Drainage Pipe Fitting

(1) General

(a) The water sealing depth of trap shall be 50mm or more, and the effective area
of the drainage hole for strainer shall not be less than the sectional area of
the drainage pipe.

b) The nickel chromium plated section of the drainage pipe fittings shall be
equivalent to or higher than Class 1 or Grade 2 in JIS H 8617 (Electroplated
coating of Nickel and Chromium).

498
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(2) Floor Drain Trap

The floor drain trap shall be made of cast iron and the strainer shall be nickel
chromium plated brass. The floor drain trap for asphalt waterproofed floor shall be
of a waterproofing type, but that for other floors shall be of an ordinary type.

(3) Floor Clean out

The floor clean out shall be of a screwed type made of brass having a nickel
chromium plating finish. The floor clean out for asphalt waterproofed floor shall be
of a waterproofing type, but that for other types of floors shall be of an ordinary
type.

(4) Under floor Clean out

The under floor clean out shall be of a screwed type made of bras.
(5) Drainage Pipe Fittings
The drainage pipe fittings shall be make of brass having a nickel chromium plating
finish and the chain and stopper shall be made of stainless steel.

7.4.46.2.8.8 Pipe Washers

The pipe washer shall be made of nickel chromium coated brass or stainless
steel.

7.4.46.2.8.9 Pipe Sleeves

The pipe sleeve shall be made of steel pipe or steel plate with a thickness of 0.4mm
or over (0.7mm or over in case the nominal diameter exceeds 200mm). However,
the non-water proofed floor pope sleeve to be used indoors shall be made of
laminated cardboard.

7.4.46.2.8.10 Pipe Support Fittings

(a) The pipe support fittings shall resistant to contraction and expansion, rolling etc. of
pipe and be of a construction having sufficient bearing strength against load of pipe
when liquid is contained inside. The materials to be used shall be in accordance
with JIS G 3101 (Roll Steel for General Structure).

All steel fittings shall be finished by galvanizing.

(b) The inserts shall have sufficient strength for supporting the pipe and shall have a
construction having suitable for connecting hangers etc. All inserts shall be made
of cast iron, press formed malleable cast iron or steel plate.

7.4.46.2.8.11 Cementing /Bonding Materials

(1) Thread Sealing Materials

(a) The threat sealing tapes shall be in accordance with JIS K6885 (unsintered
polytetrafluoroethylene tapes for thread sealing (raw tapes) , and shall neither
499
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 be hazardous to human health nor cause adverse effects upon drinking
water.

b) The paste sealing agent shall not be affected by the liquid in pipe and shall
consist of contents applicable to the purpose of use. In case the agent is used
for sealing of piping for drinking water, it shall not be hazardous to health nor
cause any adverse effect upon drinking water.

(2) Packing(s)
The packing shall be in accordance with JIS K6353 (Rubber Goods for Water
Works Service) JIS R3453 (Compressed Asbestos Sheets) etc. and have sufficient
durability applicable to the respective quality of water, water pressure, temperature
etc.
(3) Caulking Lead

The caulking lead shall, in principle be the 5th Class of those

stipulated in JIS H2110 (Pig Lead).

(4) Caulking Hemp

The caulking hemp shall in principle be the jute of #130 single thread
which, tied in a bundle has a diameter or about 25mm.

7.4.46.2.8.12 Basin and Basin Cover

(1) General
(a) The materials for iron castings shall be equivalent to of higher than Grade 3
as stipulated in JIS G5501 (Gray Iron Castings)

b) The iron castings shall be baked with refined tars in accordance with JIS K
2473 (Processed Tars) to which more than 2% of linseed oil or drying oil is
mixed, or shall be cold painted with refined bituminous materials to which
synthetic resin finishes added.

(2) Invert Basin

(a) The invert basing shall be of a concrete construction and all visible portions
shall be finished by mortar, the basin shall be furnished with a cover and an
invert applicable to the piper diameter shall be provided on the bottom of the
basin.

(b) The cover shall be make of cast iron with chain, and shall be of an door proof
type able to withstand the weight of 2,500kg.

(3) Drainage Basin

(a) The drainage basin shall be a concrete construction and all visible portions
shall be finished by mortar coating. Moreover, the basin shall be furnished
with a cover.

(b) The cover shall be made of cast iron with chain and shall be of an door proof
type able to withstand the weight of 2,500kg.
500
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.46.3 Execution

7.4.46.3.1 Foundation Works

(1) The foundation shall be of reinforced concrete construction able to withstand the
weight of equipment and external forces and having sufficient bearing surface for
installation of equipment. The foundation shall be built on the floor or ground having
sufficient bearing capacity.
(2) Cement to be used shall be the ordinary Portland cement in accordance with JIS
R5210 (Portland Cement).

(3) Regarding the sizes of aggregate, the size of gravel shall be 25mm or less that of
crushed stone shall be 20mm or less and that of sand shall be 2.5mm or less.

7.4.46.3.2 Erection Works

7.4.46.3.2.1 Drinking Water Tank
(1) The drinking water tank shall be firmly fixed with anchor bolts shaving sufficient
strength so that the tank will not slide laterally nor move in any way due to
horizontal seismic force.

(2) The drinking water tank shall be installed on a horizontal plane on the foundation
having a steel made base and the foundation shall have an even bearing surface
against the load. The tank and the steel base shall be fixed firmly with anchor bolts.

(3) After installation, the tank shall be cleaned and washed with water. Then, the tank
shall be sterilized by using solution of hypochlorous acid, etc.

(4) The piping related to the tank shall be so supported that weight of the pipes not be
applied to the tank.

Flexible joints shall be provided for all respective connecting pipes to the water tank except
for the drain pipe and air vent pipe.

7.4.46.3.2.2 Wall Hanging Type Electric Water Heater

The wall hanging type electric water heater shall be set firmly on the wall by using
expansion joints.

7.4.46.3.2.3 Sanitary Ware, Accessories and Fittings

(1) General

(a) In case wall hanging fittings are fixed on a concrete wall or brick wall,
expansion bolts shall, in principle be used.

(b) In case a metal panel or lightweight steel framed board wall is set, steel plate
and worked angle materials or hard wood patch shall be fixed to the sanitary
ware in advance.

501
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (c) In case a part of the sanitary ware is embedded in concrete, the portion of the
sanitary ware that comes into contact with concrete or mortar shall be covered
with asphalt having a thickness of 3mm or over. However, the bottom contact
surface of sanitary ware, shall be filled with sand.

(2) Water Closet (Western/European Style)

(a) The upper end of the stool shall be set horizontally in place after deciding the
precise setting positions.

(b) Prior to connecting the stool to the drain lead pipe the connecting end of the
lead pipe shall be flared up to the diameter of the flange, and after inserting
the non drink sealing materials between the external surface of the flange and
connecting end the stool shall be connected to the drain lead pipe by nuts
fastened from above by flange fittings and bolts. The plate thickness of the
external end of the flared lead pipe shall not be less than 2mm.

Moreover, the end of the flange for the lead pipe to be connected to the stool shall
be supported sufficiently with hangers etc. so that no load of drain pipe, etc, will
act directly on the stool.

(3) Wash Basin

(a) The bracket or back hanger/s shall be firmly set in place, and the sash basins
shall be fixed carefully so that the upper surface of the basing will be kept
horizontal without exhibiting looseness. In order to eliminate leakage of water,
heat resistant non drying sealing materials shall be filled around drain holes
of the basins and around openings between the drain pipe fittings.

b) The setting height of the basins shall be 800mm (approximate) from the floor
surface to the upper front end of the basins.

(4) Service Sink

The trap shall be set in place without any misalignment, and the connection of the
sink to the drain pipe shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures for
connection of stool in (2). Setting of back hanger(s) and connection between drain
holes of the SINK and drain pipe fittings shall carried out I accordance with the
procedures for the above wash basins in (4).

(5) Water Cock

The water cock shall be fixed firmly after precise centering by fully taking into
account the convenience of use and harmony witty the surrounding facilities.

A sufficient space for the spout shall be provided between the end of the spout of
water cock and the flood level rim of the drain receptacle.

(6) Mirror

The setting height of the upper end of the mirror shall 1,800 mm form the floor
surface.
502
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.46.3.2.4 Septic Tank

Reinforced concrete foundation shall be provided and the tank shall be firmly fixed
to the foundation so as to withstand upward water pressure.

7.4.46.3.3 Piping

7.4.46.3.3.1 Water Supply And Water Hydrant Piping

(1) General

(a) Prior to execution of piping work, detailed study shall be made on the
relationship between other piping and equipment, and all positions for pipe
laying shall be decided by taking into account the precise slope of the
respective piping.

In the case where piping is laid inside a building, setting of the pipe support
fittings and embedding of pipe sleeves shall be carried out without any delay
and in accordance with progress of the work.

(b) The flange joints shall be inserted for all main piping at appropriate intervals
in order to ensure easy removal of such piping.

(c) In the case where any piping is branched from the main piping, T-joints shall
be used.

(d) As air release valve shall be provided at the dead air space portion in piping,
and a mud discharge valve shall be provided at the portion where mud is
collected. The size of the mud discharge valve shall be the diameter of the
related pipe, provided that the size of the valve shall be 25mm in case the
nominal diameter of the pipe exceeds 25mm.

(e) In case any anti-sweat covering is not provided for piping, pipe washers shall
be fixed to all portions of piping that penetrate through ceiling, floors, walls
etc and is visible from the outside.

(f) Any openings between the piping that penetrates through fire service areas
etc. shall be filled with rock-wool heat insulation or other non-combustible
materials.

(g) In case where a pipe sleeve is used at a place requiring water tightness, lead
caulking shall be provided in the opening between the sleeve and pipe.

(h) In the case where any steel pipe and similar materials are laid under the
ground, such pipe shall be protected against corrosion by either a double
coating of coat tart or a double winding of corrosion proof vinyl tapes (JIS Z
1901 “Protective Polyvinyl Chloride Tapes).

(i) Any repair of steel pipe, cast iron pipe and lead pipe with caulking shall be
prohibited.
503
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (j) After completion of piping work, the inside of the piping shall be cleaned by
water pressure on the occasion of hydrostatic test of the piping. In the case
of piping for drinking water. The piping shall be sterilized until free residual
chlorine of 1.2ppm or over has been detected at the end of the piping.

(2) Gradient
In the case of horizontally running pipe, the up feed pipe shall have an upward
slope and the down feed pipe shall have a downward slope. In principle, the
gradient shall be 1/250.

(3) Support Pitch

(a) The support pitch of the horizontally running pipes shall, in principle, be in
accordance with the values in the following table and, wherever necessary ,
all bent sections and branching sections shall be supported. In the case
where steel pipes or similar pipes are supported with hangers, a steady rest
shall be provided for each horizontally running pipe in order to avoid
looseness of the pipe due to movement at the time of earthquake.

(b) A steady rest shall be provided for indoor vertical pipe at least at one spot on
every floor.

Table-12.1 : Maximum Support Pitch of Water Supply Pipe

Nominal pipe 20 or less 25 – 40 50 – 80 100 – 150 200 or more

diameter
Support pitch 1.8 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.0

7.4.46.3.3.2 Drainage and Air Vent Pipe

(1) General
(a) All horizontally branched drainage pipes, etc. shall be combined nearly
horizontally at an acute angel of less than 45o.

(b) In case bent lead pipe is used, the pipe shall be carefully fabricated so as not
to impair its roundness, and no branch drainage pipe shall be taken for
protection.

(c) No waste water shall be discharged directly form the form the following
equipment.

- Air conditioners
- Drinking water tank
- Pumps

(d) Indirect drainage pipe shall be opened while maintaining a space of over
twice the diameter of the pipe from the drain receptacle and flood level rim.
In case an obstacle is foreseen in providing the above opening, appropriate
measures shall be taken for protection.
(e) The lowest portion of the vertical drainage pipe shall be fixed with a support
stand where necessary.
504
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (f) Any air vent pipe shall be run out vertically or at an angle of less than 45o
from the horizontally branched drainage pipe and in no case shall the pipe be
run out horizontally.

(g) In the case where air vent pipes on floors are connected to vertical air vent
pipes, the said pipes shall be connected at the place over 150mm from the
flood level rim of the related equipment. Vertical air vent valves shall be
connected to the stack vents in accordance with the above procedures.

(h) In case a hump pipe is buried, a pit shall be excavated from the lower ad of
the pipe to depth of about 100mm in case the nominal diameter of the pipe is
300mm. After unscrewed crushed stone, unscreened gravel or pike sand has
been laid and compacted, the pipe shall be laid. However, the portions where
joints are provided shall be excavated further if necessary.

Initial back filling of pipe shall be carried out up to the center line of the pipe
to ensure immovability, and after sufficient compaction, the pipe shall finally
be buried.

Provisions other than those described in this paragraph shall be in

accordance with the general provisions in 12.3.4.1.

(2) Gradient
The gradient of horizontally running drainage pipes said inside a building shall be
1/ 100. All air vent pipes shall have an upward slope facing the vertical pipes and
shall be free from reverse slope and unevenness.

(3) Support Pitch

(a) The support pitch of steel pipes shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions in Table 12.1.

(b) Horizontally running cast iron pipes shall be supported at a pitch of less
than 1.6m, and the deformed fittings to be connected shall be supported at
a pit of less tan 0.6m, respectively.

7.4.46.3.3.3

(1) Connection of Pipes

(a) All pipes shall be carefully cut at a right angle against the axial center of the
pipes so as to avoid any deformation of the sections, and the cut end shall be
finished smoothly.

(b) All pipes shall be connected after removing any chips, dust and other foreign
matter and after confirming that all such foreign matter has been completely
removed form inside the pipes.
(c) In case piping work is temporarily suspended, all pipes shall be sufficiently
protected to avoid entry of any foreign matter.

(2) Water Supply Piping

505
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (a) No water supply piping shall in principle, be connected according to an
insertion system unless specified otherwise.
(b) Epoxy resin or synthetic rubber rust inhibitors shall be sufficiently coated over
the end face of threaded portions and the bottom of threaded portions of
joints. All rust inhibitors to be applied for any drinking water piping shall be
applied for any drinking water piping shall be harmless to human health and
shall cause no harmful effect to the quality of drinking water.

(3) Drainage and Air Vent Piping

(a) Prior to connecting the galvanized steel pipes, the pipes shall be correctly
threaded so that a slight clearance is provided between the end face of pipes
and the recess of joints in order to obtain the tapered threaded pipe portion.
Then, the steel pipes shall be screwed tightly into the joints.

(b) All case iron pipes shall be connected by using rubber rings. In this case, the
pipes shall be inserted into the rubber rings until the end of spigot comes into
contact with the bottom of socket. Then, the rubber rings that have been
inserted into a position near the end of spigot in advance shall be inserted
into the pipes carefully so that no twisting will occur in the opening between
the socket and spigot. Then, the rubber rings shall be set in close contact with
the pipes while uniformly fastening the tap bolts and nuts using a junk ring.

(c) Al rigid PVC pipe shall be carefully connected by a cold working method so
that no step will occur between the connected pipes. The flow of water in the
piping shall be smooth and uninterrupted.

(d) All centrifugal reinforced concrete pipes shall be connected by using collars.

After both ends of the pipes have achieved tight contact with each other at
the central part of the collar and carefully set in place to ensure proper
alignment in the surrounding opening, stiff consistency mortar shall be placed
into the opening. In this case, all cement and water inside the pipes shall be
thoroughly removed. In case one end of a pipe is made into a socket form
after connecting a collar to the end with mortar, mortar shall be placed about
10mm away from the pipe end.

7.4.46.3.4 Antisweat Covering

7.4.46.3.4.1 Materials

The anti sweat covering materials, exterior and auxiliary materials shall be as specified in
Table below.

Table - 12.2.1 : Antisweat Covering Materials, Exterior and Auxiliary Materials

(1/2)

Classification of materials : Specifications

Heat insulation materials

506
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Glass wool heat materials : The glass wool heat insulation tubes shall be
in accordance with JIS A9505 (Glass wool heat
insulation materials) or equivalent

Exterior Materials
Galvanized Sheets : The galvanized sheets shall be in accordance
with grade 2 in JIS G3302 (Galvanized Sheets.) The
standard thickness of original sheet shall be 0.3mm
when the sheet is used for insulating pipes, valves,
etc. with an outside diameter of 250mm or less, but
in other cases, the thickness shall be 0.4mm.

Cotton Cloth : The weight of cotton cloth shall be 115g or more per
1m2 In case, the cloth is used for pipe, etc. it shall
be cut into appropriate widths of a tape form.

Glass Cloth : The glass cloth shall be non-alkali plain glass sloth
obtained by processing EP211C into a non-fraying
type as stipulated in JIS R3414 (Glass Cloth).

PVC Type (Vinyl Tape) : The PVC tape shall be non-tacky tape of
medium gloss with a thickness of 1.2mm in
accordance with JIS Z1901 (Protective Polyvinyl
Chloride Tapes).

Waterproofing Temp cloth (Linen) : The waterproofing linen shall be Hossian cloth No.
7 as stipulated in JIS L 2405, over one side of
which blown asphalt, as stimulated in JIS K2207
(Petroleum Asphalt), has been coated. The linen
shall be cut into a tape form of an appropriate width
in case it is used for waterproofing of pipes etc.

Table -12.2.2 : Antisweat Covering Materials, Exterior and Auxiliary Materials

(2/2)

Classification of materials : Specifications

Auxiliary Materials
Molding base paper : The base paper shall be molding base paper of 370g
more per m2.

Asphalt roofing : The asphalt roofing shall be the one manufactured

in accordance with JIS A6006 (Asphalt Roofing
Felts) (Fiber Base) (Self-Finished Bitumen Felts),
and more than 17kg per roll (21 m2).

Iron Wire : The iron wire shall be the one as stipulated in JIS
G3532 (Barbed Wires) which has been galvanized.

Steel Frame : In principle, the steel frame shall be the one

made of steel sheet with a standard thickness of the

507
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 original sheet of 0.4mm or more as stipulated in JIS
G 3302 (Galvanized Sheets)

Adhesive PVC Tape : The adhesive PVC tape shall be in accordance with
JIS Z1525 (Pressure Sensitive Adhesive
Polyvinyl Chloride Tapes) with a thickness of
0.2mm.

Band and toothed lock washer : The band toothed lock washer shall have a
thickness of 1.2mm or more, and shall be made
from the materials in accordance with JIS G4305
(Cold Rolled Stainless Steel Strips), or JIS H3201
(Brass Plates). However, the ones made from brass
shall be finished by nickel chromium Plating.

The width of band shall be 20mm.

Adhesive : In principle, acrylic emulsion adhesive shall be used

for adhesion of glass cloth, glass filament mat
and aluminum glands cloth. Vinyl acetate adhesive
shall be used for adhesion of formed polystyrene
heat insulation materials, and the chloroprene
rubber adhesive for adhesion of rivets.
7.4.46.3.4.2 Execution

(1) General

(a) The thickness of insulation shall be that of the main insulation material and
shall not include the thickness of exterior materials and auxiliary materials.

(b) The clearance between mutual insulation materials shall be as small as

possible, and in no case shall joints for overlapping sections be provided on the
same line.

(c) Band and tube shaped covering shall be tightly bound with galvanized wire.
Bands shall be bound at a 50mm pitch and tubes shall have two windings at
least three places per tube. All overlapping portions and joints of tubes shall be
joined together by using adhesive tapes.

(d) In principle, the width of tape winding shall be 15mm or more, and taint of other
overlapping portions shall be 35mm or more. In the case of water-proof linen
wrapping, galvanized wire shall be wound twice over the wrapping at an interval
of 2m, then asphalt primer shall be coated twice of the windings.

(e) Tapes shall be wounded starting form the lower part and then proceed to the
upper part of piping. Should there be any possibility of deviation in case of
polyvinyl chloride tape, etc., such deviation shall be eliminated by using
adhesive tapes etc.

(f) The lagging plate over the insulation of the pipe shall e carried out in abed over
form, and that of the vent section shall be carried out into a fan form.

508
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (g) Shake-proof washers shall be attached to the ends of heat insulation sections
for indoor piping, and bands shall be attached to branch and bent sections of
the piping.

(h) The ends of heat insulation sections shall be protected as required depending
upon the types and purposes of heat insulation materials to be used.

(2) Materials and Sequence of Works according to the types of heat insulation

The materials and the sequence of work according to the types of heat
insulation are as indicated in Table 12.3.

Table - 12.3

Type of Covering Work Materials and Sequence of work Remarks

(I) Glass wool heat insulation materials

A 1. Heat Insulation tube Outdoor exposed

piping
2. Galvanized Wire
3. Rough Paper
4. Cotton Cloth

B 1. Heat Insulation Tube Inside Ceiling and

pipe Shaft
2. Galvanized Wire
3. PVC Tape
(3) Thickness of the Heat Insulation (Coverings)

The thickness of the insulation shall be as indication in Table 12.4.

Table - 12.4 : Thickness of Insulation

(Unit: mm)

Nominal dia. Type 10 20 25 32 40 50 65 80

100 Remarks

I water supply drainage piping 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 Glass

Wool

(4) Heat Insulation (Coverings) for water supply pipes (including joints and
valves)

(a) The materials and sequence of works according to the types of work shall be
in accordance with Table 12.3.

(b) The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with Table -12.4.

Table 12.5

509
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Place of application Materials and sequence of Thickness of
work Insulation
Indoor exposed piping a I
Piping inside ceiling and pipe a I
shaft

(5) Anti sweat Covering

(a) The materials and the sequence of work according to the types of work shall
be in accordance with Table 12.3.

(b) The thickness of the insulation (Covering ) shall be in accordance with Table
12.4.

Table - 12.6

Place of application Materials and sequence of Thickness of

work insulation
Indoor exposed piping a I
Piping inside ceiling and pipe b I
shaft

(6) No insulation shall be provided for the following pipes, valves and flanges.

(a) Devices and piping 9including drainage pipe on the floor below sink) which
are considered accessories for sanitary wares.

(b) Piping for water supply and drainage underground or inside concrete.

(c) Water supply piping laid indoors (excluding the piping to be laid inside ceilings
and highly humid areas).

(d) Hot water supply piping valves and flanges .

(e) Out door exposed drainage piping.

(f) Air vent piping (excluding the portion of 100mm from the branch point of
drainage pipe).

(g) Overflow pipes and drain pipes for various tanks and similar equipment.

7.4.46.3.5 Painting Work

(1) General

All respective equipment and materials, except the following, shall be painted.
Equipment and materials, except those requiring corrosion proof painting to be
buried.

(2) Painting

510
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The types of paints and frequency of painting of portions to be painted shall, in
principle, be as specified in Table 12.7.

7.4.46.3.6 Civil Works

Items other than those specified in the following shall be in accordance with the
specification/s for “Reinforced Concrete Works”

(1) The pit for piping under the ground shall be so excavated that the required
gradient can be kept precisely and the piping can be connected easily.

(2) The foundation and pit for tanks, etc. shall be excavated sufficiently taking
into account the space for assembly and removal of forms.
Table - 12.7.1 : Types of Paints and Frequency of Painting of Respective
Portions (1/2)

Portions to be painted Frequency of painting Remarks

Equipment Conditions Prime Inter Face
and r Coati Coati
members Painti ng ng
ng
Supports, Exposed Ready- 2 1 1 The
racks and mixed primer
similar paint or coating
fittings aluminu shall be
(Other m paint anti-
than corrosiv
galvanized e pain
materials
Canceled Anti- 1 - 1
corrosiv
e
Heat- Exposed Ready- 1 1 1 The
insulate mixed primer
exterior paint coating
(cotton shall be
and cloth) sealer
coating
Canceled Sealer 1 - 1
coat
Hear- Canceled Synthet 1 1 1 After the
insulated ic resin glass
exterior emulsio cloth
(Glass n paint has
cloth) been
precisel
y
bonded
and
made
sufficien
511
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 tly dry,
syntheti
c resin
emulsio
n paint
as
stipulate
d in JIS
K 5663
shall be
used.
Exposed Polyvin 1 1 1 After the
yl glass
chloride cloth
resin has
enamel been
precisel
y
bonded
and
made
sufficien
tly dry,
emulsio
n putty
shall be
applied
twice
and
after
surface
finish
with
paper
file,
resin
enamel
shall be
applied.

Table - 12.7.2 : Types of Paints and Frequency of Painting of Respective Portions

(2/2)

Portions to be painted Frequency of painting Remarks

Types of paints
Equipment and Conditions Primer Inter Face
members paintin canting Coatin
g g

512
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Heat-insulate Exposed Ready- 1 1 1 The
exterior(Galvanize mixed primer
d iron plate/board) paint coating
shall be
anti-
corrosive
paint
2nd
Coatin
g
Lined steel pipes Exposed Ready- 2 1 1 The
and coated steel mixed primer
pipes including coating
joints shall anti-
corrosive
paint.
Canceled Anti- 1 - 1 Excludin
corrosiv g resin-
e paint coating
joints.

7.4.46.4 Test

7.4.46.4.1 Hot Water Storage Tank

The hydrostatic test shall be carried out for the instantaneous type electric water heater.

The hydrostatic test pressure shall be 17.5 kg/cm2 (shortest)

7.4.46.4.2 Water Supply Pipes

The hydrostatic test of water supply pipes shall be carried out prior to coating work
during piping work or prior to shielding and backfilling or after completion of piping.
The minimum pressure retention time shall be 60 minutes.

The test pressure of piping below elevated water tanks shall be twice the pressure
equivalent to the static head.

7.4.46.4.3 Drainage Pipes

The water filling test of the drainage pipes shall be carried out prior to coating work
during piping work or prior shielding and back filling or after completion of piping.
The water passage test of sanitary drain pipes shall be carried out after sanitary
wares etc. have been attached. The minimum water retention time in case of water
filling test shall be 30minutes or more and that in case of the water passage test
shall e 15 minutes or more.

7.4.46.4.4 Test of Raw Water

After the completion of the water receiving tank and water suction pump, the
contractor shall test the quantity and quality of the raw water collected form the
well.
513
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The test shall be in accordance with article 4 (Water Quality Standard) of water
service law of Japan.

The test items shall be as follows :

- Cyanide
- Mercury
- Organism Mercury
- Organism Phosphorus
- Lead
- Chromium
- Arsenic
- Fluorine
- Cadmium
- Nitrogen of nitric acid
- Colon bacilli’s

The results of the tests shall be submitted to the Engineer.

7.4.46.4.5 Test of Treated Water

After the completion of drinking water system, the contractor shall test the quality
of the treated water collected from the cocks. The test shall be in accordance with
article 4 (Water Quality Standard) of water Service Law of Japan.

The test items shall be as follows :

- Turgidity
- Chromatizitat
- Stench
- Taste
- Potential of hydrogen
- Organic matter
- Nitrogen of ammonia
- Chlorine Iron
- Evaporation
- Solvable material
- Total hardness
- Iron
- Manganese
- Copper
- Zinc

The result of the test shall be submitted to the Engineer.

7.4.47 Air Conditioning and Ventilation Equipment Work

7.4.47.1 General

7.4.47.1.1 Scope

514
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 This clause covers the performance of all air conditioning and ventilation
equipment works in accordance with the drawings and these specifications.

(1) Air Conditioning Equipment

(2) Ventilation Equipment

The contractor shall submit shop drawings of fabricated items to the engineer for
approval. The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication,
installations, dimensions, sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other
pertinent details required for satisfactory installation. The contractor shall submit
the result of tests at designated date specified.

7.4.47.1.2 Design Basis of Air Conditioning and Ventilation System

(1) Outdoor

Maximum Temperature 40o C Dry Bulb

Minimum Temperature 28o C Wet bulb
Minimum Temperature 5o C Dry bulb

(2) Indoor
Temperature
25o C Dry bulb Control room
27o C Dry bulb Otherm rooms
(summer)
22o C Dry bulb Other rooms
(winter) 5o C Dry bulb

Humidity 60% Control room

(Relative humidity) Other rooms

7.4.47.2 Equipment And Materials

The equipment, materials and accessories as specified herein shall be furnished

together with spare parts for three (3) years normal operation except as indicate
otherwise.

7.4.47.2.1 Package Air Conditioning Units

(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install the package air conditioning units as shown
in the drawings. Package air conditioning units shall be factory built and factory
tested products.

(2) In this work, tow types of package air conditioning units shall be installed.

(3) Air heat source heat pump package air conditioner.

(a) Type Light weight, up right floor standing type.

(b) Cabinet Synthetic resin paint baked on finished plates.

515
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (c)Insulation Insulation shall be installed to prevent sweating and to muffle
sound, using glass wool on polywreten form.

(d) Condenser Air source heat pump condenser.

(e) Compressor Compressor (s) shall be serviceable hermetic type equipped

with suitable rubber vibration isolators crank case heaters,
liquid line strainer and suction and discharge shut off values.

(f) Air Filter Permanent washable polyvinyl chloride.

(g) Heat Exchanger Multi pass cross fined tube.

(h) Connections With flare nut or companion flange for field piping.

(i) Outdoor Fan Propeller Fan.

(j) Evaporator Multi pass cross finned tube

(k) Evaporator Fan

Multi-brade centrifugal Fan
AC- 1 (see drawings) direct drive
AC- 2 (see drawings) belt drive

(l) Applicable power supplies

AC 3-phase 400V 50Hz.

(m) Operation switch

3-position push button types and cooling heating selection switch

(Ventilating operation, cooling operation or heating operation.

(n) High Pressure Switch

This switch cuts out the operation of compressor when the discharge
pressure exceeds the setting.

(o) Accessories

Spare Parts

Refrigerant - for 1 change

V. belt - 1 each

7.4.47.2.2 Fans

(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install the fans as shown in the drawings. Fans
shall be factory tested products. Fans have to be from well reputed company.

516
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(2) The capacities of the fans shall be in accordance with fan schedules as shown.
Unless otherwise directed, the fans shall conform to the layouts as shown the
drawings.

(3) All fans shall be statistically and dynamically balanced to avoid vibration and shall
have blades to secure quiet efficient operation.

(4) The fans have to be with decoration

7.4.47.2.3 Ducts

Duct materials shall conform to the followings:

Galvanized steel iron sheet

Shape Steel
Bolt
Nut
Gasket for flange

7.4.47.2.4 Refrigerant Pipe Materials and Accessories

(1) The pipes shall be of copper. The material shall be as specified in JIS H3603
(Phosphorus deoxidized copper seamless pipes and tubes) and the dimensions
shall be as specified in ASTM B8858L (Hard materials).

(2) The joints shall be molded products made from the above materials and they shall
pass the manufacturer’s standards. In locations where removal is required, flair or
flanged joints shall be provided.

7.4.47.3 Installation Work

7.4.47.3.1 Foundation Work

(a) Foundation shall be of reinforced concrete construction and shall be able to

withstand the weight of equipment and external forces by having sufficient bearing
face. Moreover, the foundation shall be constructed on floor or ground having
sufficient bearing capacity.
(b) Cement to be used for foundation shall be the standard Portland Portland cement
in accordance with BDS 232 ( Portland Cement).

(c) In principle, the size of aggregate shall be the following values

Gravel : 25mm or less

Groused Stone : 20mm or less
Sand : 2.5mm or less

Provisions other than those specified above shall be in accordance with the
specifications for “Reinforced Concrete Work”

7.4.47.3.2 Installation Work for Equipment(S)

517
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 All equipment’s shall be firmly secured to the floor so that the equipment will o
move or be damaged due to earthquakes, etc.

7.4.47.3.3 Duct Work

(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install all sheet metal ducts for supply, return,
fresh air and exhaust systems as shown in the drawings.

(2) Ducts shall be constructed to standards outlined in the latest HASS Guide. Ducts
shall be constructed of galvanized steel gauges as shown Table 13.1.

Table - 13.1

Duct Size Metal Gauge Thickness

Less than 450 #26 0.5mm
455 ~ 750 #24 0.6mm
755 ~ 1500 #22 0.8mm
1501 ~ 2250 #20 1.0mm
More than 2260 #18 1.2mm

(3) The contractor shall clean all dirt and rubbish from the interior and exterior of all
ducts and other accessories prior to erection.

(4) A flexible connection shall be made between the fan discharge and the adjoining
duct work.

(5) Low-velocity ducts shall be installed as follows :

Table - 13.2 : Duct Flanges

Bolt Rivet
Thickness Shape Max. Pitch Dia. Pitch Dia. Pitch
Steel
0.5mm 25x25x3 3.6m 8.0mm 100mm 4.5mm 65mm
0.6 25x25x3 3.6 8.0 100 4.5 65
0.8 30x30x3 2.7 8.0 100 4.5 65
1.0 40x40x3 1.8 8.0 100 4.5 65
1.2 40x40x5 1.8 8.0 100 4.5 65
Table - 13.4 : Duct Hangers

Thickness Shape Steel Steel Rod Dia. Max. Pitch

0.5mm 25 x 25 x 3 9mm 3.0m
0.6 25 x 25 x 3 9 3.0
0.8 30 x 30 x 3 9 3.0
1.0 40 x 40 x 3 9 3.0
1.2 40 x 40 x 5 9 3.0

(6) Spiral Duct

(a) The straight portion of the spiral duct shall be fabricated, using a strip of the
galvanized steel sheet. The nominal size of the spiral duct shall be based
518
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 on the inside diameter. The tolerance in inside diameter shall be +0 ~ +2
mm in reference to the nominal size. The thickness of the iron strips to be
used shall be as indicated in Table 13.5.

Table - 13.5 : Thickness of Spiral Duct

Air Duct Diameter (mm) Thickness (Gauge No.) of iron

strips
Below 200 0.5mm (#26)
Over 200, but below 600 0.6mm (#24)
Over 600, but below 800 0.8mm (#22)
Over 800, but below 1,000 1.0mm (#20)

The pitch of the side seaming at the straight portion of the spiral duct shall
be as indicated in Table 13.6 and the folding width shall be over 6mm.

Table - 13.6 : Side Seaming pitch of spiral Ducts

Air Duct diameter (mm) Seam Pitch (mm)

Below 100 Below 100
Below 1,000 Below 150

(b) The jointing of one spiral duct to another shall be preformed by applying as
many side seaming as required, using galvanized steel strips or welding as
many steel strips arranged properly between spiral joints.
The galvanized steel strips shall be applied, in advance, with rust
preventive paint on both inner and outer sides.

The nominal size of spiral duct joints shall be based on the outside diameter
of the spiral duct joints, and the tolerance in nominal size shall be as
indicated in Table 13.7.

Table - 13.7 : Tolerance in spiral duct Joint Diameter

Nominal Size (mm) Tolerance (mm)

Below 600 - 1.5 - 2.5
Over 600, but below 1,00 - 2.0 - 4.0

The thickness of the galvanized steel strips to be used for the joint between
spiral air ducts shall be as indicated in Table 13.8.

Table - 13.8 : Thickness of Galvanized iron Strips and Steel Strips

Nominal Size (mm) Thickness (Gauge No)

Below 200 0.6mm (#24)
Over 200, but below 600 0.8mm (#22)
Over 600, but below 800 1.0mm (#20)
Over 800, but below 1,000 1.2mm (#18)

The overlapping width between steel strips used for the spiral duct joint shall
be as indicate in Table 13.9.

519
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Table : 13.9 : Overlapping width between iron strips or steel strips

Nominal Size (mm) Overlapping Width (mm)

Below 125 60
Over 125, but below 300 80
Over 300, but below 1,000 100

(c) Spiral duct reinforcement

The reinforcement for spiral ducts shall be as per Table 13.10.

Table : 13.10 : Reinforcement for Spiral ducts

Rivet

Air Duct Diameter Reinforcing Mounting Dia. Pitch

(mm) angle steel Interval (mm) (mm) (mm)
Over 600, but below 30 x 30 x 3 Below 2,400 4.5 65
750
Over 750, but below 30 x 30 x 3 Below 1,800 4.5 65
1.200
Over 1,210 40 x 40 x 3 Below 1,200 4.5 65

(7) Air duct support

(a) The hangers and supports for the rectangular air duct shall be made of shape
steel or gar steel. The shapes and dimensions of the hangers and supports
shall be as per Table 13.4

(b) The hangers and the supports for the circulars hanger shall be as per Table
13.12.

Table - 13.12 : Shape and dimensions of the hangers and supports for the
circular air duct

Hanger Support

Dia. Of Flat Max. Flat Max.

circular air steel mounting Steel mounting
duct (mm) interval (mm) Interval (mm)
Below 1,500 25x3 Bar steel with a 2,700 25 x 3 2,700
size of 25x3 or
9mmø bar steel
Over 1,500 30x3 Bar steel with a 2,700 30 x 3 2.700
size of 30x3 or
12mmø bar
steel

520
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(8) A canvas sheet shall be used for the connection between the air duct and the air
blower or between the air duct and the air exhauster so that the vibrations from the
air blower or the air exhauster may not propagate to others.

(9) Where the air duct is install penetrating through a wall, a through part both on the
was side and the duct side shall be finished to a good appearance.

(10) The checking access port shall be such as will allow the case of opening and
closing and as will permit air leakage. The access port cover shall be made of the
galvanized sheet iron having the same thickness as that of the sheet iron for the
air duct. Particularly, the access port cover at a location where the air from the air
conditioner flows shall have insulating material to the thickness of more than
25mm.

(11) After, the installation, the interior of the air duct shall be cleaned thoroughly and
check if there is no interference in the air flow.

(12) Outdoor air intake and exhaust louver

The outdoor intake louver and exhaust louver shall be made of the stainless steel
sheet having the thickness of more than no. 20 gauge.

The effective area of the louvers shall be over 40%, and those louvers, which are
installed at such locations where they are exposed to weathers, shall be designed
and manufactured to be of such a construction as will prevent rain water from
getting inside.

(13) Diffusers

(a) The diffusers to be used shall have a good appearance, and they shall by no
means be allowed to generate noises during system operation. In addition,
the diffusers shall be designed to be capable of providing normal
performance.

(b) Universal Type diffuser

The mounting frame of the diffusers of this type shall be fabricated with steel
or iron plate having a thickness of more than 1.0mm, and it shall have such a
construction as the frame can be mounted to the air duct by means of bolts.

The diffuser blades shall permit the case of adjustment.

The shutter to be employed to the universal type diffuser shall be of the

double access door type.

Unless otherwise specified, the diffuser of any type shall be made of

galvanized steel sheet and shall be finished with melamine resin baked on
the surface of each diffuser unit.

(c) The anemodiffusers to be used shall be used shall have sufficient air diffusing
performance and they shall be provide with a damper and an air flow
informing device.

521
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.47.3.4 Piping

(1) Cooling medium piping

(a) The insides of the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried before use.

After cleaning the ends of the pipes shall be sealed by an appropriate

method to prevent an foreign matter from entering during the piping work.

(b) The pipes shall be normally cut perpendicular to the pipe center. The cutting
shall be such that the pipe diameter is not decreased. The outer surfaces of
connecting pipes and the inner surfaces of joints shall be polished sufficiently
with a flux brush, etc. After the outer surface of the pipes is coated with flux,
they shall be carefully inserted in the joints and fit perfectly while heating.

(c) The discharge and intake gas tubes shall have a minimum downward
gradient of at least 1.200.

(d) The piping shall be performed in consideration of expansion and contraction.

(e) In flanged joints, a packing of a thickness within 1.5 mm as specified in JIS

R3453 (Compressed asbestos sheet) shall be used.

(f) A by- pass between the pipe diameter and the same diameter shall be
provided in cooling medium filters, automatic expansion valves, cooling
medium solenoid valves, etc.

(g) The pitch for hoist and support fixture’s shall be as shown in table 13.3.4.

Table - 13.13 : Copper Pipe support pitch

Pipe support pitch

Nominal
Diameter 6 8 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 65 75
100
B

Max. 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.5
3.0 3.0
Pitch
(m)

(h) To prevent the transmission of vibrations, anti-vibration joints, and anti vibration
hoist and support fixtures shall be used.

7.4.47.3.5 Insulation Work

7.4.47.3.5.1 Materials

522
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
(a) The contractor shall furnish and install all insulation materials required for ductwork
as shown in the Drawings.

(b) Specifications for heat insulation coverings.

Table - 13.14

Classification of Specifications
heat insulation
covering
Heat insulation Glass wool heat The glass wool heat insulation board shall
materials insulation be shall be No. 2 40K stipulated in JIS A
9505 ( Glass Wool Heat Insulation
Material ).
Exterior materials Glass cloth The glass clothes shall be the non-alkali
plain weave clothes stipulated in EP 21C
in JIS R3414 (Glass clothes) which have
been made free from fraying.
Aluminum The glass clothes shall be the flat weave
clothes made of aluminum foil with a
thickness of 0.02 mm or over stipulated in
JIS H 4160 (Aluminum and aluminum
Alloy foils), to which the plain weave
clothes made of 13 micron glass yarn and
200 single filament yarns according to JIS
R3414 with a unit acrylic resin adhesive.

Table - 13.15

Classification of Specifications
heat insulation
coverings
Auxiliary Glass filament The glass filament mat shall be made of glass
Rivet yarn of materials 18 micron of less according
to JIS R 3413 and have a unit mat weight of
45 g of over per m2. The rivet shall be made of
the washer made of galvanized steel plate to
which a nail with a length to be changed
depending upon the thickness of heat
insulation materials is built in, or the copper
plated nail for spot welding, and have a
strength sufficient to bear the insulation
materials.
Steel frame In principle, the steel frame shall be made of
steel plate with a standard plate thickness of
0.4 mm or over as stipulated in JIS G 3302
(Galvanized sheets)
Adhesive In principle, the acrylic emulsion adhesive shall
be used for bonding of glass clothes, glass
filament mat and
523
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 aluminum glass clothes, and the chloroprene
rubber adhesive shall be used for bonding of
rivet.
(3) Materials and procedures depending upon the types of heat insulation work.

Classification of insulation work Order of insulation work

Insulation of exposed interior 1. Rivetting
2. Heat insulation board with a thickness of
50mm
3. Corner patch and seal-up
4. Adhesive
5. Glass clothes
Indoor concealing 1. Rivet
2. Heat insulation board with a thickness of
25 mm
3. Corner patch and seal-up
4. Adhesive
5. Aluminum Glass clothes

Note : The galvanized steel plate with a thickness of 0.2 mm or over shall be used
for corner patch, and the glass filament mat shall be used for seal- up.

7.5.47.3.5.2 Execution

(1) The mutual clearance between the respective insulation shall not include the
thickness of exterior materials or auxiliary materials.

(2) The mutual clearance between the respective insulation shall as small possible,
and no overlapping joints shall be provided on the same line.

(3) In principle, two rivets shall be driven into the lower and side surfaces and one rivet
into the upper surface of the air duct at intervals of 300mm each.

(4) The portion or air duct penetrating through the floor shall be covered with stainless
steel from the floor surface to height of up to 150mm in order to protect the
insulation

(5) The outermost ends of the insulation shall be protected as required depending
upon the materials and purpose of heat insulation.

(6) Heat insulation work for inspection doors, etc. of equipment requiring such
insulation shall be carried out so as not to cause hindrance during opening and
closing of such doors, etc. nor deterioration of the said heat insulation.

7.4.47.3.6 Painting Work

7.4.47.3.6.1 General

(1) All equipment and materials, except for the following , shall be painted.

524
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (a) Surfaces other than galvanized surfaces

(b) Galvanized portions which are normally concealed

(2) All equipment and materials requiring inspection shall be painted after inspection.

7.4.47.3.6.2 Painting

The types of paints and frequency of painting of the respective portions

shall, in principle, be as specified in Clause 11.3.5 Unless specified in this table, such
painting shall be carried out according to similar items taking into account the work
purposes, materials and other conditions.

7.4.47.5 Tests

7.4.47.5.1 Piping
(1) The refrigerator shall pass the air-tightness and pressure withstand tests.

(2) The refrigerators shall be test operated in the factory and careful investigations
concerning performance, noise, vibrations, etc. shall be performed. After it is
confirmed that the tests have been passed, the refrigerator shall be shipped after
applying rust-proof paint.

(3) After installation, the refrigerators shall be test operated.

(4) After completing of the refrigerant piping, an air-tightness test shall be performed
using carbon dioxide, nitrogen, dry air, etc. After the air-tightness test, the entire
system shall under-go high vacuum evaporation to remove all water. After this
dehydration treatment, a cooling medium leak test shall be performed according to
the inspection of the Engineer.

7.4.47.5.2 Duct

After completing the air duct installation, the air duct system shall have and air blow test
in the presence of the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, all of equipment, materials
and execution shall be as stipulated in “Indoor Lighting System”.

7.4.48 Secondary-Electrical Wiring

7.4.48.1 General

(1) The contractor shall furnish and install the control panels, switches, receptacles,
electrical conduit pipes, wires, outlet box for secondary wiring equipment as shown
in the Drawings.

(2) Motors used in cooling equipment, blowers pumps, etc. shall all be included in this
equipment work.

(3) Unless otherwise specified, the wire conduit and wiring work in the primary side
shall all be performed as separate electrical equipment work. However :

525
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (a) Secondary side wire conduit and wiring work for cooling equipment
operating panels and below shall all be part of the work of the equipment
concerned.

(b) Wire conduit and wiring work related to the automatic control of air
conditioning equipment shall all be part of the work of the equipment
concerned.

(c) Insufficient water level alarm equipment for water supply tanks, etc. shall
be a part of the work of the equipment concerned.

(4) Unless otherwise indicated in this clause, all of equipment, materials and execution
shall be as stipulated in “Indoor Lightening Plug and Telephone Piping System”

7.4.48.2 Equipment And Materials

(1) Cables shall be as shown in Table - 14.1.

Table - 14.1(1)

Items Code No Type Letter

Control cable JIS C3401 Polyvinyl Chloride

CVV

Insulated and Sheathed control

Cables

Cross-linked JIS C3606 Cross-linked

Polyethylene CV
Polyethylene
Insulated Cable
Cable

(2) The electrical equipment and materials shall meet the standards of the Japanese
Electrical manufacturers Association (JEM) in addition to these specifications.

(3) Motors

(a) Unless otherwise specified, AC motors shall meet the specifications in Table
14.2.

Motor Specifications JIS 4201 Low-Voltage

Three Phase Induction
Motor
Voltage 400 G
Insulation class E

(b) Three-phase induction motors shall be those using the starting equipment in
Table 14.3. as standard.
526
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Table 14.3

Area Refrigerating Blowers

Capacity(kw) equipment
Motor Starting Motor Starting
system system
37 or more High voltage Resister High voltage Resister
wound type wound type
15 ~ 37 Low voltage Y-A Low voltage Y-A
special special
squirrel
11 ~ 15 Low voltage Y-A Low voltage Y-A
special squirrel special
squirrel
5.5 ~ 7.5 Low voltage Direct starting Low voltage Direct starting
special squirrel special
squirrel

37 or less Low voltage Direct starting Low voltage Direct starting

normal type normal type
7.4.48.3 Test

Upon completion of the work, the whole system shall be proved acceptable by
inspections carried out by the Engineer.

7.4.49 Lighting, Plug and Telephone Piping System

Principle of Lighting
The essential features of an efficient lighting system are :
- visual comfort through adequate illumination of the working surface, prevention
of glare, and avoidance of shadows,
- ease of maintenance.
The design of a lighting system shall involve :
a) careful planning of the brightness and colour pattern within both the working
areas and the surroundings so that attention is drawn naturally to the important
areas, detail is seen quickly and accurately, and the room is free from any
sense of gloom or monotony,
b) use of directional lighting to assist perception of task detail,
c) controlling direct and reflected glare from light sources to eliminate visual
discomfort,
d) minimizing flicker from certain types of lamps and paying attention to the colour
rendering properties of the light,
e) the correlation of lighting throughout the building to prevent excessive
differences between adjacent areas, so as to reduce the risk of accidents, and
f) the installation of emergency lighting systems, where necessary.

7.4.49.1 Scope of Work

Concealed Electrical wiring by Eastern/BRB cable or equivalent
• European Made MK type Gang switch, socket MCB etc
• Provision for Internet facilities system, Telephone & Intercom wiring.
• Sufficient Earthlings facilities.

527
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 • To be used LED Light.
The scope of work under the contract includes supply and installation of lighting fixtures,
lighting panel, switches, receptacles, electrical conduit pipes, wires, outlet boxes for
telephones, internet, dish cable and other necessary accessories for the indoor lighting
system.

7.4.49.2 Design Conditions

7.4.49.2.1 Illumination Level

1) The illumination levels for each room shall be as shown in Table - 15.2.1.

Table - 15.2.1

Name of Room Normal condition Emergency condition

Control 500 lx 50 lx
Office 300 lx 10 lx
Relay 300 lx 10 lx
PLC/ SCADA 500 lx 50 lx
Conference 300 lx 10 lx
Battery 100 lx 5 lx
Rectifier Set 100 lx 5 lx
Corridor 100 lx 5 lx
Pump Control 100 lx 5 lx
Cable Control 50 lx 5 lx
B/G 200 lx 5 lx
Lavatory 100 lx -
Kettle 100 lx -

(2) Setting Height

(a) Lighting fixtures
Refer to Design Drawings.
(b) Switches
1.25 meters above the floor level, unless otherwise specified.
(c) Receptacles
0.3 meters above the floor level, unless otherwise specified.

(3) Power source voltage

(a) For lighting panel
AC 3 phase 4 wires 415/230 V 50 Hz
DC 2 Wires 110 V
(b) For normal lighting, convenient outlet and ventilation equipment.
AC 1 phase 2 wires 220 V 50 Hz
(c) For emergency lighting
DC 2 Wires 110 V

7.4.49.3 System Description

(1) AC, DC Source and earthling shall be supplied from the primary side.
(2) Standard LED Lamps shall be provided for the control room and all miscellaneous
rooms, and shall be designed to be manually activated by means of the switches
at the entrance of each room. The lamps in the corridor, Toilet room, office and all

528
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 electrical rooms shall be sensor based which will automatically switched “ON” and
off.
(3) LED Lamp/Incandescent lamps shall be provided in all parts of the control building
to serve as emergency lighting. The lamps in the control room, corridor, office and
all electrical rooms shall be automatically switched “ON” in case of AC failure.

(4) Outlet boxes for telephones shall be provided for the control room, together with
piping from the outlet boxes to the cable tray in the cable control room. The sitting
of the telephones and wiring shall be included in the electrical scope of work of Lot
IV.

(5) Exit sign light

The exit sign lights shall be mounted above the all exits of the control
building.

(6) Spare parts, as indicated below, will be supplied for three (3) years normal
operation.

7.4.49.4 Equipment’s and Materials

7.4.49.4.1 Wires
Wires shall be as shown in the Table 15.4.1

Table - 15.4.1
ItemCode No.
Type Letter
Vinyl wire JIS C3307 600 Grade Polyvinyl
IV
Chloride Insulated Wires
Heat- resistant JIS C3317 Heat- resistant vinyl
HIV
Insulated wire

HIV wires shall be used in the DC circuit.

7.4.49.4.2 Wire Connectors

Wire connectors for indoor wiring shall be in accordance with JIS C2810 or equivalent
BDS

7.4.49.4.3 Metal Conduit and Fittings

Metal conduit and fittings shall be in accordance with the Table 15.4.3, and the conduit
shall be of heavy gauge type.

Table 15.4.3

Item Code No. Designation

Conduit JIS C8305

Rigid metal Conduit
529
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 ( heavy gauge)
Coupling JIS C8330
Coupling for Rigid Metal Conduit
Normal Bend JIS C8330
Elbows for Rigid Metal conduit
Bushing JIS C8331
Bushing for Rigid metal Conduit
Locknut JIS C8333
Locknuts for Rigid Metal Conduit
Saddle JIS C8334
Saddles for Rigid Metal Conduit
Universal JIS C8335 Universal Fittings for Rigid
metal

Conduit
Outlet Box JIS C8337 Out
Boxes for Rigid metal Conduit
Switch Box JIS C8337 Switch
Boxes for Rigid Metal Conduit
Concrete Box JIS C8338
Concrete Boxes for Rigid Metal Conduit
Box Cover JIS C8339 Box
covers for Rigid Metal Conduit
Insulated Bushing JIS C8347 Insulated
Bushing for rigid Metal
Conduit

7.4.49.4.4 Pull Boxes

Pull boxes shall be made of steel and coated with protective paint, and wherever exposed
to view, shall be coated with a finish paint of a color approval by the Engineer.

7.4.49.4.5 Wiring Devices

Wiring devices shall be in accordance with the Table-15.4.5

Table-15.4.6

Items Code No.

Designation

Fluorescent Lamp JIS C7601 Fluorescent

Lamps for General Lighting Service

Rapid Start JIS C7602 Instantaneous Start Hot cathode

Discharge Fluorescent
Lamps (40 W type)

Glow Starter JIS C7607 Glow starters for fluorescent Lamps (Less than
40 W type

530
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Fluorescent fixture JIS C8106 Lighting Fitting
for Fluorescent Lamps

ballasts for Fluorescent lamps

Incandescent lamp JIS C7501 Double Filament

Lamps for General Use

7.4.49.4.6 Lighting Fixtures

(a) In Principle shapes and dimensions shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
Catalogs and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

(b) Lighting fixtures for emergency use shall be as specified by BCJ (Articles rated by
the Building Center of Japan), or approved equal.

7.4.49.4.7 Lighting Panel

Shapes, electrical characteristics, types capacities of circuit breakers, and the

system of operation shall be in accordance with the Drawings.

The panel shall made of steel plate with a thickness of more than 1.6mm (body)
and 2.3 mm (door) respectively.

The finish shall be painted with a color approved by the Engineer. Catalogs and
shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

7.4.49.4.8 Over Current Protectors

Molded case circuit breakers and residual current protective devices shall be of European
Standard used in the lighting panel

7.4.49.5 Indoor Wiring

7.4.49.5.1 Rigid Metal Conduit

(1) Installation

(a) Imbedding or conduit laying shall be so made that the strength and structure
of the building is not affected.

(b) Cut ends of conduit shall be neatly and smoothly finished by instrument
such as a reamer.

(c) Conduit shall be bent at a radius of more than six (6) times the internal
diameter of the conduit conduit running between outlets and pulling boxes
shall not have more than the equivalent of four 90o bends.

(d) A pull box or junction box shall be installed to protect conduit exceeding 30
meters in length and at the points required.

531
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (e) In general, a switch or outlet box shall be used at all points where a switch,
receptacle (socket) or lighting fixture is to be provided.

(f) Where low voltage metal conduit is enclose in proximity to or crosses

communication wiring, metallic water pipe or gas pipe, the work shall be so
done that direct contact is avoided.

(2) Connection of conduits

Conduit and fittings shall be perfectly connected, both physically and electrically,
and the conductor resistance shall be preferably dept within 2 ohms between
grounding conductor and the end metal conduit.

(3) Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes

(a) Shape and type of these boxes shall suit the place of installation and a steel
plate or more than 1.2mm in thickness shall be used.
(b) Boxes shall have adequate dimensions well matching the number or
conduits connected and the condition of connecting or pulling wires.
(c) Where the box is covered or concealed in structural material, access to the
box shall be made possible to facilitate inspection.

(4) Installation of feeder conduits

(a) Exposed main conduit shall, in principle, run parallel with wall or ceiling.
(b) Metals supports for conduit in concrete building shall have a proper fixing
insert or bolt previously embedded in the concrete.
(c) Spacing between metal inserts or bolts to support conduit shall in principle,
be approximately 2 meters.

(5) Painting, Protection and cleaning of Conduit

(a) Where the plated or painted surface of conduit, metal support or box has
peeled off, it shall be touched up with protective paint.
(b) Conduit shall be sufficiently protected against entry of moisture, water, dust
etc. and the cut end of conduit shall be bush be capped, wood plugged or
covered with rag, etc. Whenever concrete work is in progress.
(c) Conduit and boxes shall be well cleaned and the conductivity checked after
removal of the forms.

(6) Wire Pulling

(a) Connection of wire shall not be made inside metal conduit. Connection shall
be made in metal box, junction box or distribution board.
(b) Wire shall be pulled through conduit after the inside of conduit has been
cleaned and when each of conduit has been capped with bushing. Cleaning
shall be performed in such a manner that walls, ceilings, etc. around the
conduit are not stained or spoiled in any way.
(c) In all cases, all wires stemming from one circuit shall be accommodated in
the same conduit for A.C circuit work, except where a balanced condition is
electro-magnetically attained by accommodating both lines of the same
polarity within the same conduit.
532
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.4.49.6 Installations

7.4.49.6.1 Installation of Lighting Fixtures

(a) Heavy lighting fixtures shall be firmly supported using inserts, studs or bolts,
attachments and if necessary shall be provided with a means to prevent swinging
by using wood screw, etc.
(b) Lighting fixtures shall be installed horizontally or vertically in a workmanlike manner
and shall be so located as to not interfere with inspection of related equipment.

7.4.49.6.2 Installation of Lighting Panel

Lighting panel shall be installed firmly on walls or other surfaces in a workmanlike manner,
and shall be so located as to not interfere with inspection of related equipment.

7.4.49.6.3 Test

A performance test shall be made be made after installation of equipment has been
completed.

7.4.49.7 Grounding

7.4.49.7.1 Grounding Resistance

Grounding resistance shall be 10 ohms or less, unless otherwise specified.

7.4.49.7.2 Electrical Works to Be Grounded

Except for specific instances, all electrical that the respective grounding resistance values
are kept at specified values throughout the year despite seasonal changes.

(a) No grounding is required for steel base, metal box and steel frame of equipment is
operated on less than AC150 V (Voltage to ground) and is installed at a dry
location.
(b) Metal conduit and metal accessories
(c) Metal enclosure accommodating the discharge lamp ballast and the metal parts or
a discharge lamp lighting fixture, except where grounding is required and/or when
so directed by Engineer, shall be grounded.

7.4.49.7.3 Sign, Signal & Annotation:

● Integrated Design of Different kind of Indicators like- Acrylic Sign Board, LED Sign
Board, Neon Sign Board, Reception Sign Board, Safety Sign, PVC Letters, Glow Sign
Board, Customized Display Boards, Overhead Signage, Metal Nameplates, Commercial
Sign Boards, Outdoor Signs, Electronic Sign Boards etc. should be provided in the design
& construction.
● Digital LED Signboard with the features of excellent visibility (even in daylight); Good
quality at reasonable price and light weight; Simple installation, Safe to touch and clean;
Changing color for attracting attention; Extremely low power consumption.
● Should be provided the Accessories like Adaptor and chains etc.
LED display screen shall be minimum 1.0 square meter. Shall be Compatible with IP65.
533
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Shall be installed at the front side wall of the building
Environmentally friendly display it ensures lower power consumption and longer lifetime.

SECTION 7.5
Inspection, Testing of the Equipment

534
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.5.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF GOODS

Full quantity of goods shall be ready for test before any pre-delivery inspection
& will be presented to inspection committee during pre-delivery inspection.

No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has

been approved and written instruction have been received by the
Purchaser.

7.5.1 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF 33 KV OUTDOOR TYPE VCB AND PCM PANEL
Inspection and testing before and after shipment/ supply shall be in accordance with
the relevant IEC standard.

7.5.1.1 Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness (Acceptance test)

The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time
during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the
manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance.
The following tests (not limited to) shall be carried out for outdoor type VCB and PCM
Panel as per latest version of IEC Standard or unless otherwise mentioned at the
manufacturer premises or other places where the test facilities are available:-

a) Dielectric test on the main circuit

b) Tests on auxiliary and control circuits
c) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
d) Tightness test
e) Design and visual (physical) checks
f) Electrical and mechanical operation test
g) Verification of Protection system

The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give notice to the Purchaser in
writing of the date and the place where the material or equipment will be ready for
quality witness testing.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier
timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test.
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of
charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and
instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out
such test efficiently. These tests shall be performed as per latest version of relevant
IEC/ BS or equivalent international standards as mentioned in the contract and only
routine tests as agreed upon will be performed.

535
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/ equipments shall have
passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in
writing to that effect.
Should any inspected/ tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser
shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that
case Supplier has to replace the equipment and to make good of them and the
supplier shall conduct similar pre-delivery Inspection and factory tests without any
financial involvement to the purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not
conforming to the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier
will in no way be relieved from the responsibility of replacing them on making them
good at their own cost, despite the Equipment were found good at the time of
Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the
supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

NESCO’s 01 (one) Inspection Team of 03 Engineers shall have to conduct Technical

Orientation and Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost
incurred for this purpose shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the
cost in this regard is included in the offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place
of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding
and lodging etc. will be borne by the contractor. All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.

No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved
and written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.
The bidder has to mention the place of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness
in the following table:-
Period of Technical Place & Country of
Sl. No. Item Orientation and Technical Orientation and
Quality Test Witness Quality Test Witness

7.5.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING of 11 KV AIS SWITCHGEAR

Inspection and testing during manufacture and after installation on site shall be in
accordance with the relevant IEC standard.

7.5.2.1 Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness (Acceptance test)

The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time
during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the
manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance.
The following tests (not limited to) shall be carried out for 11 KV AIS SWITCHGEAR
as per latest version of IEC Standard or unless otherwise mentioned at the
manufacturer premises or other places where the test facilities are available:-

a) Dielectric test on the main circuit

b) Tests on auxiliary and control circuits
536
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 c) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
d) Tightness test
f) Design and visual (physical) checks
g) Electrical and mechanical operation test
h) Verification of Protection system

The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give notice to the Purchaser in
writing of the date and the place where the material or equipment will be ready for
quality witness testing.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier
timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test.
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of
charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and
instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out
such test efficiently. These tests shall be performed as per latest version of relevant
IEC/ BS or equivalent international standards as mentioned in the contract and only
routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/ equipments shall have
passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in
writing to that effect.
Should any inspected/ tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser
shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that
case Supplier has to replace the equipment and to make good of them and the
supplier shall conduct similar pre-delivery Inspection and factory tests without any
financial involvement to the purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not
conforming to the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier
will in no way be relieved from the responsibility of replacing them on making them
good at their own cost, despite the Equipment were found good at the time of
Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the
supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

NESCO’s 01 (one) Inspection Team of 03 Engineers shall have to conduct Technical

Orientation and Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost
incurred for this purpose shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the
cost in this regard is included in the offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place
of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding
and lodging etc. will be borne by the contractor. All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.
No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved
and written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.
The bidder has to mention the place of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness
in the following table:-

537
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Period of Technical Place & Country of
Sl. No. Item Orientation and Technical Orientation and
Quality Test Witness Quality Test Witness

538
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
7.5.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING of 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER, 33 KV POTENTIAL
TRANSFORMER, 33 KV KV ISOLATOR with/without EARTH BLADE

Inspection and testing before and after shipment/ supply shall be in accordance with
the relevant IEC standard.

7.5.3.1 Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness (Acceptance test)

The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect examine and test the goods/materials to
confirm their conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all
reasonable time during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials
at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance.
The Routine test shall be carried out as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or
equivalent international standards as mentioned in the contract at the manufacturer
premises or other places where the test facilities are available.

The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give notice to the Purchaser in
writing of the date and the place where the material or equipment will be ready for
quality witness testing.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier
timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test. Where the supplier provides
for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except
where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance, labour,
materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and
as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These tests shall
be performed as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or equivalent international
standards as mentioned in the contract and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be
performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/ equipments shall have
passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in
writing to that effect.
Should any inspected/ tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser
shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that
case Supplier has to replace the equipment and to make good of them and the supplier
shall conduct similar pre-delivery Inspection and factory tests without any financial
involvement to the purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming to
the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be
relieved from the responsibility of replacing them on making them good at their own
cost, despite the Equipment were found good at the time of Factory Acceptance Test.
Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other
obligations under the contract.
NESCO’s 01 (one) Inspection Team of 03 Engineers shall have to conduct Technical
Orientation and Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost
incurred for this purpose shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the
cost in this regard is included in the offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place
of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding
539
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
and lodging etc. will be borne by the contractor. All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.

No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved
including factory Test reports and written instructions has been issued by the
Purchaser.

The bidder has to mention the place of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness in the
following table:-

Sl. No. Item Period of Technical Place & Country of

Orientation and Technical Orientation
Quality Test and Quality Test
Witness Witness

7.5.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING of 33 KV & 11 KV LIGHTENING ARRESTER, BATTERY,

BATTERY CHARGER.

Inspection and testing before shipment/ supply shall be in accordance with the
relevant IEC standard.

7.5.4.1 Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness (Acceptance test)

The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect examine and test the goods/materials to
confirm their conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all
reasonable time during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials
at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance.
The Routine test shall be carried out as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or
equivalent international standards as mentioned in the contract at the manufacturer
premises or other places where the test facilities are available.

The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give notice to the Purchaser in
writing of the date and the place where the material or equipment will be ready for
quality witness testing.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier
timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test. Where the supplier provides
for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except
where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance, labor,
materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and
as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These tests shall
be performed as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or equivalent international
standards as mentioned in the contract and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be
performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/ equipments shall have
passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in
writing to that effect.

540
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
Should any inspected/ tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser
shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that
case Supplier has to replace the equipment and to make good of them and the supplier
shall conduct similar pre-delivery Inspection and factory tests without any financial
involvement to the purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming to
the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be
relieved from the responsibility of replacing them on making them good at their own
cost, despite the Equipment were found good at the time of Factory Acceptance Test.
Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other
obligations under the contract.

NESCO’s Inspection Team of 03 Engineers shall have to conduct Technical

Orientation and Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost
incurred for this purpose shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the
cost in this regard is included in the offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place
of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding
and lodging etc. will be borne by the contractor. All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.

No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved
including factory Test reports and written instructions has been issued by the
Purchaser.

7.5.4.2 POST-LANDING INSPECTION AND TESTING :

The Supplier shall inform the purchaser immediately after arrival of the goods at
the designated store of NESCO (as per delivery schedule). An Inspection team of
NESCO shall perform the post-landing inspection in presence of supplier's
representative. The Supplier shall arrange the program of post-landing inspection. Any
defect or damage have been found at post-landing inspection, the defective or
damaged materials/ goods to be replaced by the supplier at his own cost within the
stipulated time.
The purchaser’s right to inspect, test (where necessary) and reject the goods
after delivery at the designated store of NESCO shall in no way be limited or waived
by reason of the goods having previously been inspected, tested and passed by the
purchaser prior to the good's delivery.
The Inspection team will check the physical conditions and quantity of the goods
delivered. If necessary, the inspection team will select the sample of good(s) and sent
the selected sample goods to CERS, BPDB or BUET/ CUET/ KUET /RUET (as
selected by the inspection team) to carry out the test(s) as per contract to confirm the
conformity to the approved Technical Specifications, Guaranteed Technical
Particulars (GTP), drawings and relevant standards. If the tested sample(s) fail to
confirm the specifications in tests, the full consignment will be rejected. All cost of
testing of Materials/ Goods including carrying, loading, un-loading etc. will be borne by
the supplier.

541
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 7.5.5 TECHNICAL ORIENTATION AND QUALITY TEST WITNESS OF
POWER CABEL, CONTROL CABLE, ACSR MARTIN CONDUCTOR, ACSR
GROSBEAK CONDUCTOR, STEEL STRUCTURE
The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time
during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the
manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance.
At least the following test along with routine test shall be carried out as per latest
version of IEC Standard or equivalent IEEE standard or BS standard unless otherwise
mentioned at the manufacturer premises or other places where the test facilities are
available:-
1. Measurement of Electrical Resistance of conducts.
2. High voltage test
3. Partial discharge test
4. Capacitance test
5. Voltage test on cable serving
6. Measurement of dimension of insulation and conductor

The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable
notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will
be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend
at the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier
may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the
purchaser’s presence, and shall forth with forward to the purchaser duly certified
copies of test readings.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier
timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test. The contractor shall submit
the factory test report to the engineer for check and verification at least 15 days prior
to inspection.
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of
charge such assistance, labor, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and
instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out
such test efficiently. These test shall be performed as per relevant IEC Standard or
equivalent IEEE standard or BS standard only routine tests as agreed upon, will be
performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have
passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in
writing to that effect. Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the
specification, the Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the item or complete
batch if necessary. In that case Supplier have to replace the Equipment and to make
good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the
Equipment found not conforming with the specification at the time of post landing
Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relieved from the responsibility of replacing
them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment were found good
542
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
at the time of Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release
the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.
NESCO’s 01 (one) Inspection Team of 03 Engineers shall have to conduct Technical
Orientation and Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost
incurred for this purpose shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the
cost in this regard is included in the offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place
of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding
and lodging etc. will be borne by the contractor. All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.

No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved
and written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.
The bidder has to mention the place of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness
in the following table:-
Period of Technical Place & Country of
Sl. Item Orientation and Technical Orientation
No. Quality Test and Quality Test
Witness Witness

7.5.6 TECHNICAL ORIENTATION AND QUALITY TEST WITNESS OF 33/11 KV, 10/13.33 MVA
POWER TRANSFORMER WITH RTCC PANEL & 33/0.415 KV AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER:
The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm
their conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all
reasonable time during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of
goods/materials at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and
performance.
The purchaser can carry out the testing of any no. of transformers during
Quality Test
Witness. But, the testing of transformers during Quality Test Witness will not
be less than
10% at random basis of the transformer ready for inspection but in any case
it will not be less than 3 nos. The manufacturer will provide all
arrangements for the testing of
transformers desired by the purchaser in his factory.
The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser
reasonable notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material
or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the
purchaser shall attend at the place so named on date, which the supplier has
stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests, which shall be
deemed to have been made in the purchaser’s presence, and shall forth with
forward to the purchaser duly certified copies of test readings.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the
supplier accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall
give the supplier timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test.
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide
543
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 free of charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores,
apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably
demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These test shall be performed as
per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent and only routine tests as agreed
upon, will be performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have
passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor
in writing to that effect.
Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the
Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the item or complete batch if
necessary. In that case Supplier have to replace the Equipment and to make
good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of
the Equipment found not conforming with the specification at the time of post
landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relieved from the responsibility
of replacing them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment
were found good at the time of Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause
shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations
under the contract.
NESCO’s Inspection Team of at least 03 (Three) Engineers shall have to conduct
Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises.
The cost incurred for this purpose shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed
the cost in this regard is included in the offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place
of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation etc. will be
borne by the contractor. All the cost of this purpose shall be deemed is included in the
offered price.
No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been
approved and written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.

7.5.7 Post-Landing Inspection and Testing :

The Supplier shall inform the purchaser immediately after arrival of the goods
at the designated store of NESCO (as per delivery schedule). An Inspection
team of NESCO shall perform the post-landing inspection in presence of
supplier's representative. The Supplier shall arrange the program of post-
landing inspection. Any defect or damage have been found at post-landing
inspection, the defective or damaged materials/ goods to be replaced by the
supplier at his own cost within the stipulated time. The goods/materials
materials shall be under the custody of the contractor for installation. The
contractor shall be responsible for all types of safety and security of the
inspected materials.

The purchaser’s right to inspect, test (where necessary) and reject the
goods after delivery at the designated store of NESCO shall in no way be limited
or waived by reason of the goods having previously been inspected, tested and
passed by the purchaser prior to the good's delivery.
The Inspection team will check the physical conditions and quantity of the
goods delivered. If necessary, the inspection team will select the sample of
good(s) and sent the selected sample goods to CERS, BPDB or BUET/ CUET/

544
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 KUET /RUET (as selected by the inspection team) to carry out the test(s) as per
contract to confirm the conformity to the approved Technical Specifications,
Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP), drawings and relevant standards. If
the tested sample(s) fail to confirm the specifications in tests, the full
consignment will be rejected. All cost of testing of Materials/ Goods including
carrying, loading, un-loading etc. will be borne by the supplier.

N.B. Third Party Inspection:

a) For any reason, if purchaser’s/Employer’s representative(s) cannot attend above
mentioned “Witnessing of manufacturing process and tests of the equipment at
manufacturer’s works including transfer of technical know-how” program, a Third Party
Inspection Company/Agency shall conduct/ witness Pre-shipment Inspection as well
as Factory Acceptance Tests as per Contract and relevant standard at the
manufacturer’s Premises with the concurrence of NESCO The Third Party Inspector
shall submit a comprehensive report to purchaser with recommendation accompanied
with photograph and video clips with date and time of the Equipment/Materials/Goods
inspected within 7 days after completion of respective inspection/Test. After approval
of third party Inspection report by NESCO, shipping advice shall be issued to
Supplier/Contractor. No Equipment/Materials/Goods shall be shipped without shipping
advice.
b) The inspections/Tests shall be performed on as-needed basis as per schedule
provided by the respective manufacturers.
c) Supplier/contractor/manufacturer shall not claim any additional cost for third party
inspection. But if the cost is less than the regular cost of PSI/FAT by NESCO's
representatives, then the excess bill will be deducted from final bill.
d) The third party inspection company/agency must not be involved in design,
procurement, fabrication, construction and installation under this contract.
e) Contractor/Supplier shall propose any of the following companies/agencies as Third
Party Inspector:
1. BUREAU VERITAS
2. SGS
3. Black and Veatch
4. Mott MacDonald
5. TUV SUD
6. Lloyd Inspection Agency
7. Intertek group
8. Any other internationally accredited, independent & reputed inspection
company/agency with global presence having minimum 05 years experiences as third
party inspection company/agency and related activities in the major Engineering
Industries can be selected. In addition, Inspection Company / agency must be a
member of the International federation of inspection agency (IFIA)/ TIC Council must

545
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
have valid accreditation certificate for ISO 9001 and ISO/IEC 17020 and experience in
successful completion of the similar test activities for relevant item.

f) With the approval of NESCO, contractor/supplier shall engage third party inspection
company/agency.
The Third Party Inspection is applicable for Equipment/Materials/Goods manufactured
outside Bangladesh. NESCO reserves the right to revise the above mentioned list.

Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other
obligation under the provisions of the contract/ purchase order.

7.6 Pre-commissioning Test of Substation

(Test reports and documents required for substation commissioning)
7.6.1 Circuit Breaker (33 kV):
1. Name plate data
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance & DAR across open contact, Phase to
Ground, Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power
frequency withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)
3. Closing/Opening operation check from Remote & Local, Closing Interlock
check, Anti-pumping operation check
4. Closing/Opening timing check
5. Contact resistance check
6. Spring charge operation check, heating and illumination circuit functionality
check

7.6.2 CT/PT (33 kV & 11 kV):

1. Name plate data
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance & DAR across Primary to Ground,
Secondary to Ground, Primary to Secondary, Secondary 1 to Secondary 2,
Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage for primary and 500 V test
voltage for secondary / Power frequency withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage
current test/ tan δ test etc.)
3. Polarity & Ratio test
4. CT magnetization curve test
5. CT secondary winding resistance check

7.6.3 Control & Relay Protection Panel (33 kV):

1. Name Plate Data
2. Complete Relay test (Over current & Earth fault relay, Directional Over current
& Earth fault relay (if applicable), Differential relay etc.
546
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 3. Primary injection test (Tripping & indication test of Over current & Earth fault
relay, CT core allocation check, Single point earthing check)
4. Differential relay & Restricted Earth Fault relay tripping, indication and stability
test
5. Master Trip relay, Trip circuit supervision relay, DC/AC fail relay and all other
auxiliary relay functionality check
6. Closing/Opening operation check from CP & SCADA, Closing Interlock check,
Anti-pumping operation check
7. Trip logic test
8. Alarm and indication circuit functionality check, Indicative meter and Energy
meter check
9. Heating and illumination circuit functionality check
10. Wiring/ Ferrule Number/ Color Coding check as per drawing

7.6.4 Switchgear Panel (11 kV):

1. Name Plate Data
2. Insulation Test of Circuit breaker (Insulation resistance & DAR across open
contact, Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage
/ Power frequency withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)
3. Insulation Test of Busbar (Insulation resistance & DAR across Phase to
Ground, Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power
frequency withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)
4. Complete Relay test (Over current & Earth fault relay, Directional Over current
& Earth fault relay (if applicable) etc.)
5. Primary injection test (Tripping & indication test of O/C & E/F relay, CT core
allocation check, Single point earthing check)
6. Master Trip relay, Trip circuit supervision relay, DC/AC fail relay and all other
auxiliary relay functionality check
7. Closing/Opening operation check from CP & SCADA, Closing Interlock check,
Mechanical Interlock check, Anti-pumping operation check
8. Alarm and indication circuit functionality check, Indicative meter and Energy
meter check
9. Closing/Opening timing check
10. Contact resistance check
11. Spring charge operation check, heating and illumination circuit functionality
check
12. Wiring/ Ferrule Number/ Color Coding check as per drawing

7.6.5 Power Transformer:

1. Name plate data

547
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance, DAR & PI across HV to LV, HV to
Ground, LV to Ground etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency
withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage current test/ tan δ test etc.)
3. Winding Resistance check
4. OLTC functionality check
5. Voltage Ratio check (At all tap changer positions)
6. Open circuit test (magnetizing current and no load loss measurement)
7. Short circuit test (At all tap changer positions)
8. Magnetic balance test
9. Vector group check
10. Bushing CT polarity & ratio test, magnetization curve test, secondary winding
resistance check
11. Functionality check of cooling fan (Manual operation by WTI, OTI)
12. Functionality check and trip test of WTI, OTI, PRD, Buchholz relay (MT and
OLTC) etc.
13. AVR functionality check
14. Oil Test Report (Main Tank (Top & Bottom) & OLTC)
15. Heating circuit functionality check.

7.6.6 Disconnecting Switch/Isolator/Earthing Switch (33 kV & 11 kV):

1. Name plate data
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance & DAR across open contact, Phase to
Ground, Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power
frequency withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)
3. Contact resistance check
4. Closing/Opening operation check, Mechanical Interlock check

7.6.7 Busbar (33 kV):

1. Busbar details (Size, Type and Capacity etc.)
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance & DAR across Phase to Ground, Phase
to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency withstand test
(Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)

7.6.8 Underground Cable & Line Conductor (33 kV & 11 kV):

1. Underground Cable & Line Conductor details (Size, Type and Capacity etc.)
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance, DAR & PI across Phase to Ground,
Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency
withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage current test/ tan δ test (for cable only) etc.)
3. Phase Sequence Check

7.6.9 Earthing Resistance Measurement (Desired value < 0.25 Ω):

1. Substation mesh earthing

548
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 2. CRP panel & Switchgear panel earthing
3. 33 kV CB/CT/PT/LA/Isolator etc. earthing
4. Power Transformer body & neutral earthing

7.6.10 DC System:
Charger:
1. Nameplate data
2. Functionality check (Boost charge, Float charge, Trickle charge etc.)
3. Protection check (Over voltage, Over load, Short circuit, Earth fault,
Reverse polarity etc.)
4. Alarm & Indication check

Battery:
1. Nameplate data
2. Capacity test (Battery bank shall be discharged at rated current by
applying load bank under charger switched off condition and voltage of
each cell shall be measured at 30 minutes interval with a duration up to
Cell EODV)

7.6.11 Attachments:

1. Approved Equipment Layout Drawing (33 kV Switchyard, Control Room, 11 kV

Switchgear).
2. Approved Single Line Diagram along with relay model, CT ratio and load.
3. Approved Schematic diagram of CRP panel and Switchgear panel.
4. Approved General Arrangement (GA) drawing of Front View, Rear View, LHS
view, RHS view of the panel.
5. Fault level calculation, CT sizing calculation.
6. Trip Matrix along with detail relay settings and related calculation for Line
Feeder, Transformer feeder, Incomer Feeder and Outgoing Feeder.
NB:
1. The above mentioned information and reports must be submitted to the office
of the Superintending Engineer, Design & Inspection, NESCO, Rajshahi at least
15 days before the expected date of commissioning. Softcopy of the requested
information and documents will have to be emailed to
[email protected], [email protected].
2. The pre-commissioning test must be witnessed by NESCO engineers and must
be signed by the testing team members and witnesses.
3. Description of the test equipment for each test shall be mentioned.
4. The relay settings have to be finalized as per NESCO’s recommendation.

549
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 SECTION 08
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULAR (GTP)
OF
(PLANT & EQUIPMENT)

550
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.01. Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 33 KV Outdoor Type Vacuum Circuit
Breaker
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufactur
Sl. NESCO's er's
Description Unit
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
1 Manufacturer’s Name & Country - To be
mentioned
2 Manufacturer’s model no. - To be
mentioned
3 Maximum Rated Voltage KV 36
4 Frequency Hz 50
5 Rated Normal current A 1250
6 No. of phase - 3
7 No. of break per phase - To be
mentioned
8 Interrupting medium - Vacuum
9 Manufacturer's name and country of To be mentioned
origin of Vacuum Interrupter
(Shall be same as mentioned in Type
Test Report)
10 Manufacturer's model no. of vacuum - To be mentioned
interrupter
(Same model as type tested unit)
11 Class of Circuit Breaker E2M2 or better
(through necessary test)
12 Impulse withstand on 1.2/50 s wave KVp 170
13 Power Frequency Test Voltage (Dry), at KV 70
50Hz, 1 min.
14 Short time withstand current, 3 second, KA 31.5
rms
15 Breaking capacity:
a) Symmetrical, rms 31.5 KA
b) Asymmetrical, rms 25 KA
16 Short circuit making current, peak 80 KA
17 First phase to clear factor To - be
mentioned
18 Rated transient recovery voltage at KVp To be
100% rated short circuit breaking current mentioned
19 Rated line charging breaking current A To be
mentioned
20 Rated cable charging breaking current A To be
mentioned
21 Rated out of phase breaking current A To be
mentioned
22 Is circuit breaking restrike free? Yes/No Yes
23 Trip coil current A To be
mentioned
24 Trip coil voltage V, DC 110

551
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufactur
Sl. NESCO's er's
Description Unit
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
25 Is the circuit breaker trip free? Yes/No Yes
26 Type of arc contacts or arc control - To be
Device mentioned
27 Main Contact :
a) Type of contact To be
mentioned
b) Material of contact surfaces To be
mentioned
c) Contact resistance  Less than 40
28 Does magnetic effect of load Yes/ To be
Currents increase contact pressure? No mentioned

29 Length of each break/ phase mm To be mentioned

30 Length of stroke mm To be
mentioned
31 Weight of circuit breaker unit complete, Kg To be
without operating mechanism and mentioned
structure
32 Weight of circuit breaker complete with Kg To be
all fittings as in service. mentioned
33 Maximum shock load imposed on floor N To be
or foundation when opening under fault mentioned
conditions (state compression or
tension)
34 Maximum pressure rise in circuit KN/m2 To be
Breaker due to making or breaking of mentioned
Rated current in outer chamber
35 Routine pressure test on circuit KN/m2 To be
Breaker tanks or chamber mentioned

36 Design pressure type test on circuit KN/m2 To be

Breaker tanks or chamber mentioned
Operating Particulars :
37 a)
3 Opening time: without current at sec. 0.05 (maximum)
100%
6 of rated breaking current
b) Breaking time Cycle 5
c) Closing time ms To be
mentioned
d) Closing + breaking time ms To be
mentioned
38 Maximum
3 arc duration of any duty Cycle ms To be
(according
7 to IEC 62271-100) At…% mentioned
39 Current
3 at which maximum arc duration A To be
occurs
8 (critical current) mentioned
40 Make
3 time ms To be
9 mentioned

552
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufactur
Sl. NESCO's er's
Description Unit
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
41 Minimum
4 time for arc extinction to ms To be
Contact
0 remark when adapted for auto mentioned
re-closing
42 Time
4 from closing of control switch to ms To be
completion
1 of closing stroke during fault mentioned
making
Constructional Features:
43 Is
4 an external series break Incorporated Yes/ No To be
in
2 the breaker? mentioned
44 Is
4 any device used to limit transient Yes/ No To be
Recovery
3 voltage? mentioned
45 Method
4 of closing - To be
4 mentioned
46 Method
4 of tripping - To be
5 mentioned
47 Number
4 of close/ trip operation possible Nos. To be
on
6 one spring charge mentioned
48 Rated
4 voltage of spring winding motor V.AC 230
for
7 closing
49 01 nos. spare rectifier circuit if AC motor Yes
is offered (Universal motor is preferred)
50 Spring
4 winding motor current A To be
8 mentioned
51 Closing
4 release coil current A To be
9 mentioned
52 Closing
5 release coil voltage V.DC 110
0
53 Minimum
5 clearance in air :
1
a) Between phase mm 370
b) Phase to earth mm 325
c) Across circuit breaker poles mm To be
mentioned
d) Live conductor to ground level mm To be
mentioned
e) Live insulator to ground level mm To be
mentioned
54 Degree
5 of protection - IP 55
2
55 Material
5 of tank or chamber - To be
3 mentioned
56 Material
5 of moving contact tension rod - To be
4 mentioned
57 Period
5 of time equipment has been in Year To be
commercial
5 operation mentioned
58 No
5 .of tripping coil Nos. 2
6

553
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufactur
Sl. NESCO's er's
Description Unit
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
59 Circuit
5 breaker terminal connectors - Copper/Al-
7 Alloy
60 Creepage
5 distance (min) mm/KV 25
8
61 Method
5 of indicating VCB ON/ OFF Mech.& To be
9 Elect. mentioned
62 Life
6 of interrupter Years To be
0 mentioned
63 Pressure
6 in vacuum tube for VCB Bar To be
1 mentioned
64 Guaranteed
6 nos. of operation for
vacuum
2 Interrupter
a) at rated Current switching Nos. To be
mentioned
b) at Short circuit current switching Nos. ≥ 50

65 Rated
6 operating sequence - O-0.3sec-
3 CO-3m-CO
66 All
6 current carrying parts of VCB Shall be - Terminals are
made
4 of made by
Copper/Al-Alloy
and all other
parts are made
by Copper.
67 Standard
6 - IEC 62271-100
5
.

Manufacturer’s Seal & Signature Bidder Seal & Signature

8.02. Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 33 KV Protection Control and

Metering Panel
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
1. Manufacturer's Name & Country - To be mentioned
of origin
2. Manufacturer's Model no. - To be mentioned
554
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
3. System nominal voltage kV 33
4. Maximum System Voltage kV 36
5. Rated Frequency Hz 50
A. PROTECTION CONTROL & METERING (Transformer Feeder)
6. Differential Relay
Manufacture's Name & ABB- (Sweden/
Country of Origin Switzerland/ Finland)
/ Siemens-(Germany)/
Alstom-(France/UK)/
Schneider-(France/UK)
/ SEL, USA
Manufacturer's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Relay Numerical
programmable
Maximum through fault at which the protective equipment is stable
with recommend settings:
a) Earth faults rating Shall be mentioned
b) Phase faults % of Shall be mentioned
CT
rating
Maximum time delay between ms Shall be mentioned
initiation of fault and energize of
breaker trip circuit.
The Relay shall be IEC 61850 Yes
protocol type.
7. Restricted Earth Fault Relay (in built function of differential
relay).
Manufacture's Name & ABB- (Sweden/
Country of Origin Switzerland/ Finland)
/ Siemens-(Germany)/
Alstom-(France/UK)/
Schneider-(France/UK)
/ SEL, USA
Manufacturer's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Relay Numerical
programmable
Range of current setting : % of Shall be mentioned
CT
rating
Earth fault element Range of Sec Shall be mentioned
timing settings at 10 time CT
rating
Burden of relay at 10 time CT VA Shall be mentioned
rating
Percentage of current setting at % Shall be mentioned
which relay will reset.
The Relay shall be IEC 61850 Yes
protocol type.

555
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
8 IDMT OVER CURRENT & EARTH FAULT Relay
Manufacture's Name & ABB- (Sweden/Switzerland/
Country of Origin Finland) / Siemens-
(Germany)/ Alstom-
(France/ UK)/ Schneider-
(France/UK) / SEL, USA
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of relay Numerical
programmable
Multifunction
The Relay shall be IEC 61850 Yes
protocol type.
Range of current setting :
a) Phase element % of Shall be mentioned
CT Shall be mentioned
b) Each fault element rating
Range of timing settings at 10 Sec Shall be mentioned
time CT rating
Burden of relay at 10 time CT VA Shall be mentioned
rating
Percentage of current at which % Shall be mentioned
relay will reset
Reset time after removal of 10 Sec Shall be mentioned
times CT rated current
Shall have event record option Yes
Three phase power Yes /no Yes
measurement option
Frequency Protection Yes/ Yes
No
Over voltage and under Yes/No Yes
voltage
9 Separate Auxiliary Flag Relays for
Transformer self-protection (OTA,
OTT, WTA, WTT, BA, BT, OLTC
Surge, PRD for main tank.)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no Shall be mentioned
Type of Relays Shall be mentioned
10 Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) Relay
(Separate Relay for each trip coil)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Relay Shall be mentioned
11 Trip Relay (Separate Relay)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Operating Time ms <10

556
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F Yes
protection
Hand & Electrical reset type for Yes
Differential, REF and
Transformer Self-protection
12 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 30 or More.

Built in buzzer and buttons for Yes

accept, mute, test, reset, etc.
13 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy Yes
switch and Local Remote (L/R)
selector switch
14 Panel Dimension (Width) mm ≤800
15 Panel Dimension (depth & mm To be mentioned
Height)
16 Panel DC Power Supply and
Panel Feature
Number of 110 V DC power Nos 2
supply incoming to panel
DC Power Supply changeover Automatic
DC Changer over time ms To be mentioned
SCADA Control Option Yes
CT PT hookup option in SCADA Yes
17 Test terminal block for over Yes
current Relay & Differential relay
B. PROTECTION CONTROL & METERING (Line Feeder)
18 IDMT OVER CURRENT & EARTH FAULT RELAY with Directional feature
Manufacture's Name & ABB- (Sweden/Switzerland/
Country of Origin Finland)/Siemens(Germany
)/Alstom-(France/UK)/
Schneider-(France/UK)
/ SEL, USA
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of relay Numerical
programmable
Multifunction
Directional Feature can be Yes/N Yes
activated/de-activated o
The Relay shall be IEC 61850 Yes
protocol type.
Range of current setting :
a) Phase element Shall be mentioned
557
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
% of CT Shall be mentioned
b) Each fault element rating
Range of timing settings at 10 Sec Shall be mentioned
time CT rating
Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA Shall be mentioned
Percentage of Current setting % Shall be mentioned
at which relay will reset
Reset time after removal of 10 Shall be mentioned
time CT rated current for:
a) Phase element (100%) Sec
b) E/F element (40%) Sec
Three phase power Yes
measurement option
Frequency Protection Yes
Over voltage and under Yes
voltage
19 Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS)
Relay (Separate Relay for each trip
coil)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Relay Shall be mentioned
20 Trip Relay (Separate Relay)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Operating Time Ms <10
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F Yes
protection
21 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 12
Built in buzzer and buttons for Yes
accept, mute, test, reset, etc.
22 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy Yes
switch and Local Remote (L/R)
selector Switch
23 Panel Dimension (Width) Mm ≤600
24 Panel Dimension (depth & mm To be mentioned
Height)
25 Panel DC Power Supply
system and Panel Feature
25. Number of 110 V DC power Nos 2
1 supply incoming to panel
558
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
25. DC Power Supply changeover Automatic
2
25. DC Changer over time Ms To be mentioned
3
25. SCADA Control Option Yes/N Yes
4 o
25. CT , PT hookup option in Yes/N Yes
5 SCADA o
25. Test terminal block for over Yes/N Yes
6 current Relay o
26 METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION
26. Multi tariff programmable
1 meter
Manufacture’s Name & Country Siemens(Germany/
Switzerland)/ AEG
(Germany) / ABB
(Switzerland)/ Toshiba
(JAPAN) /Elster (USA
/Romania), Landis+
Gyr (Switzer land/Greece)/
Honeywell (USA)/ CEWE
(UK)
Manufacture’s Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Meter Numerical
programmable
Multifunction

Class of Accuracy 0.2

26. Numerical programmable multifunction meter. ( KW,KWH,
2 KVARh, Voltage,current, PF,Frequency)
Manufacturer’s Name and - To be mentioned.
Country
Manufacture’s Model no. - To be mentioned
Type of meter - Digital
Class of Accuracy - 0.5
Multifunction meter shall be To be mentioned
capable of measuring &
displaying MW, MVAR, PF, V, I,
f, Φ etc with distinguishing
import & export
operation
Communication Protocol IEC-61850
26.
3 VOLT METERS with Selector Switch
Manufacturer’s Name and Shall be mentioned
Country
Manufacture’s Model no. Shall be mentioned
Analogue/digital, 90
Type of Meter degree scale range
559
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
Class of Accuracy 1.0
26.
4 AMPERE METERS
Manufacturer’s Name and Shall be mentioned
Country
Manufacture’s Model no. Shall be mentioned
Analogue/digital, 240
Type of Meter
degree scale range
Class of Accuracy 1.0
Separate Ameter for each phase Yes
27 The PCM Panel Shall comply all Yes
the technical specification
mentioned in Section-7.

Manufacturer’s Seal & Signature Bidder Seal & Signature

560
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.03 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11KV Indoor Type Vacuum Breaker
with Protection, Control & Metering Cubicles
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1.1 Manufacturer's Name - To be
mentioned
1.2 Manufacturer's Country of origin - To be
mentioned
2. Manufacturer's Model no. - To be
mentioned
3. System nominal voltage kV 11
4. Maximum System Voltage kV 12
5. Rated Frequency Hz 50
6. Rated normal current :
a) Incoming for Power A 1600
Transformer(10/13.33 MVA)
b) Outgoing Feeder 630
7. No. of phase nos. 3
8. No. of breaks per phase nos. To be
mentioned
9. Interrupting medium - Vacuum
10.1 Manufacturer's name and country of To be mentioned
origin of Vacuum Interrupter
(Shall be same as mentioned in Type
Test Report)
10.2 Manufacturer's model no. of vacuum - To be mentioned
interrupter
(Same model as type tested unit)
11. Class of Circuit Breaker E2M2 or better
(through necessary test)
12. Power Frequency withstand voltage kV 28
13. Lightning Impulse withstand voltage on kVp 75
1.2/50 s wave
14. Emergency overload rating of normal at - To be
200C ambient mentioned
15. Duration in any 24 hrs. period - To be
mentioned
16. Busbar Scheme no. Single
17. Number of Busbar nos. 3
18. Temperature Rise of Busbar at rated 0C To be
current mentioned
19. Material of Busbar - Copper
20. Cross-section of Busbar mm2 To be
mentioned
21. Rated normal current of bus bar A 1600
561
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
22. Bus bar insulation material - To be
mentioned
23. Are floor plates or rails included? - To be
mentioned
24. Overall dimensions of each circuit
breaker unit :
a) Incomer :-
- Height mm To be
- Width mm mentioned
- Depth mm ≤ 900mm
To be
mentioned
b) Feeder :-
- Height mm To be
- Width mm mentioned
- Depth mm ≤ 600mm
To be
mentioned
c) Bus coupler with riser :-
- Height mm To be
- Width mm mentioned.
- Depth mm ≤ 1800mm
To be
mentioned
25. Width necessary for breaker withdrawal mm To be
mentioned
26. Rated Short-time withstand Current KA min 31.5
(Rated short circuit breaking current) for
3 sec.
27. Rated Peak withstand Current (Rated KA 80
short circuit making current)
28. Breaking capacity :
a) Symmetrical rms KA 31.5
b) Asymmetrical rms KA 25
29. Rated duration of short circuit Sec. 3sec
30. Degrees of protection by enclosures IP IP4X
31. First pole to clear factor - To be
mentioned
32. Rate transient recovery voltage at 100% KVp To be
rated short circuit breaking current mentioned
33. Rated line charging breaking current A To be
mentioned
34. Rated cable charging breaking current A To be
mentioned
35. Rated out of phase breaking current A To be
mentioned

562
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
36. Is circuit breaker re-strike free? - Yes
37. No. of tripping coil nos. 2
38. Trip coil current A To be
mentioned
39. Trip coil voltage VDC 110
40. Is circuit breaker trip free? - Yes
41. Type of main contact - To be
mentioned
42. Material of contact surface - To be
mentioned
43. Contact resistance  To be
mentioned
44. Does magnetic effect of load current - To be
increase contact? mentioned
45. Length of each break/ phase mm To be
mentioned
46. Length of stroke mm To be
mentioned
47. Weight of circuit breaker complete, Kg To be
without operating mechanism and mentioned
cubicles
48. Weight of circuit breaker complete with Kg To be
PCM cubicles as in service mentioned
49. Maximum shock load imposed on floor or N To be
foundation when opening under fault mentioned
condition (state compression or
tensions)
OPERATING :
50. Operating Sequence - To be
mentioned
51. a) Opening time without current at 100% ms To be
of rated breaking current mentioned

b) Braking time cycle To be

mentioned
c) Closing time ms To be
mentioned
52. Maximum arc duration of any duty cycle ms To be
as per latest revision of relevant IEC. at....% mentioned
53. Current at which maximum arc duration A To be
occurs (critical current) mentioned
54. Make time ms To be
mentioned
55. Minimum time for arc extinction to ms To be
contact remake when adapted for auto mentioned
re-closing
563
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
56. Time from closing of control of switch to ms To be
completion of closing stroke during fault mentioned
making.
57. Is there anti-pumping facility? - Yes
58. Is there electrical and mechanical - Yes
interlocking?
59. Pressure in vacuum tube bar To be
mentioned
60. Guaranteed no. of operation for vacuum nos. 10000
interrupter
61. In normal condition at rated current nos. To be
switching mentioned
62. In short circuit condition i.e. at the short nos. ≥ 50
circuit current switching
CONSTRUCTION FEATURE :
63. Is an external series break incorporated - To be
in the breaker? mentioned
64. Is any device used to limit transient - To be
recovery voltage? mentioned
65. Method of closing - To be
mentioned
66. Method of tripping - To be
mentioned
67. Minimum clearance in air :
a) between phases mm To be
b) phase to earth mm mentioned
To be
mentioned
68. Material of tank or chamber - To be
mentioned
69. Material of moving contact tension rod - To be
mentioned
70. Period of time equipment has been in Year To be
commercial operation s mentioned
71. Is removable draw-out type VCB - To be provided
mounted on the lower part of the panel
i.e. on floor?
72. All meters, protective relays, signaling - To be
etc. mounted on the upper part of the mentioned
panel.
73. Rates voltage of spring winding motor for Vac 230
closing.
74. Materials of all current carrying parts of - Copper.
VCB.
75. Name of relevant IEC Standards to be - To be
followed for Design, Manufacture, mentioned
Testing and Performance.

564
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
76. Internal Arc Classification KA IAC A FLR,
(Must be supported by type test 31.5 KA for 1
report from any short-circuit testing sec
liaison (STL) Member [http://www.stl-
liaison.org/web/03_Members.php]
Testing Organization or Laboratory as
per relevant IEC standard).
77. Earthing Switch To be provided
78. Earthing Switch Integrated with Panel Yes
79. Earthing switch Mechanical interlock Yes
with VCB Rack-in
80. Electrical interlock of Earthing switch To be
with VCB rack in mentioned
81. Panel Mounting Lightning arrester 12 To be
KV, 10 KA discharge current, short ckt mentioned
25 KA (min) for 1 sec
PROTECTION
A. 33/11KV, 10/13.33MVA, 11KV
TRANSFORMER INCOMING CUBICLES
81.0 OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION WITH IDMT & INSTANTANEOUS
FEATURES
81.1 Manufacture's name & country of relay - ABB- (Sweden/
Switzerland/
Finland) /
Siemens-
(Germany)/
Alstom-
(France/UK)/
Schneider-
(France/UK) /
SEL, USA
81.2 Manufacture's model no. - To be
mentioned
81.3 Type of relay - Numerical,
programmable,
multifunction
with both
directional and
non-directional
O/C & E/F
protection
(IDMT, DMT,
Inst.) feature
and monitoring
functions.

565
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
81.4 The Relay shall be IEC 61850 protocol Yes
type.
81.5 Range of timing settings at 10 time CT Sec To be
rating mentioned
81.6 Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA To be
mentioned

566
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
81.7 Percentage of current setting at which relay % To be
will reset mentioned
81.8 Reset time after removal of 10 time CT rated
current for : To be
a) Phase element (100%) Sec mentioned
b) E/F element (40%) Sec To be
mentioned
81.9 Over & Under voltage Protection Yes
81.10 Frequency Protection Yes
81.11 Three phase Power measurement option Yes
81.12 Trip Relays(Separate trip relay shall be provided )
Manufacturer’s Name and Country To be mentioned
Manufacturer’s Model/type No. To be mentioned
Operating Times <10 ms
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F protection Yes
Design : modular Type To be mentioned
81.13 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (Separate
relay shall be provided for each trip coil)
Manufacture’s name & country of relay To be mentioned
Manufacture’s model no. To be mentioned
82.0 SEPARATE STANDBY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
82.1 Manufacture's name & country - ABB- (Sweden/
Switzerland/
Finland) /
Siemens-
(Germany)/
Alstom-
(France/UK)/
Schneider-
(France/UK) / SEL
USA.
82.2 Manufacture's model no. - To be mentioned
82.3 Type of relay - Numerical
programmable
with all
necessary
features
82.4 Range of current setting :
a) Phase element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
b) Earth fault element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
82.5 Range of timing settings at 10 time CT rating Sec To be mentioned
82.6 Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA To be mentioned
82.7 Percentage of current setting at which relay % To be mentioned
will reset

567
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
82.8 Reset time after removal of 10 time CT
rated current for :
a) Phase element (100%) Sec To be mentioned
b) E/F element (40%) Sec To be mentioned
83 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy switch and Yes
Local Remote (L/R) selector switch
84 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 12
Built in buzzer and buttons for accept, Yes
mute, test, reset, etc.
B 11KV BUS COUPLER CUBICLES WITH RISER (NOT APPLICABLE FOR THIS
TENDER)
85.0 OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH IDMT & INSTANTANEOUS FEATURES
85.1 Manufacture's name & country of relay - ABB- (Sweden/
Switzerland/
Finland) /Siemens-
(Germany)/
Alstom- (France/
UK)/
Schneider(France/
UK) /
SEL, USA
85.2 Manufacture's model no. - To be mentioned
85.3 Type of relay - Numerical
programmable with
all necessary
features
85.3 The Relay shall be IEC 61850 protocol Yes
type.
85.4 Range of current setting :
a) Phase element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
b) Earth fault element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
85.5 Range of timing settings at 10 time CT Sec To be mentioned
rating
85.6 Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA To be mentioned
85.7 Percentage of current setting at which % To be mentioned
relay will reset
85.8 Reset time after removal of 10 time CT
rated current for : Sec To be mentioned
a) Phase element (100%) Sec To be mentioned
b) E/F element (40%)
85.9 Over & Under voltage Protection Yes
85.10 Auxiliary Voltage AC & DC V To be mentioned
86 Trip Relay (Separate trip relay shall be
provided )
Manufacturer’s Name and Country To be mentioned
Manufacturer’s Model/type No. To be mentioned
Operating Times ms <10

568
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Self-reset type for O/C, E/F protection Yes
Design : modular Type To be mentioned
87 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (Separate
relay shall be provided for each trip coil)
Manufacture’s name & country of relay To be mentioned
Manufacture’s model no. To be mentioned
88 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy switch and Yes
Local Remote (L/R) selector switch
89 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 8
Built in buzzer and buttons for accept, Yes
mute, test, reset, etc.
C 11KV OUTGOING FEEDER CUBICLES
90.0 OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH IDMT & INSTANTANEOUS FEATURES
90.1 Manufacture's name & country of relay - ABB- (Sweden/
Switzerland/
Finland)/
Siemens (Germany)/
Alstom-(France/UK)/
Schneider-
(France/UK)/
SEL, USA
90.2 Manufacture's model no. - To be mentioned
90.3 Type of relay - Numerical
programmable
90.3. The Relay shall be IEC 61850 protocol Yes
type.
90.4 Range of current setting : To be mentioned
a) Phase element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
b) Earth fault element (% of CT rating) %
90.5 Range of timing settings at 10 time CT Sec To be mentioned
rating
90.6 Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA To be mentioned
90.7 Percentage of current setting at which % To be mentioned
relay will reset
90.8 Reset time after removal of 10 time CT
rated current for : To be mentioned
a) Phase element (100%) Sec To be mentioned
b) E/F element (40%) Sec
90.9 Over & Under voltage Protection Yes
90.10 Frequecny Protection Yes
91 Trip relay (Separate relay shall be
provided )
Manufacturer’s Name and Country To be mentioned
Manufacturer’s Model/type No. To be mentioned
Operating Times <10
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F protection Yes
Design : modular Type To be mentioned

569
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
92 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (Separate
relay shall be provided )
Manufacture’s name & country of relay To be mentioned
Manufacture’s model no. To be mentioned
93 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy switch and Yes
Local Remote (L/R) selector switch
94 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 8
Built in buzzer and buttons for accept, Yes
mute, test, reset, etc.
D METERING AND INDICATION FOR TRANSFORMER 11KV INCOMING, 11KV BUS COUPLER
AND 11KV OUTGOING FEEDER
95.0 Multi tariff programmable meter
95.1 Manufacture’s Name & Country Siemens (Germany/
Switzerland)/
ABB (Switzerland
/Finland)
AEG (Germany)/
Itron(USA)
/Elster
(USA/Romania)
/Landis+gyr,
(Switzerland/Greec
e)
/Toshiba (Japan)/
Honeywell
(USA)/CEWE (UK)
95.2 Manufacture’s Model no. - To be mentioned
95.3 Type of meter - Numerical
Programmable
Multifunction
95.4 Class of accuracy - 0.2 s
96 Multifunction meter ( KW,KWH, KVARh, Voltage,current, PF)
Manufacturer’s Name and Country - Siemens, ABB,
AEG, Honeywel,
CEWE
Manufacture’s Model no. - To be mentioned
Type of meter - Digital
Class of Accuracy - 0.5
Communication Protocol IEC-61850
97.0 INDICATION VOLT METERS & AMMETERS
Manufacturer’s Name and Country - To be mentioned
Manufacture’s Model no. - To be mentioned
Type of meter - Analogue/digital
Class of Accuracy - 1.0
98.0 VOLTMETER WITH SELECTOR SWITCH

570
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer’s Name and Country To be mentioned
Manufacture’s Model no. To be mentioned
Type of meter Analogue/digital
Class of Accuracy 1.0
For Bus Coupler Cubicle two voltmeters Yes
shall be fitted for bus-1 and bus-2
respectively.
99 For Bus Coupler Cubicle two voltmeters Yes
shall be fitted for bus-1 and bus-2
respectively.

100 Bus coupler panel will feed incoming 1 or 2 Yes

PT secondary output voltage to 11 kV
outgoing control Panel for measuring and
protection purpose automatically with
combination of magnetic contact and MCB
.

101 11 kV pcm panel of transformer 11 kV Yes

incoming, outgoing feeder PT secondary
voltage supplied to relay must be feed by
MCB for short circuit protection.
102 Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) based Yes
Live Line Indicator (LLI) for each panel

103 The PCM Panel Shall be complied all the Yes

technical specification mentioned in
Section-7 and GTP no-8.11 & 8.13.

*** If not applicable fill it with N/A

Seal & Signature Seal & Signature

of the Manufacturer of the Bidder

571
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.04 Guaranteed technical particulars of 110v 3x5(6)A, 3-phase, 4-wire, 3-
element, solid state indoor type multi tariff programmable meter
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)
Sl. Manufacture’s
Description Unit Required Specification
No. particulars
1 Reference Standard Relevant ANSI / IEC Standard
Manufacturer’s name &
2 Shall be mentioned
address
Manufacturer’s type &
Shall be mentioned
3 model
3-Phase 4-wire solidly
4 Construction/connection
grounded neutral
Indoor installation in A socket
5 Installation
[for socket type]
6 Number of element 3 (Three)
7 Rated Voltage Volt 110V
Minimum Biasing
8 Volt 40V
Voltage
9 Variation of Frequency % ± 2%
10 Variation of Voltage % + 10, -20%
11 Accuracy class 0.2s (point two s)
Rated Current
i) Nominal Current A =5
12 Maximum
ii) A >6
Current
13 Register Type LCD Display
Number of Digits
14 Nos. 8 with 3 (Programmable)
(Integer with Decimal)
15 Starting Current ma 0.1% of Nominal Current
16 Losses at Nominal Load Watt Shall be mentioned
17 Meter Constant Imp./ Shall be mentioned
Integration Period 30 (Thirty) Minutes
Resetting Period 1 (one) month
18
Cumulative MD transfer Built in
Cycle Timing Device Built in
Size of the Digit of E x H in
19 4x8
Display mm
20 No. of Terminal Nos. 10 (Ten) min
Type of socket and
21 To be mentioned
country of origin
Battery Service life and
22 Year 10 (ten) & 15 (fifteen)
shelf Life (minimum)
23 Year of manufacture Shall be mentioned

Seal & Signature Seal & Signature

of the Manufacturer of the Bidder

572
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacture’s
Sl. Required
Description Unit particulars
No. Specification
(To be filled in)
List of Recommended
24 any Shall be mentioned
spare parts (if any)
25 Warranty Year 3 (three)
26 Meter Service Life (Min) Year 15 (fifteen)
27 Weight of meter Kg Shall be mentioned
mm x
28 Dimensions mm x Shall be mentioned
mm
Outlines, Drawings &
29 Shall be mentioned
Leaflets
Performance Curve for
30 Balanced & Unbalanced Shall be mentioned
load
Hermetically or
31 Meter sealing condition
Ultrasonic welded
a) Country of Origin
32 b) Place of Manufacture Shall be mentioned
c) Place of Testing
33 Memory Storage
i) Equipment
Identification
Code
ii) Security code
iii) Access code
Shall be mentioned by
iv) Number of Power
putting Yes/ No.
Interruption with
Date & Time
V Latest Power
Failure- Time &
Date
Vi Event logs
vii) Cumulative kWh,
kVarh (Q1 + Q4)
Reading for
previous two
months
viii) Load profile with 30
min interval at least 90
days for:
KWh, kVarh
(Q1+Q4)
Phase Voltage or
Vh
Phase Amps or
Ah
Seal & Signature Seal & Signature
of the Manufacturer of the Bidder

573
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
8.05 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 33kV Off-Load Isolator with Earth
Blade
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s

Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch
-
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country To be mentioned

2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned

3. Frequency Hz 50
4. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
5. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
6. Basic Insulation Level kV 170

7. Rated Normal Current A 1250

8. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70

9. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5

10. Installation - Outdoor
11. Type - Single Vertical
Break
12. Construction - Open
13. Mounting Position - Vertical
14. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
15. No. of break per pole nos. One
16. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
17. Insulator Material - Porcelain
18. Creepage distance of Insulator mm/KV 25
19. Current density at the minimum cross Section To be mentioned
of
a) Moving Blade Amps/
b) Terminal Pad Sq.mm
c) Contacts
d) Terminal Connector
20. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts:
21. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with
Nickel Plating
22. Contact Resistance for DS & ES μΩ Less than 50
23. Contact Area:
21.1 6x50 mm copper
mm2 flat bar, length
Moving Blade for DS
750±20 mm -02
Nos per phase
21.2 6x50 mm copper
Moving Blade for ES flat bar, length
500±15 mm -02
574
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Nos per phase

10x60 mm
21.3 Terminal Pad mm2 Copper flat bar -
02 Nos per phase
Contact type Spring loaded
24.
contact
25. Operation - Gang

26. Type of main DS operating mechanism - Manual

27. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set Nos 1
28. Type of Earth Switch operating mechanism - Manual
29. Number of Earth Switch operating mechanism Nos 1
per set
Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
30. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator& Earth Switch - Earth switch –
4NO-4NC

31. Locking facility in the operating box in both close - Yes

and open position
32. Mechanical Interlocking facility between main DS - Yes
and ES
33. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions: -
31.1 For main DS - OD- 42 mm, ID –
36 mm, Length –
6 meter
31.2 For Earth Switch - OD- 42 mm, ID –
36 mm, Length –
6 meter
31.3 Controlling handle length of Isolator operating ≥400mm
Pipe
34. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang -
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized)
32.1 For main DS - 32x32x3600 mm
32.2 For Earth Switch - 25x25x3600mm
35. Total weight of Isolator Kg To be mentioned
36. Total weight of earth switch Kg To be mentioned
37. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned
38. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings of
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting Structure - To be mentioned
Arrangement
39. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
40. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

575
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.06 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 33 kV Off-Load Isolator without Earth
Blade
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s

Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch

-
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country To be mentioned

2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned

3. Frequency Hz 50
4. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
5. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
6. Basic Insulation Level kV 170

7. Rated Normal Current A 1250

8. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70

9. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5

10. Installation - Outdoor
11. Type - Single Vertical
Break
12. Construction - Open
13. Mounting Position - Vertical
14. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
15. No. of break per pole nos. One
16. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
17. Insulator Material - Porcelain
18. Creepage distance of Insulator mm To be mentioned
19. Current density at the minimum cross Section To be mentioned
of
a) Moving Blade Amps/
b) Terminal Pad Sq.mm
c) Contacts
d) Terminal Connector
20. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts:
21. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with
Nickel Plating
22. Contract Resistance μΩ Less than 50 μΩ
23. Contact Area:
6x50 mm copper
mm2 flat bar, length
23.1 Moving Blade
750±20 mm -02
Nos per phase
10x60 mm
23.2 Terminal Pad mm2 Copper flat bar -
02 Nos per phase

576
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 24. Contact type Spring loaded
contact
25. Operation - Gang

26. Type of main DS operating mechanism - Manual

27. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set Nos 1
28. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator -
29. Locking facility in the operating box in both and - Yes
open position
Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
30. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions : -
For main DS - OD- 42 mm, ID –
36 mm, Length –
6 meter
Controlling handle length of Isolator operating
≥400mm
Pipe
31. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang -
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized):
For main DS - 32x32x3600 mm
32. Total weight of Isolator Kg To be mentioned
33. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned
34. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings of
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting Structure - To be mentioned
Arrangement
35. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
36. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

577
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.07 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 kV Off-Load Isolator
without Earth Blade BUS Sectionalizer
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Manufacturer' s
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch
-
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country To be mentioned

2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned

3. Frequency Hz 50

4. System Nominal Voltage kV 33

5. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
6. Basic Insulation Level kV 170

7. Rated Normal Current A 1250

8. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70
9. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5

10. Installation - Outdoor

11. Type - Single Horizontal
Break
12. Construction - Open
13. Mounting Position - Horizontal
14. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
15. No. of break per pole nos. One
16. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
17. Insulator Material - Porcelain
18. Creepage distance of Insulator mm To be mentioned
19. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade
Amps/
b) Terminal Pad
Sq.mm
c) Contacts
d) Terminal Connector
20. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts :
21. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with
Nickel Plating
22. Contract Resistance μΩ Less than 50 μΩ

23. Contact Area

23.1 6x50 mm copper

mm2 flat bar length
Moving Blade
750±20 mm -02
Nos per phase
10x60 mm
mm2 Copper flat -02
23.2 Terminal Pad Nos per phase

578
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 24. Contact type Spring loaded
contact

25. Operation - Gang

26. Type of main DS operating mechanism Manual

-
Manufacturer' s
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
27. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set 1
Nos
28. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator -

29. Locking facility in the operating box in both and Yes

open position
30. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions:
For main DS OD- 42 mm, ID –
36 mm, Length –
6 meter
Controlling handle length of Isolator operating
≥400mm
Pipe
31. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized):
For main DS 32x32x3600 mm

32. Total weight of Isolator Kg To be mentioned

33. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned
34. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings of
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting Structure - To be mentioned
Arrangement
35. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
36. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Bidder Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer

579
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.08 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV OFF-LOAD FUSED
ISOLATOR FOR Auxiliary Transformer
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s

Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country -
To be mentioned

2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned

3. Application of the Disconnecting Switch

For Auxiliary
Transformer

4. Frequency Hz 50
5. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
6. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
7. Basic Insulation Level kV 170

8. Rated Normal Current A 400

9. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70

10. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5

11. Installation - Outdoor
12. Type - Single Vertical
Break Offload
Fused Isolator
13. Construction - Open
14. Mounting Position - Vertical
15. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
16. No. of break per pole nos. One
17. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
18. Insulator Material - Porcelain
19. Creepage distance of Insulator mm To be mentioned
20. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade
Amps/
b) Terminal Pad
Sq.mm
c) Contacts
d) Terminal Connector
21. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts deg. C To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts:
22. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with Nickel
Plating
23. Contact Resistance Less than 50 μΩ

24. Contact Area:

580
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 24.1 Moving Blade 6x50 mm copper
mm 2 flat bar, length
2
810±20 mm -02
Nos per phase
Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
24.2 Terminal Pad 10x60 mm
mm2 Copper flat bar -
02 Nos per phase
25. Contact type Spring loaded
contact
26. Operation - Gang
27. Type of main DS operating mechanism Manual
-
28. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set 1
Nos
29. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator -

30. Locking facility in the operating box in both and Yes

open position
31. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions
31.1 For main DS OD- 42 mm, ID –
36 mm, Length –
6 meter
31.2 Controlling handle length of Isolator operating
≥400mm
Pipe
32. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized):
For main DS 32x32x3600 mm

33. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned

34. Rated Fuse Voltage kV 33

35. Fuse type - DIN Fuse
36. Rated fuse link normal current A 6.3 Amperes
37. 31.5 kA, RMS
Rated fuse link interrupting current kA
Symmetrical
38. Two element,
Fuse link type -
slow/fast unit
39. Heavy duty, sealed
Fuse end cap type - cap with weather
seal at both ends
40. Shall co-ordinate
with existing
Fuse link co-ordination -
system protective
equipment
41. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings of
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting Structure - To be provided
Arrangement
42. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be provided
Equipment.
43. Standard IEC-62271-102
Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature Seal & Signature

of the Manufacturer of the Bidder

581
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
8.09 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV OFF-LOAD FUSED ISOLATOR FOR
BUS PT
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s

Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars

General Description of Disconnecting Switch

1. Manufacturer’s Name and country - To be mentioned
2. Application of the Disconnecting Switch For BUS PT

3. Manufacturer’s Model designation - To be mentioned

4. Frequency Hz 50
5. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
6. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
7. Basic Insulation Level kV 170
8. Rated Normal Current A 400
9. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70
10. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5
11. Installation - Outdoor
12. Type - Single Vertical
Break Offload
Fused Isolator
13. Construction - Open
14. Mounting Position - Vertical
15. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
16. No. of break per pole nos. One
17. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
18. Insulator Material - Porcelain
19. Creepage distance of Insulator mm To be mentioned
20. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade
Amps/
b) Terminal Pad
Sq.mm
c) Contacts
d) Terminal Connector
21.Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts deg. C To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts
22. 2
Materials of the current carrying path Copper with Nickel
4 Plating
23.Contact
2 Resistance Less than 50 μΩ
5
24. 2
Contact Area
6
24.1 Moving Blade 5x30 mm copper
2 flat bar, length
mm 810±20
2 Nos per phase
24.2 Terminal Pad 6x40 mm Copper
mm2 bar flat 2 Nos per
phase

582
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
25. 2
Contact type Spring loaded
7 contact

Operating Mechanism
26. 2Operation - Gang
8
27.Type of main DS operating mechanism Manual
-
28.Number
2 of main DS operating mechanism per set 1
9 Nos
Nos. of Auxiliary Contacts (NO/NC)
29. 3 Isolator- 4NO-4NC
0 For Isolator -

30. 3
Locking facility in the operating box in both and Yes
1
open position
31. 3 Operating GI Pipe Dimensions
2
For main DS OD- 42 mm, ID –
36 mm, Length –
6 meter
Controlling handle length of Isolator operating
≥400mm
Pipe
32. 3
MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang
3
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized)
33. 1
For main DS 32x32x3600 mm

34. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned

Fuse Description
35. 3
Rated Fuse Voltage kV 33
6
36. 3 Drop Out Fuse
Fuse
7 type -
Barrel with Link
37. 3
Rated fuse link normal current A 1 -2 Amperes
8
38. 3 31.5 kA, RMS
Rated
9 fuse link interrupting current kA
Symmetrical
39. 4 Two element,
Fuse
0 link type No
slow/fast unit
40. 4 Heavy duty, sealed
1 cap with eye at
Fuse holder type -
both ends of fuse
holder
41. 4 Shall co-ordinate
2 with existing
Fuse link co-ordination -
system protective
equipment
42. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings of
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting Structure - To be provided
Arrangement
43. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be provided
Equipment.
44. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature Seal & Signature

583
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 of the Manufacturer of the Bidder

8.10 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV OUTDOOR TYPE

SINGLE PHASE CURRENT TRANSFORMER
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer's
Sl.
Description Unit NESCO's Requirement Guaranteed
No.
Particulars
1 Manufacturer's Name & Country - To be mentioned
2 Manufacturer's Model No. - To be mentioned
3 Application - Metering and Protection
4 Type - Induction
5 Installation - Outdoor
6 Construction - Sealed Tank
7 Insulation - Oil
8 Number of Phase - Single
9 Rated Frequency Hz 50
10 Mounting - On Supporting Structure
Primary rated voltage (Phase to
11 kV 33
Phase)
Maximum System Voltage (Phase to
12 kV 36
Phase)
13 System Earthing - Effectively Earthed
Basic Insulation Level (1.2/50 Micro-
14 kV 170
Sec.)
Power frequency withstand voltage (1
15 kV 70
Min. 50 Hz.)
Ratio for 33KV Line feeder: A 600-1200/5-5A
16 Ratio for 33KV Transformer feeder:
A 300-600/5-5-5A
(10/13.33 MVA)
Type of Winding:
a) Primary - Single Winding
Double winding (1 protection
17
& 1 measuring),
b) Secondary -
Triple winding (2 protection &
1 measuring),
18 Accuracy Class:
a) for measurement - 0.2
b) for Protection - 5P20
19 RCT at 750C:
a) measuring core mΩ To be mentioned
b) protection core mΩ To be mentioned
Knee point voltage
To be mentioned (Supported
For Measuring Core V
20 by details calculation)
To be mentioned (Supported
For Protection Core V
by details calculation)
21 Burden:
a) for measurement VA 30
b) for Protection VA 30
22 Short Time Current Rating for 3 Sec. kA 31.5
Extended Current Rating (% of rated
23 % 120
current)
24 Over Current Rating A <10
mm/kV
25 Creepage Distance (Min.) 25
26 Rated accuracy limit factor - To be mentioned
27 Bushing - Porcelain outdoor type
584
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Security factor, (FS for the
28 <5
metering core)
33 kV CT terminal block must be of
Standard CT terminal block type of
minimum 10 mm2 and it will be
29 capable of holding two 6 mm2 cable in Yes
one terminal. CT secondary terminal
block wire connection must be O lug
supported.

The CT secondary cable must taken to

pcm panel through marshalling box.
30 Yes
All secondary core cable need to taken
through CT marshalling box.

All the control cable for connection

from CT secondary side to
31 marshalling box and from Yes
marshalling box to PCM panel will be
of 4 mm2 (minimum) size

As per relevant IEC 61869-1,

IEC 61869-2 (Original Copy
of Mentioned standards
32 Standard - MUST be SUPPLIED by
manufacturer while
submitting the GTP for
approval)
Seal & Signature Seal & Signature
of the Manufacturer of the Bidder

585
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.11 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11kV Indoor Bushing /Ring Type
Single Phase Current Transformer for regular substation
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
FOR PROTECTION & METERING:
1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
2 Manufacturer’s model no. - To be mentioned
3 Application - Metering &
Protection
4 Installation - Indoor
5 Primary Rated Voltage (Phase to Phase) kV 11
6 Maximum System Voltage (Phase to Phase) kV 12
7 Basic Insulation Level (1.2/50 Micro-sec.) kV 75
8 Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 Min. 50 kV 28
Hz).
Ratio:
9 Ratio for Outgoing feeder: A 200-400/5-5A
Ratio for Power Transformer incomer & Bus
Coupler: A 600-1200/5-5-5A
(10/13.33 MVA)
10 Type of Winding :
a) Primary - Single Winding
b) Secondary - Double (1
protection & 1
measuring)/Triple
winding (2
protection & 1
measuring)
11 Rated output for Incoming panel
a) for measurement VA 20
b) for Protection VA 20
12 Rated output for outgoing panel
a) for measurement VA 15
b) for Protection VA 15
13 Accuracy class
a) for measurement - 0.2
b) for Protection
- 11kV Transformer Incomer - 5P20
- 11kV Outgoing/ transformer feeder - 5P20
14 Rated short time thermal current, for 3 sec. KA 31.5
15 Current limit factor A <10
16 RCT at 75˚ C
For Measuring Core mΩ To be mentioned
For Protection Core mΩ
17 Knee point voltage To be mentioned
For Measuring Core V (Supported by
For Protection Core V details
calculation)
18 Extended Current Rating (% of rated current) % 120
19. Major insulation - Epoxy resin
20 Name of relevant IEC Standards to be followed for - To be mentioned
Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance.
21 Creepage Distance Shall be
mentioned
Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

586
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.12 Guaranteed Technical Particulars OF 33 KV OUTDOOR TYPE SINGLE PHASE
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Sl. Description Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's

No. Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
1 Manufacturer's Name & Country - To be mentioned
or origin
2 Manufacturer's Model No. - To be mentioned
3 Type - Induction Type
4 Ratio V 33000/√3:110/√3:110
/√3
5 No. of phase Nos. Single Phase
6 Total capacitance at 100 Hz PF To be mentioned
7 50 Hz 1 (One) minute withstand KV To be mentioned
voltage wet
8 Impulse withstand (1.2/50 micro KV 170
sec. wave)
9 Rated burden per phase VA 50VA
10 Class of accuracy - 0.2+3P
11 Temperature co-efficient of ratio - To be mentioned
per 0C
12 System earthing - Effectively Earthed
13 Creepage Distance mm/kV 25 (min)
14 Maximum errors with 5% primary voltage:
a) Ratio % To be mentioned
b) Phase angle minute To be mentioned
s
15 Total weight complete Kg To be mentioned
16 Standard - As per relevant IEC
61869-1, IEC 61869-
3
(Original Copy of
Mentioned
standards MUST BE
SUPPLIED by
manufacturer while
submitting the GTP
for approval)

Seal & Signature Seal & Signature

of the Manufacturer of the Bidder
587
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.13 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11kV Indoor Type Single Phase
Potential Transformer for regular substation
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Sl. Description Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's

No. Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
1 Manufacturer's Name & Country - To be mentioned
or origin
2 Manufacturer's Model No. - To be mentioned
Application - Metering & Protection
3 Installation - Indoor
4 Mounting - On transformer
incoming panel
5 Type - Induction Type
6 Ratio V 11000/√3:110/√3:1
10/√3
7 Rated Short Circuit Currents 31.5kA, 3Sec
8 Rated Burden :
a) for measurement VA 30 VA
b) for Protection VA 30 VA
9 Class of accuracy :

a) for measurement 0.2

b) for Protection 3P

10 No. of phase No. Single phase

11 No. of secondary winding Nos. To be mentioned

12 Creepage distance (min) mm/KV 25
13 Total weight Kg To be mentioned
14 Insulation - Epoxy resin
15 Name of relevant IEC Standards As per relevant IEC
to be followed for Design, 61869-1, IEC
Manufacture, Testing and 61869-3
Performance.

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

8.14 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 33KV Single Phase Lightning

Arrester
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

588
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl.
Description Unit Requirement Guaranteed
No.
Particulars
1. Reference
0 Standard IEC 60099-4
1
2. Name
0 and address of Manufacturer - To be mentioned
2
3. Country
0 of origin To be mentioned.
3
4. Place
0 of manufacture To be mentioned.
4
5. Manufacturer’s
0 model No. - To be mentioned
5
6. Class of diverter as per IEC 60099-4 Heavy duty, ZnO
(latest version)
7. Type
0 of the Arrester - Metal Oxide (ZnO),
6 Gapless-
Outdoor(Single Unit,)
8. Rated
0 Arrester Voltage kV 36
7
9. Continuous
0 Operating Voltage (COV, kV 22- 27.5
Uc)
8
10. Nominal
0 Discharge Current (8/20micro KA 10
sec)
9
11. 1 - Polymer
Material of housing
0 (Hydrophobic silicon)
12. Manufacturer and address of ZnO
To be mentioned
Block
13. Power
1 Frequency withstand voltage of kV rms 70 (Dry & Wet)
the
1 Arrester Housing, Dry & Wet
14. Impulse
1 withstand Voltage of the kV (peak) 170
Arrester
2 Housing.
15. Lightning
1 Impulse Residual Voltage kV (peak)
100 or better
(8/20
3 micro-second wave)
16. Steep
1 Current Impulse Residual kV (peak)
Voltage
4 at 10 KA of 1 micro second 110 or better
front time.
17. High
1 Current Impulse Withstand Value KV
100 or better
(4/10
5 micro second)
18. Temporary
1 Over voltage capability:
6
a) 0.1 Second kV (peak) Shall be mentioned
b) 1.0 Second kV (peak) Shall be mentioned
c) 10 Second kV (peak) Shall be mentioned
d) 100 Second kV (peak) Shall be mentioned
19. Leakage
1 Current at rated voltage mA To be mentioned
7
20. Total
1 Creepage distance (minimum) mm/ kV 31
8
21. Overall
1 dimension :
9
a) Height mm Shall be mentioned
b) Diameter mm Shall be mentioned
22. Total
2 weight of Arrester Kg. Shall be mentioned
0

589
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
23. Line
2 discharge class - Shall be mentioned
1
24. Short
2 Circuit Current Withstand Sec 31.5 kA, 1 sec
duration
2
25. Minimum
2 Energy Discharge capability - 5
(KJ/KV)
3 at rated voltage
26. Min.
2 Bending load (kgm) To be mentioned
4
27. Surge
2 Counter /Monitor Shall be provided
5
28. Surge monitor shall be insulated YES
29. Cable
2 for Connecting Surge Counter Shall be provided
6
30. Connecting
2 Lead from LA terminal insulated copper
to7 surge monitor cable of minimum
95mm2 size

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

590
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.15 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11KV Single Phase Lightning
Arrester
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be
rejected)

Manufacturer's
Sl.
Description Unit Requirement Guaranteed
No.
Particulars
01 Reference Standard - IEC 60099-4
02 Name and address of Manufacturer - To be mentioned
03 Country of origin To be mentioned.
04 Place of manufacture To be mentioned.
05 Manufacturer’s model No. - To be mentioned
06 Type of the Arrester - Metal Oxide
(ZnO), Gapless-
Outdoor(Single
Unit,)
08 Rated Arrester Voltage kV 9
09 Continuous Operating Voltage (COV, kV 8- 10 kV
Uc)
10 Nominal Discharge Current KA 5
(8/20micro sec)
11 - Polymer
Type of Lightning Arrester housing (Hydrophobic
silicon)
12 Power Frequency withstand voltage kV rms ≥ 35 kV (Dry &
of the Arrester Housing, Dry & Wet Wet)
13 Impulse withstand Voltage of the kV ≥75 kV (peak)
Arrester Housing. (peak)
14 Lightning Impulse Residual Voltage kV
35 kV (peak)
(8/20 micro-second wave) (peak)
15 Temporary Over voltage capability:
a) 0.1 Second kV To be mentioned
(peak)
b) 1.0 Second kV To be mentioned
(peak)
c) 10 Second kV To be mentioned
(peak)
d) 100 Second kV To be mentioned
(peak)
16 Leakage Current at rated voltage mA < 1 mA
17 Total Creepage distance (minimum) mm/ kV 25
18 Overall dimension :
a) Height mm To be mentioned
b) Diameter mm To be mentioned
19 Total weight of Arrester Kg. To be mentioned

591
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
20 Line discharge class - Shall be
mentioned
21 Short Circuit Current Withstand Sec 25 kA, 1 sec
duration
22 Minimum Energy Discharge - Shall be provided
capability (KJ/KV) at rated
voltage
23 Min. Bending load (kgm) Shall be provided

Seal & Signature Seal & Signature

of the Manufacturer of the Bidder

592
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.16 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Ni-Cd BATTERY (110 V DC)
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer
Sl. NESCO's 's
Description Unit
No. Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
1. Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
2. Manufacturer’s model no. - To be mentioned
3. Type - Nickel Cadmium
Alkaline (enclosed
type)
4. Operating Voltage V DC 110
5. Continuous Discharge Current at Amp 10
rate of 10 hour & Final Cell
Voltage 1.3 Volt
6. Short Time Discharge Current at Amp 50
rate of 2 hour & Final Cell Voltage
1.1 Volt
7. Electrolyte type - To be mentioned
8. Capacity at 10 hour rate AH 100
9. Discharge Voltage Volt 1.3 Per Cell
10. Charging Voltage (Normal) Volt 1.6 Per Cell
11. Number of cells Nos. 92 nos. + 5 nos.
Spare
12. Voltage per cell V 1.2
13. Charging Voltage (Maximum) Volt 1.75 Per Cell
14. Normal float charge rate A To be mentioned
15. Maximum boost charge rate A To be mentioned
16. Amp hour efficiency at :
a) 10 hour rate % To be mentioned
b) 1 hour rate %
17. Size of cell mm To be mentioned
18. Weight of cell and electrolyte kg To be mentioned
19. Standard - As per Latest
Edition of
applicable IEC-
60623
20 Specific gravity of electrolyte To be mentioned
.
21 Release pressure for valve Kg/m To be mentioned
. regulated type 2
22 Volume of electrolyte per cell ml To be mentioned
.
23 Volume of reserve electrolyte per ml To be mentioned
. cell
24 No of electrode plates per cell Nos. To be mentioned
.

593
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 25 Type of racks mm
. (a)Height mm
To be mentioned
(b)Width mm
( c)Depth
26 Cell dimension:
. (a) Height mm
To be mentioned
(b) Width mm
(c) Depth mm
27 Rack Dimensions
. (a)Height mm
To be mentioned
(b)Width mm
( c)Depth mm
28 Manufacturer must comply all the
. features of Technical
Yes
Specification
( Section 7)
29 Original Copy of IEC-60623
. standard (latest edition) MUST
BE SUPPLIED by
Yes
manufacturer/contractor while
submitting the GTP for
approval

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

8.17 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of BATTERY CHARGER

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1. Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
2. Manufacturer’s model no. - To be mentioned
3. Rating - To be mentioned
4. Rated Input voltage range V AC 415 V  10%
5. Rated Frequency Hz 50 Hz ( 3%),
6. No of Phase - 03
7. Control Shall be mentioned
8. Communication module for station Shall be provided
automation
9. Rectifier type Silicon
10. Nominal output voltage V DC 110
11. Charging operating control Boost and floating
charge, automatic
with manual
operation
12. Output current A DC ≥ 40

594
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 13. Continuous current rating 110 % of rated
current
14. Efficiency % ≥ 85
15. Voltage regulation % ± 0.5
16. Ripple voltage mV ≤ 150
17. Boost charging voltage V/cell 1.6 to 1.75
(programmable)
18. Boost charging time hour programmable
19. Operating temperature °C 0 to 50
20. Humidity % 95
21. Audible noise dB ≤ 65
22. Facilities for paralleling with Shall be provided
another charger
23. Protection against surge voltage Shall be provided
24. Protection against reverse polarity Shall be provided
25. Provision for current Shall be provided
limiting
26. Dropping Diodes unit at in the Yes
output circuit during Boost Mode
27. Provision of constant voltage charge Shall be provided
90V -130V

28. Provision of showing Shall be provided

earth leakage current by analog
meter
29. Battery Temperature Shall be
compensation incorporated.
30. Alarm annunciator independent Shall be provided
of the microprocessor
31. Analog meters for voltage and Shall be provided
current measurement of
input, output and battery power
32. Dimension Shall be mentioned
33. Output voltage range
a) normal charge V DC 110 V  1%
b) Float charge V DC 120 V  1%
c) boost charge V DC 150 V  1%

34. Normal/ boost charge independent Yes/ No

units?

35. Output current A 50

36. Rated Battery Current A 20

37. Efficiency % To be mentioned

38. Ripple Voltage % 3%

39. Type of AVR - Static

40. Installation Break Down Voltage KV 2KV for 1 Minute
41. Type of rectifier Thyristor

42. MCCB

595
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 a) Quantity Nos. 2 nos. DC MCB, 1
nos. for DC battery
& 1 nos. DC
Distribution
panel/load
output isolation
shall be provided in
the charger panel.
b) Rating A AC input MCB-50A
DC Output MCB-
63A,
43. Provision for showing voltage Shall be provided
(digital) of every cell of battery
44. Standard - As per Latest
Edition of
applicable
IEC-60146
45. Manufacturer must comply Yes
all the features of Technical
Specification ( Section
7)
46. Charger controller shall Yes
have IEC61850 communication
protocol for SAS implementation.
All the measurement data,
controlling & operation
facility of the charger shall
be available at SAS .
47. Original Copy of IEC-60146
standard (latest edition)
MUST BE SUPPLIED by
Yes
manufacturer/contractor
while submitting the GTP
for approval

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

596
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.18 Guaranteed Technical Particulars FOR 33/11KV, 10/13.33 MVA POWER
TRANSFORMER
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)
Manufacture
Sl. NESCO's r’s
Description Unit
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
1. RATING AND PERFORMANCE
1.1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be
mentioned
1.2 Manufacturer’s Model no. - To be
mentioned
1.3 Continuous maximum rating (ONAN / MVA 10/13.33
ONAF)
1.4 No. of phases Nos. 3
1.5 Rated frequency Hz 50
1.6 Normal transformation ratio at No-load kV 33/11.55
1.7 Rated HT voltage (phase to phase) kV 33
1.8 Maximum HT voltage (phase to phase) kV 36
1.9 Rated LT voltage (phase to phase) kV 11
1.10 Maximum LT voltage (phase to phase) kV 12
1.11 Installation - Outdoor
1.12 Type of Transformer - Core,
Conservator,
Oil immersed
1.13 Direction of normal power flow - HT-LT
1.14 No of windings Nos. 2
1.15 Bushing materials - Porcelain
1.16 Type of cooling - ONAN/ONAF
1.17 Coolant - Mineral Oil
free from PCB
as per IEC-
60296
1.18 Type of earthing - Effectively
earth

597
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
1.20 Type of base - On wheels with
adequate size
and length of
rails and fixing
arrangement
1.21 Phase connection:
a) 33 KV winding with bushing CT - Delta
b) 11KV winding with bushing CT - Star
1.22 Vector group - Dyn11
1.23 Neutral to be brought out :
a) HT - Nil
b) LT - Yes
1.24 Basic Insulation Level (BIL) :
a) High voltage winding KV 170
b) Low voltage winding KV 75
0
1.25 Max. Temp. Rise over 40 C of ambient (at CMR & normal tap change
position) supported by Design Calculation sheet (to be enclosed) on the
basis of Design Data:-
a) Winding Temp. Rise 0C 60
b) Top Oil Temp. Rise 0C 50
TEST VOLTAGE :
1.26 Impulse front wave test voltage (1.2/50
micro sec. wave shape) :
a) High voltage side kV 170
b) low voltage side kV 75
1.27 Power Frequency withstand test
voltage for 1 (one) minute :
a) High voltage side kV 70
b) Low voltage side kV 28
1.28 Short circuit MVA available (10/13.33
MVA) : MVA 1800
a) at 33 KV MVA 600
b) at 11KV
1.29 Impedance voltage at 75 0C and at % 8%
normal ratio and rated frequency and at
ONAN condition.
1.30 All windings shall have uniform - Yes
insulations
2. VOLTAGE CONTROL (OLTC)
2.1 Type of Tap Changer control - On load auto
regulation and
remote &
manual control
2.2 OLTC, MDU & AVR Manufacturer’s - MR,
name & country Germany/ABB,
Sweden

598
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
2.3 Model Number Shall be
mentioned
2.4 Nos. of tapping - 17
2.5 Tapping steps - +10% in steps
of 1.25% 17
tapping (i.e.
33+8x1.25%)
2.6 HV or LV winding - HV winding
2.7 Power Frequency withstand test kV 75
voltage between first and last contracts
of the selector switch between diverter
and switch contract.
2.8 Rated Voltage for control circuit Shall be
mentioned
2.9 Power Supply for control motor Shall be
mentioned
3. CORE
3.1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be
mentioned
3.2 Material of core & grading To be
mentioned
3.3 Core Loss/ Kg, supported by To be
Characteristic Curve (to be mentioned
submitted )
3.4 Thickness of core, mm To be
mentioned
3.5 Core Dia, mm To be
mentioned
3.6 Total weight of core, Kg (supported by To be
details calculation) mentioned
3.7 Maximum flux density in iron at normal
voltage and frequency and at normal
ratio (ONAF condition) < 1.7
a) Cores Tesla To be
b) Yokes Tesla mentioned
3.8 Magnetizing current (approx.) % To be
mentioned
3.9 Losses
a) No load losses at rated voltage, KW 7-12
ratio and frequency.
b) Full Load losses at rated voltage, KW To be
normal ratio & frequency in ONAN mentioned
condition at 750C.
c) Full Load losses at rated voltage, KW 50-70
normal ratio & frequency in ONAF
condition at 750C.
d) Auxiliary Losses KW To be
mentioned
599
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 e) Total Loss (a+c+d) KW To be
mentioned
3.10 Maximum current density in core at A/mm2 To be
CMR mentioned
3.11 Simultaneous operating conditions
under which maximum flux density
is attained:
a) Frequency Hz To be
mentioned

b) Voltage- KV To be
HV mentioned
LV KV To be
mentioned
c) Tap - To be
mentioned
d) Load MVA To be
And mentioned
P.F.
3.12 Maximum flux density in iron under Tesla To be
conditions entered on mentioned
line 3.11
3.13 (a) Maximum current density in HV A/mm2 To be
winding at CMR mentioned
(b) Cross section of HV winding mm2
3.14 (a) Maximum current density in LV A/mm2 To be
winding at CMR mentioned
(b) Cross section of LV winding mm2
3.15 Regulation at 75℃ and nominal tap
(at CMR):
To be
-at unity power factor % mentioned

To be
-at 0.9 lagging power factor % mentioned

4. DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION
4.1 Types of winding: - To be
a) HV mentioned
b) LV
4.2 Copper Conductor’s Manufacturer To be
Name & Address mentioned
4.3 Material of windings - copper
4.4 Winding resistance
4.4.1 Winding (Phase) resistance(at 25oC) of :

a) H.T. winding, Ohm. To be mentioned

600
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 b) L.T. winding, Ohm. To be mentioned

Winding (Phase) resistance(at 75oC) of :

4.4.2 *winding resistance must be same as .

the value used for full load loss
calculation

a) H.T. winding, Ohm. To be mentioned

b) L.T. winding, Ohm. To be mentioned

4.5 Current density of :

a) H.T. winding, Amps/sq. mm A/mm2 To be
mentioned
b) L.T. winding, Amps/sq. mm A/mm2 To be
mentioned
4.6 Outer, Inner & Mean dia of copper
winding:
a) H.T. winding, mm To be
mentioned
b) L.T. winding, mm To be
mentioned
4.7 Size of Copper conductor/bar :
a) H.T. winding SWG, dia. in mm / mm2 To be
area in mm2 mentioned
b) L.T. winding dimension, area in mm2 To be
mm2 mentioned
4.8 Number of Turns :
a) HT winding. nos. To be
mentioned
b) LT winding nos. To be
mentioned
4.9 Copper weight of windings :
(supported by details calculation)
a) HT winding Kg To be
mentioned
b) LT winding Kg To be
mentioned
4.10 Total weight of copper windings Kg To be
mentioned
4.11 Type of insulation of :
a) Tapping
b) Tapping connections
c) Core bolts To be
d) Core bolt washers mentioned
e) Side plates
f) Core laminations
4.12 Type of winding connections - To be mentioned

601
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (crimped or brazed )
4.13 Thickness of transformer tank:
a) Top mm
To be mentioned
b) Sides mm
c) Bottom mm
4.14 Vacuum withstand capability of the tank
Main tank Kpa
Conservator Kpa
Radiators Kpa
4.15 Provision of tank earthing and Core - Yes
earthing
4.16. Bladder / Air bag in Conservator - Yes
1
4.16. Material of Bladder / Air bag To be mentioned
2
4.17 Material used for gaskets for oil tight mm To be mentioned
joints
5. RADIATORS
5.1 Thickness of radiator plates/ cooling mm To be mentioned
tubes
5.2 Equipment for ON cooling state
5.3 Radiators on main tank - To be mentioned
5.4 Number of radiators per transformer Nos. To be mentioned
5.5 Rating of each radiator bank KW To be mentioned
5.6 Power of each fan KW To be mentioned
5.7 Nos. of fans Nos. To be mentioned
6. Oil Volume and Weight
6.1 Type of oil Class-1 grade,
insulating
mineral oil, free
from PCB
(polychlorinated
biphenyl)
6.2 Manufacturer Name of oil Shall be
mentioned
6.3 Breakdown Voltage at 2.5mm gap >50 kV
between electrodes
6.4 Appearance Liquid and free
from suspended
matter or
sediment
6.5 Density at 200 C 0.895 g/cm3
(maximum)
6.6 Flash point (Closed cup) 1400 C
(minimum)
6.7 Kinematics Viscosity at -150 C 800 cSt.
(Maximum)
6.8 Kinematics Viscosity at 200 C 40 cSt.
(Maximum)
602
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
6.9 Pour point -300 C
(maximum)
6.10 Neutralization value 0.03 mg KOH/g
(maximum)
6.11 Neutralization value after oxidation 0.40 mg KOH/g
(maximum)
6.12 Total sludge after oxidation 0.10% weight
(maximum)
6.13 PCB Content Free from PCB
6.14 Water content 25ppm
(maximum)
6.15 Total oil required including cooler system Litres To be mentioned
6.16 Volume of oil above of the top yoke Litres To be mentioned
6.17 Total volume of conservator Litres To be mentioned
6.18 Weight of core and winding assembly Tones To be mentioned
6.19 Weight of each oil cooler bank complete Tones To be mentioned
with oil if mounted separately from
transformer
6.20 Total weights of complete transformer, Tones To be mentioned
including attached radiators, voltage
regulating equipment ,all fittings and oil
6.21 Weight of transformer arranged for Tones To be mentioned
transport
6.22 Brief description of transformer or parts - To be mentioned
thereof subjected to short-circuit test or
for which short-circuit calculations are
available
7. TRANSFORMER BUSHING INSULATORS
7.1 Manufacture’s name & Address - To be mentioned

7.2 Manufacture’s country Japan/ UK/ USA

/ Germany/
France/ Sweden/
Europe /
Switzerland/
Canada

7.2.1 Manufacture’s Model To be mentioned

7.3 Insulator material - Porcelain

7.4 Bushing housing Porcelain

7.5.1 Bushing rated voltage (HT) KV 12

7.5.2 Bushing rated voltage (LT) KV 36

7.5.3 Bushing Current (HV) Rating at 75˚C A 630A (Minimum)

7.5.4 Bushing Current (LV) Rating at 75˚C A 1250A

(Minimum)

603
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 7.6 Insulator type and rated voltage - To be mentioned

7.7 Pitch circle diameter and drilling of flange mm To be mentioned

approx.

7.8 Length of Insulator (overall ) mm To be mentioned

7.9 Weight of Insulator kg To be mentioned

7.10 One minute 50 Hz dry withstand routine KV To be mentioned

test voltage

7.11 Lightning Impulse flashover voltage KV To be mentioned

(1.2/50 wave )

7.12 Fullwave Lightning Impulse Voltage KV To be mentioned

withstand

7.13 50 Hz wet withstand voltage across KV To be mentioned

arcing horns
7.14 Under oil flashover voltage type test KV To be mentioned
7.15 Total creepage distance of shedding mm Min. 25mm per
KV

7.16 Protected creepage distance of shedding mm To be mentioned

7.17 Rod Material To be mentioned

7.18 Rated Short circuit Current withstand 31.5KA, 3sec

capability

7.19 Standard Reference To be mentioned

7.20 Bushing Flags

Country and Manufacturer CEDASPE/COM
EM ,Italy

8. BUSHING CTS 33 KV FOR DIFFERENTIAL

PROTECTION
8.1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
8.2 Rated Voltage 33KV
8.3 Rated maximum Voltage 36KV
8.4 Ratio A 300/5
8.5 Rated output VA 30 VA
8.6 Accuracy class - 5P20
8.7 Knee Point Voltage V To be mentioned
8.8 Electrical Clearance from phase to mm To be
phase mentioned
8.9 Electrical Clearance phase to earth mm To be
mentioned

604
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
8.10 Cable for connection from bushing Yes
CT secondary terminal to
marshalling kiosk will be of 4 mm2
size
9. BUSHING CTS 11 KV FOR DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
9.1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
9.2 Rated voltage KV 11
9.3 Rated maximum voltage KV 12
8.4 Ratio A 900/5
9.5 Rated output VA 30 VA
9.6 Accuracy class - 5P20
9.7 Knee Point Voltage V To be mentioned
9.8 Cable for connection from bushing Yes
CT secondary terminal to marshalling
kiosk will be of 4 mm2 size
10. NEUTRAL BUSHING CTS 11 KV FOR SEF & REF
PROTECTION
10.1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
10.2 Rated voltage KV 11
10.3 Rated maximum voltage KV 12
10.4 Ratio A 900/5-5
10.5 Rated output VA 30 VA
10.6 Accuracy class - 5P20
10.7 Knee Point Voltage V To be mentioned
10.8 Cable for connection from bushing Yes
CT secondary terminal to marshalling
kiosk will be of 4 mm2 size
11 Oil Temperature Indicator
Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
Japan/ South
Korea /UK/ USA /
Germany/ France/
Country of manufacturer -
Sweden/
Switzerland/
Canada/Italy
Make/Model Number To be mentioned
Alarm contact 01No
Trip Contact 01No
Alarm & Trip Range To be mentioned
12 Oil Level Indicator
Manufacturer Name & Country To be mentioned
Make/Model Number To be mentioned
13 Winding Temperature Indicator (HV & LV
Winding)
Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
Japan/ South
Korea /UK/ USA /
Country of manufacturer -
Germany/ France/
Sweden/

605
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Switzerland/
Canada/Italy
Make/Model Number To be mentioned
Alarm contact 01No
Trip Contact 01No
Alarm & Trip Range To be mentioned
14 Dial Thermometer
Alarm Contact 01No
Trip Contact 01No
15 Buchholz relay and Oil Surge Relay Yes
15.1 Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
15.2 Country of manufacturer Japan/ South
Korea /UK/ USA
/ Germany/
France/ Sweden/
Switzerland/
Canada/Italy
15.3 Make/Model Number To be mentioned
15.4 Alarm contact 01No
15.5 Trip Contact 01No
16 PRD for Main Tank & Tap changer Yes
16.1 Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
16.2 Country of manufacturer Japan/ South
Korea /UK/ USA
/ Germany/
France/ Sweden/
Switzerland/
Canada/Italy
16.3 Make/Model Number To be mentioned
16.4 Alarm contact 01No
16.5 Trip Contact 01No
17 Breather for main tank and OLTC tank
17.1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address MR, Germany or
- Equivalent
European origin
17.2 Model(Main Tank) - To be mentioned
17.3 Model(OLTC Tank) - To be mentioned
17.4 Type of breather Maintenance
- free sensor
controlled
17.5 Sight (Transparent) glass for inspection Shall be
of the silica gel provided
18 Is terminal permanent terminal marking Yes/No
provided?
19 Parallel operation of identical transformer Required
20 Marshalling Box Shall be
provided
21 Silica Gel Breather Shall be
provided
22 Guaranteed Noise level db 70 (maximum)
23 Harmonics

606
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 R.M.S. value of the fundamental current Amp. To be mentioned
R.M.S. value of 3rd harmonics current Amp To be mentioned
R.M.S. value of 5th harmonics current Amp To be mentioned
24 Type of paint applied internally To be mentioned
25 Type of paint applied externally To be mentioned
26 Type of weatherproof anti rust material To be mentioned
primer
27 Dimension of the transformer
27.1 Length mm To be mentioned
27.2 Width mm To be mentioned
27.3 Height mm To be mentioned
28 RTCC Panel along with Power Transformer
Provisions for RTCC signals to SCADA To be provided
Installation Free standing
Provisions for master/follower/independent
To be provided
scheme
Winding Temperature meter (separate for
To be Provided
HV and LV) (Digital)
Oil temperature meter (Digital) To be Provided
Oil level meter To be Provided
Tap position Indication Meter To be Provided
MR,
AVR Relay Germany/ABB,
Sweden
Indication lamp with annunciator with
Buzzer
i) Winding Temperature alarm (HT & LT) To be provided
ii) Cooling fan motor Running To be provided
iii) Oil temperature alarm To be provided
iv) Tap changer in progress To be provided
v) OLTC out of step To be provided
vi) Tap changer faulty To be provided
vii) Tap changer fan trouble To be provided
viii) Tap Changer drive Box MCB Trip To be provided
ix) Transformer MK box MCB Trip To be provided
Push Buttons
i) Manual step up To be provided
ii) Manual step down To be provided
iii) Fan start To be provided
iv) Fan Stop To be provided
v) Emergency Stop To be provided

607
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 The RTCC Panel will comply all the Yes
technical specifications mentioned in
section 7 of the document
Following tests shall be done and detail test report shall be
29
provided:
TYPE TESTS
Shall be
a) Lightning Impulse Test -
provided
Shall be
b) Temperature Rise Test -
provided
ROUTINE TESTS
Shall be
a) Measurement of insulation resistance. -
provided
Shall be
b) Measurement of Voltage ratio test. -
provided
c) Measurement of winding resistance Shall be
(Both Static and Dynamic with motor - provided
current) at Each Tap position
d) Vector group test Shall be
-
(Check of phase sequence) provided
Shall be
e) Measurement of no-load loss & current. -
provided
f) Measurement of short circuit impedance Shall be
-
and load loss. provided
Shall be
g) Induced over voltage test -
provided
Shall be
h) Power frequency withstands test -
provided
Shall be
i) Dissipation factor test -
provided
j) DGA Test after installation in NESCO Shall be
premises after particular time interval provided
-
according to percentage of gases present
in the sample
k) SFRA & DFRA Test (In the factory and Shall be
-
after installation but before commissioning) provided
Shall be
l) Magnetic Balance Test -
provided
Shall be
m) Polarity test -
provided
n) Zero sequence impedance test - Shall be provided

SPECIAL TEST
Shall be provided
a) Short circuit withstands test report of HV-LV. -

b) Dynamic short circuit test report - Shall be provided

30 Standard Design,
Manufacture ,
Testing,
Installation and
608
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 performance
shall be in
accordance to
the latest edition
of the IEC 60076
31 Details drawing of every parts of Power Shall be
Transformer & Accessories, Catalogue of provided
every
Accessories (only for offered type/model)
32 Full guarantee for 02 (Two) years - Yes

Seal & Signature Seal & Signature

of the Manufacturer of the Bidder

609
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.19 Guaranteed Technical Particulars For 33/ 0.415 KV, 3-Phase, 200 kVA
Station Auxiliary Transformer
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the
bid shall be rejected)
Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
Description Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Data
1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned
2 Manufacturer's Type & Model No. To be mentioned
3 KVA Rating 200
4 Number of Phases 3
5 Rated frequency, Hz 50
6 Rated primary voltage, KV 33
7 Rated no load sec. voltage, V 415
8 Vector group Dyn11
9 Highest system voltage of :
a) Primary winding, KV 36
b) Secondary winding, V 457
10 Basic insulation level, KV 170
11 Power frequency withstand voltage, KV
a) HT Side 70
b) LT Side 2.5
12 Type of cooling ONAN
13 0
Max. Temp. Rise over 40 C of ambient supported by Calculation (to be submitted) of
Load Loss, Temperature Rise and Heat Dissipation by Radiator on the basis of
Design Data:
a) Windings deg. C 60
b) Top oil deg. C 50
14 Type of primary tapping off load, % +1x2.5%, 0,
-3x 2.5%
15 Percentage Impedance at 75 C, %o 4%
16 No-load loss, Watts Max 430 Watts
17 0
Load losses at rated full load at 75 C, Max 2800 Watts
Watts
18 Magnetising current at normal voltage, To be mentioned
Amps
19 Efficiency at 750C and 100% load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
20 Efficiency at 750C and 75% load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
21 Efficiency at 750C and 50% load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
22 0
Efficiency at 75 C and 25% load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
23 Regulation at full load :
610
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
Description Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Data
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
Transformer Oil :
24 a) Type of oil Mineral
Insulating Oil
b) Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned
25 Total weight of oil, Kg To be mentioned
26 Breakdown Voltage at 2.5mm gap between > 50 kV
electrodes
Transformer Core :
27 Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned
28 Total weight of core, Kg To be mentioned
29 Material of core & grading To be mentioned
30 Core Loss/ Kg, supported by Characteristic To be mentioned
Curve & Core Manufacturer's Brochure
31 Thickness of core, mm To be mentioned
32 Core Dia, mm To be mentioned
33 Max. magnetic flux density, Tesla < 1.7
Transformer Windings :
34 Copper Conductor's Manufacturer Name & To be mentioned
Address
35 Material of windings copper
36 Winding resistance of :
a) H.T. winding, Ohm. (per phase at 75o C) To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding, milli-Ohm. (per phase at To be mentioned
75o C)
37 Current density of :
a) H.T. winding, Amps/sq. mm To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding, Amps/sq. mm To be mentioned
38 Outer, Inner & Mean dia of copper winding:
a) H.T. winding, mm To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding, mm To be mentioned
39 Size of Copper Conductor :
a) H.T. winding SWG, dia. in mm & area in To be mentioned
mm2
b) L.T. winding length, width, thickness in To be mentioned
mm and area in mm2
40 Number of Turns :
a) HT winding, nos. To be mentioned
b) LT winding, nos. To be mentioned
41 Copper weight of windings :
a) HT winding, Kg To be mentioned
b) LT winding, Kg To be mentioned
42 Total weight of copper windings, Kg To be mentioned
43 Dimension of Transformer :
a) Width, mm To be mentioned
611
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
Description Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Data
b) Length, mm To be mentioned
c) Height, mm To be mentioned
d) Tank Sheet thickness of top, bottom & To be mentioned
side, mm
e) Total weight of transformer tank, Kg To be mentioned
44 a) Total weight of active part (core, coil and To be mentioned
other accessories), Kg
b) Total weight of complete Transformer To be mentioned
including fittings & oil, Kg
45 Type of breathings To be mentioned
46 Name of relevant IEC or other Equivalent To be mentioned
Standards for Design, manufacture, testing
and performance.
47 Drawing :
a) General Arrangement & Outline To be submitted
Dimensions
b) Internal Construction Details/ Sectional To be submitted
drawing of active parts including
Insulation arrangement
c) HT & LT Bushings with dimension & To be submitted
current ratings
d) Cross-section & Dimensional drawing To be submitted
of Core & Windings
e) Radiator with detail dimensional To be submitted
drawing
f) Tap changer with dimension & current To be submitted
ratings.
48 Routine Test Report :
a) Measurement of turn ratio test. To be submitted
b) Vector group test. To be submitted
c) Measurement of winding resistance. To be submitted
d) Measurement of insulation resistance. To be submitted
e) Measurement of no load loss & no-load To be submitted
current.
f) Measurement of impedance voltage & To be submitted
load loss.
g) Dielectric withstands Tests. To be submitted
h) Transformer oil test (including Tan To be submitted
delta).
49 Type Tests report along with details test result and drawings for 33/0.415KV, 200KVA,
3-Phase, Dyn11 Distribution Transformer from an independent testing Laboratory/
Institute as per IEC 60076/ BS 171 Standards:
a) Impulse Voltage Withstands test. To be submitted
b) Temperature Rise test. To be submitted

612
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
Description Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Data
50 Short-circuit Tests Report for the offered To be submitted
33/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11
Distribution Transformer as per relevant
IEC with detail test results & drawings from
reputed independent testing Laboratory/
Institution or detail calculation on the basis
of design data by the manufacturer.

Manufacturer’s Seal & Signature Bidder Seal & Signature

613
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.20 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Single-Core, 300 mm2 11 kV XLPE
Insulated Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data,
otherwise the Bid will be rejected)

Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacture

No. Requirement r’s
Particulars
1 Name of the Item 1CX300 mm2 11 kV
XLPE Insulated
Copper Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer/Country of
Origin
4 Standard Performance, Design
and Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS,
IEC, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
5. Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
6. VOLTAGE
Voltage between phases of
three Phase circuit
U kV 11
Umax kV 12
7. Manufacturing Process CCV/VCV
8. CORES
Number of Cores No. one
9. CONDUCTOR
9.1 CONDUCTOR Electrolytic annealed
material copper

9.2 Cross sectional area mm2 300

9.3 Min. No. & Dia of wires Nos./mm 61/To be mentioned
10. CONDUCTOR SCREEN
10.1 CONDUCTOR SCREEN semi-conducting
Material
10.2 Nominal Thickness mm To be mentioned
(Subject to approval),
Based on design
calculation as per
relevant & latest IEC
standard
10.3 Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
11. INSULATION
11.1 INSULATION Material XLPE

614
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 11.2 Type of dry curing Inert gas
11.3 Nominal Thickness mm 3.4
11.4 Diameter of over Insulation mm To be mentioned
12. INSULATION SCREEN
12.1 INSULATION SCREEN semi-conducting
Material
12.2 Nominal Thickness mm 0.5
12.3 Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
13. METALLIC SCREEN
Number and diameter of No./mm
copper screen strands or Based on Design
or No./mm Calculation
Copper Wire with helically with
applied Copper Tape Thickne
ss of
tape
14. SEPARATION SHEATH
14.1 SEPARATION SHEATH To be mentioned
Material
14.2 Thickness of bedding mm 1.2
15. ARMOUR
Number & diameter of No./mm Based on Design
amour wire or Calculation
or mm
Thickness of Corrugated
Aluminum sheath
16. OUTER COVERING
16.1 OUTER COVERING Black extruded MDPE
Material
16.2 Minimum average thickness mm 2.5
17. COMPLETED CABLE
17.1 Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
17.2 Weight per metre kg To be mentioned
17.3 Maximum drum length m 500
18. CABLE DRUMS
Material Steel
Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
Width m To be mentioned
Gross weight (with cable) kg To be mentioned
19. CONTINUOUS CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY (Must be supported by in
details calculation)
19.1 Based on the conditions
specified:
One circuit A To be mentioned
Two circuits A To be mentioned
Three circuits A To be mentioned
19.2 In Air A To be mentioned
One circuit
20. PERMISSIBLE OVERLOAD
615
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 In Service Conditions % To be mentioned
For a period of Hours To be mentioned
21. MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR
TEMPERATURE
Laid direct in ground C 90
Drawn into ducts C 90
Erected in air C 90
22. CONDUCTOR SHORT KA 71.5
CIRCUIT CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one
second, Cable load as
above prior to Short circuit
and final conductor
Temperature of 250C`
23. METALIC SCREEN EARTH
FAULT CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one KA 31.5 (Must be
second, Cable loaded as supported by in
above prior to Earth fault details calculation)
24. MINIMUM RADIUS OF 20 times of overall
BEND m diameter of cable
Around which cable can be
laid
25. MAXIMUM DC To be mentioned
RESISTANCE (Subject to
Per km of cable at 20C ohm approval), Based on
of conductor of metallic design calculation as
layer per relevant & latest
IEC standard
26. MAXIMUM AC To be mentioned
RESISTANCE (Subject to
Of conductor per km of ohm approval), Based on
cable at design calculation as
Maximum conductor per relevant & latest
temperature IEC standard
27. INSULATION
RESISTANCE
Per km of cable per core Meg.oh 400
at 20C m 40
at maximum rated Meg.oh
temperature m
28. EQUIVALENT STAR
REACTANE
Per km of 3 phase circuit at Ohm/Km 0.102
Nominal frequency
29. MAXIMUM Based on Design
ELECTROSTATIC Calculation (Subject to
CAPACITANCE µF approval)
Per Km of cable

616
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 30. MAXIMUM INDUCED
VOLTAGE
On metallic layer/sheath V To be mentioned
Under fault condition
31. MAXIMUM CHARGING
CURRENT
Per core per meter of cable mA To be mentioned
at
Nominal voltage Uo
32. MAXIMUM DIELECTIC
LOSS
Of cable per meter of 3
phase circuit when laid
direct in the ground at W/m ≤0.38
nominal voltage Uo and
normal frequency at
maximum conductor
Temperature
33. METALLIC SHEATH LOSS
Of cable per meter of 3
phase circuit, At nominal
voltage Uo, normal W To be mentioned
frequency And at the
specified current rating
34. MAXIMUM PULLING kg To be mentioned
TENSION
35. Indoor, Outdoor Termination To be provided
Kit have to comply with
Technical Specification

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

8.21 Guaranteed Technical Particulars 11kV, XLPE, 3C X 185mm2 COPPER

CABLE
(To be filled up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the Bid will be
rejected)

Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufactur

No. Requirement er’s
Particulars
1 Name of the Item 3CX185 mm2 11 kV
XLPE Insulated
Copper Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned

617
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 4 Standard Performance,
Design and Testing
shall be in
accordance to the
BS, IEC, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
Country of Origin
5. VOLTAGE
Voltage between phases of
three Phase circuit
U kV 11
Umax kV 12
6. CORES
Number of Cores No. Three
Manufacturing Process To be mentioned
7. CONDUCTOR
material
7.1 CONDUCTOR Electrolytic
material annealed copper
7.2 cross sectional area mm2 185
7.3 Min. No. & Dia of wires Nos./mm 37/ To be mentioned
8. CONDUCTOR SCREEN
Material
8.1 CONDUCTOR SCREEN semi-conducting
Material XLPE

8.2 Nominal Thickness mm 0.5

8.3 Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
9. INSULATION
9.1 INSULATION Material XLPE
9.2 Type of dry curing Inert gas
9.3 Nominal Thickness mm 3.4
9.4 Diameter of over Insulation mm To be mentioned
10. CORE SCREEN
10. CORE SCREEN semi-conducting
1 Material XLPE
10. Nominal Thickness mm 0.5
2
10. Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
3
11. METALLIC SCREEN
Number and diameter of No./mm
copper screen strands or Based on Design
or No./mm Calculation
Copper Wire with helically with
applied Copper Tape Thicknes
s of tape

618
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 12. INNER JACKET
12. INNER JACKET PVC
1 Material
12. Nominal Thickness mm 1.7
2
12. External diameter mm To be mentioned
3
13. ARMOUR
Number & diameter of amour No./mm Based on Design
wire or Calculation
or mm
Thickness of Corrugated
Aluminium sheath
14. OUTER COVERING
Material Black extruded
Minimum average thickness mm MDPE
3.1
15. COMPLETED CABLE
Overall diameter mm 64
Weight per metre kg 7.8
Maximum drum length m 250
16. CABLE DRUMS
Material Steel
Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
Width m To be mentioned
Gross weight (with cable) kg To be mentioned
17. CONTINUOUS CURRENT
CARRYING CAPACITY
((Must be supported by in
details calculation)
Based on the conditions A
specifie

One circuit A To be mentioned

Two circuits A To be mentioned
Three circuits A To be mentioned
In Air

18. PERMISSIBLE OVERLOAD

In Service Conditions % To be mentioned
For a period of Hours To be mentioned
19. MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR
TEMPERATURE
Laid direct in ground C 90
Drawn into ducts C 90
Erected in air C 90
20. CONDUCTOR SHORT
CIRCUIT CURRENT

619
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Carrying capacity for one
second, Cable load as above
prior to Short circuit and final
conductor Temperature of KA 26.5
250C`
21. METALIC SCREEN EARTH
FAULT CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one KA 31.5 (with detail
second, Cable loaded as calculation)
above prior to Earth fault
22. MINIMUM RADIUS OF BEND 20 times of overall
Around which cable can be laid m diameter of cable
23. MAXIMUM DC RESISTANCE
Per km of cable at 20C
of conductor ohm 0.0991
of metallic layer ohm To be mentioned
24. MAXIMUM AC RESISTANCE
Of conductor per km of cable
at ohm 0.129
Maximum conductor
temperature
25. INSULATION RESISTANCE
Per km of cable per core
at 20C Megohm 400
at maximum rated temperature Megohm 40
26. EQUIVALENT STAR
REACTANE
Per km of 3 phase circuit at Ohm/Km 0.103
Nominal frequency
27. MAXIMUM ELECTROSTATIC
CAPACITANCE
Per Km of cable µF 0.412
28. MAXIMUM INDUCED
VOLTAGE
On metallic layer/sheath V To be mentioned
Under fault condition
29. MAXIMUM CHARGING
CURRENT
Per core per metre of cable at mA To be mentioned
Nominal voltage Uo
30. MAXIMUM DIELECTIC LOSS
Of cable per metre of 3 phase
circuit when laid direct in the W/m 0.44
ground at nominal voltage Uo
and normal frequency at
maximum conductor
Temperature

620
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 31. METALLIC SHEATH LOSS
Of cable per metre of 3 phase
circuit, At nominal voltage Uo, W To be mentioned
normal frequency And at the
specified current rating
32. MAXIMUM PULLING kg 1295 Kg
TENSION

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the

Bidder

8.21.1 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ACCESSORIES FOR

11kV XLPE, 1-CORE, 300 mm2 COPPER CABLE.
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall
be rejected)
NESCO'S Manufacturer's
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Requirement Guaranteed
18.1 Data

Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV, 1-Core 300 mm2 XLPE Copper cable
i. Name & address of the
Shall be mentioned
manufacturer
ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be mentioned
iii. Application For 11KV, XLPE, 1C x 300 mm2
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation Indoor

v. System 11KV, effectively earthed system

vi. Cable conductor 300 mm2 Copper Conductors

- Heat shrinkable high voltage

-
insulating and non- tracking
tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control
vii. Kit content tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 300 mm2
Copper Conductors
Installation instructions
Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV, 1Cx300 mm2 XLPE Copper cable
Name & address of the
i. manufacturer Shall be mentioned

ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be mentioned

621
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 NESCO'S Manufacturer's
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Requirement Guaranteed
18.1 Data
2
For 11KV, XLPE, 1C x 300 mm
iii. Application Copper Conductors
For outdoor installation
iv. Installation
v. System 33KV, effectively earthed system
vi. Cable conductor 300 mm2 Copper Conductors
- Heat shrinkable high voltage
insulating and non- tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control
tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant
rain skirt
vii. Kitcontent - Support insulator
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 300 mm2
Copper Conductors
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
-Installation instructions

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

622
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.21.2 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF FOR
TERMINATION KITS FOR 11KV XLPE, 3-CORE, 185 MM2 COPPER CABLE

NESCO'S Manufacturer's
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Requirement Guaranteed
18.2 Data
INDOOR TERMINATION KITS FOR 11KV XLPE, 3-CORE, 185 MM2 COPPER CABLE
i. Name & address of the
Shall be mentioned
manufacturer
ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be mentioned
iii. Application
For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation For Indoor switchgear terminations

v. System 11KV, effectively earthed system

vi. Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductors

Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage

insulating and non- tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control
tubing
vii. - Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 185 mm2
Copper Conductors
- Installation instructions

OUTDOOR TERMINATION KITS FOR 11KV XLPE, 3-CORE, 185 MM2

COPPER CABLE
Name & address of the
i. Shall be mentioned
manufacturer
ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be mentioned
Application
iii. For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2
Copper Conductors
Installation For outdoor installation
iv.
v. System 11KV, effectively earthed system
vi. Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductors

623
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 NESCO'S Manufacturer's
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Requirement Guaranteed
18.2 Data
Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage
insulating and non- tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control
tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant
rain skirt
vii. - Support insulator
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 185 mm2
Copper Conductors
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
- Installation instructions

8.22 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Single-Core, 150 mm2 PVC Insulated
and PVC Sheathed Copper Cable for grounding system.
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s

No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item 1CX150 sq. mm PVC
Insulated and PVC
Sheathed Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS,
IEC, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 1CX150
6 Material PVC Insulated and
PVC Sheathed plain
annealed copper.
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm Min 37 Wires
wires

624
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8 Maximum DC resistance /KM 0.124
at 20 deg. C
9 Nominal thickness of m 1.8
insulation
10 Nominal thickness of mm 1.8
sheath
11 Colour of sheath Black
12 Approximate outer mm 21.9
diameter
13 Approximate weight Kg/KM 1640
14 Continuous permissible V 600/1000
service voltage
15 Current rating at 30 deg. C Amps 350
ambient temperature U/G
16 Current rating at 35 deg. C Amps 405
ambient in air
17 Drum wound length M 500
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –
Standard 83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

8.23 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Single-Core, 95 mm2 PVC Insulated

and PVC Sheathed Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s

No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item 1CX95 sq. mm PVC
Insulated and PVC
Sheathed Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS,
IEC, BDS or

625
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 equivalent
International
standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 1CX95
6 Material PVC Insulated and
PVC Sheathed plain
annealed copper.
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 19/2.52
wires
8 Maximum resistance at 30 /KM 0.1964
deg. C
9 Nominal thickness of mm 1.6
insulation
10 Nominal thickness of mm 1.8
sheath
11 Color of sheath Black
12 Approximate outer mm 19.4
diameter
13 Approximate weight Kg/KM 1129
14 Continuous permissible V 600/1000
service voltage
15 Current rating at 30 deg. C Amps 270
ambient temperature U/G
16 Current rating at 35 deg. C Amps 300
ambient in air
17 Drum wound length M 500
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –
Standard 83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer of the Bidder

626
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.24 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 4CX2.5 mm2 PVC Insulated and
PVC Sheathed Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)
Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s
No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item 4CX2.5 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 4CX2.5 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed
Copper Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.67
Copper wires
8 Diameter of Steel wires mm 1.4
9 Thickness of Steel Tape mm To be mentioned
10 Maximum resistance at 30 /KM 7.28
deg. C
11 Nominal thickness of mm 0.8 (min.)
insulation
12 Nominal thickness of mm 1.8 (min)
sheath
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue,
Black
15 Approximate outer mm 17
diameter
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 670
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

627
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.25 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 4CX6 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC
Sheathed Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)
Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s
No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item 4CX6 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 4CX6 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed
Copper Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/1.04
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of mm 4x0.8
Steel wires
9 Nominal size of Steel mm 0.25
Tape
10 Maximum resistance at 30 /KM 3.20
deg. C
11 Nominal thickness of mm 1.0 (min.)
insulation
12 Nominal thickness of mm 1.8 (min)
sheath
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue,
Black
15 Approximate outer mm 21
diameter
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 920
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
628
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

8.26 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 4CX4 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC
Sheathed Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)
Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s
No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item 4CX4 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 4CX4 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed
Copper Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.85
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of mm 4x0.8
Steel wires
9 Nominal size of Steel mm 0.25
Tape
10 Maximum resistance at 30 /KM 3.20
deg. C
11 Nominal thickness of mm 1.0 (min.)
insulation
629
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 12 Nominal thickness of mm 1.8 (min)
sheath
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue,
Black
15 Approximate outer mm 20
diameter
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 810
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

8.27 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 8CX2.5 mm2 PVC Insulated and
PVC Sheathed Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)
Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s
No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item 8CX2.5 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 8CX2.5 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed
Copper Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.67
Copper wires

630
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8 Numbers & Diameter of mm 4x0.8
Steel wires
9 Nominal size of Steel mm 0.25
Tape
10 Maximum resistance at 30 /KM 7.69
deg. C
11 Nominal thickness of mm 0.8 (min.)
insulation
12 Nominal thickness of mm 1.8 (min)
sheath
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue,
Black
15 Approximate outer mm 20
diameter
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 1040
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

8.28 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 16CX2.5 mm2 PVC Insulated and
PVC Sheathed Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)
Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s
No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item 16CX2.5 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, BDS or
equivalent
631
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 International
standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 16CX2.5 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed
Copper Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.67
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of mm 4x0.8
Steel wires
9 Nominal size of Steel mm 0.25
Tape
10 Maximum resistance at 30 /KM 7.69
deg. C
11 Nominal thickness of mm 0.8 (min.)
insulation
12 Nominal thickness of mm 1.8 (min)
sheath
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue,
Black
15 Approximate outer mm 25
diameter
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 1630
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

632
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.29 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 24CX2.5 mm2 PVC Insulated and
PVC Sheathed Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)
Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s
No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item 24CX2.5 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS,
IEC, BDS or equivalent
International standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 24CX2.5 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed Copper
Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.67
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of mm 4x0.8
Steel wires
9 Nominal size of Steel mm 0.25
Tape
10 Maximum resistance at 30 /K 7.69
deg. C M
11 Nominal thickness of mm 0.8 (min.)
insulation
12 Nominal thickness of mm 1.8 (min)
sheath
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
15 Approximate outer mm 28
diameter
16 Approximate weight Kg/K 1730
M
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

633
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.30 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for ACSR MARTIN
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with
appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s

No Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item ACSR MARTIN
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, ASTM, BDS
or equivalent
International
standards.
5 Installation Overhead
6 Type Stranded
7 Material Hard drawn
Aluminium steel
reinforced
8 Overall diameter mm 36.17
9 Nominal cross sectional area mm2 772.10
of conductor
10 Number/diameter of No./m 54/4.02
Aluminium Strand m
11 Nominal Aluminium cross mm2 685.40
sectional area
12 Number/diameter of Steel No./m 19/2.41
Strand m
13 Nominal Steel cross sectional mm2 86.70
area
14 Weight of conductor Kg/K 2590
M
15 Drum wound length M 500
16 Net weight Kg Shall be mentioned
17 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
18 Maximum DC Resistance of /KM 0.0425
Conductor at 20 °C

634
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
19 Minimum breaking Load of Kg min 11400
Conductor
20 Maximum working tension of KN Shall be mentioned
conductor
21 Current rating at 35ºC rise Amps. Shall be mentioned
over 40ºC ambient
temperature (75ºC)
22 Practical (final) modulus of hbar 7700
elasticity
23 Co-efficient of linear /ºC shall be mentioned
expansion
24 Aluminum to Steel Ratio Shall be mentioned
25 Lay length for Outermost mm Shall be mentioned
Layer of Aluminium
26 Lay direction for Outermost Right hand
Layer of Aluminium
27 Lay ratio for Outermost Layer 10-14
of Aluminium
28 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –
Standard 83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

635
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.30.1 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for ACSR GROSBEAK
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)
Sl. Description Unit Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s
No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item ACSR GROSBEAK
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be
in accordance to the
BS, IEC, ASTM, BDS
or equivalent
International
standards.
5 Installation Overhead
6 Type Stranded
7 Material Hard drawn
Aluminium steel
reinforced
8 Overall diameter mm 25.15
9 Nominal cross sectional area mm2 374.70
of conductor
10 Number/diameter of No./m 26/3.97
Aluminium Strand m
11 Nominal Aluminium cross mm2 321.68
sectional area
12 Number/diameter of Steel No./m 7/3.09
Strand m
13 Nominal Steel cross sectional mm2 53.02
area
14 Weight of conductor Kg/KM 1304
15 Drum wound length M 500
16 Net weight Kg Shall be mentioned
17 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
18 Maximum DC Resistance of /KM 0.0900
Conductor at 20 °C
19 Minimum breaking Load of Kg 11400
Conductor
20 Maximum working tension of KN Shall be mentioned
conductor

636
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 21 Current rating at 35ºC rise Amps. 538 (min)
over 40ºC ambient
temperature (75ºC)
22 Practical (final) modulus of hbar 7700
elasticity
23 Co-efficient of linear expansion /ºC 18.9 x 10-6
24 Aluminum to Steel Ratio Shall be mentioned
25 Lay length for Outermost mm Shall be mentioned
Layer of Aluminium
26 Lay direction for Outermost Right hand
Layer of Aluminium
27 Lay ratio for Outermost Layer 10-14
of Aluminium
28 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –
Standard 83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

637
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.31 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Disc Insulator
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Purchaser's Manufacturer's

No. Requirement Particulars
01. Name of the Item Disc Insulator
02. Name of Manufacturer & Shall be mentioned
Address
03. Manufacturer’s Code To be mentioned
No.
04. Standard Performance, Design
and Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS,
IEC, ASTM, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
05. Installation Overhead
06. Type Disc
07. Material Porcelain
08. Creepage Distance 292 mm
09. Flash over voltage
Power Frequency, Dry 78 kV
Power Frequency, Wet 45 kV
10. Withstand Voltage
Power Frequency, Dry 70 kV
Power Frequency, Wet 40 kV
11. Power Frequency 110 kV
Puncture Voltage
12. 50% Impulse flashover 120 kV
Positive
13. 50% Impulse flashover 125 kV
Negative
14. Mechanical Failing Load 70 KN
15. Nominal Diameter 255 mm
17. Minimum Spacing 146 mm
18 Dry Arching Distance 171 mm
minimum
19 Coupling Size 16 mm
20 Weight in Kg To be mentioned

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

638
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.32 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 33 KV Bus bar insulator string
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead with appropriate data)

Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
Manufacturer’s Name &
1 - To be mentioned
Country
2 Manufacturer’s model no. - To be mentioned
3 Insulator material - Porcelain
4 Number of units per string Nos. 3
5 Insulator Voltage Class KV 15
6 Insulator Materials Porcelain
7 Type of Insulator - Ball and socket type
disc, security clip
made of rod brass
alloy.
8 Creepage/ leakage distance mm 298
(min.)
9 Total creepage distance of mm 850
string
10 Unit Spacing mm 146
11 Dry Arcing distance mm 1968
(minimum)
12 Diameter of Insulator mm 256
13 Withstand Voltage,
Minimum :
a) Power Frequency, dry KV 70
(one min.)
b) Power Frequency, wet KV 40
(one min.)
c) Impulse 1.2/50  sec KV 110
14 Flashover Voltage,
Minimum :
a) Power Frequency, dry KV 80
b) Power Frequency, wet KV 50
c) 50% Impulse 1.2/50  KV 125
sec wave, positive or
impulse 1.2/50 sec wave
positive.
d) 50% Impulse 1.2/50  KV 130
sec wave Negative
15 Power Frequency Puncture KV 110
Voltage, minimum
16 Radio Influence Voltage
Data, minimum
a) Power frequency test KV 10
voltage RMS to Ground

639
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 b) Maximum RIV at 1,000 V 50
Kc
17 Minimum Mechanical Strength for Suspension :
a) Electro-mechanical Kg 7260
Breaking Load
b) Mechanical Breaking Kg 6800
load
c) Tension Proof Test Load Kg 3400
d) Time Load Test Value Kg 4536
e) Mechanical Impact mm Kg 630
Strength
18 Minimum Mechanical Strength for Strain Stringing :
a) Electro-mechanical Kg 11340
Breaking Load
b) Mechanical Breaking Kg 11340
load
c) Tension Proof Test Load Kg 3400
d) Time Load Test Value Kg 4536
e) Mechanical Impact mm Kg 530
Strength
19 Insulator Hardware Insulator hardware
for insulator strings
or bus-support such
shall have UTS-120
KN and galvanized
as per BS-729 OR
ASTM A-153.
20 Standard AS per latest
editions of IEC-
60383-1, IEC-
60383-2.

Seal & Signature Seal & Signature

ofthe Manufacturer of the Bidder

640
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.33 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for H-Type Connector
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s

No. Requirement Particulars
Compatible for ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Code No. Shall be mentioned
3. Applicable Standard Design, Testing &
Performance shall be in
accordance to BS, IEC,
BDS, ANSI, ASTM or
equivalent international
standards.
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be
installed for the above-
mentioned conductor.
5. Type H-Type
6. Material Aluminium
7. Minimum Continuous 628 Amps (min).
Current rating at 35ºC rise
over 40ºC ambient
temperature (75ºC)
8. Length Shall be mentioned
(Subject to approval)
9. Weight of 100 nos. in Kg Shall be mentioned

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

641
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.34 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Guy/Earth Wire.
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Purchaser's Manufacturer’s

No. Requirement Particulars
1 Name of the Item Guy/Earth Wire
2 Name &v Address of the Shall be
Manufacturer mentioned
3 Manufacturer's Code No. Shall be
mentioned
4 Standard Performance
Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the
BS, BDS or
equivalent
International
standards.
5 Installation Overhead/Stay
6 Type Stranded, Solid
and Bare
7 Material High Strength
Steel
8 Overall diameter mm 9.50
9 Number/diameter of each No./m 7/3.15
strand m
10 Nominal cross sectional area mm2 54.53
of conductors
11 Weight of Guy Wire Kg/KM 430
12 Ultimate Tensile Strength KN 62.75

13 Galvanisation As per ASTM

B498-74, Class-A
14 Modulus of Elasticity Kg/mm 19.7 x 103
2

15 Coefficient of linear /ºC 11.3 x 10-6

expansion

16 Drum wound length M 1500

17 Net weight Kg Shall be
mentioned
18 Gross weight Kg Shall be
mentioned

642
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 19 Lay length mm Shall be
mentioned
20 Lay direction Right hand
21 Lay ratio 13-18
22 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82, C2
Standard –83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

8.35 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for PG Clamp

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Purchaser’s Manufacturer’s

No. Requirement Particulars
Compatible for ACSR GROSBEAK to ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Code No. Shall be mentioned
3. Applicable Standard Design, Testing &
Performance shall be in
accordance to BS, IEC,
BDS, ANSI, ASTM or
equivalent international
standards.
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be
installed for the above-
mentioned conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy
7. Minimum Continuous 628 Amps (min).
Current rating at 35ºC rise
over 40ºC ambient
temperature (75ºC)
8. Dimension 125 mm x 50 mm
9. Weight of 100 nos. in Kg Shall be mentioned

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

643
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Drawing FOR 33 KV PG CLAMP (ACSR GROSBEAK)

Drg. No: 8.35

644
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Notes:

1. Dimensions : In mm
2. No. of M12 Bolts : 03
3. Tolerances :
Material Sizes : ± 1 mm
Thickness : -0%, 10%
This is a conceptual drawing. All measurement will be approved during drawing approval as
per relevant standard.

8.36 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF STEEL STRUCTURE DESIGN

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad with appropriate data)

Manufactur
Sl. NESCO's er's
Description Unit
No. Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
1 Manufacturer's Name and Country - To be
mentioned
2 Maximum ratio of unsupported length
of steel compression to their least
radius of gyration:
a) Main members Mm 120
b) Bracing's Mm 180
c) Redundant Mm 180
3 B.S. 4360 grade 43A steel or other
approved standard :
a) Elastic limit stress in tension members Kg/mm2 To be
mentioned
b) Ultimate stress in compression Kg/mm2 Sc=F/S[{1+0.0
members 0011x (L/R)2/
(expressed as function L/R) M}]
4 B.S. 4360 grade 50C steel or other
approved standard :
a) Elastic limit stress in tension members Kg/mm2 To be
mentioned
b) Ultimate stress in compression Kg/mm2 Sc=F/S[{1+0.0
members (expressed as function L/R) 00166
x{(L/R)2/M}]
5 Formula for calculation of ultimate - SC=F/S[1+{LE/
stress in compression. 2E}x
{(L/R)2/M}]
Where,
SC = Ultimate stress in compression Kg/mm2 To be
mentioned

645
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 F = Yield strength Kg To be
mentioned
S = Section mm2 To be
mentioned
L/R = Length / Radius of gyration Cm To be
mentioned
LE = Elastic limit stress Mg/mm2 24 or 36
E = Elasticity module Kg/mm2 22000
M = Rigidity Coefficient at each end - To be
mentioned
M=1 with only one bolt at each end of - To be
member mentioned
M=2 with two bolts at each end of a - To be
member mentioned
M=4 if L/R between 110 and 130 - To be
mentioned
M=3 if L/R over to 130 - To be
mentioned
6 Minimum size of member Mm 45 x 45 x --
7 Weight of each Column Kg To be
mentioned
8 Weight of each Girder Kg To be
mentioned
9 Total weight Kg To be
mentioned

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

646
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.37 Guaranteed TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF SHIELD WIRE, EARTHING GRID AND
EARTHING ELECTRODE
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad with appropriate data)
Manufacture
Sl. NESCO's r's
Description Unit
No. Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
A. SHIELD WIRES
1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be
mentioned
2 Material - High Strength
Steel
3 Grade of Steel Kg 60000
4 Nos. of Strand Nos. 7
5 Diameter of each strand Mm 3.05
6 Overall diameter Mm 9.525
7 Nominal cross -section mm2 35
8 Weight per km length Kg 407
9 Maximum rated current (3 seconds ) A To be
mentioned
10 Maximum working tension of main Kg/m2 To be
connection mentioned
11 Resistance of conductors per 1000 Ohms To be
meters at 20 c mentioned
12 Rated Ultimate Tensile Strength Kg/mm2 4900
13 Maximum permissible span length M To be
mentioned
14 Maximum sag under own weight of Mm To be
maximum span mentioned
15 Co-efficient of liner expansion cm/ 0C. To be
mentioned
16 Class of Zinc Coating - Class-A
17 Galvanization - As per BS-
729 OR
ASTM A-153
B. EARTHING GRID
1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be
mentioned
2 Material - Copper
3 Overall diameter Mm To be
mentioned
4 Nominal cross -section
a) Interconnecting the earth mm2 To be
electrodes mentioned
b) Connecting equipment to mesh mm2 To be
mentioned
6 Area of each earthing grid mxm To be
mentioned

647
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 7 Depth of bedding of conductor Mm To be
mentioned
8 Maximum earth fault current for 3 sec. KA 31.5
9 Resistance of conductors per 1000 Ohms To be
meters at 200c mentioned
C. EARTHING ELECTRODES
1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be
mentioned
2 Material - Copper
3 Dimensions :
a) Dia mm 16
b) Length Meter 4
4 Number of electrodes per group - As per
schedule
5 Number of earthing point per - To be
substation mentioned
6 Calculated resistance of combined Ohm Less than
earth grid and points one (1)

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

648
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 8.38 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33 KV FLAT I-TYPE CONNECTOR (25
mm)***
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Manufacturer's
Description NESCOs Requirement
No. Particulars
Compatible for ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address of Shall be mentioned mm
the Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Code Shall be mentioned
No.
3. Applicable Standard BS, IEC, BDS or equivalent
international standard
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be installed
for the above-mentioned
conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy (LM6 or
higher grade)
7. Minimum continuous Shall be mentioned and
current rating at 35°C capable of carrying the
rise over 40°C continuous current of the
ambient temperature specified conductor in Amps.
(75°C)
8. All Dimensions, Dia Shall be as per drawing
and Hole Size
9. Weight of 100 nos. in Shall be mentioned
Kg
10. Dimensional Drawing Shall be enclosed

649
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Tenderer:

*** This GTP has been used as an example. Tenderer has to submit
GTP & Drawing of all type of connectors to be used in the
substation in a similar format.

DRAWING OF 33 Kv Flat I-Type Connector (25 mm)

650
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
*** Dimension of all the connectors has to be similar to the above
drawing i.e; hole diameter can be different but thickness, length etc.
have to be similar to the above drawing. Dimensions of all type of
connector will be finalized during design approval.
8.39 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (GTP) FOR 33 KV T-TYPE
CONNECTOR (25/25 mm)

651
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 (To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriate date)
Sl. Manufacturer’s
Description NESCO’s Requirement
No. Particulars
Compatible for ACSR GROSBEAK to ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address Shall be mentioned
of the
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Shall be mentioned
Code No.
3. Applicable BS, IEC, BDS or equivalent
Standard international standard
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be
installed for the above-
mentioned conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy (LM6 or
higher grade)
7. Minimum Shall be mentioned and
continuous current capable of carrying the
rating at 35°C rise continuous current of the
over 40°C ambient specified conductor in Amps.
temperature
(75°C)
8. All Dimensions, Shall be as per drawing
Dia and Hole Size (Drg. No. 8.39) ( To be
confirmed)
9. Weight of 100 Shall be mentioned
nos. in Kg
10. Dimensional Shall be enclosed
Drawing

SEAL AND SIGNATURE OF THE SEAL AND SIGNATURE OF THE

MANUFACTURER TENDERER

652
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 DRAWING OF 33 KV T-type Connector (25/25 mm)

Drg. No: 8.39

Notes:

1. Dimensions : In mm
2. No. of M12 Bolts : 12
3. Tolerances :
Material Sizes : ± 1 mm
Thickness : -0%, 10%

This is a conceptual drawing. All measurement will be approved during

653
drawing
Four 33/11 approval
kV Substations asSirajganj
at BSCIC per relevant standard.
 8.40 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (GTP) FOR 33 KV T-TYPE
CONNECTOR (36/25 mm)

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriate date)

Sl. Ma nuf act ur e r’ s

Description NE S CO ’s R equ i re me n t
No. P art i cul a rs
Compatible for ACSR MARTIN to ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address Shall be mentioned
of the
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Shall be mentioned
Code No.
3. Applicable BS, IEC, BDS or equivalent
Standard international standard
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be
installed for the above-
mentioned conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy (LM6 or
higher grade)
7. Minimum Shall be mentioned and
continuous current capable of carrying the
rating at 35°C rise continuous current of the
over 40°C ambient specified conductor in Amps.
temperature
(75°C)
8. All Dimensions, Shall be as per drawing
Dia and Hole Size (Drg. No. 8.40) ( To be
confirmed)
9. Weight of 100 Shall be mentioned
nos. in Kg
10. Dimensional Shall be enclosed
Drawing

Seal and Signature of the Tenderer Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer

654
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 DRAWING OF 33 KV T-TYPE CONNECTOR (36/25 mm)

Drg. No: 8.40

655
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Notes:

1. Dimensions : In mm
2. No. of M12 Bolts : 12
3. Tolerances :
Material Sizes : ± 1 mm
Thickness : -0%, 10%

This is a conceptual drawing. All measurement will be approved during

drawing approval as per relevant standard.

8.41 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (GTP) FOR 33 KV L-TYPE

CONNECTOR
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)
Sl. Ma nuf act ur e r s
Description NE S CO s Re qui r em en t
P art i cul a rs
No.
1. Name & Address of Shall be mentioned
the Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Shall be mentioned
Code No.
3. Applicable Standard BS, IEC, BDS or equivalent
international standard
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be installed
for the ACSR Grosbeak/Martin
conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy (LM6 or
higher grade)
7. Minimum Shall be mentioned and capable
continuous current of carrying the continuous
rating at 35°C rise current of the specified
over 40°C ambient conductor in Amps.
temperature (75°C)
8. All Dimensions, Dia Shall be as per drawing (Drg.
and Hole Size No. 8.41) ( To be confirmed)
9. Weight of 100 nos. Shall be mentioned
in Kg
10. Dimensional Shall be enclosed
Drawing

656
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Tenderer:

DRAWING OF 33 KV L-TYPE CONNECTOR

657
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Drg. No: 8.41

Notes:

1. Dimensions : In mm
2. Tolerances :
Material Sizes : ± 1 mm
Thickness : -0%, 10%

This is a conceptual drawing. All measurement will be approved during

drawing approval as per relevant standard.

8.42 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (GTP) FOR 33 KV Double I-

TYPE CONNECTOR (36/25 mm)

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. NE S CO s Re qui r em en t Ma nuf act ur e r s

Description P art i cul a rs
No.
Compatible for ACSR MARTIN to ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address of Shall be mentioned
the Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Shall be mentioned
Code No.
3. Applicable Standard BS, IEC, BDS or equivalent
international standard
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be installed
for the above-mentioned
conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy (LM6 or
higher grade)
7. Minimum Shall be mentioned and capable
continuous current of carrying the continuous
rating at 35°C rise current of the specified
over 40°C ambient conductor in Amps.
temperature (75°C)
8. All Dimensions, Dia Shall be as per drawing (Drg.
and Hole Size No. 8.42) ( To be confirmed)
9. Weight of 100 nos. Shall be mentioned
in Kg
10. Dimensional Shall be enclosed
Drawing

658
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Tenderer:

Drawing FOR 33 KV Double I-TYPE CONNECTOR (36/25 mm)

659
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Drg. No: 8.42

Notes:

1. Dimensions : In mm
2. No. of M12 Bolts : 12
3. Tolerances :
Material Sizes : ± 1 mm
Thickness : -0%, 10%

This is a conceptual drawing. All measurement will be approved during

drawing approval as per relevant standard.

8.43 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (GTP) FOR LV AC / DC

Distribution Panel
EMPLOYER Tenderer’s
S/L Description Unit Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL
1 Name of the Manufacturer To be mentioned
2 Address of the Manufacturer To be mentioned
3 Rated normal current of Bus-bar A To be mentioned
4 No. and size of fuse circuits nos./ A To be mentioned
5 Thickness of sheet steel mm To be mentioned
(enclosure )
6 Dimension mm x
mm x To be mentioned
mm

7 Weight Kg To be mentioned
8 MCCB
a) Manufacturer's Name and To be mentioned
Country
b) Manufacturer's model no. To be mentioned
c) Rated voltage To be mentioned
d) Rated current To be mentioned
9 DC Panel will comply with Yes
technical specifications
mentioned in 7.1. 23
AC DISTRIBUTION PANEL

1 Name of the Manufacturer To be mentioned

2 Address of the Manufacturer To be mentioned
3 Rated normal current of Bus-bar A 400
4 No. and size of fused circuits nos/ A 3

660
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 5 Thickness of sheet steel mm 4
(enclosure )

6 Dimension mm x
mm x To be mentioned
mm

7 Weight Kg To be mentioned
8 MCCB
a) Manufacturer's Name and To be mentioned
Country
b) Manufacturer's model no. To be mentioned
c) Rated voltage To be mentioned
d) Rated current To be mentioned
9 AC Panel will comply with Yes
technical specifications
mentioned in 7.1. 22

8.44 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (GTP) FOR FIRE DETECTION

FACILITIES

Sl. NE S CO s Re qui r em en t Ma nuf act ur e r s

Description P art i cul a rs
No.
1. Codes of practice National Fire Protection
Association, Boston,
Massachusetts, U.S.A. as
appropriate or Codes and
practice of the Japanese Fire
Protection
2. Fire Alarm Panel - Japan / Italy/ UK / USA or
Country of Origin: equivalent approved by the
Project Manager.
3. Fire Alarm Panel Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer Name
& Address
4. Fire Alarm Panel Shall be mentioned
Model No.
5. Panel AC input 220 V AC
6. Panel DC output 24V DC
7. Fire Alarm Bell- Japan / Italy / UK / USA or
Country of Origin: equivalent approved by the
Project Manager.

8. Fire Alarm Bell- Shall be mentioned

Manufacturer Name
& Address
9. Fire Alarm Bell- Shall be mentioned

661
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Model No.
10. Optical / Japan /Italy/ UK / USA or
Photoelectric equivalent approved by the
Smoke Detector- Project Manager.
Country of Origin:

11. Optical / Shall be mentioned

Photoelectric
Smoke Detector-
Manufacturer
Name & Address

12. Optical / Shall be mentioned

Photoelectric
Smoke Detector's
Model No.

13. Heat Detector- Japan /Italy/ UK / USA or

Country of Origin: equivalent approved by the
Project Manager.

14. Heat Detector- Shall be mentioned

Manufacturer Name
& Address
15. Fire detection Yes
system will
comply with
technical
specifications
mentioned in
7.1.28

662
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj
 Section 9. Drawings
Drawing to be Submitted
Successful Bidder shall, within two weeks of signing of contract, submit five sets of
final versions of all the drawings to Superintending Engineer, Design & Inspection
for necessary approval. NESCO shall communicate his comments/approval on
the drawings to the supplier.
Manufacturing of equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
purchaser.
The following drawings are required to submit for approval but not limited to
following details:
1. Single Line Diagram (SLD) of the Power Supply System
2. Layout Diagram of whole Drying plant & subassembly.
3. Structural (Foundation & Superstructure) drawing of the Drying plant & assembly.
4. Foundation drawing of all equipment’s
5. General outline drawings showing dimensions for each type of equipment
6. Earthing Design, Calculation & Drawing for effective earthing system.
7. Secondary/Control drawing of Panels, ACDB, DCDB, Battery Charger panel etc.
8. Any other drawing as required and instructed by NESCO/Manufacturer.

The general guideline to EPC for submission of the drawing but not limited to
following details:
1. All Legends/symbols should be mentioned in respective page along with a
summary page.
2. All equipment’s list, model number, product serial number, quantity, country of
origin, general name shall be mentioned.
3. Each page of the drawing should contain Employer name with logo,
signature & stamp of EPC contractor along with drawing title, drawing number,
page number, Project Name, Contract number along with date and version of the
drawing in the bottom right corner.
4. Rating plate of equipment shall be mentioned with dimension, font size and fitted
in visible position during normal service and installation. The rating plate shall
be engraved, weather-proof and corrosion proof. Description on the rating plate
should be given in "legible English letters".
5. In applicable cases, the revised drawing is required to submit even if the drawing
is approved.
6. All types of assumption/calculation should be submitted in book binding format
along with signature & stamp of EPC contractor. The basis of the calculation
should be as per relevant standard (IEC/IEEE/BDS/BS/IS) and such standard
should be attached.
7. Any other additional instruction from NESCO.

663
Four 33/11 kV Substations at BSCIC Sirajganj